IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 &^ 
 
 {/ 
 
 
 
 ■.**,.V^. 
 
 < <f 
 
 V 
 
 :/ 
 
 
 % 
 
 1.0 
 
 lASIM |2.5 
 
 150 ■^" H^H 
 
 ■^ 1^ 12.2 
 
 t^ m 
 
 "= ""^ IIIIIM 
 1^ IIIIIM 1^ 
 
 - 6" 
 
 '.i 
 
 i 
 
 (?^ 
 
 /] 
 
 y;ar >> 
 
 /; 
 
 
 Hiotographic 
 
 Sciences 
 
 Corporation 
 
 g>^ 
 
 i\ 
 
 k 
 
 
 
 23 WEST MAIN STREET 
 
 WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 
 
 (716) 872-4503 
 
 
CIHM/ICMH 
 
 Microfiche 
 
 Series. 
 
 CIHM/ICIVIH 
 Collection de 
 microfiches. 
 
 Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions / Institut Canadian de microreproductions historiques 
 
Technical and Bibliographic Notes/Notes techniques et bibliographiques 
 
 The Institute has attempted to obtain the best 
 original copy available for filming. Features of this 
 copy which may be bibliographically unique, 
 which may alter any of the images in the 
 reproduction, or which may significantly change 
 the usual method of filming, are checked below. 
 
 D 
 
 Coloured covers/ 
 Couverture de couleur 
 
 I I Covers damaged/ 
 
 D 
 
 Couverture endommag^e 
 
 Covers restored and/or laminated/ 
 Couverture restaurde et/ou pellicul6e 
 
 I I Cover title missing/ 
 
 Le titre de couverture manque 
 
 I I Coloured maps/ 
 
 D 
 
 Cartes gdographiques en couleur 
 
 Coloured ink (i.e. other than blue or black)/ 
 Encre de couleur (i.e. autre que bleue ou noire) 
 
 I I Coloured plates and/or illustrations/ 
 
 
 D 
 
 n 
 
 Planches et/ou illustrations en couleur 
 
 Bound with other material/ 
 Reli6 avec d'autres documents 
 
 Tight binding may cause shadows or distortion 
 along ir^terior margin/ 
 La re liure serr6e peut causer de I'ombre ou de la 
 distortion le long de la marge intirieure 
 
 Blank leaves added during restoration may 
 appear within the text. Whenever possible, these 
 have been omitted from filming/ 
 II se peut que certaines pages blanches ajoutdes 
 lors d'une restauration apparaissent dans le texte, 
 mais, lorsque cela 6tait possible, ces pages n'ont 
 pas ittb filmdes. 
 
 Additional comments:/ 
 Commentaires suppl6mentaires: 
 
 Th 
 to 
 
 L'Institut a microfilm^ le meilleur exemplaire 
 qu'il lui a it6 possible de se procurer. Les details 
 de cet exemplaire qui sont peut-Atre uniques du 
 point de vue bibliographique, qui peuvent modifier 
 une image reproduite, ou qui peuvent exiger une 
 modification dans la m^thode normale de f ilmage 
 sont indiqute ci-dessous. 
 
 I I Coloured pages/ 
 
 n 
 
 Pages de couleur 
 
 Pages damaged/ 
 Pages endommag^es 
 
 Pages restored and/oi 
 
 Pages restauries et/ou pellicul6es 
 
 Pages discoloured, stained or foxe( 
 Pages d6color6es, tachetdes ou piqudes 
 
 Pages detached/ 
 Pages d^tach^es 
 
 Showthrough/ 
 Transparence 
 
 Quality of prir 
 
 Quality in^gale de I'impression 
 
 Includes supplementary materia 
 Comprend du materiel suppl^mentaire 
 
 I I Pages damaged/ 
 
 r~~L Pages restored and/or laminated/ 
 
 V~lf Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/ 
 
 I I Pages detached/ 
 
 rr\ Showthrough/ 
 
 I I Quality of print varies/ 
 
 I I Includes supplementary material/ 
 
 Th 
 po 
 of 
 fllr 
 
 Or 
 be 
 th( 
 sio 
 oti 
 fin 
 sic 
 or 
 
 Th 
 shi 
 TIf 
 wh 
 
 M{ 
 dif 
 em 
 be) 
 
 rig 
 rec 
 me 
 
 Only edition available/ 
 Seule Edition disponible 
 
 Pages wholly or partially obscured by errata 
 slips, tissues, etc., have been refilmed to 
 ensure the best possible image/ 
 Les pages totalement ou partiellement 
 obscurcies par un feuillet d'errata, une pelure, 
 etc., ont 6t6 filmies d nouveau de faqon d 
 obtenir la meilleure image possible. 
 
 This item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/ 
 
 Ce document est filmA au taux de rMuction indiquA ci-dessous. 
 
 10X 
 
 
 
 
 14X 
 
 
 
 
 18X 
 
 
 
 
 22X 
 
 
 
 
 26X 
 
 
 
 30X 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 y 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 12X 
 
 16X 
 
 20X 
 
 24X 
 
 28X 
 
 32X 
 
re 
 
 I6tails 
 BS du 
 fnodifier 
 Br une 
 filmage 
 
 The copy filmed here has been reproduced thanks 
 to the generosity of: 
 
 National Library of Canada 
 
 The images appearing here are the best quality 
 possible considering the condition and legibility 
 of the original copy and in keeping with the 
 filming contract specifications. 
 
 Original copies in prmted paper covers are filmed 
 beginning with the front cover and ending on 
 the last page with a printed or illustrated impres- 
 sion, or the back cover when appropriate. All 
 other original copies are filmed beginning on the 
 first page with a printed or illustrated impres- 
 sion, and ending on the last page with a printed 
 or illustrated impression. 
 
 es 
 
 L'exemplaire film6 fut reproduit grdce d la 
 g6n6rosit6 de: 
 
 Bibliothdque nationale du Canada 
 
 Les images suivantes ont 6td reproduites avec ie 
 plus grand soin. compte tenu de la condition et 
 de la nettetd de l'exemplaire filmd. et en 
 conformity avec les conditions du contrat de 
 filmage. 
 
 Les exemplaires originaux dont la couverture en 
 papier est imprimde sont fiimds en commen9ant 
 par Ie premier plat et en terminant soit par la 
 dernidre page qui comporte une empreinte 
 d'impression ou d'illustration, soit par Ie second 
 plat, salon Ie cas. Tous les autres exemplaires 
 originaux sont filmis en commenpant par la 
 premidre page qui comporte une empreinte 
 d'impression ou d'illustration et en terminant par 
 la dernidre page qui comporte une telle 
 empreinte. 
 
 The last recorded frame on each microfiche 
 shall contain the symbol ^^> (meaning "CON- 
 TINUED"), or the symbol V (meaning "END"), 
 whichever applies. 
 
 Un des symboles suivants apparaitra sur la 
 dernidre image de cheque microfiche, selon Ie 
 cas: Ie symbole — ► signifie "A SUIVRE ", Ie 
 symbole V signifie "FIN". 
 
 Maps, plates, charts, etc., may be filmed at 
 different reduction ratios. Those too large to be 
 entirely included in one exposure are filmed 
 beginning in the upper left hand corner, left to 
 right and top to bottom, as many frames as 
 required. The following diagrams illustrate the 
 method: 
 
 Les cartes, planches, tableaux, etc., peuvent dtre 
 film6s d des taux de reduction diff^rents. 
 Lorsque ie document est trop grand pour dtre 
 reproduit en un seul clichd, il est film6 d partir 
 de Tangle sup6rieur gauche, de gauche A droite, 
 et de haut en bas, en prenant Ie nombre 
 d'images nicessaire. Les diagrammes suivants 
 illustrent la mdthode. 
 
 errata 
 J to 
 
 e pelure, 
 :on d 
 
 n 
 
 32X 
 
 \ 1 
 
 ■ , ? 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 9 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
« II . pi iiMmmni I ■ 
 
 BY 
 
 *■ 
 
 RUI 
 
 EXE 
 
 S. 
 
 fcyvtv 
 
 PVBLISJ 
 
 ^Jiiin 
 
 r- 
 
BY ORDER OF HIS EXCELLENCY. 
 
 Office of the Adjutant General of the} ] 
 Militia of Lower-Canada, y ; 
 
 RULES AND REGULATIONS 
 
 / 
 
 r - m 
 
 FOR THB 
 
 FORMATION, 
 
 EXERCISE & MOVEMENTS 
 
 ,«^^C'■•"'*^^.*^■ 
 
 OFTHK 
 
 
 MILITIA 
 
 OF 
 
 LOWERXANADA. 
 
 K^ 
 
 PvBLi&HED by order of His Excellekcy tux 
 
 COMMANDEB IN ChIEF. 
 
 nfram 
 
 QUEBEC: 
 
 VSUfTCB AT THE NEW FSINTI 
 
 1812. 
 
 X" ; " 
 
 --iie': 
 

 
 .-■■■■■». 
 
 I' ':o V 
 
 'T 
 
 « :' i 
 
 U 
 
 r 'i 
 
 pr* 
 
 t 
 
 Pf 
 
 f ' 
 
 i7:.^/-o-M 
 
 '■, ilXj .A 
 
 Ji"^ ^r' ■ 
 
 i^ii xi)k.ki 
 
 / ;^ 
 
 
 . .T/r^'^r*lS'».i ^. -'V"'^''*'t3SK"* .* ■ 
 
 f » . 
 
 aTiu -n 
 
 
 
 
 #^. 
 
 1 1 
 
 iiSl^a''';' 
 
 ». ■* • **^f/ 
 
 ■.^■"Uii'i:- ■'j^'i 
 
 ^Hi-- l.,^.. 'I3T/- T 
 
 .#i?^i 
 
?^" 
 
 PAR ORDRE DE SON EXCELLENCJR 
 
 Bureau de VAdjudant G^n^ral des 
 Miiices du Bas- Canada. 
 
 \ 
 
 "REGLES & REGLEMENS 
 
 POUR tk 
 
 FORMATION, . 
 
 L'EXERCICE ET MOUVEMENT 
 
 DB LA 
 
 ■i1 
 
 \ 
 
 MILIC 
 
 DU 
 
 BAS-CANADA. 
 
 -\.: 
 
 '^v-' 
 
 ^UBiiiE^s par Tordre de Son Excellence le 
 Commandant en Chef. 
 
 QUEBEC: 
 
 IMPRIMe's a la NOUVELLE IMPRUiUSEIV. 
 
 1812. 
 
 ^ 
 
 y 
 

 
 • 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 % 
 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 :T*^^i 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 
 / 
 
 r/i. \i>(- 
 
 » 
 
 * 
 
 > 
 > . 
 
 • 
 
 / 
 
 
 
 
 
 /I 
 
 :I 
 
 
 -U 
 
 11! 
 
 "> 
 
 ^ 
 
 m 
 
 : fc ' 
 
 \ 
 
 '^k 
 
 <i 
 
 ,Si.a:»i* 
 
 
CIRCULAR. 
 
 Office of the Adjutant General of \ 
 the Militia of Lower^Canada^ 
 Quebec, 5th May^ 1812. 
 
 His Excellency the Commander in, Chief findfng^ 
 it necessary to establii«h a uniform sy^tpm, for the 
 exercise and instruction of the IVlilitia of this 
 Province, has commanded me to cau^e to be printed 
 and circulated the following Rules and Regulations 
 for the information and guidance of the Officers : 
 and to signify to you his desire that what is therein 
 contained may be strictly observed by the battalion 
 under your orders. 
 
 His Excellency further commands me to inform 
 you that copies of the said Regulations will be sent 
 to his Majesty's Inspectors of Militia, who will be 
 commanded to report every deviation which thej 
 may observe to be made in the different battalions 
 which they may be ordered to in9pect. 
 
 By order of His Excellency, 
 
 F. VASSAL DE MONVIEL, 
 
 Lieut, Colonel and ^tfjutant General 
 iffthe Militia t^ Lower Canada, 
 
 To the Coloneh or Lieut, Colonels, ^ 
 commanding Battalions or divisions > 
 0f the Militia. 3 
 
CIRCULAIRE. 
 
 Bureau de VAd^udant Giniral ^ 
 des Milices du Bas-Canada^ > 
 Quebec, 5c. ilfai, 1812. > 
 
 Son Excellence le Commandant en Chef irou- 
 vant n^cessaire d'etablir un syst^mo uniforme 
 mour Texercice et Tinstruction des Milices de cette 
 Province, m*a ordonn^ de (aire imjprimer et circu- ' 
 ler leg Ragles et R^glements suivants, pour Tin- 
 ^ formation et le guide des Officiers qui y appar- 
 tiennent, et de vous signifier qu'il desire que ce 
 quiy est contenu, soit strictement observe par le 
 Bataillon sous vos ordres. 
 
 Son Excellence m'ordonne, de plus, de vous 
 informer qu'il sera envoj^ aux Inspecteurs des 
 Milices (le sa Majeste, copies des presents Rdgle- 
 ments, et qu'il leur sera ordonn^ ae faire rapport 
 de toutes a^viations qu*ils pourroient observer y 
 6tre faites dans les diff^rents Bataillons (\\x^u% 
 pourront avoir ordre d^inspecter. . . 
 
 Par ordre de Son Excellence, 
 t. VASSAL DE MONVIEL, 
 
 Lieut, Colonel et Adjudant ginerttt 
 de$ Milices du Bat^Canadtt 
 
 / 
 
 Aux Colonels ou Lieut, Colonels 
 commandants des Batailldns ou 
 JJivisigns des Milket*' 
 
*. 
 
 .*';• 
 
 
 . I j 
 
 III 
 
 f 
 
 » » 
 
 >- 
 
fl' 
 
 1 1 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 EVERY individual destined to take up armn in the service 
 of his country, whatever may be his rank or station, 
 must make a temporary resignation of a small portion of his 
 liberty. 
 
 His assent to this sacrifice is implied from its absolute 
 necessity : for, was each person permitted to follow the 
 dictates of his own inclination, disorder andcbnfusion must 
 necessarily result. From the moment, therefore, that any 
 number of men are assembled to act together, the interest 
 of thecommunity makes it requisite that a certain proportion 
 of them should be charged with an aulht)rity, to wlhich it is 
 incombent on the rest to pay implicit obedience. 
 
 Military service is as it were a passive state : obedience to 
 commands is one of its most essential duties and of equal 
 importance in e-c(',ch respective rank ; no one individual can 
 be guilty of a breach of it, without injury to the service iu 
 which he is engaged, since by snch.a fniilt, the safety of a 
 whole army, and consequently the safety of his country, 
 may be endangered. 
 
 In compiling the following short instruction!) for the gui- 
 dance of the Militia of Lower Canada, His I'xrellencv thej 
 GovERNOA iM Chief calPs upon the officers of every des. 
 cription, but particularly those commanding cor|)S, to pro- 1 
 ceed without delay to qualify themselves in the duties re- 
 quired from the soldier. An officer who cannot discipline] 
 and ejiercise the foody intrusted to his cnmmaiid, isnpt fit 
 upon Si?rvice, to lead it against the enemv : he cannot^ be 
 cool and collected in the time of danger; the fate of many 
 depends on his ill or well acquitting himself of hisduty; nor 
 will troops ever act with spirit when they have no reliance| 
 on the capacity of those who conduct them ; and his EsLcel* 
 lency is firmly persuaded, the officers of militia will view, | 
 in a proper light, the force of these observations. 
 
 Aa instructor cannot be too gentle and patient in hill 
 first lessons to the recruit: to mitigate, as much as possible,! 
 the painfuln<>ss that necessarily attends them, he should! 
 explain with clearness and precision, the principle of everyl 
 part of his instructions.. He must study the capacities andl 
 defects of each individual committed to his charge, in orderl 
 to regulate hi« conduct as to the manner of conveying hill 
 instructions^ with mildness, or otherwisct accordiuj^ io tht| 
 4kiOiiti<m which each displays. 
 
D.ISCOURS PRBLIMlNAmE. 
 
 TOUT individu de§iin«? a porter h§ arnoM au jervicc dt 
 la Fatrie, qjueiqiie soil son rang^ ou son ^tat, est obligi 
 de resi^ner, pour un terns, une petite portion dc Ka liberie. 
 
 Cestoid necessite absolue q^ui exige son consentenient a ce 
 sacrifice: car s'il^tait perinis a cha<|ue. inililaire d« 
 wiivre le». impiUsions de son inclinatiionv le d(^sordreet lit 
 <oufiu9ioo 8!easuivroicnt,n4cessairemeiit. CVst pourqiioi, dir 
 momeot qu'aaaonibre d^homniesrest assemble pour ag^ir en 
 CQrp», riut^riSt de la coimnunauU denoande qu'une certaioe 
 IM-oportioasoitrev^ue d'une autoriU a laqjueile les autrei 
 dpi vent une ob>^issancf implicite. 
 
 Le militaire est un ^tre pa5*iffc rob/issanccauxordresest 
 un devoir »i essentiel, qii'aucnn ne pent 8'en dispenser, sans 
 faire tort au service, pitisq^^ie f^ar uue fasiUe de celle nature, 
 il pifuirra niettre en dans^er toute une armee, et en const!* 
 quence exp^tsen sa padi'ie. ' 
 
 Le but que Son Excellence te G«uverneur en Chef sepro- 
 poiu d<'aiiQi|i«lre ^arce.ttecuQipiJation abrt*s6e d instructtont 
 
 {H>ur l:\ conduitedelaMilice du Has-Canada, est d'exhorter 
 es OflSciers de tous-les grades, surioutceux qui coromandent 
 desCorp»» ase-mettre en devoir sans delai d'apprendre le 
 service requis du Solddt. Un Officier incapable de discipli. 
 ner et d'exercer la troupe qui a €le confine a ses ordres, ne 
 sauralaconduirecontr Pennemi: il ne peut'Conserver son 
 san^ froid et sa presence d^esprit dans les occasions dang^* 
 reuses;- le sort du ^rand norabre depend de sa bonne 
 ou inauvaise Gonduite dans Texecution de son devoir; let 
 soldats n'ag^iront jamais avec all^gresse sMIs n*ont pasde 
 confiance en la capacite Ae ceux qui les conduisent; et Son 
 Excellence est fermemcnt persuadfce, que les officiers de 
 Milire envisageront, sous son Trai point de vue, la force de 
 ces observations. , 
 
 L'InstruGteur ne pent user de trop de douceur et de pa« 
 tience dans les premieres lecons quMI donnera au jeune mi- 
 licien, afin de mitiger, le plus qu'il est possible, I'ennui qui 
 les accompagne: il expUquera avec clarte*et precision, le 
 principe de cbaque partie des instructions. 11 ^tudiera la 
 capacite et les df fauts de chaque individu qui lui est confix, 
 et il assaisoniiera ses instructions deloaanges ou autrementi 
 aelon la disposition d'un cbacun. 
 
 A 2 
 
-1 
 
 Recruits should liot be kept too lon^ at any particular 
 part of their exercise, so as t,o fatigue or make them uneasy i 
 mardiing without arms should be occasionally intermixed 
 ^ith the firelock instruction. 
 
 These hints an^ the foliojving outline of drill for; the 
 militia, are recomrfiended to the atSention of the inspecting 
 Field Officers, but it is not to be understood, that they are 
 entirely precluded from raakiag alterations, which expe« 
 rience, and local information obtained in their reipectiye 
 districts, may mak^ it expedientifor them to adopt, for the 
 good of this description of force, and of his Majesty's service 
 aJt large. Commanding Officers of corps as Wf^ll as otheri, 
 are expected to pay the utniosl attention to the direction! 
 of the inspecting Field Officers and also to indoce iheir mea 
 to a ready compliance with them. 
 
 By Command of hit Excelleneyi ^ 
 
 . F. VASSAL DB MONTIEL, 
 
 '' ' . 
 
 4 ' 
 
 •• ,\ . , .(••.• 
 
Les Recrues ne.seront pas tqnuestcop longferapf ;) une 
 [•eule parlie de I'exereice, crainte de letienniiyer; et I'ecole 
 defa inarclie sans armes sera de iems en terns entrem^lee 
 avec ceile du maniment du fusil. Cot avis et la suivantees- 
 qiiisc JV'Cole pour la miiice, sont recommandes )i Patten- 
 tion des Ofiiciers inspectenrs, uiais ils ne sont pas enti&re- 
 nient exclusde faire des chaagements, tels que Texp^rience 
 et i'liifurmation locale oblenue dansleurs districts res^iectifs, 
 rendraient expedient d'adopter, puur Tavanta^e de cette 
 description de troupes,, etceliii du service de Sa Majesty. 
 Les Coininaiidauts de Corps et autres Qfficiers, seront tres 
 attentifs anx instructions des Officiers Superieurs du d£par« 
 teinent de rinspection de Milice, et a disposer leurs Mili<» 
 «i«ns I les executer avec zeie el exactitude. 
 
 P»r Ordre de Son Excellence 
 
 F. VASSAL DE MONVIEL, 
 
 yidjudant Geniral dC8 MillQe*^ 
 
 A n 
 
t 
 
 f 
 
 RULES AND REGULATIONS^ 
 
 i: 
 
 FOR THB 
 
 \ m 
 
 MILITIA FORCES 
 
 OF 
 
 LOWER. CA.N AD Ai 
 
 
 JMfc 
 
 Pontioh of 
 the soldier. 
 
 Mtandwg ot 
 we. 
 
 Jftenfioiu 
 
 SQUAD PRaL. 
 
 THE gqttads are^lwa]i^8 to aMemble with Iheir 
 arms, and complettly accoutred. 
 
 At first th6 arms are to be piled, and the Ji|aaf| 
 to fall in, in a rank entire^ 
 
 An equal Squareness of theshouldcfrs and body 
 to the front, is the first great principle ; Ibe 
 heels must be in a lin^^ and closed ; ine kneet 
 tt-raight vitbout stiffness, and the toes a little 
 turned out, -^ 
 
 On the word» "stand at ease,** the right foot 
 is to be drawn back about six inches, and tfa6 
 greatest part of the weight of the body upon it ; 
 the t^ft knee a little bent, the hands to ht brought 
 imartlj together before the bDdy, shoulder* 
 square, and attitude without constraint. 
 
 At this word the hands are to fall smartly down. 
 Hbe outside of the. th»|(hi| and ihe right beti to 
 
 
2^' 
 
 REGLEMENS 
 
 FOUR LA 
 
 MILICE 
 
 wr. 
 
 BAS^CANADA 
 
 mmm'^ 
 
 ECOLS UB L*ESCOUADE. 
 
 *• 
 
 Y ES Eicouft^cis g'assembleroDt toujour^ayee* 
 JLi leurftArmes et completement accoutres. 
 
 A vant les premiere fiuftructrons, le» armeste* • 
 rent croisees en faisceaux^etrEscouad&forjnera 
 tin leul ran^. 
 
 Le premier grand principe rested placer \t PmIIim dku 
 corps 4l'aplorab ao froot. let epaulet efi^ic^ef, Soldut, 
 \e9 talons etf Itgne et terras aulant- one la con« 
 formation de riiomme le |>ermet, lea ^eiiotix . 
 tendufr sans Toideur* etle#pied5 4in pen toum^a ^ 
 endehorst- ' 
 
 Aumot " i^09,*^fe pied droit sera rettr^ it p«u jt^M, . 
 pr^s six pouees, et la plus erj»nde partie ^u ppid 
 
 du corps appu^ie desf^us; fe geiiouil gfam^heim' 
 pen pH^, les mains 'poriees vii^mentd^TftiitiB * 
 corps, les ^paules.^galement effacees, et TattW ^ 
 lade sans ^ene. 
 
He brought up at the same moment in a line wTth 
 the left; 
 
 Myes right f These m'otions rau»t be praclised/aa Ih^ are 
 ^jie$ left t useful in wheeling and drcflsing when halted, and 
 
 should be made without the smallest turn of the 
 
 body. 
 
 XMfaiinga, In going through the facings the left heel never 
 quits the ground, the knees must be kept »traight 
 and the turnings made smoolhiy, without jirking 
 the body. 
 
 TotherlgH 1st. Place the hollow of the right foot smartly 
 jace. against the left heel ; 2d, raise the toes and tura 
 
 2 motiont, ^o the right on both heels. 
 
 To the right Ist. Place the ball of the right toe against the 
 about jMcCyXeW heel; 2d, raise the toes and turn lo the 
 Amotions, right about on both heels ; 3d, brirtg the right 
 - foot Mnartty back in a line with the left. 
 
 T9 the left |gt. Place the right heel against the hollow of 
 
 f^'^''\. the left foot ; 2d, turn to the left on both heels. 
 
 ^motions* 
 
 r tht left '*** Place the right heel against the ball of the 
 
 about *ace.^^^ foot; 2d, raise the toes, and turn lo the 
 
 ^mjtions. ' leftaboiit on both heels; 3d, bring up the right 
 
 ' tmartly in a line with the left ; (the bd^dy to bt 
 
 kept square.) 
 
 t>re$>ine, — In drestnag, the eyes of the men are always 
 
 u>hich is to tumed to the person who gives the wOrd *'• drea'* 
 
 be taught and who is posted at the point by which the 
 
 equally by l^ody halts, and wht) from that point corrects hi» 
 
 ^Z*"* *^ men on a point at, or beyond , his opposite flank; 
 
 ttgnt, which may be marked by a camp colour, or by 
 
 "a man thrown out for that purpose ; .as soon at 
 
 the dressing is accomplished *' eyes front" will 
 
 be gi?en» tbat the heads may be square, to the 
 
 front. 
 
 Earthing, All marching (the side step excepted) inTaria- 
 tfc^itroiMry blybegiQg with the left foot. This l^gth of ^acd 
 
preifdre la premiere potilion, porUnt le talo» 
 droit en avant ct ea la ligne dii talon gauche. 
 
 Ces motions teront pratiquces, parce quVHes 
 soht utiles pour leg conversions, et pour Tali, 
 gnement lorsque I'escouade f^^^it halfe, et elles. 
 devroicni s'cxecuter tans que le corps soit le 
 moindrement tournc. * 
 
 Pour les extcuter Is talon gaache ne doit ja- 
 mais quiller terre, les genoux srront tendus et 
 les mouvements se feront uniment el taas ic- 
 cousie dM corps, 
 
 Au premier, plar pz la cavit(§ du pif d droit vi- 
 yement centre letnhm gauche t au second tnnr- 
 nrz iur les talonil droit le (junrt du cercle, 
 ^levant un p«u les pointes des pieds. 
 
 Au premier, placfz laplaciedu pied droit, 
 eontrele talon gauebei au second, ^leycz let 
 polntes des pieds, ei lournez i droito le demi 
 cercle sur les talons » au troisieme, avancez 
 Tivement le piedilroit d I'Riignementi (conser* 
 ▼BDtl*<^qunrrilure du corps > 
 
 Au premier, placez le talon droit coiitre la 
 cavity du pied gauche t au second, tournez fur 
 let lalbns a gauche le quart du ceicle< 
 
 Au premier, pl<.crz le taloit droit contre la 
 planle du pied gituchei au second, ^levez les 
 poiutei den pieds, el tournez I gauche le demi 
 cercle, sur les talons (. au troitieml^, portezvir 
 yement'le pied droit en Talignement du pied 
 gauche (a)fant toinde mainteair Tiquarriture du 
 corps ) 
 
 Les yens seront toujours tourn^a dans ces 
 mouvements vers celui qui donee le mot '* a/»- 
 gnrment^** et ^ui est postf au ppint d'alignetncnt 
 sur lequel le corps fait halte, et qui de ce point 
 corrige Talignenient, sur un point au flanc op- 
 pose, oa plus loin ; qui pourroit ^tr^ marqu^ 
 par un jallon ou par un homme plac&a cetie fiii; 
 aussitot que ralignement est correcte, I'Officier 
 donnera le mot *'^xe," afin que les t^tes sdienJt 
 portees au front, 
 
 'flutes leu marches (except^ le pas de cdte) 
 HommcDceat par le pied gauche, qui fait i^ pre- 
 
 TcteadroiU 
 Tetta g<iM. 
 cAe. 
 
 Cont)er«t'«n 
 par homnUm 
 
 A droiteg 
 8 tenu. 
 
 9em{ tour 
 a droitCf t 
 terns. 
 
 J gaucMi 
 8 tem?y 
 
 Ikmi tour M 
 gancht, $ 
 iemi^ 
 
 A droite on 
 a gauche^ 
 Ali%netMnt» 
 
 
 %< 
 
 t ■ 
 
 I!"- 
 
 '■ni 
 
 
 m 
 
 March* (au^ 
 pas itrdinai" 
 
j<11 
 
 > ! 
 
 m 
 
 u- 
 
 ■ ■ ■■ ,t 
 
 I i 1 
 
 ■ 11 ' 
 
 The quick 
 tiep. 
 
 cruit should tfebiu'^ht to hike Id* of theiie pace* 
 in a minute, wilhoirl t.oilerin|^ and with perfect 
 steadinest ; al the word **^haU/* let th« rt^ArfV)ot 
 bebi'ou^ht upofi^ a line with the advanced: on«« 
 §o as to nn>8h' th-e step which waft taken when the 
 command was given. 
 
 The reoruithMriogipractiiicd the4>rdiaafj»|iacei 
 musinowhe taught to march 'miquickiime,t wchieli 
 is I OS steps in a minute, each of 3<Xinch«st>iBaki» 
 iog 2T0 feet in^ai- minute. 
 
 The toheelm I> 190'sleps of SO* inches eachj,. or aOOfeetiQr 
 ing march, a minute. Thiffisthe rjle at. wh^ch nil bod4eft 
 accumpiish fcherr w/ie^er/tf, thoMHitward fi'e step- 
 ping 33 iitciiesi, whtUher the wheel i« fjoiB, liiui 
 mto column^ or froor culuma iota liiMh 
 
 Double Should be- performed at a short} tr-ot, the moii 
 
 fiMcA time, bending their knees, tind-^ looking to^ the ianiti 
 ihnk^rthetiiDcu Itshuuldaev«c exiuicd Uiafe 
 pace \m which a frirmiitiaB can he, eJMcuted 
 without eoftfuaion* 
 ♦ 
 The aidti or Goieto the rights-March I; Each man carruei 
 thiing itept hi* right ffnot about 12 inches directly, to hit 
 riglttvand iostantJy brin«;s up hisiloft foot'Ullthe 
 heel touche»hi* right heel ; l^e then pauses Aa a*^ 
 tok perform thi§ movf.raent in ordiuacy time,. and 
 proceeds to take the next step in the same maa* 
 B«r. Close to the left — March !. Step to the left 
 Id inche» and brkig up. the right foot, &c. 
 
 The back This step is performed in ordinary time;— On 
 
 itep, .the word " Step back, rn«rch,** Ihe recruit must 
 
 betaughtto move straight bo the rear, ta.kii^ hit- 
 full' pace of SOinches at each Htepi preserving hit 
 thouldeis square to the front, and his body erect i 
 on the word ** Halt,** the foot in front must be 
 brought back, square with ihe other. Ten or 
 twelve paces only of the back step can be neces» 
 lary at a time, it i» an operation frequeotlj 
 roquired from 4 bvttaKon. 
 
 K*^ 
 
€ 
 
 Pa$redou* 
 
 Pafd« con* 
 version ou 
 pdsacedlire. 
 
 mxr ptt. La loBi^ifear du pM, de Ulooi taloM 
 pst (le30 pourct, 6t la recrue doit dire inilruile 
 ifoirc 76de ces pai, par niiniite« «ans chance- 
 ler, et d'un pas ferme atparfailenient auurf i 
 au mot ** hallCt* le pied qui je trouvetn arriere 
 sera porte en raligneinent du pied avanc6, afiu 
 d'ochever le pas qui s'ex^cutait Ion do com- 
 inanderaent. 
 
 La recrue ayant .pratiqu6 la marcho an pim 
 ordinaire, apprendra a raartflier au pas redoubiit 
 qui e8t de 108 pas par minute, ce qui, a 30 pou- 
 cespar chaque pas, fait 270 pieds par minute. 
 
 £slde 120 pas par minute, cliaque pas de 30 
 pouces, ou SOOpieds par minute. C'esta ce pas 
 que s'ex«cutentles fonrer«{>n«,'la'file oppostfeau 
 
 f)ivot alon^erale pas jnsqu'a 33 pouces,- s»it quo. 
 a «onver»ion se fasse pour rompre la li^ne eu 
 colonue, on pour la formation de la colonne ea 
 ii^ne. 
 
 Doit Stre execute au petit irol, les soIdaLs Pasdecowm 
 
 Sliant lesgenoux, et prenant teur alig^nement '^* 
 u 'flanc'de Pi v'i>t II; n'exc^dera jamais en Vi- 
 tesse le pas auquel la formation puiwe 4e faire 
 sans confusion. 
 
 ** Jppvyez a draHCf J\1arehe^* iLcs soldats -P^s de o6tt, 
 'portent leu rs pieds droits a peu pres 12 pouces k 
 droite sur I'alignement cieiWi troupe, et a rinstaat 
 
 iiortcnt lespiedsgnucbesa droitejusqu'ajoindre 
 es talons avecceux dc !leuf ft pirds droits: ils 
 pauscnt pour prendre' le terns du pas ordinaire, 
 et continuer les pasde cdteUe laroeme maniere, 
 
 '** j4 gnuehe^'pns de eote,** portez le pied.gaudie 
 dou^c pouces a gauche, joignez le taioo droite 
 au talon gauche, et ainsi de suite. . 
 
 f>e fait au' terns du 'pas ordinaire. '' Au com- 
 mandenietit ^* Bn ttrtiere Jif.arcAe" la recrue 
 sera instruite a re€Bl«r«<i arriere, par le, pasde 
 30 pouces, cotisenmnt Tequarriture des ipaiilcs, 
 et tenant le corps < droit, on d ploimA i%u.moi-, 
 ** //a2<r,"'le pied avanee sera retiri pounaJi- 
 gner avec I'autre. Dix on. donee pas de cette 
 inarchesonMe phis qui' est n^fssaire, a: la foia« 
 
 ' Ost un ntrottveBMOt • fouTent tji^coMaife p«iir 
 tia BatailloD, 
 
 Pat en ar- 
 riere. 
 
 i'i 
 
 I 
 
 ■ I 
 
 -■I 
 
 I 
 
 ■; 
 
 : 
 
 (■■ 
 
 1* _ 
 
 1: 
 
7 
 
 Plummet. 
 
 < 
 
 lit 
 
 \ \ 
 
 fKhttUn^, 
 
 Wheeling 
 forward on 
 single rank 
 from the 
 halt-^that is 
 fin a fixed 
 pivot. 
 
 A rausket-ball lunpended by a imall strinr 
 (knotted) of the following leniiftlii, will mark 
 the timet of the diflfurent marchei in a minute, 
 measuring from the point of luspension to tht 
 centre of the ball : 
 
 Lenffth of Cord. 
 Vibration, Inches. Hun.^parti, 
 
 Ordinary tinie....75 paces... .24 96 
 
 Quicklime 108 ..12 S \ 
 
 Wheeling time... 120 .9 80 
 
 In all wheelin^ii forward, on a ^fixcd or halted 
 pivots the flank front rank man, on whom the 
 wheel is made, that is to say — the pivot man faces 
 outward from his division. The other drink front 
 rank man, thnt is the man on the reverse flank, 
 is called ihe^oulward or wheeling man. 
 
 in all wheelings backward, tbe pivot facet 
 fiitoard to his division. 
 
 In A// wheelings, the eyes of the men are turned 
 to the wheeling man. 
 
 In all wheelings the eyes of the wheeling man, 
 are turned to the ptvot. ** Halt, Dress'* is only 
 one word of command. , 
 
 Whenever the squad is ordered to wheel To 
 either right or left, it, always ^leans that the 
 wheel is to be /ortean/, and when ordered to 
 wheel On either right or left, it means that the 
 wheel is to be backwards, * __ 
 
 At the words" To the right Wheel," the man 
 on the right of the rank faces to the right, taking 
 particular care t]iat his person is square in the 
 new direction i ,on the word ** March" the; step 
 oif together, the whole tnrning their eyes lb tbe 
 left (tne wht^eling flank) except the outward maa 
 Qn the left flank, who looks inwards, and during 
 th,e wheel becoms a kind of base line for otheri 
 to co!>form to, and maintain the uniforiiiit/ 
 
8 
 
 Vn l^onlct de Mouftqiiet suffpemlu par irM Plomb •« 
 petite CoiOc cles I(»ngiieuri ci-desRoiis iiuirquera Plftmb perm 
 le terns rfcs' diflKreiils pns tie Marche pilr ini- ptndUulairt 
 nute, mcfltiriuit du puint de iiinpelisron,- au 
 cciilre du Boulet. 
 
 Longueur dc la Corde- 
 fihraiionst Pouvea^ parties decimalet, 
 
 »ni8 ordiiiflire, 76 ^?4 96 
 
 reiDS ledoiiblr, 108 12 S 
 
 renis.;e C(m."f J2Q ^ qq 
 
 version, J 
 
 Dnns Ics Convcmions qui se font giir un Piirol Co-^versiont 
 \xC\ I h<Mnme-dii Fivol frtit face en dehors de paf Hangs, 
 
 division. Celtiidu flanc oppos6, esl nunime 
 ^e guide de Conversion. 
 
 Dans toiiles le.s Qonversions en arriere, le A* 
 }ot fait fn'ce vers sa division. 
 
 Dans loutes l(>s Conversions, lett jeax sunt 
 to u rn e s V e rs le ^i/iWe £ff co nve rsion . 
 
 Dans 'tonics les conversions Ics yenx du guide 
 ie conversion sont tourues vers lepivot, 
 
 ** Ilalfe alfgnemfnt:' ou " Halte lignCy* ne 
 Fail qa'iiJi commandemcnt. 
 
 Qiinnd iT-sconadc est commandeiR -de faire 
 
 iConversion a drm'le ou it i^nuf'he; il esl touj'Mira 
 
 intend n que le nionvement se fait en avaut, et 
 
 jirand fclle est coniinaodee k faire conversion sur 
 
 \la droile ou sur I.i-^nnche^ il est entendu que le 
 
 hnouvemcnt se fait en urriero. 
 
 Aux mols " ^4 droile conversion^'* rhornme du 
 mane droit fait un a droit ayani soin de pl«cer 
 Ison corps quarrdnient danslanouvelle direction: 
 Uiu mot " MarchCf" ils cxecutent le mouvement 
 Itournant Ics yeux vers le guide de conversion, 
 (■qui se r^«^lant sur Ic pivoU dcvicnt one base 
 [pour ainsi dire, qui facilite aux autres, la con- 
 [foruiite, €t le mainiien deruniforniit-3 do front. 
 Leguide'de conversrun allungeant ses pas jus* 
 
 B 
 
 Conversion 
 d*uri Hang 
 <n arinf.Mf 
 un Pivot 
 
 Jixt, 
 
 ■ .i 
 
 \ 
 
 ({ 11 
 
 ■i^ 
 
 i 
 ;; ,| 
 
 M 
 
,r. 
 
 ■U' 
 
 •» 
 
 trhegUng a 
 single rank 
 from the 
 maixh. 
 
 '\- ' 
 
 •f/ront. The outward wheeliiif man •oiwati 
 lenglhcnR hid pac<^ to 33 inrhei^tlie whole oh- 
 nerve the name cadence { buteuch m:in shorteni 
 bii ttf^p^ in proportion as he id nearer tu the 
 ■landing flank, on ivhich the wheel if made. 
 
 During thewlieel, the files lightl)' touch, »nd 
 great care miml ho taken not to open out, but 
 rather to incline to the pivot, lyithout j>i'e^'iing 
 on it. 
 
 On the word * Half! each man halls invmc- 
 di'jtei}', withont Jumpin;:; forward, or niaJiing asy 
 false moTeraents, and the M'holc rcmiiin perfectly 
 steady, still looking to the wheoling flank, until 
 they receive the word ** right drcM,'' and then 
 •*ey«s front.'* 
 
 This is a wheel on a halted pivot; the rank 
 marching at the ordinary time, receives the word 
 of command *' halt," *' right wheel ;" the mo- 
 ment the word ''halt" is pronounced, the man 
 on the ri«;ht hallxand faces to bin ri^hl,^hon Ihe 
 whole wheel as directed in the preceding section. 
 As soon as the portion of the circle is completed, 
 the words *'' halt, dress*' will be given ; then 
 after a pause of two or three secoiuU, the word 
 ** march" may ^e given, on which the whole 
 rank steps o(i' together in onlinary time. 
 
 If the wheel is to be on the right hacknards, 
 then ai the worH«, <m the ^* right backwards 
 single rank, wheel," the man on the right of the rank, that 
 is, the pivot, faces to the lejt ; at the word 
 <* inarxh," the whole step b ickwards, thixke near- 
 est the pivot man making their steps extremely 
 small, and those to<vards the wheeling man en- 
 creasing them as they are placed near to him. 
 
 In the wheel for ward' /o the left^ and the wheel 
 
 backward on the Ufl^ all that has liecn before 
 
 aaid takes place, and is in the same manner ex- 
 
 ' ecuted : only the /^^^^AiiAr front rank man, does 
 
 what has been directed for the tpight. 
 
 In wheeling of a single rank on a moveable 
 pivot, a well-drilled man should be placed on 
 each flank of the squad ; when the wheel is to be 
 made to the directing pivot flank (suppose the 
 
 Vl^heelhig 
 hackvoardi a 
 
 WhteUng a 
 aingle rank 
 on a moveu' 
 *U miuot. 
 
\\Vl 99 polices, tout te ran^ obrierre la m^mcr 
 radonct*} mai^chacun rnroiircil lei pa^ a pro* 
 »ortion qu'il te trouve prof he du Pivot qui ne . 
 Muige 
 
 I'eudant la convertion, lei filcA te toucheot 
 ('■^( remeiit, et on doit avoir toiii dene pai trop 
 ouvrir, malt plutdt d'iiidiner vert le Pivoif 
 laim ccpcndani le p^rester. 
 
 All mot •» fMtet" le inourement cetse, et le 
 [rang reite parfaltement ferme, lant te porter en 
 kvuiii oti fnire do fuuiscn (^ettet, let 5011 x tour- ' 
 IKS 'Cr% le i^uide de conversion, en attendant le 
 imot " i droite ttiignemantt* et apret celui de 
 f» >Afr," ou *' till %tn front 
 Se fait tur ini Pivot qui* ft fart haltei le rang Convenion 
 larchant ail pat ordinaire, recoil le com man* d^un Itwg 
 lenient, ** A«/l/, k Mmil§ eonveniont" an mot tn MarcH§» 
 »' haltt** le guide du Pivot fait un i droit et nt 
 louge* la rang extfcula la converiion, comme it 
 )tt expliquft dam la Seelioa pr^c^dente. AuitU 
 |t6t que la portion du eercle eit compl^tlet aux 
 (moti ** iroAtf, JUgnfmmti mareht,* le rang 
 •*avanee uo temi ordinaire. 
 
 8ilaconvariiondoll^lre«'|Mf7erfrefte M conveniens 
 l#rr<rw," aux roott «• war U drotU tn arritre gnarriert 
 UfinvertibHt* Phumme do la droite du rang fait tTun Rang, 
 hulte k gauciie ^taiit le Pivot 1 au moi JUareht^ 
 )o rang ne porta en arrifre, Iti^lut prucbet du 
 Pivot racourcittent leurt put, et reux qui tont 
 prit du guide de conversion let- alongcant, k 
 Iraisonde leur proximity du flanc oppot6. 
 
 Pour la convertion i gauche en avaht, et celle 
 tur la ga ache en arriere, let m^met regies tns- 
 dites »ont observeet, et s'exftcutent de la inline 
 manierc; seulenient le ^fkind ^aucJu fail ce qui 
 ysiiU eiiscign^ pour le flanc^roit. 
 
 Pour la conversion d'un rang tur un Pivot Conoersion 
 mobile, it faitdroit pincer un hommeb^ien cxer- d'wa Itang. 
 ce serl'unet i'autre flanc de TcRcouade, si \& sururtPtmt 
 cooveFsi4>B doit te faire vert le flanc de direc- ^f*^*^*^ 
 
at 
 
 % 
 
 
 u 
 
 "'< 
 
 left) the rank inarching afc the ordinarj slept 
 feceives the word " right shoulders forward/ 
 OQ which the pivot iitun, without altering the 
 time or lcns;th of pace, continues his marck on 
 the circumference of the lesser circle, and on the 
 principle of dressing, gradually brings. round his 
 rank to the direction required, without obliging 
 the other flank which is describing the -circuin- 
 ferencffi of the larger circle,- to too much hurry^ 
 Wk the word ** forward/' shoulders are squared, 
 aod the whole luarGh to the front. 
 
 When the directing pivot has to describe the 
 circumference of the larger circle,, on the words 
 *' If^ft shoulders forward," he will, without 
 changing the time or length of his pare, gradu- 
 ally bring round the rank, and when the rank 
 has whetied the required degree, then the word 
 f* forward^ is given, om befure mentlotted. 
 
 ^ From what has been said, it is evident that 
 irhttther the i^ivoJt main is moving on the smaller 
 or the larger circle, he never changes the length 
 or cadence of his step, when he is moving on the 
 fmalieR ciffcle» the otherflank mast aecelecate its j 
 
 Eace er kugthen its step, or both ^ and this will 
 e in proportion to the numberof files iir the di* 
 vision, and to the portion of the circle.on which 
 the pivot maA marches. When the outward 
 roan is the pivot, the inner' flank, which has less 
 ground to go over, will in the same proportion, 
 step shorter and gradually couform. ^ 
 
 Attention in The squad to fall in two deep, and to be taught 
 forming the to cOver i^i file to the right or left, 
 
 squad or di' . , ,., , > 
 
 vidon, 
 
 W^hen the squad or division or any larger, body 
 is ordered to /(i//t;7— -each man Willi, with carried 
 arms, as quick as possible take his place in the 
 ranks, and dress according to the directions al-l 
 leady given v atteollon qausl Ue fiaid that tho files 
 
T 
 
 lion (par cxeinple ^ gauche) lerang marchant ^ * ,- 
 
 au pas ordinaire, fontiiHiesa inarchejusqii*icft 
 qu'il rC9oive le coramaiideiiieni, *' Tourmz a- 
 gnuchfy" alor« le piYot 8ans chfttigcr Ic teiiis ni "^ 
 
 reteiidiic dii pas, continue sa marehe enr parcou- ^ *• 
 
 raul iu circoiif^rencc du petit cerele, et siir le ;- - ' 
 principe de I'ali^iiemcnt, le rang.seconfornie 
 gradueiiement i l<r direction reqiiisc, sans a»> 
 sujelir Tautre flaiicqui parcourt la ei re inferen- 
 ce dii grand cerele a trup de precipitation; au i 
 mot, "e««ra«<," les-epaules sont effaceesqnar* . ^ 
 
 rement, et la marche est dirigce dan»lanou» : .. ;*. 
 I Telle direction. 
 
 Lorsqu<^* le Pivot dirccteur aura a decrire le 
 Iplus <^rand curcle, aux inotH Tournez a droHe^ tn 
 lADtfa/, il rundnira graduellemeut le, rang, eu ' .. \. 
 jparcourant 1-iFCulairemen.t I'espacc require, sans -i 
 fi^hanger l« lein» ni ta in«siire du pas, et alprs au %..: 
 limit " Kn avanty'" le rang avaiicera danskbouu- , -^ . ; ' 
 voile direction comnie il e»t dii plu»haut. , - . 
 
 II s'ensuit qu'il est evidcnf que, soil que le ^ -"" 
 
 jFlvol directeur parcourt le plus petit oa> le phis • - ^ v^^f ^ 
 grand ceccle,.jl ne ciiangera jamais la longueur 
 ni la cadence du pas, quand il parcourt le plus < 
 petit cerele, I'autre flanc aura a accelerer la ■ '* 
 
 Icadence <>u i alonger I'^lend-vie de scs p9<); ou < 
 peul-^tre Tun et Tautre r ct cela a proporti>on du 
 noinbre de files de la division, et de la portion • 
 [du cerele que le Pivot aura k parconrir. Lori- ^: 
 
 aue le Pivot est aussi guide de ponversion, le 
 anc iuterieur ajant un muindre espace a par- 
 courir, racoiircira par cou»squent ses pai afin 
 [de s'y conf Conner par degres. 
 
 L'Escouade sera fornaee en deux rangt on i Attention 
 deux de hauteur^ et ilsftervnt instruits'a secou- P""^ laftrm 
 •vrir de droile a ga-uche ou de gauche a droile, ""»'*<*" f^" 
 Yet serrefiles se^ placant dtreclement en arriere '■f*fo'*<"^'»**' 
 de leurs cbet« defile. 
 
 Quand PEscouade ou Division recevra Tordre 
 de se ranger en bataille, chaque soldat prendra 
 sa place dans les rangs, se conformant aux ins- 
 tr-uctions deja dounees ; on aura attention a ce 
 que les files soy«Dt correctemeut serrccs,, se 
 
 B 4. 
 
 division^. 
 
 ti'i 
 
 i-'^ 
 
 .: h i 
 
 fj 
 
 It'', 
 
 Is 
 

 Iff 
 
 srevmrertljrclbfedtlijrht^ touching, but wtthoat* 
 crotiding. Each man wilt then orciipy a space ' 
 ' of aferout 99 inches. Attention innst also be paid" 
 that the men in %he rear rank cover well, looking 
 their file leaders in'the middle of the neck-— that- 
 the ranks have their proper distance of one pace 
 (SO inches) from each other — that they are 
 equally welt dressed, and that the m«a do not 
 turn their beads to the right ur left. , 
 
 Open order The recrails being: formed in two ranks, on 
 fromthehalt the words ** rear rank take open order" the flank 
 men on the right and left of the rear rank step 
 briskly back one rarce — inetanlly fare to the right 
 and stand ctivered, to mark the ground on which 
 the rear rank is to halt and drew. On the word 
 "march** the dressers, (that is the men who' 
 had steptpcd back> front; and the rear rank at 
 the same time falls back one pace, dressing bjr 
 the right the instant it arrives on the ground. 
 
 Close order On the words " rear rank take close order, 
 fromthehalt march'* it close* one pace and then halts. 
 
 i!i 
 
 * 'm 
 
 \ ?i 
 
 To wheel its ^' *^® words " to the right file,'* or '* to the 
 
 bead to eU I^^t file," each file will make its seperale wheel, 
 
 tk$r flank, but wrthont altering: its time of march, the rear 
 
 rank men. keeping their eyes on their file leaders,, 
 
 thus gpdualiy gaining the new^ from the old 
 
 direction, and thereby avoiding the sudden stop, 
 
 , which otherwise would tal^e place. 
 
 MarcJiing in 
 fite. 
 
 The accuracy of the march in fifes to a flapk^ 
 is essential, and should be frequently practised |. 
 tn this march, the commander of the squad or 
 division will lead the front rankf suppose the 
 movement is to the left, at the vrords " to the 
 left face." he, and his covering serjeant, instantly 
 shift to the left flanks At *' quick march'* the 
 whole step off together. When the words" halt 
 front" are given, the leader aad his lerjtafti 
 return to their posts 6a the right. 
 
14 
 
 I e se former 
 a rang ou- 
 vert. 
 
 fduc1i«nt l^^remcnl sans presse. Chaqocsol-'- 
 dat occiipera iineespaced'eiiviroii 22pouces. II i 
 fout eocorc ^Ire allentif a ^ce que les solilits du 
 second rang couvrent exaciement Icvirs chefs ile 
 files; que les Tangs ayentleiirftpropresdislnncci* 
 d'un pas (Sa poures) qu'ils soieut ^^alemtmt 
 ' aiign^s, et que les henimes ne tournent pas leurs 
 |t6les ni k^droile ni a ganche." 
 
 Le premier horame de la droiteclcelui de la Deransser, 
 »auche du second rang, aux mots " en arrUre 
 otti^rez !'«» ranga^' font un pas en arriere el en 
 m^me terns font a droite, pour marquer la ligne 
 isurlaquelle le second rang doit s'aligner. Au 
 mot " Marche,*^ le premier rang no bougera ; le 
 second rang se placcra sur raligncment d6fer- 
 Jniine par les deux guides de la droite ctde la 
 gauche lesquel»feront en m^me terns a gauche. 
 
 Aux mots, '^^rrirt vos rangs, Marchty' le j^^fan'^ ou. 
 second rang fait un pas en ayant., „g,.^ $^for. 
 
 . . mer a rang 
 
 " . srrre. • 
 
 Aux mots,^ ** Jl drsile ou a gauche^ eonvfrsion Conversion 
 pttr files " chaque file suivra successiTemcnt, detatetede 
 fiisant la conv^rsidn sur aucun c6t6 des ttancs : In cotonne d 
 sans perdreou prendre trop de distance, sur uu i'»*i(>**^ii^onm 
 pivot, niouvunt Mnperceptiblement, mais sans M^fi'^^^*-^ 
 allerer la marche; I'homme du premier rang, '*- 
 
 qii'il soit pivot ou non, gardera sa distance, (H 
 cetui qui fait la conversion allongera son pas, et 
 ne penilra aucun terns dans la'marche. Ceux da ^ 
 
 second rang feront attention i leurs chefs de 
 file, afin d^^viter I'o&^stacle soudaio, qui, sans 
 ces precautions, s'ensiiivra. 
 
 L'Exactitude de la roaTche verltun flanc, est Marche pav 
 estenttelle; c'cst pourquoi on doit sou vent la pra- fi^s, 
 tiquer; dans cette marehe I'ofiicier commandant ^ 
 de I'escouade «onduira le premier rang; si le 
 raouvement est a gauche, aux mots, * ./^^aticAir' 
 tl se place avec son Sergent, instaramentau flanc 
 gauche; aux mots, ^* Pas rfdouble, marche " I'esi 
 couade se met en marche. Aux rnols -i* Halte, 
 front,'' rOflBcier et son sergeDt reprennent leutr 
 j^ostes4 iadroite» 
 
 }h-i 
 
15 
 
 OCiiqutttep 
 
 ■m 
 
 ij 
 
 
 '^ V 
 
 SteppittgQut 
 
 31 
 
 time. 
 
 31 ar king 
 
 Stepping 
 short, . 
 
 Increasing 
 the front of 
 ttn open co~ 
 lumn haltetl. 
 
 A\ the words- <*te -he left oblique, march,^' the 
 rccruil withuut altering ius personal squaiene^s 
 opposition, bntpreservtnt; his sivou I tiers parallel 
 to the line on which they first were placed ; he 
 will when he is to step with his left fbott point 
 and carry il forward about 19 inches iaa diago* 
 nallineto the left, which ^ives about 13 inches 
 to the front; the next Klep, he will bring hii 
 right foot SO inches forward, so that the right 
 heel be plac-ed thirteen uichei directly before the 
 I;elt one, .continuing to march in this manner in 
 the cadence of the ordinary step, viz..T5 paces in 
 the minute.' 
 
 Obliquing to the right is- done exactly upon 
 the same principle, the right foot being carried 19 
 inches in a diagfinalline to the rio^ht, and the left 
 foot 30 inches fori\ard-— this is also to be practis* 
 ed in quick time ;' when obliquing to the rights 
 eyes must be turned to the I* ft r aud when oh* 
 liquing to the /«//, eyes must be turned to the 
 rif^ht. 
 
 TlVe oblique march enables a body to preserve 
 its ;E;arc//WdirectiAn». atid at the same f^imc to 
 gain ground to a flink as* well afr to ti. fronts 
 without filing' or opening oui- ^ 
 
 At the words " step out r the step is lengthened 
 to S3 inches, but.witlmutaUering the cadence. 
 
 At the words *.* mark tim^l" the foot then ad- 
 Tancing,, completes its pace, after which the 
 cadence is continued without gaining ground, 
 bCit alternately throwing out the foot, and brings 
 ing it back square with the other. 
 
 At the words** step short T* tKe fool advancing 
 will finish its pace, and afterwards each recruit 
 will step as far as the ball of his toe, until the 
 word ** forward", is given, when be resumes the 
 usual pace. 
 
 The company standing in open column of sub- 
 divisional (suppose the right in front) receives 
 fHoro the instructor of the drill the caation> 
 ** form company :" 
 
 The commander of the company turning round 
 instantly orders, ** rear (or left) sub-diviaion^ 
 laft obli^ue-^quick—marcb/' 
 
16 
 
 Aux iiioti " J gauehe\ pas ohli'quf^'' la reerue Pas oblique, 
 tans riianger I'equarriture de son corps, ntals 
 couservant ie paraleiisme de ses cpaulcs a la It- , 
 
 gneoueliesontt^tefixeesaucoinmenceraent^fera 
 Hn pandu pied gauche, environ 19 ponces^ a- 
 van^int diagonilemeut vers'la jfauche, ce qui 
 doniie a pen pres 13 pouces en front, Ie pas sui- 
 .vantsera de 30 ponces avec Ie pied droit, de ' 
 , forte que Ie lalovi droit sera plac6 13 pouces . 
 [«n avaiit du pied o^auche, il coutinuera de mar- 
 cher dc cette nianiere dans la cadence du pas 
 Dfdinaire de 73 pas par minute. 
 
 Le pas oblique a droit s-'cx'^cnte cxactement 
 i^fur ie-m^me principe, Ie pied droit ctanl porte 
 ■ 19 pouces en li^ae dia^onale vers la droite, et , 
 
 le pied gauche 30 pouces en avant. Ce pas doit 
 ^^tre aussi pratique au pc-H redouble; cbn» la 
 marche oblique a droile, l«s yeax sont tourn<^« 
 4 aax^be;. eA dans la raarcbe obiique i gaucb^ 
 les yeux soot tourn^s ^ ^rotl!e. 
 
 La marche oblique met une troupe- en ^ tat dm 
 consafTee son paraleliuoe, eten inerae<temft^a»- 
 ^er du teriein vers un flanc atnsi qu-^eu f roni, 
 sans defiler ou s'ouvrir. 
 
 Au mot ^*' Alongez^^ le p'^s est along^ iusqo'a 
 93 ponces, sens altt^rer la cadence. - 
 
 A ce oGzjmamleraent le pied qui ^e troave ^ 
 Tance. complete son pas, la cadence est coDti>- 
 Bfl^e en levant \m pi.eds alternative ment tans 
 avancer, et ramenantle pied en raligneraent. 
 
 pan, 
 
 Marquez U 
 pas. 
 
 Aux mots " Diminuez le pas** le pied avanc^ 
 finira son pas et ensuite la recrue ne pas^era 
 point la poinfedapied a chaque, pas en mar- 
 chant, at aux mots, '* r/i avanty* il reprend le 
 pas ordinaire. 
 
 La Compagnie en colanne ouverte de sous- 
 divisions (flupposant la droite en front) re9oit 
 de Tinstructeur la caution ou mot 'preparatif 
 *' formez compagnk.** 
 
 Le Commandant de la compa^nie se tonrnant 
 instamment romuiande " Sous d'wision de Var» 
 fierr, oblique a gauche, pa9 redouble', marche,* 
 
 Diminuez le 
 pas. 
 
 Jugmtntez 
 le front de la 
 colonne de 
 pied feme. 
 
 
 u 
 
 m 
 
 if 
 
 i ■ 
 
n 
 
 ' 
 
 1 ;,; 'V •, 
 
 ; 
 
 IP 
 
 )i 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 flii diminishing 
 If. the front of 
 
 f 1 1 ' MM f>j7(->l CO- 
 
 ' ,j '/ lumn halted f 
 1 1 Me right iti 
 'Ml ' ' pont. 
 
 
 11 sV' 
 
 ! 
 
 II ■ 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 \%.'i» ■ , ^ ' 
 
 'i 
 
 iM €k^n$ratule» 
 
 1 
 f 
 
 ! 
 
 ,:\l i . ■ ; 
 
 •^ 
 
 
 1 
 
 4 
 
 y ;|i . ' Increasing 
 
 |. ;^f ;-, the front of 
 
 l|i ! on open co- 
 
 [ ' hunn^on the 
 
 i 
 1 
 
 ilil ■ . ' 
 
 When it has obliqued fo as to open its rf^ht 
 iank, (that if, ivhen its right flank has loom to 
 Riiirch past the left flank of the division thai was 
 in its( front) he (the same officer) gives the 
 i»ord •♦forward," the division raarchcs Htrai*rht 
 forward, and tvhen it is in aline with the Arst 
 division^ he orders ^' halt, dress," and takes post 
 on the left, the pivot flunk of the company. 
 
 When the iostriictor of the drill gires tht 
 caution *' form subdivisions,'* the covering ser* 
 jeant steps back, and remains to mark the spot 
 where the left flank^ of the sub division is to be] 
 placed. The comn)ander uf the company ad vane* 
 ing one tttep, orders'* left snbdivi!)ion— >inwards 
 face,^* on" which the ittb-divixion fncei to the 
 right, and the thre6 leading filet disengage to the 
 rear I hetheogives the word '* quick —^gaarch/' 
 the diyifioD in file paisei- round and behind the 
 lerjetDt who bad lie pped back to mark (heir 
 froimd, and at-iooD at the commaiMler of the 
 oompany aect that the left flank of the dtTiiion b 
 dofe to the nerjeant, he instantly gif ea the wordi 
 '* haltr front, /eft, d/esi t'* he then' poiti him- 
 ielf OD the lefl flank of the firit sub-diiriiioii, and 
 his covering ^lefjeant on that of the feeond. 
 
 Indiininiihing the front of nn open colugiQij 
 the fub-diviaion or leetioa on the reverie flunk, 
 if the one behind whtch the other lobodivifion 
 or tettion doubles. , 
 
 Therefore, when thi^. right it- in front, the 
 donblingwiU be in the rear of the right divituint 
 and when the left is in front, the dtyubliug will 
 bo in the rear of the left division. 
 
 And in increasinc^ the front of an open column, 
 the rear sub divisions* or sections, oblique to 
 the hand ibe pivot flank is on ; so that whei^the 
 ri^bt is in front, tht^ ob'iqning willbe to the 
 Ieft4 and when the left is in 4Vont» the obliquing 
 viill be to the^ ri^ht. 
 
 The pbtooti marehin;? at the ordinary time 
 ill open column ofsub-divisions, the ti>slructor of 
 th: '^rijl gives the cautionary command, ** fofm 
 wMupauy C the cojumander of the platoon. ia'^ 
 
18 
 
 Qaand il a asiiez obKqu^ pour d^coavrir torn 
 
 haiic droit, il cuiumandet *\fn a^va^U" et etant 
 
 \ti\yii en li^ne avec la premiere div'.aion, il 
 
 jiumande, ** //aftr, aligntm'rnt.'* el prcod 
 
 iluce a la gaocbe (jui est U* |)iv4>tulu pelotua. 
 
 A ravcrliigement de I'liislruclenr qtii y« c^m. jyhninuer fe 
 laudcrde former »ou8-divi»ioii8, le -^ergeut ij^ui ffont (Tune 
 jDuvre, va en arriere, pour marqoer (e , point colnmne ou'. 
 Ill le flanc giiuche de la sotis-division doit ^tre wr/e, ia 
 lace, le clief de la divitiion toui'iie i droite: lea druite m 
 [ois files qui guident ne d- boiteiil fn arrtcre, f'ynt, et dtt 
 ox mots '^ pas rtdoubfe, mnrihe" les files pas- P^*dfermt^ 
 Inl en touriiant deriicre le ScrgeiU, cl aa 
 pnie moment re9oiTeut le coininandement, 
 
 HuHe^j'ronlya'gaiithf aligfiement^^^ le chet de 
 )mpagnie se trouve alors sur le flanc gauciis 
 
 la premiere division et son Sergentsur ceJui 
 
 la sucoiide. > s ^ 
 
 Resale Ctint^ 
 I'lile. 
 
 £n dimmu^iit le front d'une Colonne, tes aa- 
 ^es soiis-division.s on sections doubteront dcr- 
 ierc ceHc qui est au flauc oppose au pivot« 
 
 Ainsi quand la droite est en front le doublement 
 ;ra en !iri'ierc de la Division droite } et quuid 
 i guuclie est en fronts le doubieaient sera ea 
 Irriere de la diviou gauche. 
 
 Et en aqgrnentaiit Ic front -d'line colonne oo- 
 jerte, ics sou's divisions ou sect iimsobliqucntdu 
 [otpdu Pivot, de sople que quand la droi e'esten 
 rout, Tobliquement sera vers la ganctic, et 
 luand la gauche est«n tete, robliqaement sqra 
 
 ^rs la4roite. 
 
 Lepek)ton marchantau pas ordinaire en CO. ^ 
 >one ouverlc de sous divisions, I'lnslruclcur u-ff^'Tl 
 lonne le mot d'averlissemenl, " Formei compa- necoidmie 
 t«ie" le chef du pelotoo de rarridrc se taurnaut ^acuu u en 
 
 ill' 
 
 I'll 
 
 ci' i : 
 
 I'll 
 
19 
 
 niarch^ the sf^ntfy turning ronnd, gives Ihe words, "left I 
 
 [§■ 
 
 
 right 
 
 III 
 
 Dhninishmg 
 lAd front of 
 an open co- 
 lumn on the 
 marv.k^ the 
 right in 
 front. 
 
 obiiqti^r Tjuick march {'* on -nhich the rear sub- 
 division obliqaes to the left, and as soon as its I 
 r^gfht fia'fik is open, it receives from the same 
 officer, the word ** forward," and when it ffcts 
 U)) to the first division, which has coniiniird to 
 march with the utmost steadiness at the ordinary 
 pace, the same officer i^ives the word *' ordinary 
 time," and takes post on the pivot flaiik, towards { 
 which of coiir e he has been movio; 
 
 The company marching at tlie ordinary pace, 
 receives from the instructor of the drill, the! 
 caution,^ *' form — sub divisions " 
 
 The commander of ihe platoon advancing one' 
 step, immediately orders '* left s>fb-divisi(>n— i 
 mark time ;" this it does until the right sub* 
 division, which continnes its march stead ly, has[ 
 cleared itK flank ; he then orders Ihe '^ left sub- 
 division—quick (jblique," and when he pcrceiveij 
 tl\at i'l hasdoMbled pri>p(rly behind the right one,! 
 he gives the word " f(MWJird" on which it takesl 
 up the ordinary utarcK, and follows ar its proper] 
 wheeling distance, the commander of the compa- 
 ny being lh«ivposte»l t)n the pivot flank of the! 
 first siib'division, and his Serjeant on that of the| 
 second. 
 
 The same directions that apply to increasingj 
 . or diminishing by sub-divisions, »pplv equally 
 to sections, which individually repeat the sanicj 
 operations. 
 
 On this principle, the front of a column may] 
 be reduced or increased any number of file*, 
 
 'As increasing and reducing. the front'of a co- 
 lumn is an operation that will iVe<|'.'en(ty occurl 
 m the march of iart^e bodies^ it is of the utmost 
 importance that it be perf«»rmed wilh »'xaclness,| 
 the transition from one situation to the otherl 
 must be made as qoi<'k as possible, the Icadiiigl 
 division must continue its march at the regular 
 time and length of pace, the ex:tcl di8tances| 
 between the divisions, must be .accurately pre- 
 served; and during the operation the rat>ks mus{| 
 be closed, r s carred, and the gi^eal'esl altcn* 
 tiua required from every individual. 
 
20 
 
 iommiinde inntnnirncnt V it gnuche^ pas reAou' rdute, h 
 ►feV' •» »ou»-divi«ion de I'arrierc obliquera 2i droiteentU 
 rauche, el aus»il6t qwe »on flaiic droit est di- <«• 
 'ag< le ra^me offic« comnionde, " en avant^* 
 ft quand il e»l arrive .. ia premiere division qui 
 contiDtli Jtt marche an pas ordinaire, avec 
 ^aucoup de fermet^, le mfime officier coral- 
 lande "•' pan ordinaire^'' ct iC place au pivot 
 srslequel s;i marche 6lait dirigec. 
 L'lnstrucleur de ia torapagnie en raarche aa 2)i„„„,^g^ ^ 
 IS ordinaire, donne le mot d'avertissement, p^^^ ^,^^^ 
 Formez sous division *' le chef de pelolon a- colonne ou- 
 mce un pas, ct commande instamment, ** aouty. ^grte et en 
 yision de gauche marquez le pasy" ce ^u*elie route la 
 itinuede faire jusqu'aceque la sous-division droiteen tim 
 la droite, qui poursuitsa marche fermement te, 
 pas ordinaire aitd^couvert sod flanc droit, 
 lors le chef de la sous-divisi an dc gauche- com* 
 \9knAe ^* pas redouble a droite ohliquey^ eX({\i?iVi^ 
 vcrra que la soas-di vision a doubl^ avec pre- 
 fsion en arriere de celle de la droite, il coni- 
 landera, '* en avftnt" afors elle repreud le pas 
 rdinaire et la juste distance, le chef setrouvant 
 ostd au pivot de la premiere sous-divisi '>a, et 
 )n Sergent a celui de la seconde, . 
 Les raSmes regies qui servent pour augroen- 
 ;r ou diminuer par sous-divisions, s'appliquent 
 IX sections qui s^par^ment r^pStent les mdmet 
 t^rations. .' ' 
 
 Sur ce principe on peut r^duire ou augmenter 
 front d^une colonne i im norabre de files 
 lelconque. 
 
 Comme il est souvent n^ce'ssaire d'augmenter 
 
 [I diminuer le front d'une colonne, dans leg 
 
 louvemens de grands corps de troupes, il est 
 
 tlademiere importance que cette op^ratipn 
 
 fasse avec exactitude, la transition d'une si- 
 
 ition a I'antre sera faite avec toutc la promp- 
 
 tude possible, la division de t^te ou de front 
 
 >ntinuera sa marche au pas r^gl^, pour la ca* 
 
 ^nceet la longueur du pas; les justes distances 
 
 ^tre les divisions seront scrupuleusement ob- 
 
 ?v^es{ etdurantie raouvetuent les rangs «e- 
 
 C 
 
 
 
 
 
21 
 
 
 .ti 
 
 V 
 
 '% 
 
 ] : 
 
 Observa- The column of march or manoeuvre, in «oii- 
 
 tions, •equeiice of obslruction^ in its route, which it 
 
 cannot giirmoiint, is frequently obliged to diniin. 
 iflh its front, and n^ain to incrensc it when such 
 difHculties are passed ; it is otic of the most 
 important of movements, and a battaiion/which 
 d«es not perform this operation with the greatest 
 exactnei4 and attention, so as nut to lengthen 
 out in the smalltvst de<^ree, is not fit to move ia 
 the column of a considerable corps. 
 
 The increase or diuiiiuition of the front of the 
 coluiiiu is performed when in movement, by each 
 company successively, when it arrives at the 
 point where the leading one of the column per- 
 formed it, or else by the whole companies of the 
 battalion at the same niomeul ; in cither case the 
 couimander of the battalion, at the instant that 
 it should begin to reduce or incre<i8e its front, 
 gives the general caution, that is to do go. 
 
 When a column of corapanics'in march, dimin- 
 ishes its front, either by compaiiics successively, 
 or the whole battalion at once, so soon as the 
 leading company arrives within 12 or 15 paces 
 of the point where it is necessary to diminish its 
 front, the commander .will give a loud caution, 
 that the 8ub>divisions arc to double either by 
 companies successively, ur the whole battalion 
 
 at once. 
 
 OBSERVATIONS AND DIHECTIONS. 
 
 The instructor of the drill previous to putting 
 his squad or division in motion should mark out 
 an oblong square, 40 paces by 20 or 30 (accord- 
 ing to the strength of his squad) the corners of 
 which he' will ascertain by camp colours, pikes, 
 •tones, or in any other visible manner : he will 
 place the pivot fia6)k of his division on the out- 
 ride of this square, but close to one of thci camp 
 colours. He williheu march his squad along 
 
22 
 
 1 .1 >'f: 
 
 in-con- 
 wliich it 
 II dim in- 
 len 8uch 
 
 1)0 IlKHit 
 
 n TV hid) 
 j;reate»t 
 Icnj^thea 
 )uovc ia 
 
 nt of the 
 , by each 
 s at the 
 J nil) per- 
 o« of the 
 • case the 
 lant that 
 it.s Trout, 
 
 80. 
 
 h,(1imin- 
 
 L-essively, 
 
 1 as the 
 
 15 paces 
 
 iiinish its 
 
 caution, 
 
 sithcr by 
 
 battulioa 
 
 )NS. ■ 
 
 puttino: 
 nark out 
 
 (accord- 
 >i'nei'8 of 
 i, pikes, 
 
 he will 
 
 the out- 
 [hd camp 
 id aloo^ 
 
 font serr^s, Ics armes port'^en, et ^tifgntM^ 
 attention est reqnise dc chaqiio iot vulu. 
 
 La colonnc dc i))archc on de inccuvri , en Ohservattm 
 conscqiienctMrobstacles danwsa ro «• .[irell'K ne 0,15, 
 pent suriuonttM', est friquemmcnt obligee de di- 
 minnerson trOnt, et de Taugnientcr quand ces 
 diflicdllcK sunt passres, c'esl un noouvcment des 
 plus important 1 car un bataiilon qui uc peut 
 excciUcr cette opt'ration avec la plus grande 
 pr<5ci<iU)ii et Piiltenlion la plus sui vie, pour em- 
 pcchcr que la colonne ne s'alon:^e pas \& moiii- 
 dreinent, n'est pas reLevabie \ w^'it dans une co* 
 lonne coinpos.'c d'un corpi de troupes conside- 
 rable. 
 
 L'au^mentation ou la dinninution du front de 
 la colonne, eat ex^cutee en marchc, et faite par 
 chaque compagnie succcssivement, quand elle 
 arrive au point od celle de la t^te qui guide la 
 colonne, Ta faite, ou bten par toutesles compa- 
 gnies du bataiilon au nndnie instant ; dans I'un 
 ou I'autre cas, le chef du bataiilon, a Tinstant 
 que la colonne doit comnnencer "k diminner oa a 
 augmenter son front, dnnnera 1*» mnt it'ov^rtl*. 
 sement geiK ral pour lepreparer au mouveraent* 
 
 Quand te Iiataillon, \naruiant en colonne, 
 diminue son front, soit par compagnie en suc- 
 cession, soit dc tout' le'bataillon a la fois, aussi- 
 t6t que la compagnie de direction arrivera a 
 12 on 15 pas du point ou il faut diminuer le 
 front, te chef avertira a haute voix que les soui 
 divisions doubleront, soit par compagnies 8U(- 
 cessives, ou par toul le bataiilon a la fois. , 
 
 OBSERVATIGAS ET DIRECTIONS. 
 
 L'ln^trucleur de I'ecole d'exercice, avantde 
 mettre sou escouade ou sa division en raouve- 
 ment, doii tracer un oblong de 40 pas sur SJ) ou 
 SO (seion le nombre des recrues) il en v^rifiera 
 les quatre coins par dr.s jallons. II placera' le 
 flanc du Pivot de sa division en denors de c& 
 quadre, mais proche d'un des jallons. Alors il 
 i«ra marcher son escouade le long de»cdtejde 
 
 C.a- 
 
 '1 » 
 
 ■r" 
 
 i„'i 
 
 
23 
 
 Ihe sulen of the oblon^^, inAking correct fVhseU 
 and Haltt at the angles. 
 
 The time of march beinj^ exactly nteertained 
 as already directed, he win tee that the sideii of 
 Ihe oblong are {;one over at the known uiirah«r 
 •fftepf I and if there be any inaccuracy he will 
 lengthen or shorten the step, uutil the squad 
 narcbes with the utmost precision. 
 
 He will frequently make his squad face to the 
 right-about, and march and wheel with its rear 
 rank in front He will make them break off", 
 and the men fall in again in different placet from 
 what they before occupied in the ranlLs, so that 
 each raau in his turn may be the pivot man of 
 the squad. 
 
 |n these positiontthe Miuad shouM be marcbod 
 tod wheeled both in ordinary and quick time* 
 
 The division during its mareb in line will oc> 
 rationally be ordered to tlep tful, 9tfp sAorl, marM 
 UmCt and oblique. 
 
 To acquire the just length of pace, corda 
 should be prepared by tying small pieces of cloth 
 on them at the distance of 30 inche« from each 
 other I at the end of 7d paces or tics, a piece of 
 cloth farger than the rest ibould be fastened i 
 a« 108 a piece of cloth of a different colour 
 should be tied ; and one differing still from both 
 should be tied at 190 paces; these mark the 
 extent of the Qrdiattryyihe ^lacls and the quickeB$ 
 time in a minute. 
 
 ' 1- * 
 
 
 I >> 
 
24 
 
 cef obi on*, faifnnt oorrectcmcnl lei c(tnvtr'<ion9 
 el (iet halli's aiix angles. 
 
 Ix loinn on codencc tie In mnrrhe <^tant c»- 
 aolemenl vcTifii*, il aiirti loin de 'a«r« parcourir ' 
 U'H coU'N (ill qnudiT dann le noiuhre de pan reqnif • 
 el ti il ne trouve un n)ani]ne de precision, ii fc- 
 |ra Hloni!;er ou rncourcir le ir.is jns<|u'ii ce qn« 
 I EHCouadc inaroho avec la piiiN S( riipiilruse ex« 
 n*'titnde. II fera f'r(i|uenin>ent fairo i son cs- 
 Icotiadit le denti tour ;l droit, nfin de In f'airo 
 Imarcher el faire les conversions, le second rnnj; 
 Ml front. Ii le* ronipra son vent, et lorsqne les 
 honiinr!* se remettr<»nt en pelolon, il IcHarraa- 
 jera de n»aniere qn'iis ne «pr»ut pins placr? • 
 i;onime nnparavnnt, afin qne chacnn piiistfe 
 sun lour ^Ire ri)t)niine du i'ivot de PE»couade« 
 
 Dans een positioni) TEscouade pratiqncra la 
 larche et les cunrersions au pas ordinaire, et ' 
 
 m pas redonble. 
 
 I La division march ant en li^ne, ilprendrales 
 ■occasions de faire alonger le pas^ racourcir Ic ' 
 yas, murquer le tems^ et de pratiquer I'obiique* 
 
 Pour acqn('rir la juste lonuueur du pa», il • 
 Ifera preparer des cordes, en attuchant des petits - 
 jmorceaux do toile a chaque trente puuceg; au ' 
 Ibout db 75 de ces marques, nn morcean de toile 
 Ion de-^ rap plus grand que les antrcs et d'ane * 
 jdifferenle conlenr sera attache, un autre a 108 
 Ipas, et un aulre different des precedents sera 
 jattach^ an boutdc 120 pas. Ces marques* in* 
 Idiqueronl I'etendue du tempt du pas ordinaire, 
 
 du tems du pas redouble, aiasi que du pas d« ' 
 
 charge ou de course par minute. 
 
 ,.i'i: 
 
 € a^ 
 
 ^■wijata;.- 
 
Words of ■ ^,j 
 command* 
 
 25 
 
 THB MANUAL exercise; 
 
 EXPLA^NATlONi 
 
 
 Suurearms, *»*• Bring the right hAndAriAly up, and plafe 
 
 it under tbecock, keeping thefirelcck steaify. 
 
 •> ' , - • 
 
 2d. Quit the I)utt with the left hand, and seize 
 
 ' '' the Areiock with it at the swell, brin^ing^ the 
 
 - elbbw close down upon the lock ; the right hand 
 
 .:. k«pt fast ia thin motion, and the piece still iup- 
 
 ■ '. "^ iSd. duit the right hand, and hrinit it down 
 
 "^ - to the right side, bringing the-firelock down to 
 Ihe secure under the left arm, and the hand 
 .. rather below the hip bbne. 
 
 9koulder 
 
 r-. 
 
 l«t, Brii^ ^lie ^relqick upto. the perpendicular 
 line, seizftbg it with the right haiKl under the 
 cock. 
 
 ^d. Quit the left'hand, and place it grasping 
 the buttk 
 
 3d. Quit the right hand, and bring it smartly 
 down to the right side. 
 
 Order arms, If^ Seize the ^elock with the right hand at 
 the ioif er loop, ju»t at the swelK 
 
 0d. Bring it down to th6 right side» to the 
 iriiil; the butt as low down as the arm wiU 
 admit without constraint, the niusale a little 
 
 ^ a4Tapced* 
 
 '••'■( 
 
 Sd. Drop the bult on the ground, plaeing tho 
 muzzle against the hallow of the right •houldcFy 
 and the hand flat upon the sling« 
 
 Fji ^«yon«<i 1'^ At the word /«, place thethinnb of the 
 
2^v^ 
 
 KANIMENT D£S AEMES.. 
 
 ExPLlCATIOIf; 
 
 Poxr'tinn dli r 
 poi id' acmes > 
 
 le Sdklftt ^tant place coinme ii a ilt present 
 ei*de?ant pour la position tans arraes, on hu 
 placera Tarme dans la main ganche contre r^> 
 paule ; il tournera le poignet de celle main le- 
 jjeremenl en dehors ; le pouce seul paraitra en 
 front; iesquatre doigts sons la croste, et le 
 conde gauche tant soil pen toum6> en dedans,, 
 ppur ne pas^tre separe du corps, et i I tie sera < '/■.•/: 
 ni plus reciile ni plusavance que le coude droit. ^ . .. '• ' * 
 Le iuVil restera sur la paurae de la main et non ■■ . ;^ -^ 
 sur le bout des doigts: etseraporti de nvaniere ;^ . v 
 i ne point faire hausser, avancer ou reculer uue 
 '£panl(/plus qne I'autre : c'est ponrqiioi la crosse-' - 
 isera uii peu avanc^e, et port^eaussi bas quefai- ..■ • 
 re se pent sans contrai<He; son devant trespeu' 
 I avance, et Parriere partie colldc ^ la cuisse par ' -. 
 
 le poi^net i I 'ar me sera tenue fermemeut devant- v •' 
 Ic defuut de 1 epaule; si die est retir#ei> ou por- • . , 
 tee trop baut, une 6pauJe se trouve avancee 
 et Tautre reculie, etlehautdn corps sera en ^ 
 contorsions et aura, perdu son^ ^qi^arritu^re par ' 
 rapport a la iierne et atiirprwds.' ,' ' - 
 
 I, Erapoignez brosquemenCllirme avec la Vdrfnewu* 
 main droite, le pouce sur la. contre platine» et ' tebras gau* 
 !e premier doigt contre le cWen ; detqehez en *'**• 
 m^rne terns I'arnge, del'^pauie, le caifon en de« 
 hors sans <||ue le bee dte la 'crosse change de place.': 
 
 S. La saisir avec la m^in- gauche £k la premie* * .. .; 
 
 re capucine, le pcHiee ' aloagi sur la bagnette,- 
 i'arme d^aplomb vis^-vis I'^paule, le coude joint < ^ - 
 
 a l*arm«.' • *-^- . 
 
 3. RenveVser I'armier, la passer sous le btat*^ 
 gauche, la maingayche restant a la premiere 
 capucine, le pouce a|)puy^ sur la baguette pour 
 l*emp^cher de ^kisser, le petit doigt lappuviS ft 
 la hanche, la maia'droite toibbant i sa premiere 
 position. 
 
 1. Releves raraae iFiTemeot de la maia gan- Portet%e$ 
 che, sans trop brusquer ce niouT6ment, pour «*"»»«»• 
 ^fiUr %w la taif^ette se ai'idchappo det Unooi » 
 
 ' it 
 
 ii'-'i, 
 
 M 
 
 m 
 
 #';:l 
 
27 
 
 fc *" ' i! 
 
 r't^hl hand, as quick as possible, behind the 
 barrel, lakinj^ a gripe of the firelock. 
 
 2d. As soon ns the word of command is fully 
 given, posh the firelock a little forward, at the 
 same lime drawing out the bayonet with the left 
 bind, and fixing ii with the utmost celerity. 
 The instant this is done, return as quick as pos- 
 sible, to the order a» above described, and stand 
 p-erfeclly steady. 
 
 ShouliJer 
 arms. 
 
 Present 
 mnns. 
 
 v 
 
 
 J .>''"' 
 
 1st. As soon a» the word shoulder \h given, 
 lake a gripe of the firelock with the right hand, 
 as in fixing bayonets ' 
 
 2d. At the last word, ai^ws, the firelock must 
 be thrown, with the right hand, in one motion, 
 and with as little appearance of effort aspossible^. 
 into its proper position on the left shoulder. 
 The hand cross-s Jhebody inso doing, but must 
 instantly be withdrawn. 
 
 1st. Seize the firelock with the right hand 
 under the guard, turning the lock to the front, 
 but without moving it from the shoulder. 
 
 2d. Raise the firelock up from the shoulder 
 to the poize y by placing the left hand upon the 
 sling, fingers pointed upwards ; the wrist upon 
 the guard, and the point of the left thumb of 
 equal height with and opposite to the left eye; 
 the piece to be kept perpendicular in this ppsi- 
 tion. 
 
 3d. Bring down the firelock with a quick 
 motion, as low as the- right hand will admit 
 ivithout constraint, drawing back the right foot 
 at the same instant, so that the hollow of it may- 
 touch the left heel. The firelock in this position, 
 "with the guard to the front, to be totally sup- 
 ported ia the left hand aud opposite to the Ic^ft 
 
 ^1 ^^t 
 
ReposeZ" 
 
 vou: sur V9i 
 
 28 
 
 lasaisisj-inlaussitot de la main droite entre Ic 
 thicii et la crosse. 
 
 2. (iiiitler I'arme dc la main gaiicbc, et ea 
 leine terns la placer fermement sous lacrosse. 
 
 3. Uuillcr la iiiiio droite et la porter vive- 
 lent a sa pogitiun au c6t^ droit: 
 
 1. Saisir Tariue avec la main droite, 4 la pre- 
 
 liere capiicitie. 
 
 2- Porlez-la au cote droit, lacrosse aussi ba«- annes, , 
 
 que le bras droit peut le faire sans gene, la :„. 
 
 »ouche du fuVil un pen avaoc6e, lachez en oiS- 
 le terns la main gauche. 
 
 3. Limez glisser la crosse a terre, placez ea 
 iSme tems la bouche de rajrme coutre le defeat 
 |e Tepaule droite, et la main a plat sur la ban- 
 loullieie del'arrae. 
 
 1. Au premier mot BayoneUCt placez le pou- BaytutUmt 
 \e de la main droite vivement d^rriere le fusil) canon. 
 mant fer me ment I'arme* 
 
 S. Au second mot Canon, poussez-Ie un peu - > ' 
 m avant, et portez en m£me teius la main gaur 
 pbea ia bayonette; saissisea!>la pour la fixer au : ^ 
 
 Sout du canon avec ciil^rit^, el reyenez Tite- ' * '. 
 lent a la position fixe. * 
 
 K Au8sit6t le premier mot doan^ Porten^ sai- 
 ^issez fermement le fusil de la main droite pla- 
 pant vivement le pouce derriere le fusiL 
 
 8. Au second mot Armet, le fusil est jett^ par 
 
 |a main droite, avec aussl peu que possible d'ap- 
 
 >arence d'effbrt, ii sa propre position a I'^paule 
 
 jaucbe, la main traverse devant le corps en le 
 
 jTaisant, mais se retire le plus vivement possible, 
 
 1. Saisif Tarme de la main droite au-dessous 
 le la platine, tournant laPIalioe aa front, sans vosarmM. 
 16hacher l*arrae de I'epaule. 
 
 2 Elevez ou haussez Tarme de I'ipaule pla- 
 cant la main gaucbe sur le cuir, les doigls- poin- 
 tes en baut, te/poigiiet sar la garde, et la pointe 
 lu pouce gaucbe. a hauteur et vis-a-via Toeil 
 gauche ; le canon sera perpeodiculaire daIl»^ 
 ;elt^ position. 
 
 3. Abaiuer vlveiaent Parme autant quo la^ 
 iiMa droite peut je faice laiia K^Mto,. rAtirani. aAi 
 
 Portez'VS 
 armes,. 
 
 PrlsenUz 
 
 >i ' 
 
 11 
 
 :"t 
 
 H 
 
 '1. 
 
 Oil' 
 
 '» 
 
 flm * 
 
 ,' 
 
 Rh 
 
 i;';j 
 
 i 
 
 1^ ) 
 
 W\ 
 
 yi- -J 
 

 29 
 
 thigh ; Ihe right hnnd lightly holding the smatl| 
 of the bull t the iinj;ers pointing rather down- 
 wards : the body to rest entirely on the left fbol,| 
 both knees straight. 
 
 Shoulder 
 mmu. 
 
 Isl. By a turn of the ri;5ht wrist^ bring the Are- 
 lock to its propor position on llio left shoulder, 
 as doscribed above, the left hand grasping the 
 butt, aud brina:ing up the right foot at thcitanie 
 instant to its original position. 
 
 2d Quit the right hand bri.nkly, and bring it] 
 down to the right side. yH 
 
 Fortarnut- At one motion thro\r the firelock from the I 
 
 shoulder across the body, to adia^onal nositiou, 
 
 in which the lock is to be turned to tne front?, 
 
 v' > und at the height of the breast r the muzzle 
 
 '!*■ ' slanting upwards, so that the barrel may crosi 
 
 opposite the point of the left shoulder, with the{ 
 
 , /^ bitt proportionably depressed. 
 
 ^ ' '.' ' - I 
 
 V 2: The rif^ht hand ffrasps the small of the but», 
 
 and the left holds the piece at the swell, close to 
 the lower pijie ; the tknmbs of both hands 
 pointing towards the muzzle. 
 
 
 Charge 
 lajjonets. 
 
 Make a half face to the right, and bring down 
 the firelock to nearly a horizontal position, with 
 the muzzle inclining a^ little upwards, and th« 
 right wrist resting against the hollow of the 
 thighi below the hip. 
 
 1st. Throw the firelock up to its proper posi- 
 Moulder: y^^^ „„ j^g 1^,^ ghoulder, grasping the butt with 
 
 *''^** ^ the left hand, and at the same instant coming to 
 your proper front. 
 
 2d. Quit the right hand smartly and bring it 
 daDwaio the righ.t side. 
 
PnrteZ'VOS 
 amies. 
 
 Prepares- 
 vos amies. 
 
 30 
 
 i^me-lems le pied droit, dc sorte que le crcux 
 m la bouole du pied droit toncjjo jui talon gau- 
 Itie. Le fusil daiis c* He position Jivec b {jarde 
 It la conroie en av?n\t, est entierenKMil supporte 
 jar la liyiii f;aijche, ot vis-a-vis do la ciiistte jfau- 
 [he, la m.iindroiie ttMjaut legcreinent ledvfaiit 
 le lacrosse: Ics dai;;ts pointant vers la tcrrej 
 corps entiernnent appuyc sur Ic pied tranche, 
 is gcnoux tendiis. 
 
 1. Par un tour du poigoet droit, meltez I'ar- 
 \c dans sa juste position a iVpaulc gauche, 
 
 ►mnie ii est d crit ci-dessus, la main gauche 
 lississant la crosse, el ramertantau racme ins- 
 M»t le pied droit ii sa position primitive. 
 
 2. Laissez tuiuber vivcment la main drolte au 
 Fote droit. 
 
 1. Dun seul mouvemcnt jettez le fusil de I'e- 
 taule dcvant le corps t.>n position diagonalc, la 
 datine seia tournee au front au niveau do la 
 loitrine; la bouche de I'arme tlevee obliqtie- 
 nent, le canon \is-a-vis la poinle de I'^rpaule 
 ;auche, et la cross.; abniss.'e a proportion . 
 
 La main droile saisit le defaul de la crosse, et 
 la main gauche einpoi ^nc larrae au bis de la 
 )reuiier« capucine; ies puuces des deux mains 
 )uintant vers la boiiche de I'arme. 
 
 1. Faire iin demi-qnart de conversion par 
 tomme a droit, et baisser le fusil a une posi* 
 tion presque hoMsoatale, le bout du canon 
 lu pen hauss>. et le poignet droit appuye 
 ;ontre le creux de la cuisse au dessuus de la 
 Ihanche. 
 
 1. Jettez r»rme a sapropre position a Pepaule 
 [gauche, saisissant la crosse avec la main gauche, vos amies. 
 el en meme terns remetlez-vous a I'alignement. 
 
 2» Ranienez vivcment la main droite au cotd 
 droit. 
 
 1 . Saisir Parme de la main droiie par la garde 
 tournant la plaline ^au front, sans I'oter de I'e. 
 paule. 
 
 2. Elevez Tarme de Tepaule, p!a9anl la main 
 S^auche iur la courroie, le« doigts puintant vers 
 
 Presentet la 
 Bayonctte. 
 
 PorteZ'Voa 
 
 Au bras 
 droit rarme. 
 
 tm 
 
 
 m 
 
 .1 
 
 |"-ll 
 
 !;■■■ 
 
 iMil 
 
31 
 
 Jdvance' ||t. Seize the firdock with the right hand 
 arms, under the guard, turning the lock to tne front, 
 
 but without moving it from the shoulder. 
 
 8d. Raise the firclotn upfrom the shoulder to 
 the poize, by placing the left hand upon the 
 sling, fingers pointing upwards, the wrist upon 
 the guard and the point of the left thumb of 
 equal height with, and opposite the left eye; 
 the piece to be kept perpendicular in this posi- 
 tion. 
 
 3d. Bring the firelock down to the right side, 
 , ~ with the right haiid as low as it will admit with« 
 out constraint, slipping up the left hand at the 
 same time to the swell, the guard between the 
 thumb and fore*fiiiger of the right hand, the 
 three last fingers under the cock, with the guard 
 to tHe front. 
 
 4th. Quit the left hand. 
 
 Shoulder 
 
 Support 
 Mrm9, 
 
 Ist* Bring up the left hand, and leize it at the 
 swell. 
 
 Sd. By a qmck turn of the right wrist, throw 
 it smartly to its proper position on the left 
 shoulder, and grasp the butt with the left hand. 
 
 3d. Quit the right hand, and bring it to the 
 right side. 
 
 ist. Seize the small of the butt, under the 
 lock, with the right hand, the thumb pointing 
 upwards. 
 
 2d. Bring the left arm under thecockt 
 
 3d. Quit tbe right hand. 
 
32 
 
 le haut, le poignet »ur la garde, ctla pointe ^u 
 pouce gauche a la hauteur cl viM-vU I'cBil 
 gauche, I'arrae sera perpeadiculairc, dans celle 
 position. 
 
 3. Placer le fusil le Jong du c6fi droit, avec 
 la main droile, austi bag (jue faire se peul NaHi 
 contrninte, gllssant la main gauche juaqu'a la 
 premiere capucine, la garde entre le pouce et 
 le premier doigt de la main droit*.!, I *» lroi» 
 derniet-A doigls sous le chi«D^ la garde tournce 
 • aufroBt. 
 
 4. LaisseztomberTi cement la main gauche. 
 
 m 
 
 ■ ( 
 
 ' -V; 
 
 R 
 
 '%: 
 
 w' 
 
 ' ^ i ' 
 
 m\ 
 
 '! ''''' 
 
 H « 
 
 4 
 
 1 
 
 ; , ■ > 
 
 » 
 
 '<HK 
 
 L m 
 
 ■'i"'!f 
 
 ^■,1 
 
 ;As I- 
 
 B'^J 
 
 Hut 
 
 vt\ 
 
 
 iW'j 
 
 '■ W 
 
 tmt- 
 
 
 > il 1 
 
 
 ill^f 
 
 
 H 
 
 
 1 
 
 1. Saisir I'arme de la main gauche \ la premii- Pnrtez v$$ 
 re capucine, en n<?uie, terns d^gager la main droi- armts, 
 te pla\;aat le pouce sous le chicn. 
 
 2. Tournant viyement le poignet droit, jt Iter 
 I'arme adroitement a sa ureutiere po^i* ui k 
 Tcpaule gauche, et saisir la crosse de I Main 
 gauche. 
 
 
 
 3. Jettez la main droite, au^cd(6 droit* 
 
 1. Saisisscz le dcfaut de la crosse sous le bras L*Armt «if 
 ^auebe avec U main droite, le pouce poiate en bras, 
 haut. " * . 
 
 3. PlaceZ le bras gauche sous Ic cbieo* 
 
 3. Quittez la main droite. 
 
 D 
 
T* 
 
 t ^>'V 
 
 i 
 
 m 
 
 33 
 
 €nrr^armi. Isl. Seize the §mall of the hull, irnder iTie 
 , left arm, wilh thL' right hand. 
 
 «-•- 
 
 2d. Smartly place the left hand grasping the 
 <butt, the firelock kept steady. 
 
 •8d. Quit the right hand. 
 
 "N. B. The position of ported arms is that 
 •which the soldier ^'11) either from the shoulder, 
 or after firing, take, in order to advance on an 
 enemy ivhom it \h intended to attack vf'iih fixed 
 bayonets; and the word of cooiniand for that 
 purpose is *' prepare to charge" The second 
 position is that which the front rank takesufter a 
 •quick advance, and when arrived at a few yards 
 distance only from the body to he attacked. The 
 position of ported arms is also that which sentries 
 are to take when challenging nry persons who 
 
 approach their posts. 
 
 / '1 
 
 In explanation of the 17th movement pres- 
 'Crihed in His Majesty's Kefj;ulati<)n.s for the in- 
 spection and review Exercise, it is to be clearly 
 understood^ that whenever a h;itialion or line 
 char^^es with bayonets, the whole are in the 
 first instance to port their arms, and advance 
 at a firm quick step ; or at a steady run, if cir* 
 ^umstances render itnecessaiy, but in the most 
 perfect order possible until they reach the enemy. 
 
 - It is at that instant that the front rank arc ne- 
 >ressarily to bring^ iheir firelocks down to the 
 t;harging position, and the whole are to press 
 forward with the utmost energy. The enemy 
 being routed, it will depend on I'he officer com- 
 manding to give the word " haltV when the 
 front rank will resume their position of ported 
 arms, and proceed as may be afterwards direct- 
 «d. But the word ** halt" is on no account to 
 ^e given during a charge, or as preparatory to 
 the front rank bringing the firelocks down to 
 iMm -cbargiDg poaition. It is therefore to b« 
 
.">. 
 
 34 . 
 
 r. Sainir le d^faut de la crosse, ■ons le bra« P'ortez v»9^ 
 gaiicho avec la main droitc. brines,. 
 
 '2» Em|»ai;;nt» vivement la crosse et tenet 
 I'armc fiTino. ^ . .^ ^ 
 
 3. JelU'Z la main droitc. ' '"' ' \ * ■• 
 
 N^. B La position de PoW<?rf^rw», .//riwespr/- 
 pnrecs, est cellc que le soldat prcndra, s^it du ** 
 
 Shoulder, Port d'Jrmet, o\x apres avoir tir6, \ ' ' 
 
 afin d'avancer sur rennemi, pour I'attaquer la . » 
 bayonelte au bout dii fusil ; et le mot de cora- 
 raandement sera prepare to chargey pre'parez let . "^ , ^ 
 
 Armea. La secoude position est ceite que lo - >■ 
 
 premier rangf prend apres avoir avauc^ vive- > 
 
 ment, a quelque peu de pas du corps que l*oa * 
 
 se propose d'attaquer. La position de Ported 
 Arms, Arine.s Preparees, est celie que Ics senti- 
 oelles prennent quand elles appellent ceifx qui 
 appracnent leurs postes. 
 
 Ponr expliquerle ITrae mouve/nent prescrit 
 par les regleraens de Sa Majeste pour I'eAerci'ce 
 d'in.<ipection et de revue, il° est cJaire que touteft^ 
 Ics fois qii'un bataillon ou une lizue s'avance 
 uour charo^cr a '/armeblaiiche, tous en premiere 
 instance, feront l.e mouvement de preparez lea. 
 armes^ et 8'av.anceront aii pas redouble d'une 
 marche ferme ; ou au pasde charge $'il estne- 
 cessaire, mais oardant le plus-parfalt ordre pps* 
 sible, en joignant i'cnnemi. 
 
 C'e^^t a ce moment que le premier ranp; pr^- 
 ffenterala biiyonctte, Tarme etant rfiisenlapo* 
 sition de Bayonetie croigec et le llutaillon se prfe* 
 eipitant sur Pennemi,.le choqucra le plus rude- 
 ment possible de toutes. ses-forcesw L'ennemi- 
 etant en d^roiite, il dependra du Commandant 
 de donner Ifc liioU" ft«//e," alors le premier rang, 
 resiimera la position d'armeapre'pnrtesi et agira 
 apres cou)u>c il sera ordonnc ; Mais il faut ab* 
 sclument se garder de donner le mot An/Ze du* 
 rant l'a»taque, ou comme preparatif au raouve- 
 ipfiat du premier rang lorqu'il pr6seatera let; 
 
 
 t^i 
 
 . il 
 
 > 
 
35 ' 
 
 » \ 
 
 I! I 
 
 5|k 
 > 
 
 ■A 
 
 « 
 
 ^me* 
 
 ' * 
 
 Bentries, 
 
 understood, I' at in the charge or quick attack 
 upon the enemy with fixed bayonets, rithrrpre« 
 vjons to, or aft<'r firiiiir, which is ii.«al(y b«'giia 
 at a diHtance of 150 or ^00 }ar(!s, as the ^roinui 
 "will adnnt, the char;;iu;^ position of the tVont 
 rank is to be assumed only at the instant of attack 
 f or defence. 
 
 In inarching any distance, or in standinjE^ at 
 ease, when supported^ iHe men are allowed to 
 brin^ their right hand across the body to the 
 saiall of the biitt, which latter must in that case 
 be thrown a little forward ; thiefin<;ei'Sof tlieleft 
 band bein^ uppermost, must be placed belweei^ 
 the body and the right eibov ; the right handi 
 are to be instantly removed when the division 
 huUSy or is ordered to //fcf«« by the right. Sloped 
 uHns on a march, and' i& quick moveinentf, are 
 also allowed. ^ ^ 
 
 The moliong in the manual exercise are to be 
 performed) leaving three pauses of the ordinary 
 time of march between each motion, except that 
 ot fixing bayonets^ in which a i mger 'time niust 
 be given. / 
 
 The maaual is not tr> be excuted by one word 
 or signal, but each separate word or command 
 is to be giv^en liy the officer who commandaihe 
 body perfx)rming it. 
 
 The manual and platoqn exercise yrWl no longer 
 make a regular part of a review, but will only 
 begone through when particularly called for by, 
 the reviewing General. T^f ^• 
 
 The platoon exercise is always to be done with 
 ranks closed, except .at the drill. 
 
 Sentries, posted with shouldered arms, are 
 ]^ermittcd afterwards to sujpport^ but not to slope 
 ■li|em. On tlie approach of an officer, they im me- 
 iifUtfj. carry their afuit, and put themselves in 
 
36 
 
 fnvonn«!lte« pour leacroiser avcc rennemi. Ce t 
 |iiMirqu(>i dans la charge on ntUqiie briiN<|u<^' , , 
 coiitrt' I'eiirteiui a Tii'iMe olanclic, j»oit .avaiil tni 
 nprcs 1c feu, qui cviiiineiire urdiiiairenieiil ^ 
 151) oil 200 |)ai!«cl<>n le tcrrein, le premier ran^ 
 lu; proiuira la posilivi) <ie. la charge ((u'ai'iiislant ; 
 |ile i'ulUqiiu oude la defeuse. ^^ 
 
 En tnarche de roulfl, ou qiinnd on fall haWe, 
 \l\innc t!ubras,\e» soldals peiivcnt, dau« la po- 
 [sition dti rcitosy meltrc \\ inaia droilq a Iraverg, 
 Idevant li! corps, pour tenir le fiisil culrc h cliiea 
 let la crosse, qui, dans, re can, lera uti peu ay^m- 
 ic* : ies d^ii^tsde la miiu gauche, qui e<ct densus, ,- 
 'rout places enlre le corps ctle coude droit ;. 
 
 Icsiu'riioii cicoites s^ront aussildtde^lac^c^f.qnaod 
 [la divi.ifion failAtf//tf, ou quand ilest^comma^de^ ,y 
 \droUe uUgnementf, }\ est permis qiissi en uiurclie ,j ' 
 
 de, route el daus It's UMiuvemeuts precipiles,. de 
 
 porter le^armes a \p)cuU'. 
 
 Lcs motions du manimont des armes: seront Teim^ 
 ex^cutesde nianiere qiiij .y aura Uous pauses 
 de la roarche en terns ordinaire aprcs chaque 
 motion, except*! celle d<i bayrinelif )tu cation y 
 ou le terns sera necessaircmenl plus long. 
 
 Le nianiment des ;irmei» n'cst pas cxdcut^, 
 par ua seul-commandemenl ou signal, inais Tyf. . 
 ficier qui commande une troupe,. I:i tui ter.A 
 faire, eo,4unnan^ )L-baque mot .4cv commande- 
 mi^nt -si^^j^f^ ^t distiiift. i Le mamiiAeat d;es.ar* 
 iiiQjs etj'e^erciee .des feg^ -de jpatUAio^ ije feroni 
 pl«f. Hnepitrti^ rj^guligw jdluAe BevuiS, Ui ae , 
 seront executes que quand le General ou oflicier 
 Inspeoteuf, le^demaadera. ;>»M.ii.r: 
 
 A" .t'-'.tV 
 
 )t 
 
 >ti 
 
 jA'E^XQrcioevafeu. de peloloa se fait toujourf k 
 rang»»erri»excepte1ir^cole.. i , 
 
 ..i Jl.'4 
 
 Les Sentinelles poslees avec les armes portees, SenHnettea. 
 J»««vettl, ikkMf'jfi^is, we|jtr.(? Im /?r»ie« au J^as, 
 mais Qoa peacli6e8. A rapproclic d'un Officier. 
 
 3 
 
 • ■ * 'I 
 
 I 
 
 ^^d:4'' 
 
3T 
 
 V. » . . 
 
 V 
 
 their proper pOAJlion I which if nor to be done nt 
 Ihe-itistant he pasiei, but h'j the time he !.<« Mrilhiii 
 twenty yards of their post, so thnt they may he 
 perfcotly steady before he comes up. 
 
 Corporals marching with retiefs, or commnnd. 
 §orporah. ingr detachtnents or divisions, ate to he on I he- 
 right, and will carry their ann#, advanred, with 
 bayonets Axed. 
 
 VnftJibay- N. ». The foUowin* are thTe raolions to be 
 •nf t$f' (the pfftctised in unfixin? bayonets. 
 Mrnis being «^ . 
 
 mtthsor^r) ^^^ ^^^ ^^^ ^^ motions the same as ordered 
 
 for fixing, 
 
 8d. Thlft left hand jp^rasps the ffrelock above the 
 upper swivel, and withlhe ri^ht the briyonet is 
 to be struck off and immediately returned to 
 the scabbard, and the iireloek to he placed' 
 quickly in its original posHion at ordered arms. 
 
 Words of 
 Command. 
 
 THE PLATOON EX^ERCISE; 
 
 ExpldnatiQnof.the several motions as taught al 
 
 the drilL. 
 
 Mlakereath/. Brin,^ the firelock to the recover, by Hi roiling 
 itbriskly from the shoulder, the^guard f o th^ 
 / . ' front, and instantly eock assoon as the left hand ■ 
 seizes the piece above the lock ; the ri^hi elb<ow 
 is-tq be fvimblyraifted a little, placin>; the thumb 
 upon thecockf and the fingerri>peir by the olatw^ 
 of the loek r ' then jtfrop ' the elbow ' as ^u icW &• • 
 poMible,f orctng 4*»wq the cock with the thiiiiib»v, 
 xaifir^.o yo i/»'; JO' r) at on/M. >'On|i.«^Jny'.'X.t) liiaiflu 
 
 Present, ^^'P ^^® teft hand along the sling as fklr as this ' 
 
 swell of the firelock ; bring the piece down to 
 iM^ftresentj stdppiftg back srx ineher^o tho rear, 
 with the right roat, -Md looking atedfastlyakHig 
 the barrel of the firelock. 
 
 Fif«.J 
 
 Full the trigger firinl jr^ and remtiun ^s tk* 
 
 iU 
 
38 
 
 lonent 
 v^itliiii 
 nay lie 
 
 imnntl. 
 on llie- 
 /, wilh- 
 
 to be 
 rdcred 
 
 ovethe 
 otiet is - 
 
 pilaccd' 
 A Arms. 
 
 U porleront /<•« armen el prendronl la poflitiori 
 \\i porte fnvmrn i' vihj;! pus eleleur poile, d« 
 orlequolriir aUiluile fcra parf\iitcmcnt poi.^e 
 >l i|.ploml>avaiU lun arriv(^o. 
 
 !>» Cuporaux condiii»ant la poge pour- rdtrer 
 M nentinellci, purteront tarme au brat droit, 
 'haifonellc uu.canon, 
 
 \. B' Lf)iTnotions suivantes «croat faitof pour 
 MiiuUre labayonetle. 
 
 Lei preraisre etseconde morionssont comme 
 f)nr mcttre labayonette au canon. 
 
 :) La main gauche saisit Tarme en haul dc la 
 tremicrc capuciiie,,etla bayonette d^'placce par 
 ti'iiiainUroiteeit PMnise au fourreau, et Parme* 
 *isHilo!: rcplacee i sa premiere pusition<de. rc^ • 
 ^ssur Icsanncg, 
 
 Jimtrltet Id 
 liilih'ii Itc. 
 (f'ui meilanl 
 tlaitsla iwni'- 
 Ihn ilu rr-- 
 
 I 
 
 vght at: 
 
 rowing 
 to th^ 
 't hand 
 elbow 
 thumb 
 eDlatW' 
 icfe u ' 
 brnnrb*..' 
 
 ai th)B - 
 lown to 
 
 LEXERCICE DU FEU DE EELOTOX. 
 
 ijcpUcnHon den diffe'rents Moureme^its, monlrci 
 a. I' Ecole tfinstrMclion* ■ 
 
 riacez PArmc dans la poKilion A'Artrhe»>hauies, 
 >u haul' lea armea. ce qui sefait comme »uil ; 
 i<;tlez rarrae vtveinent d« T^paule^la gardeeu 
 Tront, bandaz le chien aussitdl que la main pturi-i 
 'he saisit Parme en haut de la platine i le coud«-' 
 Iroit Si*ra promptemcntJe.T^ un peu, le pouce 
 jlac6 8l^rlQ chien, et les doigts ouverts prds de -^ 
 la platine; bVissez brusquement. le. Cj0uae« ^or* 
 pant le chien iiTec le poiiee.. ' . 
 
 Glissez la maiq^^auche le lon^ de la courroie 
 
 >lus t}'ai que la iireraibre. capucine, mettezPar- 
 
 irae en joue, relirant le pied droit six pouces en 
 
 farriery, et regs^rdaDtjKxement.le long.du canon. 
 
 maiidctnent^ i 
 
 •^u 
 
 JpprHe% 
 vosarmea,. 
 
 "^ 
 
 Joti#. 
 
 Ul«: H ^"tlrezfcrmemcntWiMienteietreftea dant la; jr^r 
 
 M HiiiUi 
 
39 
 
 t\ 
 
 Loadt 
 
 Handle car- 
 tridge. 
 
 Prime. 
 
 Cast nbouty 
 as it is to 1)6 
 pronounced 
 for the sake 
 ofbrevity, 
 
 present, lo(>ki.n^ stuatriiy along th« piece until 
 the next word of coiniuaud, 
 
 lit. Brinj!^ up the ri<j;lit foot to the inside of 
 the left lied, and at the s-4,»ne tiiiie drop the 
 firciock briskly, down .to the primjng position} 
 the top of , the cock oj>posite the rjofbl brcust, the 
 m'jzzlo raised to the height of the peak of the 
 capt and |iointtn^ directly to the front, which 
 will throw the firelock into ^he hollow of the 
 right side ; the left hand continuin<|;'to grasp the 
 piece at the swell, bol.iing it firm and steady ; 
 seize the cock with the fore-finger and thumb of 
 the ri^hthand. 
 
 2d. Ui\}f cock— by drawing back the right 
 elbow briskly, bringing it down on the butt of 
 the firt'lock. 
 
 Ist. Draw the cartridge from the pouch. 
 
 2d. Brin^ it to the mouth, holi[|ing it,|>etweeD 
 the fore-iinger and 'thumb, and bi^e oft the top 
 of the cartridge. 
 
 Ist. Shake sdme powcler inlb the pan. 
 
 Sdi Shut the pail with the three last fingefrs. 
 
 3d. Seize Ihesnlall of (he butt with the above 
 
 three fingers. 
 
 ' M;.f 
 
 Ist. Turn the piece pi ifia'blv r'ounditb th^lead- 
 iri^ positi'cjii V'tbVbiiU VHftin Wo incfr^^^ 
 gfoiitid, the lock' towa;^^Hs (h/fry^,a^ii the 
 muzzle of the piece ne¥r Vf>e DreWst ; th^rlgTil 
 baud to be brought on tha^ part of the barrel on 
 which the si^t is' jil^Ced i b(^li feet kire to b» 
 keiit fesi in this posrtion.^ f '^^ ' r K*t?r^»'. JT 
 
 ; ,' ; • -■ ■ • \' \ •■ » j\ 
 
40 
 
 ri 
 
 iositlon (rcnjoitc, Fes ycnx iixemeiit \e long du 
 fanonjnsqu'aii iiiotc/rflrgc. 
 
 1. PhceT le pied droit en dcdaus du talon 
 raiiche, buissant vivcnient I'arme a !a position Charges^ 
 ramorcer I le haul du cliieii vis-ivis dii tetun 
 
 Iroit, le boufdu canon eleve a lahkutenrdu 
 lonnet, ct pointant directement au front ce qui 
 teMcra I'arme au crenx du c6te droll-; ta main 
 rauche continuera a erapoigner rarrne a la pre- 
 niere capucine, la tenant fernieitient et^pose- 
 lent ; 84isisi(e3; le chien du premier dpi^tet du 
 iouce de lainaindroite. 
 
 2. Metier le chien en repot, retirant brusqob- 
 lent le coude droit, posez le lur lacrosse dti 
 isil. 
 
 Prenex la 
 Cartouche, - 
 
 Amorces, 
 
 1 . Tirez la Cartoiiche de hi Qibenie. 
 
 2 Tei^ant la Cartouche entre le prenoier doigt 
 le prduce, haussez^la, et mordfez-en le haut» 
 ivec les dentA. ' 
 
 I. Seco6ez de la Foudre dana le bassinet* 
 
 3, Fermezf le Bassinet a-vec les troiaderniers 
 loigls. 
 
 S. Saisissez le cqI de la crosse aYec le» Irois 
 loigts susdits. 
 
 T. Tournez adroitement t^arme ^ la position ,, 
 Je la charj::e,^ la crosse a deux pouce« de terre, o.<,yp^j 
 la platine vers-Ie front, et le bont du canon pris 
 Ha lapoitrine } la main droitc placee a la parlie 
 1u canon od est pl-ic<^e la lomi^re } lea deux 
 liedsjesteront danscetle poiilion. v 
 
 2. Laissez tomber la crosse Ik terre sans fatr^ 
 le bruit, secouez la puiidre dans le caooa f% 
 leltez pardessut le papier et In balle. 
 
 'i 
 
 4 
 
 U 
 
 
41 
 
 3(1. Seize the top of ihe ramrod with the fore^l 
 finger and ihuinb. 
 
 ^''"^ Isl. Force the ramrod half out,, and seize \t| 
 
 ramrodi. back-handed, exactly in the n»iddle. 
 
 .2d. Praw it entirely out, and turning it 'withi 
 the whole hand and arm extended from youj 
 put it one inch into the barrel. 
 
 Rfltn down 
 •artfidge. 
 
 Return 
 ramrods. 
 
 8houftter 
 tirmf. 
 
 1st. Push the ramrod down, holding it ail 
 before, exactly in the middle, until the haDdj 
 touches the muzzle. 
 
 2d. Slip the fore-finder and thumb to tht[ 
 upper ead, without letting tiie ramrod fall furJ 
 ther into the barrel. I 
 
 S(i. Push the cartridge well down to the bot>| 
 torn. 
 
 4tU. Strike It, ||rx> very quick strokes with the| 
 ramrOd. '" 
 
 Ist. Draw the ramrod half out, catching it| 
 back-handed. 
 
 2d. Dra,w it entirely oil ' iiing it very brisk-l 
 ]y froiTvyou, with the arm extended, ani^ putitl 
 into the loops, forcing it ati quick ^ possible tol 
 thebxMlom ^ then face to the proper front, th«| 
 finger and thumb of the rii^ht hand holding thel 
 ramrod, as in the position immediately previous] 
 to driiwing it, and the butt raised two inche(| 
 from the ground. 
 
 Strike the top of the rn iiz^le smartly with tliel 
 right hand, in order to fix the bayonet and raiu-I 
 rod more firmly, and at tli'e sasne tM.u' throw itl 
 nimbly up, at one uuUiun, to lite shoulder. 
 
 N. B. Though the butts are not k) come to the 
 ground in casting about, -ts accidekits may happen 
 from it, yet th*;y ar& permitted, "while loadingl 
 to he so rested ; but it must be done withoiiil 
 lioi^, and iixaioaaper imperceptible in.the fronL 
 
42 
 
 m 
 
 3 Saifissez \e hant de la B3gnctt« avec ]e 
 reuiier tioigt ct le police. 
 
 1. Force* la Baguette en haul jusqu'a la root- ^^''^^j^ 
 saisissez la en louriiant la imiime lie la main ^"Sr"cwe. 
 
 dehors exacleiiient au milieu. 
 
 2, Tirez la des tenons el tournez la avec la ' 
 lain ct ie bras etendu, mettez la un pouce dans 
 
 canon. 
 
 Bourez* 
 
 Hemettez 
 la baguette. 
 
 1. Poiwscz la baj^uclte en bas, la tepanl coni- 
 
 |e dessus, exactenieiit au nulieu jus<|u'ace que 
 
 main louche la bouche de Tariue. 
 
 t2. Cllissea le premier iloigt el le pouce en haul 
 
 la Bagiiette, sans souiTrir qu'elle tombc plus 
 
 IS (ians le canon. 
 
 3. Forcez la carlouchc au fond de Tai me. 
 
 4. Frappez la cartouche deux coups vifs avec 
 baguette. 
 
 1. Tirez la baj»tiette jusqu'aii milieu^ la aai- 
 [ssant adroitemcnl de la main tournee a revers. 
 
 2. Tirez la enticrcment hors du canon, la 
 
 mrnant eh meme iems du bras etendu, et met- 
 
 ^z la dans les capucinesou tenons, la forfant 
 
 livemenl au fond { fatten face au front, ledoigt 
 
 le pouce de la main draile tenanlla baguette 
 ^)nime dans la position immediatement avant 
 
 lirer la baguette, et la crosse hauss.'e de la 
 >rre de deux pontes, ' . - 
 
 Frappez le de^sus de la bouche de t'arme vi- Portez les 
 mient a\ec la main droite, afin d'assurer la ^ii'mes, 
 i}'onette et la ba^cUc plus fermement, et ea 
 [n meme terns faites la sauter a la posili^n du 
 >rt d'armes. 
 
 N. B. Quotque lesisrossesne doi vent pas lou* 
 
 ler terre dans le mouvement d'arrae 4 gauche, 
 
 lisque Uv-anmoins il pent arriver des accident», 
 
 consequence il leur est permis de placer Icnr 
 
 Fosse k terre pendant qii iis cbargent, mait ceci 
 
 >ra fait sans faire do bruit «t d'ljne mauiert 
 
 I perceptible. 
 
 hm 
 
 ■ > i 
 
 1. 1 
 
 }9 'fill! 
 
 km 
 
 
43 
 
 Words of 
 Command. 
 
 Prime and 
 load. 
 
 Ojficin, 
 
 VWtLkVAJlOS OF PRIMING AND r.OAl>IN'(t> 
 
 Ist, Bring tlic firelock down in one brisk mow 
 ti(»n to the priming position, the thumb of the 
 ri«;ht band placed u;;ainsl the p^ai-cover, or 
 steel i the finj^ers clinched ; and the elbow a 
 little iurneil out so that the. wrist mav be clear 
 o/ the cock. 
 
 2d. Open the pan, by Ihrowinj;^ up the «teel, 
 with a fitroiig inolioirof tlie rio;ht arm, turning 
 the elbow in, and keeping the firelock steady in 
 the left hand. ' < 
 
 * ■ 
 
 3d. Brin^ your hand'round t-o the pouch and] 
 draw out the cartridge. 
 
 The rest as nbove described, exceptin;^ that 
 in loadino^, all motions are to be done with ai 
 much dispatch as possible^ even/ man shouldering 
 or recovering as soon as Ms ramrod is proiicrIr/\ 
 returned, 
 
 N. B. In giving words of commdnd ns well in{ 
 as out of the ranks, oflScers are io stand perfect* 
 ly steady, and in their proper position s their I 
 swords iheld firmly in the full of the ri^ht haiul, 
 with the upper part of ihe blade restin^j^ again.nt 
 the shoulder, the right Wrist against the hip, and 
 the elbow drawn back. 
 
 In firing by gi'nnd divisions, the centre ofHccr 
 falls back, on the preparative^ into the fourlbl 
 rank, and is replaced by the covering serjeaut. 
 
 FIRING BV PLATOONS. 
 
 II The officers, instead of giving the wordi, 
 ynake r^adiff present, Jire^ are to pronounce the| 
 words short t as for instance) ready ^ p''sent^ fin, 
 
 In firing by>platoous or divisions, the oflficerij 
 •ommaudiDg tueia.are to step out one pace oj^ 
 
m 
 
 44 
 
 Explication de la charge Prb'cifite'js* 
 
 L t 
 
 Charge 
 prScipUie. 
 
 \. Piacez vlvement I'arme d'un (teul terns a 
 la position d'amorcer^ Ic poucc de la main droi- '^^*"'.^« "*• 
 le plac^ cootre le bassinet ; Ics doij;ls formes, " '^*^** 
 et le coude un pen toitruR en dehors, dc torte 
 que le poignct Noit d^^age dti chien. , 
 
 2. OiivreK le Bassinet, en faisant ecarler la 
 balterie d'unc forte motion dii bras droit, tour- 
 Bant le coude un pou en dedans, el tenant le ' 
 fusil ferfiie danata main gauche. ' ' 
 
 3 Portez la main a la Gibcrne ct tirez la 
 Cartouche. 
 
 4. Le reste comme dessiis, excepts que tou- 
 testes notions dc la charge seront ex^cutoea 
 aussi Tito que faire se peut, chaque homuie 
 porlant les armea ov\ f^\%?tx\i haul Ics prmeSy aus- - ^ 
 sitot qu'il a remis la baguette a sa place. 
 
 N. B. En pronon^ant Ins mots de commanded OMciers, 
 nients aussi bien dans les ran<;s que hors des 
 rangs, les Officiers restcronl parfaitementfcrraca 
 et dans leur proprepoaition ; leurs ep'es tcnues 
 dans la paume de la main druitc, le haul de la 
 lame restant contre I't'paule, el le c^udc re«^ 
 tir^. • 
 
 En tiranl par Grandes Divisions, I'Officicr du 
 centre va se placer au rang surnumiraire, quand 
 Ic signal du pre'paradfal donne, et il est rein- 
 j)lace par son Sergenl de serrefile. 
 
 DES FEUXDE PELOTONS. 
 
 Les Officiers, au lieu de prononcer les motf 
 Apprelez vos armcs, en joue. feu, racourciront 
 les commanderaens autaat que.po88ible, et di- 
 ront armenyjoue^ feu. 
 
 En lirant par Pelolons ou par Divisions, lea 
 commaudasts, fcroat un pas a la fiadu sigual, 
 
 ■^ H 
 
 ! 
 
 i 
 
 ♦^: 
 
 
 
 ^] 
 
45 
 
 tlie close of the preparaiiy^, and face to ttic left 
 tovrards their men. They then stand perfectly 
 steady, until the last part of the General is bent 
 as a sig^nal to cease firing, when they iustiCutly 
 step back into the proper intervals. 
 
 When a division has fired, Ihe men prime and 
 load, and come to the recover as quick as they 
 individuuiiy can vfilhout an^ flugel man, who ii 
 not to be made use of in any firing whatever. 
 
 It is expected thai, from the insertion of the 
 fourth command, '* Load," in the Platoon 
 Exercise, the troops will become so h»hitiiaied 
 to the pause after pulling the trigs^ers, which is 
 requisite to ensure precision, and the full effect 
 of their fire, tliat they will invariably adopt it 
 on ail occasions, though in the iu\i\ they arc 
 not to expect any word of comni-»n(! after firincr, | 
 bujt each man after making the pause, which he 
 feels to l>e necessary for the efibctual delivery of I 
 the contents of hb piece, is to proceed to prime | 
 ^and load. 
 
 In all firing by platoons, divisions, or compa^ 
 nics, the first words, *' ready ^ "prenenU fifc^^ are I 
 to be regular, and generally from centre tu 
 jSanks of the battalioti, each wing independent, 
 though circumstances may occasion it to com* 
 mencc from any other part of the battalion that 
 inay be first formed ; but, after the first round, 
 every company is, by command of its officer,! 
 to present and fire as soon aj loaded. 
 
 In a'* firing by platoons or divisions, after the 
 frsl ri,^.:d tlie nrelock is not to be shouldered 
 oot briskly thrown upto therecoi><?r, which willj 
 render the word ^* ready" unnecessary, and re- 
 duce the words of command to the following, | 
 Tiz. ** p'sent, fire." 
 
 la file firing} the same rules are to be observed 
 
46 
 
 clferont fjfce a <::aiiche vers leurs troupes* iTii 
 ii'iiteront parfHitemeiit feraie, jiiiqu'a cc que 
 Iti premie rv partif de In generait; qui est le sii^oai 
 <lr tcsser le feu, soil battue^ alorsibsc piaceiit 
 iiistuinincnt dausleur» propres iutervallcs. 
 
 Q:ian(l unc Division a tir^, Ics N(4ilat8« *' char- 
 ffcnl," t:t lout " haul Ics annes ' sans aitendrc 
 riiutnine d'aile ; on ne s'on scrvira pas dang 
 rex'-ciitioij des feux, mais chaque individu fera 
 htnd (a's arnus, apres avoir charge aussi vile 
 qui) pourra. , 
 
 lie jnteftdu que Vinsertion du quatrieme 
 mol, chargez,'" dans I'cxercice a feu de Pelo- 
 tons, los troupes seront si habituees a \a. pause 
 quiest nei'essaire, apres avoir tire, pour assu- 
 rer Ja prccisiou et ie bon eflfet de leur feu, 
 qu'ils i'adopleront invariablenient en toutef 
 occasions, uoaobslant qu'ils ue doivent pas en 
 Bntaillon s'attendre i aucun mot apres avoir fait 
 ieu, fnais chaque hoiiime apres avoir fait la 
 pause qu'ii jugera necessaire, pour dicharger 
 efficacenient le contenu de son arme, executerft 
 r/Mrg-^ iodividuelleinent. 
 
 Dans Texecution des feux par P«Iotons, par 
 [Divisions ou par Compagnies, les premiers mots 
 
 irmeSfjoue, feu^ seront r^guliers et en general 
 
 lu centre aux flancsde cbaque Bataillon, chaque 
 [tile independerament, quoique.les circonstauceg 
 
 lourront causer que le feu commence de toute 
 ^utre parlie du Bataillon qui se trouvera ie pre- 
 nnier forme ; mais apres la premiere ronde, cha« 
 
 |ue compagnie par ordre de sun Officier fera,, 
 )foueetfeHy aussit6tqu'il aura charge. 
 
 Dans tousles feux de pelotons et divisions, 
 ipres te premier feu Tarme ne sera plus port^e 
 
 Tepaule, mais elle sera vivement pla^ee a la 
 ►osition de haul les armes, ce qui fera qu'ondis*' 
 >ensera du mol armes et reduira les mots de 
 jommaiideiiwnt, a ceux dejouet feu. 
 
 Dans, les feux tie files, les m^nie regies jerpntt 
 
 £2 
 
 -.7 ' 
 
 m. -'i^ 
 
m 
 
 i 
 
 jH 
 
 ! 
 
 
 1 
 
 ' m 
 
 1 rt 
 
 l.k 
 
 I'i 
 
 t •: 
 
 .♦r 
 
 47 ^ 
 
 by the several ranks, wtthout waiting for any 
 word of command. 
 
 CEA»E PIRINO. 
 
 When 4he signal has been made to ceaw 
 firing, ih* iien aie to rt cov»r arms — tialfcock, 
 for ^Tb!ch iliey will receive the word of com- 
 mand as Htii rs to fiho(i!der ; nhen the rear rank 
 men will spiring to the left and accurately cover 
 their file leaders. 
 
 J?nus€, It \h to be observed, that in all firing the soldier 
 
 . i' is to be instructed to pay due attention to that 
 , . -. order which enjoins the rep:nlaled pause upon 
 the pr£»fnt after pulling the trigger. 
 
 Fitirg, When the recruits have acquired the manage* 
 
 menl of their arms they will bo instructed first 
 r in 8ina;le rank, and afterwards at two.dee|), in 
 
 firing, with blank cartridges: and at a subsequent 
 meeting to fire individually with ball cartridge! 
 at a tatgret. 
 
 - ; " ' Prior to the comraenfcem^nt of th« firing, a 
 
 particnU«r inspection of the armsand ammunition I 
 should be made by the officers, and great atlen- 
 tion must be paid to the proper fixing of the 
 fl,inls. 
 
 N. R. Marching in line and ip file in ordinary, 
 ^<ii(k, and double quick time, to be practised j 
 each day, particularly advancing and .retreating 
 b,y files, and forming divisionsr 
 
 ' REGUXATIOWS IN FIRINiG 
 
 1< The advance of the battalion should instant* 
 Ij succeed the forming of the line ; and when it 
 
48 
 
 of»«crv^»'» par Ics diffrrcnt* wings sons attendre 
 auciin coMiinundcmcnt. 
 
 CESSEH LE FEU. 
 
 I » 
 
 Q<mnd le signal de cesser le feu sera donii^, 
 lies soldttts feront haul /r< -nrmes, meitront U 
 Ichfen e?} son repos, pnr cnmiTi!indi'i1i(*nf; ainsk 
 liine le mot, Portrz-armes; -Mors la h^u^\m^sde 
 ierrcfiln s'elancerojit k pauche cl couvriront 
 |cxactein<5nt leiir chef dc file. ^ 
 
 11 est ? oF^server, que dans tons les fenx, IteJ Pause^ 
 [s»ltlat sera iiislruit de faire aftentionj^ I'oidre 
 [qui prcscrit !a pause rt^j^lce de ralliliide en jou^ 
 |apr()» avoir tire. 
 
 Q'land les recfies auront aeqiiis le manimenl Les Feujg, 
 desarmes, iis seront instruils premi^rement en 
 iin rang, et erswile a denx de hauteur, a tirer 
 ia cartouches sans Uallcs ; et dans lu cours d'lin 
 |cxercice uiterieure, il leur sera inoQtr^a tirei' ' 
 
 I au blanc et h Balle individueliemchi. 
 
 Avant de commencer les feux, les^ Qfficierf 
 fcront line inspection rigide des arnicjJ, et de la 
 mtmition, et feront grande attention i ce qn« 
 Its railhttx on pierres "a fusil soient fixees soi- 
 jgneu semen t. Le plomb en feuillesest la raeil- 
 fieur substance pour fixer les pierres it fusiL 
 
 N. B. Onpraticjuera tousles jours la marche 
 «nligne et par files, au pas ordinaire, au pas 
 r^dottd//, et au pas pr^cipit^, surtont d'avancer 
 et se retirer par Qles, et de former les divisionik 
 
 Reglemens four l'execvtion des Feux;. 
 
 I. Le Bataillon marchers eh avant, aussitdt 
 foe la ligne tera formtfe i et auand il fait halte 
 
 &3 
 
 t •' 
 
/ 
 
 K '" 
 
 iw 
 
 i> 
 
 * utriiTfi and h;\U« at the point where it U to (Ire, 
 the firing •)Uj;ht instantly to coinireice at the 
 i!?ord hall ; tor the bahaiion havint^ been apprin* 
 ed during the inarch, of Ihu nature oftherov 
 quired iirio^, do improper delay need therefon 
 be made. 
 
 ted. Thd greatest care is to be taken by thej 
 officers anu iinder-officers in tiie rear (Tvhose 
 principal attention this is) that the rear rank is| 
 welt locked np in the firings, and that in loading 
 ihey do not fall back. 
 
 3. The line, if retiring, h a Ha^ fronts', at on« 
 f,ti'*t* *0'ii"^*n<J J ^"tl instantly begins firing, having 
 
 been apprised, during its raovcraent, of the na* 
 I ture of the firing. 
 
 4. The pause betwixt each of Ihe firing wordi 
 , , '■ . ^t Ready ! Present ! Fire I is the same as the ordi* 
 
 'f^"' nary time, viz. the 75th part of a minute, and 
 
 - no other pause is to be made betwixt the wordj. 
 
 5. In firing wings by companies: £ach wing 
 carries on its fire independent and without regard 
 to the other wing, whether it fires from thi 
 centre to the flanks, or from the flanks to the| 
 centre, if there are five companies in the win^, 
 
 , -. two pauses will be made betwixt the/re of each,! 
 , , and the ready of the succeeding one.— If theref 
 "' are four companies in the wing, three pausei 
 I will he made betwixt the jire of each, and the 
 ^ ' ready of the succeeding one.— This will allow 
 sufficient time for the first company to have 
 again loaded and shouldered at the time the last I 
 company fires> and wUlestabltsli proper kitenrali| 
 between each. 
 
 6. In firing by grand divisionSt three pausei 
 will be made betwixt the ^« of each division)| 
 and the ready of the succeeding one. 
 
 « 
 
 : :l„ la £riog by wme$ : Oat n\»s ^'^ Vi»k» 
 
U to firfr, 
 ice at the 
 ;cii nppris* 
 of the re.! 
 I therefort 
 
 ken by the 
 
 ar (Tvho§e 
 
 ear rank is 
 
 in loading 
 
 nts, at oni 
 no^, having! 
 ) of the Da>| 
 
 iring^ wordi 
 
 as the ordi* 
 
 linule, and 
 
 the wordj. 
 
 Each wing 
 
 outrej^ara 
 
 from the 
 
 inks to the! 
 
 ) the^vin^,. 
 
 re of each,! 
 
 —If there 
 
 ee pauseil 
 
 and the 
 
 will allow 
 
 to have 
 ne the lait 
 
 Mitervali 
 
 ee pauMi 
 diviiioDi 
 
 50: 
 
 point oft it doittirer, lesfeux connmcnceront^ 
 mot halttf car, h Batailloa nyant cid prcve**' 
 
 \u pendant la marche, de U nature desfeux re'*- 
 
 tuis, tout delai sera mal apropos, 
 
 2. Les Oflliciers et Bas Officicrs de serrefile 
 knronlle plus grand soin(et c'est leur principal 
 levoir) que Ic second ran^ soit bien enchaKya 
 pendant Ics feux, et q^rib ne reculeol point 
 >our charger, 
 
 S Quand la lignese retire, il faiiihaite front, 
 I'un sunt cominandement, et instannmciit lei> 
 
 feux coMjmenceront, la ligne ayant t'te prcve- 
 lue pendant son luouycment de la nature des 
 
 I'eux. 
 
 4. La pause entre chaque commandeineot det 
 feux, armes, joue,feu,e»t celledu pas ordinaire, . 
 :'esl-d-dire, la 75me partie d'une minute, etil> 
 
 se fera aucune autre pause entre les mots* 
 
 5. Dans Texecution des feux par ailes ou par 
 coinpagnies-: chaque aile soulient son feu 8an» 
 i^Brd a Tautre nite^ soit qu'elle aye commence 
 3u centre nux flancs, ou du flanc au centre, 
 I'il y a cinq compagnies dans Taile, deux pauses 
 turont lieu entre le motfeu de chaque, et celui 
 \*arme9t du suivant. S'ily a quatre compagnies 
 }ans I'aile, trois pauses seront faites entre le 
 feu de chaque, et lesarmes, du suivant. C« 
 
 [qui donnera un terns suffisant a la premiere 
 compagnie de charger et porter armes, quand 
 la derniere compagnie fera feu et 6tablira let 
 * itervales convenables entre les feux» 
 
 6. En tirant par Grandes Divisions, il y aura 
 rois pauses entre le feu d& chaque et Vurme$ 
 le celle qui la succ^de* 
 
 VI 
 
 I r 
 
 . ( 
 
 riU amOmIB V TifwM; ^ 9iiei \m «Ut mr^kra l49Mr» 
 
51 
 
 rrady the xiiMtnnI tlie other Ig shouldering.— Tht 
 conitnnnding oflicer of the battalion nre» the 
 
 ifin;jii. •» 
 
 8. Ill firinsjrompanicsh)//^*: Each company 
 flrcH indepeudeiit. — When iLeri^ht file pr suntji, 
 llie next makes rcndv, ard no on.— Aft r the 
 first, firu, oih man as he loads comes to a re- 
 cover, and the file a^jnln fires without waitinsj 
 for any other ; thtr rear rank men are to have 
 their eves on tl^;ir front rank men, and be 
 guided by, and present with them. 
 
 
 9. In fjencra!, after the march in front, and 
 hall of the battalion, company or platoon firing; 
 ithnnid he^in from the centre, and not from the 
 tlank». — In other ca»es and in successive forniu- 
 tions, it may he<;in from whatever division Arsl 
 arrives and halls on the ground. 
 
 Ifrtrr/iifi"- to "^^^ squad or division is to he particularly vreW 
 
 the fnnti »r dressed, files correct,arm8 carried, the rear ranks 
 
 rear, and coveriui^ex'.icllv, and each individual to have his 
 
 turning on justattil r le and position, beforf! the squad is snf- 
 
 ihe march, fc red to move ; which ever flank the march is 
 
 made From, a well trained man will be placed on 
 
 it to conduct it. The caution " squad or division" 
 
 ■will then be given ; and at the word " march," 
 
 each man steps forward a full pace, the recruit 
 
 must glance his eyes to the hand to which he is 
 
 dressing, but he must not bt suflPered to turn his 
 
 head, as a turning of the shoulders will tmdoubt* 
 
 edly follow. His elbows must be kept steady 
 
 without coDitraint % if they are openea from his 
 
 body, the next roan must be pressed upon ; if 
 
 they are closed there arises an improper tlistance, 
 
 which must be filled^up ; in either case, waving 
 
 on the inarch will 'take place, and must bis 
 
 aToided. 
 
 Twhhtg U Whev the diTifion ii marching, and that it 
 
52 
 
 mea nil |)ort-d*arinrN de Taut re. Le Comman- 
 dant du Uataitlua duiine Ics motti'\}Our Ic feu dui 
 ailcn. ' / 
 
 8. Kn lirnnt pnr fil*,'*, par compa^inici, rha- 
 quo conipai^iiic It fait indciXMidciuinijiil . Uui*.nd 
 J.i pr( initrc file fiiit./ow^ lii scroiuV? fait //»•/;/<»«» 
 f I ai.'si di' suite Aprrs Ic prcinirr feu, clut^iio 
 h(Mnmcavai\» cliarff'% fait "haul Ics rtrmr.v," et 
 la flic c<)iitiMUi.'H<)ii fc'ii Hxm attciidre !«» autres : 
 JeMhommeii dii nccond raii;:^ on dc Ncrn'filu au- 
 ronl ra'il (.ui- ienru d'cf?* d« lilc, cl so r^;;l('ront 
 
 5UI cux pour la charj;c, otic feu, c'est-a-dirc, . ^ 
 
 qu'ilK char;^ .'roct et tiieroptenstMiiMc. 
 
 9. Km ;;er era! .ipre» la ir.arche dirccle, ou en 
 avaul, el hi haltc d'ur. bataillou, compa|^nie on 
 pcloton, lo f".i com nencera dii ;"entre, et noa 
 
 par ItH flancs, en toi.t autre i-as, ei dans Ics for- ' 
 
 matious iuccessives, il cr*t.h.encera par la di- , 
 Ti§ionqul aura fait halleii preiBi^''e «ur le ter- 
 reia., 
 
 L'Eicouade ou la division sera correcu v* ent Marcheen 
 allgnce, lest tiles a leur juste distance, les nr- avant et en 
 nu'S porlet's ; et chaf<^u« iniJividn duns son atti- retraite;S^c, 
 tude r^gMe avant de soiiffrir que rFscoiiadc soil 
 niise en niouvemcn i on pl.icera un homniebicn 
 instruit pour legnider, au (lai^c d'od la mnrche 
 est faite, Le mot dc caution " Euouade ou /)i- 
 r/.>7t/»," sera alors donne^ ; et au mot **frnrilte" 
 chaque homnie fail un pas en avant, la recruc 
 jettera l<*2:<5rcraent I'oeil du coti dc I'alijneinent 
 oudugn :!.', iTiais sans tourner la t^le, '■e qui 
 entrainek'H i«!faiHible»ncnt les 'panics, N k cou- 
 des suront tcnus poscment snns contrai.ite $ s'il 
 ies 01; vif' dc sou corps, 'I pressera sur son voi- 
 sin,, s'i! les (ient trop clos, unc distance irrcgu- • ' 
 
 livl-rc s'ensuivra ^u'il faudracorriger ; dans I'un 
 ou I'autrc cas, il fant prevenir ou remcdier k 
 J'ondoyement qui aura lieu. 
 
 Oil and Ta division est on marche, et qnUl re- Tonmez iur 
 
 ill 1 
 
53 
 
 1'! 
 
 r^i 
 
 »n the maich 
 
 iherif^ht or receives the words ** lo »he right-alnxit — lurn,"* 
 hft ftdovt, as soon as tho recruit's left foot is placed on the 
 ground, at the full lens;lh of pace, he makes a 
 moiucntary halt in that position, gradiinlly tUiiH 
 his body round on both heels to the riu;ht, and 
 IhtMi brioj;s his left fool the full pace to the front, 
 and so coulinues the inarch. 
 
 If the words are to the ** U»fl-about— turn." 
 then if the recruil's left fool b« advanced, he 
 niu. I make another pace, and when his ri};ht foot 
 is ndViUici'd, he will proceed as above directed 
 with the exception of turning; on both heels to 
 the left, iastcad of to tiie right. It is however at 
 fii j»l heller to ptactise the spiiad to f^alt, and then 
 to give the words, '-right, or h fl-aboul— /</cf,' 
 and then ** march;''' .s the other iiyelhod is lesj 
 accurate, and the men will of course be more 
 likely to lote their dressing. 
 
 When Companies or their Divisions are moving 
 in file, and that without halting, it is eligible to 
 make them move on in front; or when moviD| 
 in front it is proper withont hailing to make them 
 move on in file ; the words of command are, 
 " to the right— turn," or " to the left— «Mm." 
 
 Changing from ordinary to quick timet and 
 from quick to ordinary/ time^ must alwaj^s be pre* 
 ceded by a previous, but instantaneous httHy 
 although this may not appear essential for the 
 movementsof a squad, division, or battalion, it 
 is absolutely so for those of a larger body, and 
 is therefore required in small ones. 
 
 m 
 
 ffrortideep '^^^ «q«iad or division having been told off in 
 
 to form 'k "S*^' »"<* 'c^t fi'P* allernately, at the words 
 
 d^ep, ** prepare to form four deep'* the rear rank steps 
 
 back one pace; at tho word'* March " Ihe left 
 
 files step hick to ihcir right, covering the men 
 
 who before stood at Iheir right hand. , 
 
54 
 
 gaucht' 
 
 Loitlemot, ^^ *4 la droiiedemi tour^'^ auisUut la march* 
 (j(ielet>ieJ gai.c hr ot |»l.ica a lerrc, j> la (lis- ihmj-tour & 
 tance tl'm boii pas dii piec! il: oil, il fcra nne halle '^'"''^ "" * 
 ni(>iucntiu»r.'*e dans ct'ttc j»o«!ii(»n, li)urj)ant uni- 
 menl son corps a (a ilroltc sar les deux lalous, 
 e. pia^Hnt son pied o^'iuclic iin pas en Irunl, ^i 
 conliniiera ainsi la lu ichc. 
 
 Si !e mot est, ^4 la gauchn demi-tovr^' alors 
 Isile pirtl <jauclie de la lecnic setr(#uve avancce, 
 III fera tin autre pas, el quaiil son pied droil se- 
 ra avance, il proccdora, c omme ci-i!f^su», ex- 
 ccple jjii'ii tourneta a {gauche au lieu do la droi- 
 Ic. Il vantccpendant mieux aii Jonimence.' ent 
 dc fairc t'aire Unite u iFsroMade, el aprcs de 
 donncr le mot, "^ Demi-lour a dru'Ue o\\ a f^iu- 
 che" et eiisiiito, Marchff,'* parre que I auhe 
 int'thode est moins exaclc, el les homines par 
 cansequciit plus sujels > perdre leur ali^neinenU 
 
 * > 
 
 Quand les Companjnies ou DivisioiH sunt cii 
 marche par files, et ({tie sans faire iiaile. il est 
 a propos de les faire marcher de front, ouqiiaud 
 mardiant en front, il est 4 propns sans faire 
 halte, de les faire marcher par tiles; les mot;; 
 seronl, '* ^ droilc ou a gauche." 
 
 Le chan«;emenl dii Pas ordinaire an Pas re- 
 double, etcelui du Pm redouh!/ n\\ Pns ordinaire 
 sera toujours prdcdde par une halle ujor^entan- 
 n^e; el quoique ceci ne paroitra pas pout clre 
 bien essentiel pour les mouvemeuts d'dne F.«- 
 coiiude, une Diviiiion, ou iiieu'e d'naBalaillon, 
 ileslabsolument necessaire ponrccux d'un pln« 
 ^rand corps, c'est pourquoi on Tcxige des pe- 
 tits. 
 
 I/Rsconade ou Division ayant el^ distin<;u^e -. n . t^* 
 «a files Ae droile ct files de gauche^ atix inoti, jj^JJ-/ 
 •* Formez-fiualre rangs,''* le second rnnja: fail un 
 pa» en arriire Marche, les files de pianchc font 
 tin pas en arriire et couvrent a la droite, let 
 hommcf qui dtaient a Icur dreUe* 
 
 ir^-iil 
 
 :! 
 
55 
 
 Fromideep "Form Iwodcep !" will be a caution— at iht| 
 to form 2 wori^ ** March !" the iilcs that stepped bark, 
 ^cqf. TviH move up into their proj^er places, and the I 
 
 ■rear rank will close to the front. 
 
 / It is a very common and a very pi <i'uv prac* 
 
 ti«e to march a battalion by Fi/urs— particularlj 
 in narrow roads, or pusses. At the wordi 
 *' halt, front/' the corps forms two deep ai 
 atiove directed* 
 
 FORMATION OF THE COMPANTi 
 
 Shing, 
 
 The formation of. the company, as well »| 
 that of the l)altalion is to be /i&o deep — beinn 
 better calcuinted for the nature of this country,! 
 and for quick movements, than three deep. 
 
 Having an exact size-roll of thf^ company, yo« 
 begin with the shortest man placin": hv.A in the 
 centre, the next taller on the left, the next above 
 him on the ri<;ht, and so on alternately formind 
 a rank entire until the tallest of all arc on (he 
 llutiks Yon then tell otf this rank into four 
 divisions, telling the division on the right and 
 that on the left that they are the /mi/ rank, 
 iht remaining divisions form the rear rank. Bt 
 ordering the men told off for the front rank to 
 march for\vard one pace — face inwards— march 
 until they meet, and then front— the company 
 is formed. 
 
 Telling off. Each company is divided into right and left! 
 sub-divisions j — each sub-division into right and 
 left sections; there should be four files at lefl<t 
 in a section. If the company is not strong 
 enough to have four sections, it should be divi* 
 ded into three, each of which ou^ht to have I 
 £ve files. The company should also be told oi\ 
 in rijfht and left files alternately . 
 
on— al thil 
 ppcd bark, 
 ;s, and the I 
 
 ^articularljl 
 the wordi 
 deep ai 
 
 as ivell ai 
 leep — beind 
 ig couutr]f,| 
 3 deep. 
 
 mpanj, yoil 
 
 hiiiii in the 
 
 next above] 
 
 |Iy formin; 
 
 re on the I 
 
 into four 
 
 right and 
 
 rotit rank, 
 
 rank, fit 
 
 t rank to 
 
 s— inarch 
 
 companj 
 
 It and left 
 right and 
 
 fcs at lea<t 
 
 It strong ] 
 be divi* 
 to have I 
 
 le told off 
 
 Pang it 
 
 56 
 
 Lcmotde ** Fnrmez tieHxmngs^" servira de Donhht let 
 
 cautious " jy«n74£,' Ics tilfs qui flalfnt lilc'sue I ilt». .i. * 
 gauche so |jlacerout a Ii'uis ^jiaces daos Icspn;- 
 inicr ct sicoud ianj,s, el Ic j»€Cofc.(l rau^ verera - , 
 
 vers le iVoot. 
 il o«l prutiquo' tres commun^meat et avec 
 
 jraisottde faire marcher un iiataiilou ^/.irijjatre, 
 warliciili remrnt daiis !es clitiiuus clioio* 1 1 ies . 
 d ill <8. Aox iiiols '* llaUey I runty'' Ic corj.s 
 
 Iforine coniiue I'i diSMis. 
 
 FOIIMATION I)G LA COMPAGNIE. 
 
 La formation dv ia C(»inpa^nio, conuiie celle 
 Idu liataiilon scrii .j urax o'c ItuuUurs • uinl niioux . cp ?'• ^\ 
 calcul «^ pour la itaUiie du pay^, n oMir Ics- 
 Inio'ivt'incnts vif», quo I ordre t;e lH'i.s do nauie»ir, .^ -■' , *.^ 
 
 ,\yM\\ v.nc Us'e cAacte do la Coii!p;ii;uic pur 
 jrari|j, ile tnille, \o\\h c»>nnuotii*erfZ par plater Ic 
 jpliis pelii honnno au cenltc, colui qui osi le pli s Taille, 
 hielit aprcs le j. aioiei:, .. s;i j^auclu, ie troijiicniC 
 la ta itroitc du pic.oier, et aiiisi do Nuito, justjo a ' 
 Ice (lite lo.>i pioN ^-riuul.s houiui- s suicni a i.i liVw.le 
 Ici . lii Jiauflie ilu ;aii;;. Alois vous n'..!trtz ce 
 Iratio ei] ;^:<alrc divisiucs, (ioat \:\ prethicre cL ia 
 \quturicm(f 401' n\er owl /e iniihur rung v\ Its s?- 
 umdeci ti'i.hicnte^ ic atrma,' ru;^, ( riloiiiitz ii 
 iccux du premier raii^ de uia ciier irn j»:.s t.\\. 
 »v.iiil, de fairc uoe a ^aucl;t\ cl nue d dioilc* vers 
 ^c cenlrc, " March*':.,'' lor.*.qjM<» «e rn,coiUicut 
 lu cenlic; vols tM(U);ir.Ci ez, *' J^tUttu i lunt^'* 
 ;l ia I ompa^n'e esi i(iriu. c, Ics hoiiistu's liu pre- 
 liter rang connoiit-at leurs JUMreiiics, ft cenx . 
 Mu iieriiier rang coniK.itrtMil cms chols t e hlc, 
 :l cjiaciin a'lra counoi.vs'iucc de soi deux ciuia- 
 radcsa droiteet ■^ i^auche. 
 
 ( h que Compagivfi ost dlvisee en sous divi* 
 lion de ta droite, ct sous divi>ioii i c la gaiichc ; 
 'haqne soos-division en s. clioi.i* de riioitc, ct firi!t*ii.o>i 
 lerlions de gaiichi;; chiMpie stjctiun aivu an *'"" ^'"'*- 
 iioins qjiitrc fi(e» H U toiiipij^nic e&l trcjp 
 Foible ^jotir avoir qualie s«!cttor.s, cil- e»i fluru 
 Irois, <| li devront ctre do cii'.q files. La Coia- 
 I'l'gnie s-Jra au8») divi.s.'e eu hloi de afcitc, et 
 'lle.4 deganche, «iiLiM-nHt:vemeiU. 
 
 De/a'l de 
 
 P'T.,'n'.e, 
 
 
J; 
 
 m I 
 
 if: 
 
 iM- 
 
 > ;) 
 
 • . 57 
 
 c 
 
 Distance of In close fites each man when in his I rue position i 
 Jilts, under arm^, iihoiiidored, and in rank, inustjmi 
 feel with his elbow the touch of hin nui^hhi/ur, 
 ivilh whom be drifise.v, ut^r in any silualion of 
 movement in front, must hc^ ever relinquish 
 such touch, which is the principal direction for | 
 the preservation of his order. 
 '' ' , 
 
 In open files — ihe files are to be two ffcl| 
 * asunder, they m:jy b ; extended frwm rit;ht, lelt 
 
 1 ' or centre, accordu»g to circunjslaices. 
 
 Open order. Is when the ranks are two paces a«under. 
 
 Clttse order, U when they are one pace asundrr ; when (be 
 
 body is halted and to fire, Ihey are slill cloiier 
 
 ^^>( -y-', locked up. 
 
 Close ranks — is the constant and habituall 
 order, at which troops are at all times formd| 
 and moved. 
 
 Opeu order— is fur parnde and show, and Ml 
 used also for the inspection of 'ahwh and accoM 
 tie men Is. 
 
 Counter* 
 tnarrh by 
 files. 
 
 The counlei march hy fi'es is < f two kindii; 
 either -uccfg^-ve (ihc division htiii.; halied) \m 
 each file wheeling suci* sslve!> on ifs i;rotjiul, ail 
 it conies to ils turn, or pr^^rtxs^i'c (ihe ilivisionl 
 beiiio^ in motion) by eaeh file whetlir.i;' wl en iti 
 comes up to the pcii t at which the Icuiipi; fi'<j 
 is wheeled — In the cV«:(<'**7rf counlermarch, thfl 
 divi^i<>n must siiift its ground to a Hank, a spacel 
 at least equal to its front. 
 
 In Ihe pro^r<'>'»/iT, it will perform Ih's oper»| 
 tion of the countermarch on ill original <^iuuQ(i| 
 
 In the countermarch of all div'sions by filcsl 
 the facn-s are made ./r»;/i the flank, Ibeu tli(| 
 pi rot, lo the one which is to become such. 
 
._« 
 
 58 
 
 '-I 
 
 Chaqiic homiiic dans sa vraie pfl«iiiion, Ics files Disfantfs 
 st'irdcs, 'I Irs amies pork'cs, rl rii rang, ton- tics I'Ues. 
 rlii'ia rrrs It^jfcTcmonl sou voisin snr qui il s'ali- 
 [itu-, ot iK'tlovroilen aiiciinc ircasidn ahaiidon- 
 iK'i rtl uUitchciucnt, qui osl le iirinci|>alc guide ' 
 pour cuiiservrr !>(in ordre. • • 
 
 • Imi Hies oavcilcs, les files sont a deiiv picds 
 dedislance, tm pent les etcndre a la droitc, a la^ * - 
 
 gauclir, ou dn cenlre, selou les circunstances, 
 
 Lt'S rnngs sont a deux pas de distance I'un dc Ordreou~ 
 I Tan ire. ««»■'. 
 
 Qtiuid lis n'oni qii'un pas de separation, ct Ordrtserre. 
 and Ia troupe fait hake 
 sont encore plus serres, 
 
 I quaiid M troupe fait hake pour tirer, Ics rangs 
 ill 
 
 I/Ordre serr6 est done celui qui esi constant 
 I e! liabitMcl, etcehii que Ics. troupes prennent en . 
 tdiiU's los occasions de formations et de mouve- 
 incnls. 
 
 I/Ordre ouvert est pour la parade et 1:^ mon- 
 tre. il eitaus^i usite pour Pinspection des Armes 
 el Accuiilremeuts. 
 
 If. 
 La Contremarche par Jilen^ est de deux manie- Contrcman- 
 res, I'une sjicecsm'P (la division ayant fait halte) chepnrfiies. 
 par la conversion de chaque file sur le terreiivk 
 nic'suie par succession; ou pragressive (la di> 
 vision ctanl en monveincnt) par la conversion _■ ^ 
 dc rhiupie file a mesure qu'elle arrive au point 
 oil la premiere file a fait sa conversion. Dons 
 la conlremarcho successive, la division change- 
 ra son terroin vers le flanc, a au moins unc es- 
 pac9 pgaie ' son front. 
 
 Dans la progressive, reparation dc la contre- 
 marchc sera exc'culec sur son proprc terrein. ' • 
 
 Dnns la contremarclie de toutes divisions/'cr 
 filcit, oil fera face du flanc qui est le pivot ver$ 
 ccUii qui va le deveuir. 
 
 F 2 
 
 I (: 
 
 Wi 
 
 %\- 
 
 
59 
 
 When an open column with tho right in frtnt, 
 18 t<i countermarch on i'.s own j^roiind, the left 
 beiH'x the pivot, it faces to tlu^ r/j;/:/ flank, which 
 wht"i th«' eounteiinuch i« ntmpleled, will then 
 be llio pivot flank wIumc xho, ofFu-er is posted : for 
 as in ihr tirs! uMta ic" Ci" o i cer was posted next 
 to t!ie IcJ! hniiil niiin oi' h » tliviHi')n, so. he in now 
 posted next to the riahl hand man of his divinion, 
 Trhich stands frunfed to its former rear, without 
 its order being inverted. 
 
 1. Hfnrch the company in a flins^le rank, to 
 
 front iind to n-i.- — h^ a iiar.k and obliquely. 
 
 2. Open and close files and intervals by the 
 •ide-step. 
 
 3. Sub-divisions double on the march, and 
 again form tip by obliquing* 
 
 4. Wheel backwards by snh-divisions, march 
 along tho line prckUngiug it, form to the left 
 flank by wheeling up, or to the front by obliquing. 
 
 At close 5. Exercise of the firelock— manual and pla- 
 
 rmnksb^ flies ^oon by ranks and company. 
 
 6. Firings by file», sub-diTisions, and company. 
 
 Marching to In the drill of the platoon, \ihe person instruct 
 
 the front, iiig must always consider it as a company in bat* 
 
 talion, and regulate ail its movements upon (hat 
 
 I . principle ; he will, therefore, l>efore hr puts it in 
 
 motion to front or re ir, indicate which flank is 
 to direct. If the right flink is to lead, he will 
 give the word Ejes — RighU . If the left flank is 
 to lead, he will give the word Eyes-^LeJl, when 
 tbe officer and his covering serjennt (if not 
 ^ready there ) will shift to the left of the front 
 
60 
 
 Q\r<iiid la colonne ouverle, la droile en t^le, • • 
 
 fait I'l conlrtMnart'lie siir stih proprc l*?rreH), la . - 
 fiomrhr einnt le pivot, elle fait fjtce ren Irjlnne 
 droit, <|iH lo(gquc la contiemarche sera ex)»cutre • 
 ilcvieiit U: lliiiic dc pivot, ou Pofficiei'sera postcz 
 wr en prciirer lieu, l*f)fficier ^tait pincc aiFpr^s 
 <le liKMnine dc la gauche de %-\ division, et xe * 
 trcuivo place* aiipres de rhomine de la droHe de 
 na division qui ale front ou ilait son arriere* 
 sans que son oidre »oit renverse. 
 
 I. Faics marcher la €orapa«xnie en un seul 
 ran«; en av^int, en arrierc, par un flanc« et 
 obliquenienf. 
 
 2 Ouvrez et serrca lesfile»et les intervales^ 
 
 par Ic pas de cc)t<5. 
 
 3. Faites doiihlcr Its sous-divisions en raar-- 
 
 flic, el d'doubler an p!\^ oblique. • ^ 
 
 4. Faites faire la 'conversion en ari'^ere par 
 I sous-divisions, marcher en prolon^eant I'ali^ne- 
 jmenl, formez au flanc gauche par conversion^' - 
 
 uu au front par le pas oblique. 
 
 5, L'Exercice du fusil, manim'ent des armes, ^Jf^"^''* 
 let les feux de pelotous par raiigs et par compa- ^.^^^ 
 jgnies. 
 
 6, Les feux par files, par sous- divisions, et 
 Ipar Compagnie. ^ , 
 
 A r^cole du peloton, rinstructeur la regarde- 
 Ira comme une compagnie faisant partie d\in 
 JBataillon en ligne, et iireglera lous ses ilacuve* 
 Imens selon ce principe. C'est pourquoi avant 
 Ide le meltreefimouvement, ilindiquera le flanc 
 |de direction. Si le flanc droit est le guide, il 
 lonsera le mot, " Tete a droite'' Si le flanc 
 Igauchc est le guide, il coramaudera, *' Tele i- 
 :auche" alors Tofficier et son Sergent de serre- 
 le, (s'il n'y est pas dejk) se placeroBt k la ga■^ 
 
 r 3 
 
 La Marche 
 de Front. 
 
 .' ': \.: 
 
 i'h 
 
M 
 
 II 
 
 ^B 
 
 HI 
 
 .'^^^B 
 
 1 
 
 ■-./ 
 
 6t 
 
 rank j the officer, before Iho irord March, ii 
 given, will endeavour to remark some clislinct 
 €)bjett <»n Ihe ground in his own fionl, and per. 
 penJiculnr to the directing flank, thai is, the 
 flank which he is on. * 
 
 Every leader of a body, which is to move di- 
 rectly forward in front, niusi lukecare to conduct 
 it in a line, tntfy perpcvdUuiar toihoLfroni. To 
 march straight on oneobjrct only, wHli oortfxinty 
 and wi'howl wavering, is not to be depcntlcd on; 
 tiio>objecl» will therefore in ^onerui b<i prepared 
 for thedirection of any coiisidorahle boily. But 
 should a le^<!ui*, either in file or in front, have 
 011/7/ o/ie marked point of march uncertained to 
 hun., he will then observe some nearer and inter* 
 medi'ite point in the same line, such as a stone, 
 tuft of grass*, &c. These he will move upon with 
 aficiiracy, and as he approaches tlie nearest of 
 these points, he must, from time to time, choose- 
 fresh oris in the original direction, which^ie will 
 by thi§ means preserve, always havmg two suc\ 
 04N/7/8 to move upon. If no object in the true 
 line can be ascertained, bis own M]uarene»s of 
 person must determine tlie direction of the 
 march. ' 
 
 As the march of every body, cxcf.pt in the case 
 of inclining, is made on lines perpcndictilar to Hi 
 then fronts ea^h individual composing that body 
 must, in his person, be placed and remain//«r/Vr//j( 
 »quure\o the given. liise, otherwise he willnatur* 
 ally and insensibly move in a direclion> perpefi* 
 dicular to his ov>n per«oii,and'thereby open out, | 
 or close in, according to the manner in "trhichhe 
 is turned /rom Ml? /rue point of his march, i#| 
 tb^ distortion of a single man o;« rates in thilj 
 manner, (and all turnings of the head a«> 10 
 distort him,) it may be easily imagined what that 
 of several will occasion, each of whom is march* 
 ing on a different front, and who9Q iinei. of 4^» 
 rcclioa arc croM iii{|[ «a€b (^bcK* 
 
62 
 
 Ihe tlu premier mii!? j. lOffirier avanl de doiiner 
 t mot. " Marche." reiuarqiiera qiu'l(|iic < bj^jt- 
 jur lo lorrcin, qui xera directoincnl |)cr|icDilicu- 
 laire au flaur de direction ou il le trouve. 
 
 Tout chef dc corps, qui marcho direclciTicnl 
 »nav»nl, aura iJ<»in de le condiilrc ei> parcoii- 
 rant iiuc li<;ne vraiment jicrpendieulaire a Si>d 
 Front. On ne saiira avcc cniilMilo parcoinir 
 ine ii£^nc dioitu n'ayant qifiin point de vtic, . 
 t'esJ pourquoi en gc'iuTal dt'ux objcis soul pre- 
 Njr'n. p(Mii* dirijjcr nn corps considerable.*. Main 
 li on ni' lui a iuiliquc qn^iin seiil poinN \c cbef 
 jreinarqnera queiqiie point dan.H la meine ii^ne 
 lei qni soil plnM procho que Ic premier, lei qn'ii> 
 Ue pierre, une elale d'hcrbc, une mottedc lerre,. 
 jun btii.HScn, &;c. Par-cemoyen il pnrcourra hcl: 
 ilignccorrectement, et a ronsiire qu'i! appi-och«- 
 he point le plus prcs* il en cboisira de iciwa en- . 
 iemii de noii^eaux. Si aucuo objel reniarquable 
 ne sc prt'senle dans la veritable ligne, il tachera 
 de conduire la marche par Tequarriture de sa. 
 ptcrsoone* 
 
 ' I 
 
 ■•'^i, 
 
 •)■ ^, 
 
 Conime la niarche de toute troupe, eccceple- 
 quand elle ol>liqne, m dirige sur deM li^^nes p^r*- 
 peadiculaires a sou frmit, chaque iiidividu qui 
 la compose, doit se placer le corps parfaiteraent 
 en ^querre avec la ligne de marche, aulrementr 
 marchant oatirrelfement perpend iculaircinent ^ 
 ax personne, il causera des ouverliires, ou fera ere— 
 ver le Qataillon, selon le cote vera- leqnel ilaura 
 incline son corpsten perdantde vue le vrai poiatt: 
 de la marche. Si la coiitorsion d'un scul bumrae 
 opere do tels efieU (el il ne peut iuurner la tStct 
 saos distorsion du corp») il est ais^ d'inaagnDer 
 
 3uel en sera leT^siiltat si plusieuri nnarcBieafe 
 aiis de fausses positions^ parcourant aur de*. 
 fronts diffi^reuts, dont le» c^uerrei m croiseroot* 
 •)Ltouaac(uit> 
 
63 
 
 n1 
 
 111,:' 
 
 fnieeling In whe^Iinj; cither forxvanl, or brickward, 
 
 fioin a half, from a halt, the r«)nin)an(lL'r rffhe pliil'dn ontic 
 
 caution *' rijfhl, or left — wheel," nw»vf^ out and 
 
 f»I.H*e!»himiitflfon'« pnce in iVoiif of he (<• 'Icc of 
 lil |)li(tuon : diiriiu!; the wheel ho luniN lowanlt 
 his men, Mild ineliiu-9 tnwnrds Ihni Mank V hjch 
 hai been named ax the directin;; or pivot Hank ; 
 he gives the word " h«lt, dress," when hii wheel. 
 in<; man has jiinl completed the required dc<;ree 
 of wheel ; he then saiiarcs his platoon by bi-iii<;inA 
 up (»r throwing back his reverse flank, bill on nu 
 account AuiTtring his pivot to move ; when thii 
 is correctiv dune, he then takes his posi uti the 
 pi vol tiiink. 
 
 Whrriing On the caution, ♦• by snb-divisions — to the 
 forward b}i T\^\\\. wift'el, " the Commander oP the platoon, or 
 anb-dlvhinns company, places himself one pace in fr( ntof the 
 or fia-'i'coin- centre of the r/j^7»/ «'<ib-di vision, at the s.ime time 
 paniesj'.um the men <»n the ri<;ht of the front rank of eaci 
 sub divisioii, or hftlf«ompnny,face to the right, 
 from their divisions. 
 
 
 At the word " march," each sub-division stepg 
 off in wheeling time. The commander of the 
 platoon turning towards the men of the leading— 
 i. e. the right snb-division. and inclining to iti 
 left, (the proper pivot flank) gives the words, 
 ** halt, dress, for both sub-divisions, and instant* 
 ly posts himself on the left, the pivot flank. His 
 covering serjeant, during the wheel, goes round 
 by the rear, and takes post on the pivot flank of 
 the second, or left sub-division; 
 
 It is to be observed as a general rule, that the 
 officer tommanding the company or platoon 
 INVARIABLY takes post with the leading sub- 
 division or section, with the right when the right 
 is in front, and with the left when the left is in 
 front, and during the wheel iucliuts to his post, 
 the proper pivot flank. 
 
 When the 'wheel ii completed, aod~nW^</ar<| 
 
 Poll 
 
 >n nri 
 lonnel 
 Ion a 
 lavantl 
 
 fClOCI< 
 
 Iveii* ll 
 
 iivot,1 
 |e <;uid| 
 
64 '■ . 
 
 Pour fair^io qirirt de coiivonion en nvant on 
 
 Ml arricrc, a|»r<}9 la halte^ le chef de Peloton 
 
 Icmiicrii le m(»t de caution, '* Pelolon^ a dtoite, 
 
 \ott a gaurhc, marrhv,'' cl so plaoem iiit pas cu 
 
 lavant dii ccnlre dcsou peloton { pendant le mou* 
 
 a*mcnt, ii Hti touriie vers Ics liommcs, et se ^iisse 
 
 Ivt'is le (line 4]ui a cW: nonimi' pour scrvir de 
 
 livot; iJ donae le mot halte, aligneinent, quaad 
 
 [e guide a (ini l:i portion du cercle rcquise; a« 
 
 lots il redresse son peloton, faisnnt avancer ou 
 
 reculer son fliincoppo*i6, niHfstI ue lonftVira point 
 
 jue son pivot bouf^e; ayaot fiui de curriger, it 
 
 lie pusle au flunc de pivot* 
 
 Conversion 
 dc la liulte. 
 
 r 
 
 
 p"' 
 
 I. « 
 
 i \ 
 
 i - I'/ 
 
 n 
 
 vl 
 
 Au mot de caution, " Par anus-divMon^ i ConverHen 
 
 iroite, le chef dc Peloton ue place un pas de enavantpar 
 
 rant son centre, ct IMiomme & la droitc du pre* 'f^us division 
 
 jier rang de chaquc sous diTision ou demie "" de7nie. 
 
 joiupagnie, fait un i droite. compagnieu 
 
 Au root " Marche," chaque sons division se 
 lel en niouvement nu pas de conversion. Le 
 chef du Peloton se tournunt vers les hommes de 
 la sous-division droite, et giiitsnnt i sa gauche 
 [le flatic'du Pivot) donne Ie» mots, " HuUc^ alU 
 fnement,'" aux deux sons-di visions,. et uiMara- 
 tner.t so place ii sa {gauche. Son Serpent de serrc* 
 lile pendant la ronver^on, fait le tour en arriere 
 }t se place au flanc de Pivot on dc gaucho dc ia 
 ?conde ou soUi>-divisiun de gauche. 
 
 C'est une ri^4le ginirale que le chef de Pelo- 
 toQ ou de compagnie* tm/anablement se place 
 I la sous-division ou section de front, et pendant 
 la conversion sc transpof le Ik sod poste, le fluuc 
 lu Pivotal 
 
 Quand la coaveraioa est fiuie, et jpaa plututj^ 
 
 Pas redoU" 
 bU, Marche, 
 
i' : 
 
 ;. '■) 
 
 \l 
 
 \f 
 
 /" 
 
 btcktsarris 
 bo /tub'divi- 
 awns frvm 
 Hnt, 
 
 65 . 
 
 \hv. \M\\er% who arc h> conduct Iho pivol fliink of 
 Jw* ^ciMtnd .siih (livi.Hion, or of I he nocoikI or 
 «!*«^r n'cliomi, places llu'iiisclvt h IIicit — llu' <<»ni. 
 n..uidur of llic roin|inny in then on the pivot fl'uik 
 irf Ihr !t'ii(iin^ ncclioit or siih-division, his lovcr. 
 tn<: scijoanl on the necond, nii oflicrr on the third, 
 and.il'lherr he a fourth section, a nerjt'intornon* 
 coiitnti»iii«'ncU olticvr is on the pivul Hank uf 
 that stction. 
 
 Ail ^vhedin^i by fiub-diviiion§, or Recttoni, 
 from Hue into column, or from coUnnn into line, 
 arc performed on the word (j;iven by the oHiccr 
 ^'ho coiumandfl the company, that in,' ivhcn 
 companies singly, or succcKhi^cly no^^liccl, the 
 'woroH of command are not to be repealed by the | 
 leaders uf its divisions. 
 
 When the company from line breaks into cpeiil 
 cohinm of ftnb-divisions or sections, after thel 
 commander of thecomjianv has <;ivon the worn 
 Hall., Dress, for the whole, the officer or serjeanti 
 on tlK *)iv(>ts of the other sub-division or seclioni 
 may he pcruiittcd to correct thedressin*; of their 
 divisions; itiiL in no i';\se in the wheel up into 
 line, whether the company Ih iiclino; 8iii(>;|y oria 
 battalion, musl any officer or serjcnnt attempt 
 to interpose in the dressinj^ of the company, but 
 the officer who commands it. 
 
 When the right is intended tp be in front, at 
 
 BY SUB-Ul VISIONS^ ON THR LEFt| 
 
 BACKWAHo wiiELii, (he con\ inander of the })la> 
 toon moves out briskly, and |>lares hiinstlt'iDl 
 front of the renter ot the right sub-division. 
 The man on the left of the front rank of each I 
 sub-division at the same time faces inwards, tliati 
 is, to the right { at the word Ainrchy the wheel ir| 
 performed as diiected in the foregoing station. 
 
 In wheeling forward, Ihe ranks should lock up 
 close i but in wheelinsi: backward, they maybe 
 mi IDcir usual distance of one i)acc asunder. 
 
 ly heeling ., 
 
 .,^..«,wf the caution, 
 
65 
 
 lr< .';iii<l(M <\i\\ ilolveni con(i«iiro le Pirol «lc l<i ic- 
 roiiiii^ nous diviHion, on (leu Aecoiidci ol, niitrcf 
 jicitidH, HO pliucnt Id. Le cherdu \k Coni\)'.i'^\\\o 
 Chi i\\itfi ui llaiic do Pivot d<; la fteclioii, on jumis* 
 divjtiion de front, loii Serpent dn SL^ncfiic a U 
 soroiid*^. nil odicior a la lroi«i«}m<', el h'II y a 
 unc «j.iilri&t»»o (lection, um Ser>. cnl on has i;!* 
 ficicr est au U-inc de I'ivol de celtc ^'eiiioii. 
 
 Twiilet \en convcrnlonn pjir *oiii divisinm ct 
 nnr ^(<liont, de la ligne on coloiine, on dc en- 
 lonne cii b iluillc ko tont au mot d.; I'oOiiier, 
 chcl 'Is,' la compajjiiie, cVsl-a dir<», iM.stjui* Itsi 
 coin|)a;;iii('.<i AciiieH ou e i mirce !i'm>:i, font aiiHi 
 h conversion, IvsinotunL «i*ronl |)'i« rcp^lc"* par 
 li's ;;iiide(i dcii pariieii (j<ii l.\ coii)|>o9L>nt. 
 
 Qii\iul la comi»agnie en h'llnillc, est rcnipiie 
 eiic'olonnc oiivcMi(Mle soii-i d visioi!4 oil »i;tti.:nfl, 
 ape-* (|'iele chof ile conp!>;;ni(j a <lonn.- K: mot, •, 
 
 fioHr ult)(vemthty pour toim, les OlRriorH on 
 Serj;tiis awx I'ivut.i, poiirroni ctrc j'<:rr.ns de ' 
 
 currij;er rallfjnemcnt de h'nr* divisioi»««. mais 
 (laiit) acctin rav JoiMjtrtlic kp forme en bataiile, 
 »oi* scull', soil comii.ft |i\ilio du balMilloii, les 
 OiHclci!) ne 90 meleron^ (!o rali(;neineiit| muii 
 tc cluif de Ih coinpugnie itcnlotDenl. 
 
 ituand la droite doit ^Ire le front, au mot S>tus.tlfvi>,f'' 
 pr par'Alif, * Sonh tfiriiffiofs, a ^niitkr. en urrihit., du > nanhrg 
 le fhcf (III peloton fe placr vivtMncnl en front dii " A'"M<Ae 
 cti>(re ile la division drt>il(v L'honimc de l:i ''^"'•'■''«. 
 guiche du premier rnn-j; dt'tlnque svus division ' 
 
 e4> lueme lems fail faos inh riei'miuMit, cY*8t a- 
 dire a droite : an m*)', "'' Marthe.'" le inouve- 
 ni( n( est ex'^cule coinme il Oftt dtt, dans la sec- 
 tion ])rec^dcnte. 
 
 Qiiand la conversion se fait en avant, les rangi 
 seront bien emboilrs; mais dans la conversion en 
 arricre its aurunt leur dislance ordinaire d'ua 
 pas. • 
 
 ... vV\' 
 
 ipm\ 
 
67 
 
 ■|MI .1 
 
 i i,!i 
 
 •hservations 
 
 on ii'hrcl>n<* 
 backtvanis. 
 
 By wheeling backward on the pivot fljink from 
 line into coiiinin, altiioii*^l! divisions shonid he 
 uneqiiiii cither iu iUv .same bntttiliuii or in line, 
 yet all their pivot flankn will iiftcr the whiel 
 remain truly dressed ; of course the di«»;inc('s 
 will be Just, the line of marchinjj; ;icc sraUly 
 preserved, ani each' division, by afUrwardi 
 wheeling? up, will exactly occupy i he identical 
 ground it quitted. 
 
 Whereas in wheeling f()rward, even if llic 
 divisions are of equal siron;; lb, the pivoU and 
 distances aflrr the wheel will not be true, hetanse 
 the different siz'S of men, and Ih" lent over or 
 under wheel of any one divisini, will <!iM;;n^e 
 Iheni, which in praclioe will inf I'.libly luippcn. 
 But if the divisions are af ime(|iKil sJnMi^lh, 
 inde|)endent of the pivots nece«s;\nly not cover- 
 ina:. the disl'.rces which thecolMUM) niaichi'sotF 
 at, must be all chanj^ed d irin«^ the march, other- 
 wis(! \vhi"> the column is }o whc I ui)^ and form, 
 stronjij divisions would h.ive to w he(>.l into the 
 spiu'e which the wesiker ones had left, ami vice 
 vcrsu, J he coMsqueuces and confusion thence 
 
 arising' :vre obvious. 
 
 Suppose four divijitins are drawn up in line, 
 tlK'lirsI coiis'stin2[<»f eij»lUeen files, lhf> srcorid of 
 tweUe, the third «)f (ifleen,and the fouilli often 
 fiies, ifthf*««e divisi(*ns are wheelt'd />»rira/v/ to 
 the ri»;ht into open column, Ihey niil be at un- 
 equal distances fi om ench othi-r j for the seco!»il 
 will be thirleen jiaces 6 inches fii^ni tiie firs^ 
 the third will bt;eis;ht pnce« 24 ifuhe;; from, the 
 ticcond, and the fourth will be cicvtu paces from 
 the third, nor in Ibis situation would i! bo prac- 
 ticable to wheel them up into line ; if it should 
 atanytimc hiippen, Ihat uneoual divisions are 
 wheeled forward into oj»en roluum.lhe column 
 is first to march olf, and afterwards the pivots are 
 gradually to be corrected durhi«:the march, pre- 
 paratory to the wheel up into line i to preveut, 
 
68 
 
 Par le moyen de la conTertioii en arri^re lur obiervaUonM 
 leflancdu pivot, de la ligne en coloipne, quoi- mr la coiht 
 que certaiiies divisions soient peut-^tre in^galea, ver»t0n en 
 cependant tons leuri pivots resteront dans ie <^^i^^* 
 vrai ali^nement ; p>r consequent les distance! 
 seront jiistes, ia lifi;ne de marohe ezaclement. 
 teonevet cbaque division, se roetlant en balailley <' 
 sera exaclement sur Ie ierreia <ju'elle aur»> 
 quitti. i :.' , 
 
 •■v »' 
 
 An lieu qu'en faisant la conversion en avanf, 
 m^me si les divisions sont de nonibre rgales, lea 
 pivots et les distances ne seront pas justest \ 
 cause des diffV rentes taiiles des hnnimei, et le 
 moindrement qu*iine division d^passe* ou au 
 contraire s^arrele, avant d'avoir compl^t^ son 
 quart decercle,elle les d^rungera, ce qui dang 
 la pratique arri vera infailliblement I Maisquand 
 vatme les divisions seroteni de force inigal^, 
 independammenl de ce que let pivots nepeu vent 
 se oouvrir, les distances, qui existoient au d£* 
 part dela colomne, seront n^cessairement toutea 
 chiii)j;ecs durant la marche, autrement qiiand la 
 coloinne scmettra enbatttille, lesdivisif>nsfurtei 
 n'aurontque le terrein que Ivs diviaion^ fu ibief . 
 occupoient, et vice verad^ les c«;naii-qi4ences et, 
 la confusion, qui s*ensuivront, seront seasibles* 
 Supposes quatre divisions en bataille, la pre- 
 miere dc dix-buil files, Useconde de douze, U 
 troisi^me de quinze, et la quatri^me de diic files, 
 ti ces divinionsfaisoient la conversion en mvantf 
 pour se inettrc en colomiie ouverte, par la droi- 
 te, el les seront' a distances* in6^les{ car la m* 
 ro'ndeseraa treise pas et' six ponces ^eda pre* 
 mi^rc, la ti'oisi^e sera i huil pas 84 pouce, qp la 
 seconde, et foqttalri^nie aonze pas de h trqi* 
 si^me, et il de ae^a paapraticable de les> OMtt^ro: , 
 enbattaillei B*it arrive que desdivisionain^j^dlef 
 soient mises en colomne ouverte^ la colomAe 
 sera prtelablenient niiseen mafrbei tt^pprist lea 
 pivots seront corrigr^s par degr^ duraol la mar- 
 dte, pour preparer la formatitfik en IMtaillei 
 
 'U' tS: 
 
 \ i| 
 
 
 '' ( 
 
i,f'- ! 
 
 \ 
 
 'd' !, 
 
 t '" ■ 
 
 ..!i,r^ 
 
 !i.'i;i'i ■! 
 
 '■ ii 
 
 ttr -! 
 
 Circuttutan- 
 cea in tcheeU 
 ing. 
 
 69 
 
 lioWteT^, MitYi ifi^oiitvuidik?*, it mvft lie i%- 
 Igarded almuiiit as a 
 
 That all wheels hy eoni|Mii)et or smaller di vimmn 
 £r\3\n bitttadiun or rrne/Cwhenhtiifced) iolo op«n 
 ctifutttii, tflrmild be tmade Bacrwaivd, aid all 
 wheels from open culutnn into line FoRWAa». 
 
 If the 'tfitfsion doca tHtl exOeed sixteen «r 
 cilhleea files, it may readily wheel hock; hut 
 if the '^ilvitton is stronger, an4 iltc {ground 
 1>rOkeii, ^ vitry noeven, it must Fuce ab»mtt 
 wheel, Hnd^httR'/Zuft, Fr§n$, 
 
 In wliMiiiff B<t4?K WARD from tine mto column, 
 whDn the ri^t is to be in front, the wheel is 
 in^de Om the left { and when the K'ftisio be in 
 frOttt, (be wheel is made On the ri{;hL 
 
 In wheelin*; forward, from line into open 
 cdlumn to the right, the proper yivot flank of 
 the trnlunin is the wheeling one. In wheeling 
 backward, tipe TiPojter pivot flank is the standing 
 one, Urid iwiMining fixed, the divisions, how- 
 evtr Utveouatf will always eover on that hand, 
 which will OGt be the cMe if the wheel is mado 
 forward, 
 
 l^n the ')!)i'eonifbren«e 44 the quarter circle, 
 which a division describes in its wheel, is one 
 hdlf mure (ti«lirly) th»n'ii» ftottt, it is necessary 
 thvt in open eoluttln k should, in the time that 
 it titkes 'tb ttmrch pver a 8p<u>e e^al to the ex- 
 ieHt ^fHkfi^nt^ not only coraplele the whael of 
 thfe^<|thiVte/r£i^le,ttttt be enabled to move on at 
 iti jiiti dlitaiMSe fVom'itsprecediag division, and 
 ti^ th -«!«)) that'whichaurceeds it. The wheel 
 nfbit (h0#df6re be quickened, or the step lengt b- 
 erted, (oV fM^ of both applied,) in pr4>|H>rlioa 
 to Oie'getieMl MBrdi* ,,. ^ , , 
 
 % » 
 
 il? 
 
70 
 
 pour pr^venir, qcpondani> de lel« incoDTcnienls, 
 il faut eiiviiiaoer presque coinme, , 
 
 Kbgi«k Gcnbrax.b. 
 
 Que loiitM letconversioDfi ptu eonifMignie* ou 
 par niuindrei divisions, du Bataillon en eok>n»Be, 
 ou de la colomne ep bataille, (^tant de* pied 
 fiernie,) te fsroiit en mrtiirt, el to»lct let gmi« 
 verftiuHs Je la cotumne oaveMe seroDt ftHlet en 
 avani puur w onettre en bataille* 
 
 Si la diTision n^zc^die pas se»e ^ dix huit 
 files, elle pent aif^nient fai re conversion en ar- 
 ri^re ; raais sf la division est plu* forte, et Lb 
 terreia pftb«»teui, ou in^gal, elle fera demi-tour 
 a droi^y fera la eoaversion, ensuiie ttaUe^ Front, 
 
 Dmi* let eoDYenions en nrri^re ie Itgne en 
 colomne, lor^ue iadroite doit elreeo front, on 
 fait la convertroB iur la <;tluchef et qiiand la 
 
 Saiiehe est en front, la conversioB te f%\l sur la 
 roitf*. Dans les conversions en araat, de li{;ne 
 en eolomne onrerte a droitc, le Aane dti ptrot dc 
 la colonniit: est celui qui ^uiiic le mouvemeiit. 
 Dans lacunvertioueuarri^re, le flanc du pivot 
 fsL celtti <|>ui tt« buugc ; lea diviuooA, quoi- 
 qu'iaefp^es qu'ellea soiciit» couvriroiit dc ce 
 cot^, ce qui ne sera pas le cas, si la conversion 
 se f^iit en avauk. 
 
 I 
 
 r il 
 
 I 
 
 Vu que le quairtdecercle d^crit par la divi. 
 ston, est (k |Hu»-pr^s) la inoiti^ de plus que son 
 fl'ont, il pstn^censaire, qu'etant en colomne (»ti* 
 verte, elle piusse dans Ic tenis qu'elle aura pris 
 pour passer uiie espucc t'-gaie a son front, non 
 seulenunit pnrcourir iu quart du cercle, mnis 
 encore cuusorver s:i juste distance de !a div'Hi'M)n 
 qui In precede. CVst poun^uoi, pour dc pas 
 arr^lor celte qui la suit en sucietsion, non seu- 
 lement ^ \>nH sern acct'lere, mais alonge, pen- 
 dant la coBvertioB, en proportion de la m&rdit 
 
 09 
 
 Circotutan" 
 ces a obsetm 
 vtr dans lea 
 convemoHS, 
 
 iil 
 
 V 
 
 Hi 
 
 ■ 5 
 
 
 :"U| 
 
 •if! • 
 
 >i 
 
 { 
 
71 
 
 wl': 
 
 I 
 
 ir 
 
 u*. 
 
 
 J' 
 
 ^ i-^ 
 
 TABLE, 
 
 Shewing what extent of ground a ^iven niinr* 
 ber of filet wifl cover when drawn np in liae, 
 each roan being supposed to occupy a space of 
 S2^ inches. 
 
 fio, of Jilts in a division 
 tqch qecupying 22 incheo 
 
 Files 
 
 Front ofdioisions in ordi~ 
 nary paces of 30 inchet. 
 
 Pares Inches 
 
 
 
 5 will occupy 3 
 
 10 »»'■ I 
 
 12 
 
 14 
 
 15 
 
 16 
 
 18 
 
 80 
 
 SO 
 
 60 
 
 100 
 
 • •••• •«}»•«« 
 
 ..20 
 
 ••••••1 »•••< 
 
 .10 
 
 ••#• •0«»»a 
 
 .24 
 
 10.... 
 
 ...9 
 
 11 ... 
 
 • • • 
 
 • ••••11 ••• • 
 
 .83 
 
 • • • • • 13 • • • • 
 
 ...6 
 
 • •••«- I4««a«< 
 
 .80 
 
 
 
 «9..... 
 
 .la 
 
 • « • • .3o. • • • . 
 
 .80 
 
 70 
 
 .la 
 
 Words of 
 comtnand. 
 
 The CompaJty in open column ofSub-Divhtntia, f* 
 pass a Bridge or Defile hy breaking off Files. 
 
 The platoon is tiiippoRed in ofien column of 
 
 •ub-divisions, with the rijjht in front, marching 
 
 ,> in ordinary time : when (he leading; diviftioii is 
 
 Break off arrived within a f«w pares of the def«h% it 
 
 three filei. rcc«*iv s ffom the in(ilriict(»r of the drillnn order 
 
 to break off a certain number of *-les (»\ipp»i«s 
 
 Three filet, three) The commander of tiie division in. 
 
 vi^ht turn, stantly give* the words. Three files on tfie lefi^ 
 
 right, turn \ the named files immediaieiy turn 
 
 ■to the right, and wheel out in the rear of the 
 
 • three adjoining files The comman<'er of the 
 
 sub division himself rlo<«eM into the flank of the 
 
 part formed. When the second sub-division 
 
 comes to the spot where the first division cob* 
 
 I' 1 
 
 it 
 
72- 
 
 TABLEAU, 
 
 Pom* montr«»r I'^tendtic de» divi«jioiis seloh leiii' 
 iioMib.e (ie fiU'ii, quand elies sont rRn^eex en 
 bntaillc « chiique homine net upaiit, I'un por- 
 taiit lautre, a-pcu-prc's^^jj puuces. 
 
 i 
 
 j\,'omhrr dr fiUs dans nnn ni~ Front ries Divisions en 
 vision, ft rai»nii de ^i-poMoc* pan ordinaire de 30 
 pi)Ui cha4iiie Jiie, pouces, 
 
 FlI.KS Pa* PourES 
 
 5 occiipffront S « 
 
 10 . 
 
 1"2 ^— — 
 
 14 . 
 
 15. 
 16. 
 1^. 
 
 10. 
 
 40. 
 
 60. 
 
 100. 
 
 7. 
 
 ... , i,^j 
 10 
 
 .,. 8. 
 
 10. 
 
 H. 
 
 11. 
 
 1.1. 
 
 2A 
 
 8 
 
 22 
 
 6 
 
 ri. 
 
 ^2'i.. 
 
 2a 
 
 ««. 
 
 70. 
 
 ....10 
 20 
 
 to 
 
 Ln Compnf'TVT en cnJomvp! ouvrfe de F!ous-Dibt< 
 
 shlf'^, ptmsera un }*ont ou un i)efiie. Mofs de 
 
 iepeloton en colomne ouTerP' de S9iiii-divi- <*«>«»'"a"de 
 ?lian^^ li( droi'e en frotil, utaicbrtut ,iii p-is or<H- "*'^'"* 
 nau'O, ia premiere division a qttelqoea pan dii : 
 (! -file, refoit i\>rdre dt IMnslructeur, de dinii. 
 niier ie front (»itpi»o8e7^ de 'roi. tilei* Le Chef 
 de 1a dtviroo inataainieiit (ioum* i»» mot, '• 7roi» 
 ^' fie de la ^ftuche i dioite i " les files nonDrecs 
 to(.( nent a Uroite, et par nne corvrr»i»m suore»- 
 sivi' suivent k * I «•'»•• hies vrjisiies, I^e ch«'f de 
 division se traniportera au fl;inc nnhche de la 
 part ie qui est formre, 4nRnd ia •econd^' divigion 
 tirrive au poiul oU la premiere a diinmue ton 
 
 GS 
 
 Trois fihs 
 de Ic i^aucht 
 a droite. 
 
 ' :m 
 
 i 
 
 ^•\m 
 
73 
 
 Iricted its front i it wilt receive the sain» 
 words of cammand from its awn leader, and 
 will proceed iu like rnAoner. 
 
 Two .files 
 righi turn. 
 
 Sbootd it he required to diminish the front of 
 the column one or two Ales more, the com* 
 raander of the leading division will, as before^ 
 order the desired number of files to turn i oo 
 which those already in the rear will incline to 
 the right so as to cover the files now )>rdered to 
 break off, and which are wheeling out in th« 
 manner alreadjf prescribed^ 
 
 In this movement the files in the rear of the 
 sub-divisions must lock well up, so as not to 
 impede the march of the succeeding division. 
 
 Three Jiles A a ike defile widens, (or tbn instructor of the 
 i9 the front, drill gl^all direct) the commander of the leading 
 sub-division, will order files tu move up to the 
 front, by giving the word^ One, two or three 
 JilcB, tQ the front ; on which the named files 
 turn to their front (tho left) and leugtheninj; 
 their pace, march i»p, file by file, to the front 
 of their sub-division, and immediately resume 
 tkeir ordinary pac*. Those files which are to 
 continue in the rear will oMiq^ie to the left, 
 lengthening also their stepv till they cover, 
 and are closed up to the three files on the left 
 tank of their lub-divisioiu 
 
 I 
 
74 
 
 fronJ, ellererevra do ««« rhcf let mffmwr moCi 
 de coinmaudcineat, et leiex. cutera de la indme 
 Diauiere. 
 
 gauehs 
 tlroite. 
 
 S*il '^st requU de diminuer te front de la co- jy^^j^ ^ ^ 
 loiniiu d'uiie oil de deux files de pluit, le chef de ^^ la gauehs 
 la division de front ordonnera, comm«' atipa- 
 ravantje norabre de files, reqiiis de faire a 
 Sroite : ei ceWtn qui lont drjji en arri^rr, ohli- 
 querqutadroitc pour couvrir lev files qui ont 
 mainienaot eu ordre de rompre, et qui font leur 
 conversion eu succession de la inuniire d^j% 
 prevcrile. 
 
 Dans ce mouveroent lea files qui sont en ur- 
 I here des divisions seront bien emboitt-es, pour 
 ne pas deranj|;er la marcbe de la division qui let 
 
 ■uit. 
 
 4 i " ' ill i 
 
 
 A mesure que le d6fil<^ s'^Iargit, (on que l^ins- 
 tructeur ordonaera, ) le chef de la premiere di* 
 fision eoiiimandera aux files de se former en 
 front, tonnant le mot, une deux ou trois files 
 au/roifl ; alors les files nominees feroni i ^au' 
 che, et allongeaul le pas, se fornieront succestive- 
 ment, au front de Icurs soused ivisiona^ et rcsu* 
 ineront leur pas ordinaire* Les file* qui restent 
 enarriere obPiqueront h la $;auche, allongeant 
 i\\m leur pas, pour couvrir, et serrer lea troi» 
 ik* a la gauche du front de leur dlviuoD» 
 
 Trnis files 
 au front » 
 
 : 1 
 
 i 
 i 
 
 ., ^ ? if W; 
 
 mm 
 
 M 
 
M ><! 
 
 75 
 
 FORMATION OF THE BATTALION, 
 twi. 1. »• !• • II f J Grenadier, 
 
 Each foinpany conaisti of 
 
 trOfficeri, 
 I Seijenn I, • 
 Corporalii, 
 Drummer, . 
 Private*. 
 
 Pcfrtnalion 
 of ti,c bal- 
 talioit. 
 
 When the companicfi join, and (hebaltalioa 
 i§ forinci!, there is to bu no inttM vul between 
 any oi them, grenadier, hj^ht company or 
 other, hilt cv<^ry part ^»f the front of the bit. 
 tahon Hhould bcequullv strong. 
 
 Rarh company which makes a part of the 
 saine litie, and is to act in it, must be formed 
 and arranged in lh« same manner. ' 
 
 «-^j' r The companies will be formed at follow from 
 
 thecnmpa. '''S^^' to left, {jrenadn'i s an (he n};hl; light com- 
 
 niexinbal- pany on th<»lfft. The f»»ur cldoitt Captains are 
 
 taiioiu «n t'^P ri!;ht of the grand divisions; oil^cers 
 
 commanding, compatties or platoonK, are all on 
 
 the right of the fiont rank of their respective 
 
 commands. 
 
 Divisitns, 
 
 •';rl' 
 
 The eight battalion cnntpanles will compote 
 fonr gr-'tnd divisions; eigl t companies or pla< 
 toons sixteen ftub-division^; thirty-two sec* 
 lions, when sufficiently strong to be so divided; 
 otherwise twenty four for the purposeii of mart h. 
 The battalion is also divided into ri<^ht :ind jcft 
 wings. "When the batlnliiin is (<ii a high establish- 
 went. CM-h C'lmpwy will be divided into two 
 
 Elatoons ; when the ten companies are viiih the 
 attalion, they may then, for the fiurposes of 
 iSring or deploying, be divided into five grand 
 divisions from light to left. 
 
 Th« battalion companieg will be numbered 
 
76 
 
 FORMATION DU BATAILLOK* 
 
 Le Batailton poor rordinnireest de <fTi Compa- 
 
 liei, dont une de (Uenndiers, huit Factionaires, 
 
 [t line I >g^re. Chnque eciinpau^nic sera compoi.^e 
 
 'Ol'iciert, SergeoUi Caporaux, Tambuurt iei 
 
 Pactionairen. 
 
 Qtinnd let compagnies s^aisemblent, et que le Fo 
 atnilion est former, il u*^ a point dMDU'rvai1« dubi 
 itre ellei, mail chaque f artio da Bataillou eit 
 ralemeal forL 
 
 rmaHon 
 batctiUan, 
 
 I :. 
 
 Les compairniet fcront form^es comnie fiiit, _ ... . 
 edroilc k jfaiiche,— Lea Grenadieri \ h droite > ComvZniHt 
 
 Compagfnie Upirc ^ la gauche. Let quatre e„ BataiUon 
 lus aiicieni Capitaines iont k la droite dcf 
 jnnden Diviflionf ; les OiBciprs chefi dc com- 
 [i^nieft, <>u de pelotons tierout tons a la droite DivUi9Htk 
 
 letim troupes I 'jpcrlive*. Les huit compa- 
 
 liesdu bataillon, coinpus^ronl quatre grandcs 
 |iTi<ions, huit compa^nies ou pclotons, seize 
 )ii§ (livisions, el treiile deux sections, lorsqite ' 
 
 fon-f le periuet; autrem^ul, viu^t quatre 
 |oiir facilller la maiche. Le bataillou est aussi 
 iviv* cu Aile Droite, et Aiie Gauche, diiaijil 
 
 bataillou est bi^n fort, chaque roinpaofnie sen' 
 
 ^vls*e en deux peloUms, qu»ud lesdix comy.ji- 
 
 lie^Hout avec le biitaillon, oe peut, pour fnci- 
 
 teriesfeux el let dJployemenls, lesdlviser qh 
 
 [iiq graudes divisions, de la droite u la gauche. 
 
 i*l 
 
 Los compagni«9. du bataillon M^rout namercK 
 
f 
 
 f 
 
 If 
 
 
 nNi 
 
 i 
 
 ■ 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 f^ 
 
 Ctmpaniei 
 fgwUistd, 
 
 jmt^C'uQ- 
 
 77 
 
 from ib< ffiRlit to Hit lof^* Ir 9« a. 4 6. A, 
 8( thr iiib-diTigioni wiHbe numbered 1, 2, 
 each { the wctiunt will be numbered 1, 8, 3, 
 of enrh » the Hie* of companicft will aIiu I 
 Dumbered, I, 2, S, 4, &c > the grenadier n 
 I'mhl rompauiei will be numbered sepnrateHi 
 the same manner, and with the addition^ 
 thojie diiliactiom. Theic neyeral appellatit 
 will be prcaerved, whether fcced lu front i 
 rear., 
 
 
 
 The companies ihonid be equalised in pc 
 of numbers at all times when the battalion i 
 formed for tke}d movement \ aid could Hie I 
 talionf of aline aha be equaliaed, tbegi 
 tdvmntvget wfNild Mritt. 
 
 ^M ." 
 
 Wotdi of Comman4 to be 
 BuUalwn lifter UkM 
 
 t. Riji^lil compaAiMk 
 tk Lefl companies 
 S. Righl MBCtions» 
 
 4. Left Section!^ 
 
 5. nigt-hand men of grand 
 
 di villi ons, 
 0. Lefl*hand men of grand 
 
 divisions. 
 T; Right-hnni! men of com- 
 
 i, nnies. 
 %% Right hand men ofsuh- 
 
 di visions, 
 •^ l,( ft-haiid men of siib- 
 
 divisions* 
 10«,Rigbt*hand meo ofiecti- 
 
 given in frytii|l 
 heentoHqf, 
 
 ^houMer^-amul 
 'Order armt 
 Shoulder— arm I 
 Ord^r— annf 
 , {Shoulder— arail 
 Order— «riB» 
 Shoulder— fl/url 
 'Order— flriBi 
 >houlder — arail 
 Order— »i*wi 
 Shoulder— a mil 
 'Order— tfrnii 
 Shoulder — armil 
 0^.|^r -armt 
 houMer— tfTMil 
 'Order— flrmi 
 Shoulder tfrail 
 '0»'df»r— flrwi 
 
78 
 
 ,! f 
 
 (tdedroite k f^&niihe, I. f. S.4. S. 6. n.m, let 
 ^iiiiliviiioiii ferofU 0UBi6rol^et t.%, de cha- • 
 lei \vn sections seront iiumfrotcefi 1 8. S. 4. de 
 Uqiie: lei Mf* dm coinpagnici teroiit auiii 
 umen tern 1« 9* 3 4 &c. les comiinf^aief det 
 
 [reiiUilters, et des diuf^eiirt on Iiiftmieriu L^- 
 kreserootnunicr'iUeiisepar^iiieiitdtt la m^ina 
 
 laui^re, avec TaddiliMn de rei difiinoti«ini. 
 >i difTireati noniii ten nt conterTdv, de qoel 
 
 He que le bulaillon putMe taire face, awit au 
 
 foot luit ^ I'ai riere. 
 Lei coiiiiingnief tferoiii if^nVinfen touleii hi§ Compagniet 
 
 fiiquelc unlniilftn eiil form6 pour Pexofcke, ip,ali^Ui4, 
 •'u (^luit prHticable d'i^aliier Ins bataiiLos 
 
 [uiie ligDc. il en riiuUeroit de tr^igraadf a? an« 
 rei. 
 
 ' ^ 
 
 mmandrmefftt pour virlfier le detail dm dtffi" 
 
 renU's partie»% dans kur dittributiont dant h 
 Uulaillon, 
 
 ,.Con,p.gni..d,oi.c,. {"jP-J^.'rrn: 
 ,.C.n.p.g.i.d.g.uche.(««P«;j:^;--™- 
 
 . c».«:»». j*/«:*<>« / Repose* TO* — armeu 
 
 I. Sections dro.les, | pSrtez vos-amw. 
 
 kSiclioMdegaiiehe. j pSriervos-arndt. 
 p. Honimei de la droitc l^Reposczvo*— <irw<^ 
 
 dcsgrandesdWisioufl, 1 PorteiToa*— armory. 
 |6. Bommes ii la gauche J Reposez vnft^arine^ 
 
 des {;candes divisions, \ Portez voi— ^rtiiM 
 |7 Hummes a la droilej Reposez voa— armf« 
 
 des Compa^nieii, i P^i^tez vat«— «nNtf« 
 |8. Huiuroes i la gauche jRepttses vo»— ^'armv* 
 
 des compagnief, \ Portez voa— arm^t 
 
 19. Honimes a ta droitexReposez yoa— armtf* 
 
 des iiou8«divii(Dni, i {*t>rlez'VMi-«^4mfi«» 
 10 Homines ii la gauche f Reposez tos — amsaf 
 ^fles fyui-di^visw9f| 1 Portez voi—arinM 
 
 ) I 
 
 ■T. :Ki. ..o 
 
 !>.•'- JLi< 
 
IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 {./ 
 
 k 
 
 ^ A% 
 
 
 E 
 
 i/.. 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 1.0 
 
 I.I 
 
 lti|28 |2.5 
 
 IL25 n 1.4 
 
 1.6 
 
 Photographic 
 
 Sdences 
 (Jorporation 
 
 <J 
 
 ■< 
 
 \ 
 
 V 
 
 •SJ 
 
 <^ 
 
 Iv 
 
 
 > 
 
 o^ 
 
 23 WEST MAIN STREET 
 
 WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 
 
 (716) 872-4S03 
 

79 
 
 1 K Left-hiod men of MCti>.f Order— «nN« 
 
 rOBi , \ Shoulder — arm$ 
 
 la Y>:^k» «fi. /Order— tfrmt 
 
 12. Bigtit fillis yhouldcr-an»i 
 
 ,i i-f, fiu. /Order— flrm« 
 
 15. Left files, \Shoulder-flrwi 
 
 14. First^rand division, V 
 
 16. Second g^and division, I Ovder'— >.arm« 
 
 16. Third grand division, TShoulder—ar/wf 
 
 17. Fourth grand division, J. > 
 
 ■ a n:»kt .:««> / Order— .armt ' 
 
 18. Right wing, Isboiilder-nrm. 
 
 M i^ft «:«-. J Order— ttriw* 
 
 M. left wing, Ishoulder-amt 
 
 The officers should also answer to their nu in* 
 bersfortlie opening of a column, and for all 
 their different firings. 
 
 ^oo ranch attention cannot be given io tell* 
 ing the battalion off correctly. 
 
 ryr^w" Banks arc at the distance of one pac«, ei- 
 ^alionat ^*^** ***® third or supernumerary rank, which 
 4ria$e order. <>»• three jIBCCt. 
 
 All the field officers and the adjutant art • 
 mounted. ;> -. ,.', <*'■- -h tmaiir..' 
 
 The commandiar officer iv the 'Oaiy- officer 
 mdvani^ediu front, tor the general pui;poseof 
 exerCife when^the battalion is single ; but in thci 
 march in line, and the firings, his station is ia 
 
 therear* " -\ 
 
 ■ ' ' ' * , , 
 
 The other raoiinted field officeri are diipofed 
 of in the rear of each Wing. 
 
 > )! 
 
 The adjutant's statipn is iii the rear of (he 
 battalion, rather to the left of the cominanding 
 officer. ... 
 
 Oae officer if on the tight of &• iroht fldk bf 
 
80 
 
 leir nura* 
 
 11. Hommet i U droite 
 des sections, 
 
 12. Hommes a la gauche 
 des sections, 
 
 13. Files droites, 
 
 )4. Files gaucties, 
 
 15 Premiere Grande Di 
 
 virion, 
 16. ^econde Grande Di- 
 
 Ttsion, 
 17 Troisieme Grande 
 
 Divisifin 
 
 18. Quati-i^me Graade 
 DiTisi-on^ 
 
 19. Ailedroite, . 
 SD. Ailc gauche. 
 
 fReposez ^os— arm«9i 
 \ PorleSB vos -^armea 
 
 ' Heposez ▼os^-armft 
 Porlez V<»s — armea 
 Re|>osez ■90H-^armet 
 PorJez vntt—'armes 
 Iteposez voB*' armet 
 Poftez <• OS-— arintt 
 Keposez vos— «r»i<f# 
 Portez \L8-^arme» 
 Repos^'Z v»>8 — armea 
 Poriez vos— tf,-m«« 
 Uepo«?ei vos— arihtff 
 Portcz vns ^armes 
 Reposez vin-^amnei 
 Poriez vos - armet 
 Rep<>8«z \ <»•— «frm«« 
 Pol-tez vos -'artnet 
 Reposez "vos-— «rw<?« 
 Portez Tos — armea 
 
 les offici^rs aussi repondronti leiirs Nnme- 
 ros pour rouverturcd*une colomae, at pour leurf 
 diSerents feiMC. 
 
 On np pent fairelrop d'aitenlion ace que le 
 detail de distribution d*un .hatailion soit eiactc- 
 mentfait. ' 
 
 Les rungs seront a iin pas de distance, excep- FormiUion 
 \i le rang surnumdraire, qui sera a 3 pas. du bataiUon 
 
 Tous lesOtfjciers Suu^rieursel I'Adjudanl sent ^" "',*« 
 kcheval. ''"'^' 
 
 Le Chef dii bataiilon est le neiil offirier avan- 
 ce devant le front pourexercer le batailton lors- 
 qn'il est sen! ; mais dans la marche de iigne, et 
 n^feuxi it sera post6 en arrt^re de sou batail- 
 lon. > 
 
 Les antres officiers moot 's lont placet en ar- 
 riere des deux ailes. 
 
 Le poste de PAdjudant eit en arri^re du ba-. 
 taillon, un peu a «;aiiche du CnminftnHaht^ j 
 Vq Officiiir est a la dr6it6 de chaque Pdotott 
 
 H 
 
 
81 
 
 <€aeli company or platoon, and one on the IdH 
 .of ihe battalion I dli these, are covered in the 
 rear rank bj their respective Serjeants 4 andth« 
 •remaining officers and Serjeants are in a third 
 .rank behind their companieA. - 
 
 The folouFS aV« placed between the fourth 
 
 and ^ih battalion cooipanies,- both in the fVoflt 
 
 j-ank, and each covered by a non>comniis«ioDed 
 
 oJBIcer, or •steady man in the rear rank. — One 
 
 -tef^eaat is in the.frontrank betwixt the colours^ 
 
 :he IS covered by a second serjeant in Ihe rear 
 
 r<ank, dnd by a *third in the supernuniera^j 
 
 rank.,— «The«ole business of these three sorjeanti 
 
 i«> when the battalion mov«8 in line, to'advance 
 
 and direct the majdi as ibereafler mentioned. 
 
 !|rhe place of the firat of those scrjeantSt when 
 
 they do move out, is preserved 1>y a named 
 
 •odicer or 4erjeant» who moves up from the 
 
 4uperBunierary rank for thiat purpose. 
 
 Use of the 
 Mhird or 
 supemume- 
 ,rarjf rtmk* 
 
 i 
 
 The third ijrank is at ^ree paces distance wbea 
 hultcd or marrhing in line.«~When marching ia 
 column* it must close up to the distance of the 
 .other ranks* — The essential use of the third 
 rank is, to keep the others closed up te the front 
 vduring the attadt, and to piievent any break lie* 
 j^inning in the rear.; oh this important service 
 too many officers and non*commissiuned officeri 
 «annot be employed . 
 
 The music should be posted in the rear of the 
 )r4fiit centre company in a ^^agle <rank, 'three 
 Itaoeabebind the tbicd mnk. 
 
 '1 
 Tkc ftoneera ^tliould 1m rffsled at theMan 
 •distance in the rear of the third rank of the Ml 
 Anotffe^coBifaagr^iuidiB.aauK^letrMik. 
 
 T3ie drunmiera Qf tbe etglitliattftlion conijpi* 
 •ifiei are aaseoiblcd in tviro division^ six paces 
 Itf^od ihe tiurii r^ok otf Ui«ir -spcoad and 
 
82* 
 
 ou Compagiiie, et uni la ^audie Jti batailloti^ 
 Tons ces Officier» smitcuu verts dans !e second 
 ran^ par ieurs Sergetis . respectifs ; el les ^lulres 
 Officiers el Sergetiii se forineat eu 
 arriere de leurs curapagaies^ 
 
 11 u raug ca 
 
 Les Drapeaux sont placets entre les qnatri^me 
 etcinquieine compagiues, tons ies deux an pre- 
 mier raug et chacuii couverl-par uti "^ergenu ou 
 unsoidat bien dre s:^, aii second rang — un Ser- 
 geut au premier rang entre !es Drapedux ; il t-it 
 cou vert par un second :crgeiU au second ranj^, 
 el par un troisidme au rang suruuaiei'aire.<— >Le 
 seul devoir de ces In/is !<ergens, est, U>r.sq\ie lb 
 balailion niarche en bataille, d^ivancer et diriger 
 la marche comme il sera dit ci-apr^s. La place 
 dn premier de ces si^rgents, quaiid ils s'avanrent 
 burs d\:s rangs, est co^isi^rvc'e par iin Officier 
 ou sergeot qui t'avaace du raa^; surautaeraire 
 pour cette no* 
 
 Le troi9ienie rang 09t 1^ trois pas de distance^ 
 da second, quaiid le bataillou est de pied ferme 
 ou marche en balaille. — Eh cotumne il seta 
 serre a la distance des autred rangs* Le devoir 
 essentiel du troisieme rang est de tenir lee aatref 
 ^^err^sau front duraut rattaqu^, et d'emp^cher 
 que le desordre lie commence au dernier rang { 
 on ne sfauroit employer trop d'officieri et* baa 
 officiers. 
 
 La musique sera post^e en arriere de la eom- 
 pagnie droile du centre, k trots pas en arriere da 
 troisieme rang. 
 
 Les Pionierg seront post^s Si laLmdfkie distance 
 en urncre du troisieme rang delk comjpagnie da 
 
 centre 
 
 i 
 
 Les Tan>liour8 des huit compflgnies dti bataiH- 
 lon, sont assembles en deux divisions, » six pdb 
 .eiti arriere du tcaUjeme rao^ dS: la secuufl^ ei 
 
 H 8 
 
 V - 
 
 i 
 
 'if .*^!^-^-^' 
 
 
 m i 
 
 J;,;| 
 
 ^ 
 
 ■ ■ - i 
 
 ^ 
 
 i\i 
 
83 
 
 . leyenth companies—The grenadier anti light 
 cumpany dnimiuers audi fifert are six pacei 
 bebtod Ihei'r respective companies. 
 
 ifjfficers. In general, officers remain posled with their 
 proper companies ; but commanding otficeri 
 viil occasionatly make such changes as thej 
 ' may find necessary. 
 
 Meplncifi^ Whenever the officers move out of the front 
 
 Mrjtaius. rank, in parude, marching in column^ \vheelinj^ 
 
 in line, or otherwise, their places are taken by 
 
 their serje nt coverers, and preserved until the 
 
 l^fficers again resume them. 
 
 When the line is baited, and especially durhig 
 jthe firings vrhen engaged, the serjeant coyereri 
 fall back into the third rank« and observe their 
 platoon. 
 
 WHEN TBB BATTALIOH TAKU OFBV ORDBB. 
 
 Bear rank At this command the flank men on the ric^ht 
 take open of the rear rank of each company step briwly 
 f/(fer. b^ck one pace to mark the ground on wnich thai 
 
 rank is to halt. 
 
 March, At the word "march" the flank Dreiiers face 
 to^ the front, and the reac rank talis back one 
 . pace, each dressing by the right the instant it 
 arrives on the ground. 
 
 The officers iathe front rank, as also the co» 
 tors, moye out three paces-'-those in the rear,^ 
 together with the radsic, moye through the in- 
 tervals lefi open by the front rank officers, and 
 divi.dc themselves,, viz. the captaios covering 
 rile second file from the right ;. the lieutenants 
 the second file from the lef4 1 and the ensigns^ 
 opposite the centre of their respectiT« compa- 
 iiei.. 
 
 The music form between the colottrs.«nd tilt 
 ^ontcank* 
 
8<i 
 
 nttimt tl deiB th^iireum iaurtint htwn tumbooTt, 
 ilfres, ou corps de chagse, a six pas en arricre 
 de ieurs corapaguics respectives. 
 
 £n general, les Officiers r«M«Mt |pt>«tl^ h h?iH» Offiden, 
 propres compagoies ; inais les chets peuvent 
 Aiir« ^tf ^(Mog^iittOAtft, >s'»ifc 4tt4 t«tMlv«tft trifcUb^^ 
 8»ires. 
 
 . dn^nd les Oifittkrs »c trtmtptrftifrttl ttli pr«ftiier SergenU <f« 
 rang %a parude, mai^thant -eti e^kitHie, fatsMrt rempiace- - 
 conversion cii ligue, ou autreinent, ies Sergens nienU 
 toiK^feirrsprehdronl lem^ places, et biicotiser- 
 nrdtii jusi^u 'k ce qtite les 0{fi<>.iers 1<» reprenMtiL 
 
 Qiiand la ligne^i fait haite, et surtout durant < 
 \i^ f<Mi\ diu coTi^bat, I^j) Sfergens tsotivmeurft se 
 rangcrunt au troisibtire railtg, ts^t oinstTteronl . 
 ieiirs p^loions. • 
 
 QUAND LE BATTAIl,X.Oii[ FRBIiO^ fcVlkl^AiB OOtB%¥. 
 
 A ce mot'leslioiumesilfe flsfnc dd l«tt^tti rtltfg Enarrihr% 
 ge>chaque ceiupagme wwV Mv«inent un |)as,cn f.^^^.^ 
 8rrien3 4)oariuar(iuei le tcrrem Ji^ue <:e ran^oc* * 
 
 cupcr^ . g 
 
 Aiim(]fl/"j!f«rrA«,'^1es'bnthmes^i|^ei^l^ JITarcAe, . 
 aux flatics, foot a droU«,.et le second raiig fait 
 UD,|>as eu arriere,t*iMi el i'autre iiilgAftit a ttlpoUtt .^ 
 aVuislauitqu^il arrive sur lb lerr«itt» 
 
 Les officiers an prIIHIlB? Yanfff.et les dra|YeauK ^ 
 tfVi^mi«er\i)rit't!rdi»|>M^cm(^ d^ flm^iftHriMiM^- 
 raire, et la inusiqtie passeront par les inter vulea ^ 
 tpi«1c« on}iHelVi>att^0ttttH> Tftt^i»A^ )&iiW^^^ "^ 
 
 sa (iiviseroni aivoir, lel»'#iit)itliiititiHni\rriiilt4fk v 
 seconde file de la droite : les lieutenant* la se* 
 tetitfflts ii1« de-la'^ititeh« t ^t '1^ ««K>'t^He^ devao^, . 
 le centre de leurt couipagaie» ri^pMftifli^efe.^ ^-^-.^ . . 
 
 rang., |L». 
 
 ii 
 
 ; I' 
 
 '^r^'^} 
 
 ..■I 
 
 1:.]-' 
 
 ;4iil 
 
 
8& 
 
 The Mrjtaat coTererr move ri|r to th« froif 
 riak, to preserve the iotervaU left by tho of> 
 ficeri. 
 
 The pioBeem fall back io six paces distance 
 behiod'the rear rankp. 
 
 The dviunioarslake the taniQ^distaiica behind 
 their divisions. 
 
 The major moves 4o tlfe right oC the line of< 
 •fficers.-^TIieadjplaDt remains ia the reaf. 
 
 The slaflT p)ace themselves on the vig^hl of (he 
 front rank, of the girenadiers«.viz paymaster,, 
 •uigeon, q^yarter-mastert assistant surgeon. 
 
 The lieutenant colonel, (dismountddh ■ sd« 
 vancesbeforetbe coleurs-two paces. 
 
 The whole being, arrived at their several poiti. 
 •— Halt— Ikess to therigbl — and the battalioi. 
 remains fdrmed in parade, in thto order in whicU 
 ^ey wottid recei ve.a su p^r ior to^cer. 
 
 When th> batlalion' is reviewed ^sniglfi thft-{ 
 dffvimon of driutimers raav be movled up, and 
 formed two deep on each flank of the line'— the 
 
 S^opeers may farm tw^ deep, on the right of the' I 
 rummers of the right— and staff* may f6rm 
 oa the riirht ofsthe wnole :*<^but this -licence ii- 
 •Dover to Xe acted up^ou'whien more than om 
 biattalion isinlino.' ^ 
 
 .vfj[|[fir vac aATTALipjr'aBsvifBS ci^M oavn*. 
 
 niar rank^ The lieuteoant-coloneli, officers, colouct^ftaii^ 
 takecloM sDutic,, facets the rightr 
 •rtUr, < . 
 
 The drummers and piDneerftCrpo Uiie fianki) 
 v^fiice to the centre. ' If !.; 
 
 Tbe setjeantt (ifki^thft froBt nak) Im tf* 
 iKe right. > .^ :., \ 
 
»6 
 
 CerierganU-^ouTreurs, jicplaeeni au premiorr 
 wng pour preserver les iutervalei que les ofti-- 
 •iers auroDt laiMiei* 
 
 Let-pioniersiereiirent )^ tix pa» d^rriere Vt- 
 Mcood rang;. 
 
 Lertambourf'preQiieiit ht^m^iiie dittance d<:r*^ 
 riere leum^diviiiunt* 
 
 Le major fe placei la c|r«it» de la ligne det- 
 officier»— radjjudaiil reste derriere. 
 
 L*^tat-major,. c*est>4-dire, le tr^ferier,.le chT* 
 rargieii, le quartier^mattrevet I'assistant chirur— 
 
 Sien et le chaplain, I'il y en a un,.se placcnt k iar 
 roite des gfeaadiera>au premier r«Dg* r 
 
 Le lieutenant-colbnet, (i pied,) esl avandnt 
 deux pas^evant lei drapeaux. 
 
 ** * 
 
 Le toot ^tant arrive k letics di?«rf potteii 
 ** Halte, ddroUCf^ alienement,** et le bataillon est 
 forme eil parade, dans Vhrdte qpUlprendroU 
 pour recef.oir ua offibier Mip.£rieur« _, 
 
 Quand le batEiillon passe seulen revue, jadU 
 vision de tambours «erafotrm^e^ dfeaxde' h^u* 
 teur mr les deux fl'ancs de la ligjie.— Lev pio* 
 niers seront fbrm^s^i deux d6 hauteur d ladroitUR 
 des tambours de la droit« — et T^tat maXor se 
 formera ii la droite dd loute la^ ligae : mais cette 
 licence n*aura jamais lieu quaodl} j aura, plusv 
 d'un bataill6a en ligne, 
 
 QJJAND LS 9ATAILL0» aBSCKB L*0RB11K 8BR«b'. 
 
 L^' lieutenant colbnelj fes oScrers, drapeaux, s*rr«g^§$> 
 <tat' liiftjor, et mosiqae, fdront Ik droite. nmgi,. 
 
 Les tambours et pioniers»(s'ils«oiiiaiix. flaoe) 
 ftront face au centre. 
 
 Les Sergens (qui le UoaTeni «u premier raiig)> 
 feront i droite*: 
 
 na 
 
 m-\i 
 
 
 4 
 
 .Mm. 
 
 rr 
 
 '^4 
 
 
 \ 
 
 ■) 
 
 I 
 
 I' 
 
i 
 
 BY 
 
 m'rch, Tbte r^T fink Hoam within om^ ^ht^ toad Ititlu, 
 
 The mii»ic marches throN»li Ifi^ <9etitl« iM^ 
 va), aad resume* tUctation in the rear. 
 
 The Serjeants, dniminers, )iionc«Tk, flbe Yfs 
 sume iheir.ulaces, each a» in the original forma- 
 tion dfth^'bf&l1tlH«ti^«1«s6-tyHl{}t. 
 
 The officers moTe throiigti and into Iheir rcg. 
 l»«ttiTe iitvevvat^ atid -eairh 'itiAitldnfal <8rH^c» 
 and places biifiseUpfOp^Hjrfttlilipon "in cto»k 
 order. 
 
 INSPEGTIiON OR RKViBW OF A BATTALIOK 
 OF INFANTRY. 
 
 M 
 
 The Battalion marches to its ground in opea 
 tolnftin of toirfpani'es of tiatlF coni^tmiiTifs :— 
 ittftiirtliet into the ali^ietfrcnit "Hj t^>m(itmte8 » 
 i^rttftin tHoit iit^tr ^wfakcA 0|ren ovder «rs di- 
 rected in tbefofkoatitfti of rh« ^attnliutu 
 
 tn this disposition, and iht 'y^'Ublb ^tei^A to 
 ifee right, the (xeneral is awaited.— Hfc is 1o 'be 
 ret^eived with the cemnliriientl ilue'to \\'^ rtfnlL, 
 asset forth in the re^uiaTion olf mitit4ry h^fiiorkk 
 i— f bte Lieutenant Colonel oli this ocCiltiua it <ta 
 tool' at the heitd of (he coiiMta ; and at bll diiut 
 titneahe is to remain on horseWclu 
 
 A eamp colour i* to1l>e ori?inaUvi)laced 80 or 
 lob paces in Ifrunt ot'die «VnlVe iiHt fne hattali'dti, 
 where the General is supposed to take his station; 
 but afi.|it>ilffh lie mnv cnbaelo quitthatponluoa, 
 still the colour isto oe tbnlidcred iis the'|^6im lo 
 wm^ iifKOiK Md "lo^iuli ml flUHtrntiii Jaud 
 focmatiiNif are rekiive. 
 
ss 
 
 he second ningf Mrre k Ia ditUace d*un pa» ct Marc/ie, 
 fail halte. 
 
 La musique marche par rintervaledu centre, 
 et resume iM>n pusle eu arriere 
 
 Les Serpens, Tambours, Pioniers, &c. resa- 
 ineut Icurs places, chacun coinme dausla for- 
 mation du BaUiUou.«aor.dre serr^. 
 
 Lei officiers patient par les interTales, oi»l 
 leurs intervales retpertiYement, etchaque indU 
 Tidj arrive, et ae place a ton vrai poile, en or*^ 
 dre ierr4. 
 
 IIEVCJ£ DTOSPECTiON DU BATAILION 
 D'lNFANTSRtE. 
 
 Le Bataillon imrebe h ion terrain en celoBoe 
 eoverte de conip^gaies ou derai<conipagniet< |. 
 marche dans Palignement par coropagnies i le 
 forme en ordre serrei et prend Tordre ouvert 
 corame U est preterit, pour la foriDalion du b«* 
 taiilon» 
 
 Ainsi ditpot^, et lb tout aPign^ i droite,' oil 
 attend le ^^n6ral —It tera re9u avec les compli- 
 ments nui appartiennent a aua grade,, comme it 
 est expliqirjf dant le reglement det honneursmi- 
 litairet. Le lieutenant colonel en cette occation 
 est t pied i la t^te det. Drapeaux » en, toutet au- 
 tresoccasiont ilrettera a cbeval. 
 
 Un jallon tera plac^ 80 ou lOQ pas en frontdu 
 centre du batlaillon, c'est U ou on suppose que le- 
 general irase potter ; et nonobatant qu'il pourra,^ 
 I plaisir, changer de station, cependant ce jalloo; 
 est regard^ comrae le point auquel tout leat. 
 ■umnementtet fiormatiuns aoDt relaltfik 
 
 
 I' 'I fi|* } 1 
 
 
 
 ■i 
 
 r 
 
'i^il 
 
 Pirtteni 
 
 mrnu, 
 
 Mear rank 
 tMke chse 
 order'^ 
 mntrch. 
 
 »9 
 
 When the reviewinjc General prcientt Ifiinielf 
 before the centre, and it 60 or OOpareii diiitant, 
 he will be receWed with a general vaiute. The 
 men present arum, and the oflBcers Haiulcj so ii 
 to drop their swordi with the lust motion of |)re> 
 tented arms; the music will play, and ail (he 
 dmms will beat. The colours onl^ salute such 
 persons as from their ihank, and by regulatiuo, 
 are entitled to that honour. 
 
 The men shoulder, and the officeri reco?ef 
 their swordfe with the last motion. 
 
 The General then goes towards the right, 
 the whole remaining perfectly steady without 
 paying any i'arther cumplimeul whii.: he \)i\%Hi 
 Along the frunr of tbe battalion, and withuut 
 facing when h« ^o^ aKmg thv flank and rear. 
 While the General is going round the battalion, 
 the music will play, and the drums beat ) they 
 wMtceMeavtaoh a» thv llenefal hot reluroed 
 t» til* right flank of ttbe boltaliuiK 
 
 While thi General is proce«dinf to plaoe 
 himself in the frtmt, this command wiilb« ^>iv«ii 
 and the Lieutenant-Colonel will then mount oa 
 horseback, in the rear of the centre. 
 
 VARCsrxira PASv iH oasiNAaT TIMS*: 
 
 ) The battalion will break into eolumo of com" 
 tympanies, finiea the right in front. The column' is put 
 on your left in motion, pioneers and^nusicbaving been pre- 
 viouslj ordered to ttoejiead of it. Points will 
 tte^aiicertained by the Ad^rant for thee»uitand 
 soverdjil wheelings of the dtvtsioifs, to thattk«ir 
 righJi flanks in marching past shall he only four 
 pucea distant from t he-camp coknir, where it is 
 mpposed the Geperal placet himielf to rcceife 
 tbe«alufeek i . -.a 
 
 backward 
 tofteel — 
 Htarch. 
 Halt, tlnss* 
 Marc A. 
 
90 
 
 B recoTef 
 
 HVCtfTOm LV «»lf*lt>4t.. i' 
 
 Quand le grn(fral>M pr^senle dcvant \e centra 
 I 50 ou 60 pas de dMlance, il lera refu a?ec ira 
 «alut gitieraL 
 
 Lei noldals pr6ientent lef arroei, et let ufficier« Pi^sent»x 
 ttlueront de I'^p^c^b litsantlei pointet au dernier ^^' armu, 
 temt (III .prtf«enlement dei armef; la muiique 
 juuera, et ton* ie« tarobouri battront. Let dra- 
 \|ieaux ne Mliieut 4)ue lei perfoonei <\m eo vertu 
 de ieurt gradei et du regienienrt ont le droit de, 
 Kcevpir eet hooneur. 
 
 Lei foldatt portent lee armes, et lei officters pontes vm 
 releveiil leuri ep^es au dernier temi, de presenter aimes, 
 k» armee. lU pvendront leirr terns de riionime 
 d'aile, pour la premiere motion, et ponr placer ' 
 
 lours ^p^i k la position do parade, its prendron 1 
 ,le terns 4u<<olonel. 
 
 Alors le geti^ral se tninfporte vet* la droite, 
 le bataUlon demeurant ptrfaiteroent fixe sans 
 /aire aucun •compliment ni aucun mouvement 
 pendant qu*il 4>asfe le long du front, at par let 
 tflanra, le long de! I'arrierc. Tmitfe temt que lei 4 
 general fait le tour du "balaillon, la mutique 
 jouera, et les tanifbourt battront^ ilt ceiseront . ^ 
 aussilotuEjue le general -tera rendu au Aanc droit 
 ^u bataillon. 
 
 Fendant4|iieleg^n^ral«*aTance pour te placer 5^^^^, ^- 
 
 devant le front, ce «oramandement tera donn^ rang» 
 
 4)ar le Colonel, et le Lieutenant Colonel montera Marche, 
 \ cheval e^ arriere du bataillon. 
 
 Jifarch^ Xun Bdiaitlon en terns ordinaire^ pour 
 pa»ser en-eolmme^ la revue ttintpeclion, 
 
 Le BattaiH«A rompra en -«i»lonnet ile com- 
 
 fogfliflt la droite eii<f rook JLa<colonne'Be metien Compagniet 
 
 mouvement, let picmiert«t la -oiusiqueayaat ^te « gauchern 
 
 pr^alableroent ordonn6t i la t^te. L'Adjutant arriere^^^ 
 
 •ura)fix4 detjioioit rfe^ruepoturrexacittude des marche. 
 
 eoniwr^ont oef ^fviflioiif^ de aorte «<i»e Ieurt HuUe^alU 
 
 4aikct AnoiiB^ttdi'ik pattent leg^n<{ral oedoient ^"«me«^ 
 
 i^hU diataooe^deMtiB pat du jallon, 011 U e«t ^a'^<'^« 
 •uppoa6 %ue:kvg«imiie.flafiera^mir MKCviNf 
 le talut. 
 
 I'l, 
 
 'mi 
 
 .1' 
 
i 
 
 Halt^ left, 
 wheel. 
 
 Halty drtsSf 
 march. 
 
 Halt, left, 
 toheel. 
 
 Ifafi, dress, 
 
 March, 
 
 EjfeSf right. 
 
 Rear rank 
 take open 
 •rder. 
 
 — ^ 
 
 9r> 
 
 The leTernl compafiiet wheel Miccessively at 
 the fii'st aogle of the grouad. 
 
 The companies Kuccei^iively make this wheel 
 at the second ancle of the ground, and which 
 brin^ them on me line on whiqh they pas» the 
 General; Fach leader uf a company, vvheiiit 
 h^s advanced six paces ft-om the wheelins^ point, 
 chtm^es ^uickl) by the rearto the ri^^ht fl 'nk of 
 htsconipnny, and as soon as he has placeii him* 
 self on that flank, he will order eyes to be turned 
 to the right. 
 
 The leading company, and each bther sue* 
 msivelyf as it arrives within 5Q paces of the 
 Geiieial, opens its ranks, at which time the 
 officers r.ioye intQ the front of the company, and 
 fh'e leading one is replaced ob the right flank bj 
 his serjeai^t. 
 
 In marching past the reTicwin^ General the 
 Lieutenant Colonel is at the head of the grenadier 
 company, the Major is to be in the rear of the 
 column with the Adjutant a little behind and on 
 his left :<"if there is a second M^jor he is to be 
 « little behind", and on the left.of the Lieutenant* 
 Colonel. The music are in two ranks, six parea 
 before the Lieutenant-Colonel:— The pioneers 
 are in two ranks six paces before the music, 
 having a corporal at their head tolead them. 
 The drummers and flfers are on the left flank of 
 their respective companies. 
 
 The colours are S paces behind the fourth 
 battalion company, covered by their Serjeants.— 
 Staff ofiicers do not n^arch pakt. 
 
 In marching past at open ranks, the serjeant, 
 who is on the right flank of the company, is res> 
 ponsibh for the proper wheeling distance being[ 
 k^pt from the front rank of the company prece- 
 ding him.— The leading officer must invariably 
 
ft 
 
 «n tucces»ion au pr«iiii«p Mijpte du UMineia. 
 
 Bttei awmceMt eB la (vouvtsAie directioak 
 
 J,p,9 Cannpagnittf e^j fuccei»w«nfunt <}Q||v#r8ioi| 
 ^u yecund angle, ce ^iii le* iiuin^pt k U JljS^e qH 
 i|« paAff^nt Ic <?4i\^C}U. C|l!»que chpf de coipapa- 
 rnie, quaiid elle a avanc6 a six pas de ta pointe 
 de couversiou, change vrvec.eut en arriJbre du 
 4an<: droHe de la..c(4mpjigii>e,. et aULViildt qt^'il 
 lera pla«;e giir q? flam;,, jj ^<fmu|an4«i:«>.» .^ue 4<^ 
 jeiLx soieai t»(^rtt^4-i 4ri>m. , 
 
 La Coix^pAgpU gujdf;, t^t toqii (enAutrefi ep T^te i rfr«f 
 fucce^sioii, a me8ure<2uMl5 arrlvent a bO pas du te, 
 Qcaeral, oi|>^Ee ka^ raogs, el les^ oSiciec^ en 
 m^me terns .sGplaeeujt«n I'ruuf dc iacar^piagaiet 
 9t celni quKou^tt^t «sV i-^mpl^e ^^^ iiu 3erg(?iLt 
 aaflanc^roii. 
 
 gauchey 
 
 Halte, alU 
 gnement, 
 Marche, 
 
 HaUe, M 
 gauchCy 
 
 Ham, aU 
 gnement* 
 Marche, 
 
 Enavant,. 
 
 En p9A»»nl Je (f'^Byfiral L9 XieHteni^nt Colonel 
 ^t a la tate dcila Cpwipaguie des gren;uli«rs, I9 ^„y^^„ ^^^ 
 )|lajor sera a ift^MQuedc la t.oloMMe* l*Adju4ant jtangs, 
 im p(;ii (;a.ari'^rt?, «t « #a,gi^u«&hfi ir-^ U y a MH- 
 i0(^oQd Alai<>r vl. sera un |M?ii en arri^re i^t a. gy%i|A 
 chedju iieut(,'i)ant C,ul(AMe^ La niusHiMt: fprineK 
 ra deux raitgM, six jtas en front du Lieutenant 
 ^it|<»nel t-^Le^ f^i^nvDrs/^yaiH im CaponaJ a leur 
 Ute 99r#ai a IN X ^ en ir^ai de !{« «i(|si%ui). L^ft 
 Tafl)i)iMH-«.«t i^'ilr^A «i) ^^mk gait^W de leuft 
 
 Le<i Drapeaux a S pas en arrtdrc d« Iaqi\»(fi4<« 
 me Cum|)agui^ fitctionnane, converts par leqra 
 3erj;ents,— Les Ofllciers de I'Etat Msyor ne pay* 
 feat i>a9 devant le Gfnt fat. 
 
 Hvai hi marche en cohonoe ^ rangs onrerts, le 
 Savf^t, au 4iiAc «i)F4iU4ft U C»B»i>a&ni?K 4ft )e* 
 nM.4«^g»rdef.Mjq»t¥«i4i«UW<5»diii,frw>*idp,<j^, 
 
 .1 
 
 s^ri 
 
 ,.», ..;!" 
 
 v ■■;>;! '.'Mr 
 
 '■ ■■i'iB:i- 
 
 I 
 
 II 
 
 Mm. 
 
 f<> I 
 
■*■* ,%v^ 
 
 * 'A. 
 
 93 ^ 
 
 |>refi«rve his dislance of 3 paces before the right 
 <of the cDinpaay, aod not derange Us march* the 
 rank of officers dre»s to him, eyes are turned a 
 little to the right, and they divide the i;ro:und 
 in order to cover the front afihe company; if 
 there is only one officer with the company, he 
 i« towards the right ofit.—> Supernumerary ser* 
 jean is are 3 paces in the rear of their 'iefVeiai 
 divisions < 
 
 The music begin to play, just after the leading 
 -company has made the second wheel ; they con. 
 tinue to march on, and do not draw up opp<^site 
 the General.— Theyr, as well as the pioneeri, 
 .regulate their march by the head of the column. 
 
 The officers, when they arrive at their proper 
 
 'distance from tbe general, must prepare to salute 
 
 -successively by companies, when within Gpacei 
 
 of him, and recover their swords wh.-^n 10 pacei 
 
 past him, without in the least altering the>rateuf 
 
 inarch, or impeding the front rank of companies. 
 
 The commauding officer, when he has saluted 
 
 at the head of the ballalion, places himself near 
 
 the General, and remains there till the rear has 
 
 marched past. The drummers give a roll earb 
 
 when the officers of his own company salute. 
 
 The officers commanding companies will each 
 successively when he has passed Ihe General by 
 30 paces, close his rear rank, and at this time 
 each individual of the company lesumes the ; out 
 which he held when ihe column was first put in 
 motion. 
 
 ftalty Uft. The several companies wheel successivelj 
 
 wheels haftf wbeu oposile the ground where the left of the 
 
 dress^march regiment stood, their leadmg officers having 
 
 «liit]ted to their left flank when the ranks closed. 
 
 When the leading company is near to where 
 the left of the battalion stood, the whole iialts, 
 music ceases, arms may be supported, and tht 
 j|uick tnarch ouiy instantly commeBce.- 
 
 JlMr rank 
 take cloit — 
 srder. 
 
 BaU, 
 Support 
 
94 
 
 tance de $ pftii cler^nt la rompaf^nie, tit ne d(!> 
 ranirera pa» sa loarchc, le tang de» Offici^rs «'a- ' 
 lii^nent stir lui, les yeux iin peu toiirn''»a druite, 
 ^1 iis diviseront le terrein en «orte quMiscouvri- 
 ron! le fiont de la comptignie : »i il n'y a qu'un 
 OtBcier av^c la compa^nie, il est vers §on flane 
 droit. '-Les Serpent siirniim^'raires sont A 3 pat- 
 derriere ieiir»divisiuns. 
 
 Les musiciens cotnmenceront a jouer aussttSt 
 aprcxque la c<>m|)a«^aie de la t^te aura fait sa 
 secoiide coQver«ion ^ — i^s cuu'inuent laniarche, 
 6l neRC rangent pas vis-S-vis du General— inaia« 
 aiissi bten que les pioiiiers, ils regleront leur. 
 niarche sur celui de la tete de la colonne* 
 
 Les Officjers, quand ils arriyenl a leur propre- 
 distance; ie preparerotil 3i saluer en succession 
 
 I)ar Conipagnies, a 6 pas du General, etrelevent 
 eurs epl^cs ii 10 pas aprei I'avoir pass^, sans le 
 -moindreiucnt changer le terns ni la mesure du 
 pas, ou difirangetle premier railg de leurs com* 
 pagnies.'— Le Chef du^battiallon, qnand il aura- 
 salu6 i la t^e du Battaillon, se place aupres du 
 General ei reMe a;iree4ul jusqii'ii^ce (que la co* 
 loQue ait pass^ . Lei TkmboursTouleroQl quaodl 
 leurs ofiiciers font le si^lut. 
 
 Les chefs de Cpinpagnies, h mesure quMlg au- 
 root successivemenl passe le General de SO pai^ 
 feront serrer leur dernier rang, eta ce moment 
 chaque individu-de la coropagnie resume lepos- 
 tv qu'il occupoit quaud la colonne a etc mise en 
 mouvoniont. 
 
 Les diiTerentes compagnies fcront successite- 
 meut cqnyerHion, quand ils. arriveront y.is-a-vis 
 dn terrein oii etaitja g,aurhe du Kegiment^ leurs 
 oSiciers Commandants ayant deja prit poste a la 
 gauche. 
 
 Quaud In Coropagnie de la t^te est prorhe du 
 point ou etoit placee la gauche du bataiilon, le 
 tout fait Haltt'y la nuisique cessera, les soldals 
 nietlronti*.'/r7it« ■<iM.6r/f», etiU mavcherout au 
 pag redouble, tans musique. 
 
 ^ 
 
 fna-imi^Si. 
 
 x* 
 
 En avani, 
 Serrtz h$ 
 
 Rnnga. 
 A gauehe, 
 
 alignemenU 
 
 Haltet ^ 
 ganche^ 
 Mavche. 
 
 IlaUe\ ali~\ 
 gH*ment» 
 Marche. 
 
 HaUey M 
 gauche mavm 
 che^ HalU, 
 alignemeUty'. 
 Pas redou-^ 
 
 ■ '- « ■ - 'Ji 
 
 #1 
 
 •■M0^ 
 
Si> 
 
 95 
 
 tnk«<^iniv« VAST i« mvtCK rnuk 
 
 Halt, left The coltHSti mak«s three nevtrdl wheeU, ▼is. 
 whefi, »t thfi paint where the left of (bo batlalioD first 
 
 **{''"''*"*♦ iluotit nt the point where the first wheel was 
 futcA; marcA ,^3^1^. a^j ^t i^-^. p^jn^ ^herc the second wheel 
 
 was made, which places it od the line of passing 
 the GeD^rdl. 
 
 J Bdfbt-e the l«aditi|^ eompany htts ihad* Ihe last 
 
 **^ar«». j^^hw5l,Arhila4ijfcarH^d -^Whekilt hascoiriplelMl 
 
 tflilt #h^l th« music begirt tt> play. 
 
 W manfoMng pmttihe Oeneral in quivk time, and 
 i^«lo«e order, officers do not salute or pay 907 
 «amftlinienl, hut are attentive to preserve the 
 |»r«»er iiM»rvalfr betwixt tbeir Gompaaies. — *th/t 
 leading officer ^f each company tb itis to ita right 
 ■by Hs rear in th^ sarajB-raannerasin tbv or4iiiar|]r 
 fUMMTdli, >6 pMetafter thc'laf^^Rhed) , wh ich britu^t 
 Mni«n4h«liiie «Mtb Ifae General, «ad "wheniie 
 Jb««fiasie4 4he "General 80 fMMas be wiU^^aiune 
 km preiper jpiwM flank /" 1 The superauraerarjjr 
 officers and Serjeants «nNM^ in ^^Mutk^ in jecar 
 of the coTnpanies« at one pace from the rear 
 ifimlt, ft«diimcws'8W'diiAaaiietm-fted<Bgeniiat^be 
 vi^tvkmiWer, und ttenfly. 
 
 tlm motinldl «(!ffieert are In tlie tame^ilaeei 
 •s in niBrehinrg pwn m orffinary itme j as alio 
 drummers, pioneers, and music ; whidh lajift will 
 tommence (/laying ^o#t ^Her Ihct have wheeled 
 'itito the Hue of passing, and wiH contimie to 
 march on stt the 'head of the colnmn. 
 
 MynUfi,, 
 
 left 
 
 The several companies SO paces after pasiini; 
 •w.ill'Suc€essi!vek(t#«ss to ^e left the propenr )>rvot 
 tank, ani itha officers wiil sh^ lo that flank. 
 
 liie toom^iaiiiiai soccessivelf iw4ieel iwhen «p- 
 
 JiWifi/fKMt, posite to the ground vfh^e lh!r<left>ortbtR bal-- 
 
Por/Wr- 
 armcfv 
 
 96 
 
 PEVItAjIT «N COLONNE, iv PAS •EDOVBtK'. 
 
 Lacolonnn fait 3 conversidni, la premiere au 
 point ou ^loit la gauche du bataillon : la secon- 
 lie au point ofk la premiere couvcrgion au pas 
 ordinaire avoit eti- faite: et la troisienie au point 
 eit la leconde coiifersion en terns ordinaire avoit 
 et" faite, ce qui la place eu la ligne de passer It 
 General. 
 
 Avant defair* laderniere conversion, la coin- - 
 pa^nie de la t^te, portera fes.armes, Quand elle' 
 a fait Ma -conversion, la musique conimencera ii 
 jouer ; mais-Ies Oflkiers ne salueront pasutiie 
 feront aiicuo compliment. '''> 
 
 Le chef de chaque compagnie cbangera d« - . 
 place a la droite, par derricre le second rao^ 
 cumine dans la niarche au pas ordinaire, a 6 pas- 
 apres la derniere conversion, ce qui le meneeai 
 li;;ue avcc le General, et quand il Mira^pass^ Id 
 Gsneral de 80 pas, il r^sumerason poste au pi- - 
 Tt)t. Les Officiers el Sergents surnumirairetr 
 marcheront en un ran^, enarrierede leurscom- 
 pagnies a la distance d'lin pas, et les officiert ' 
 porteront leurs ^pj^es fermement coutre Tepauk 
 droilei 
 
 LesOffioiers^ cheval, sont poslfs commeen: 
 passant au pas ordinaire ; ainsi que leatambourt' 
 pionierset rausiciens {- ces ■derniers commence* 
 renta juuer aussitdt qu'ilfrauront- et^ placia^ 
 la ligne du passage Levant le IS^neral, et conti- 
 Duerontde marchera la t6te de lacokane. 
 
 Les diffi^rentes compagnies,' apres <aToirpa»> Tctift^ ga» 
 s6 le Gdn^ral de trente pas. s'aligneront ea c'<^> 
 saccession i la gauche qui est le vrai pivot, et 
 lei01ilciers~se mettront i ce flaac. 
 
 - < 1 
 
 Les Compagnies en succession font conversion 
 
 >«s-t-vii du terrreio ou itoit la gauche du baUiU gmci»,haitke 
 
 1^%^ 
 
 mlignement^. 
 
 :Vv*^ , 
 
 
 
 
 
37 
 
 MkU: . When IhHicMl of ihe celuom af promohit io 
 
 the left of the ground on which' it originally 
 feceivod th« General, 4he muik will ceaie, nod 
 the cohimn «^ill her haked in order to lake up the 
 
 March, ordinary march^ for thib purpoae of nMnriflg,oi< 
 fln«HgDenient. * 
 
 Halt, kft whi« tdr the point on the left )ofih» «l»gll^ 
 
 mm dre»9, "*"^* 
 
 fharcA. 
 
 HnU. 
 
 Ijtft wheel 
 into line — 
 march. 
 Halt, drets. 
 
 With car. 
 
 tridger 
 prime and 
 load^ . 
 
 The<^olif rnn prolongs 4hfe alififaenient, till «^ 
 rVved at the point where its head or ri^ght i« to 
 b^ placed— it receives the word halt : pi'voti 
 are instantly corrected, if necessary ; it wheels up 
 .into Ihiei and th^ pioneers and tnusie go totheir 
 peits histoid the centre. 
 
 'V. 
 
 the 'entaiiraadlnf^ offiv^ will 'order it to prime 
 and load with •'Cartridj^, aodwiU proceed with 
 
 Platoon Exercise berequiredt 
 
 The ifvmniandhtj^ oificer, ailiT the linie haS' 
 fiAPtiijBdi iivoa ^ cnutton 'that tlie mannal and 
 plaionn exercise %>HM>i perfomw^i and goes to 
 Ibe Tenr of th^ bittiilionv flie Maj^ advansei ' 
 ^(thefN)nt«f1h6-bittnlhuiv opeaa ranks iint- 
 fixes IHiyoneK't .shoulders srms^r-nidkes tk 
 officers and colours take their post of exerciw 
 4b the Nnr, by liiclnff^ttttlhe'r^fiit; aaarebiiig: 
 tbrotti^^theettverml inlsrtnltmieopiBd hf lb 
 «»r inanti } «Md nviran 8 pncea :b^oiidstbe><is«v 
 rank'Ahey haU,w>tlthen tfwxhawtlie 'wi .d l ^ li fa a t; 
 The mounted.officers, pioneers, music, superna* 
 «i«rar3r WHjemita, -dmnmievt^ *mvt%^ «f»^tttieir 
 
 at cloM orderi;. 
 
\9W 
 
 QAjndk t^ectek eoloniie apprwdie lii riinch^' 
 dti terreiti sur le quel eilenyoitoriginellement . Ualte^^ 
 ftf^ ie (ita^mlt Is mttMque te taini, et la co- 
 Idone fiera haHe, afiH de mareiiOT an pai >ardi< •"^r'^^t 
 ■aire* iurl'aHgement. 
 
 Lorsqu'ao point Mrla'gaacte de l*aKgiM« HmUe^ d 
 neot* . • gauche crili- 
 
 gne^ aligne- 
 > • ■ - ^. ment^marche -^ 
 
 SB FOftMBft Eir LJCMfCi- 
 
 Lacolonne prolooge TalijiCDeinent J|ts^*a la 
 ppinte ou~sa t^te-^loit ^ire plac^e»^^Elle refoit 
 Mmot Hulie^ ie» '^pivots'inftamaieiit corrigt^sg li' 
 o^at ff^cessftire ( '4;He fait la con ver»U>o - en J%oek 
 etia muf^ae t^i let piooiarspreaaeBt leirrs''ji0s» 
 tei derriem le«ir ceaUra 
 
 le bataiUoa iHank forin^ en ordr'e lerrif , le 
 commandant, ordonnera depbarger a cartouche, 
 et alors il pfocMew aux mvuMm9iU^ii9m9nteU' 
 vret. 
 
 gauche y en 
 ligncy mat~ 
 che^ HaHCf 
 atignement 
 
 A CartoU' 
 ches chargiK 
 vox. arm**. 
 
 .1. .'., 
 
 'h\^ 
 
 ■ r . > . 1 • > -J 
 
 Mais si le mmniiikentdes Armit tsiteqvis, ■. 
 
 "Le CpniBiandaHt,apr^rla li|^fdrin€e, donne ' 
 |6 mot pr^paratit ^ue te mantraent Att annes ei^ 
 rexercice du lett> ierbnt extcut^s, et «e met^ 
 derriere le4>alaiUbn. Le Major atance au frorit 
 du batfliiSlon, ouvreles rangfty^ remet les trayo- 
 oettes au f»nrreau ; DblU porter les armeir, met^ 
 le!i<)fiiciers el l^s Drapeaux'^ Itxuts po^tet d*ex« 
 ercice ea arriere, en fkisant faire nn^ a drotte) 
 jDar4:baat ^ar les intervales occupees par les 
 Sei^em^ ^a^4>as derriere leaecobd rang;, ilf* 
 iaat Jwlte^ Jti tec^i vent 4e mot frstnt . Les ' 'Of^ 
 Snien a cbe;ira}, Fionierau Musimie. Seigena svr* 
 AiwnicaHres^v Taiabouraf .Fifves -a lenrs Apitcs ejli ^ 
 •snare, xoaMP^fuaadvJciMilafnjiB n»t ^femrf p 
 
99 
 
 III, 
 
 WARCH op TITB B4TTALI0H IV- LXIfE. 
 
 Qtnrral The March of the battaKon in line, either to 
 
 ti^ntioH$, ff onl or rear, being the naost iraportanl and most 
 
 ' difficult of all movements, every exertion of the 
 
 commanding officer, and every attention of of. 
 
 ficcrs and meu< become pecultaily necessary to 
 
 attain this end. Tho great and iodispemublc 
 
 requisites of this operation are, the direction of 
 
 ^ the march beipg perpendicular to thefront of the 
 
 ' battalion as then standing ^the perfect square* 
 
 ness of the shoulders and body of each indivi* 
 
 dual ) the light touch of the fifes ; the accurate 
 
 equality of cadencej and length of step, given bj 
 
 the advanced serjeaiits; iirhom the battali-on, ia 
 
 every respect, covers, follows, and complief 
 
 with. Iftnese arc not observed, its direction Mviir 
 
 be lost; opening, closing, floating,., will 'take 
 
 place, and disorder will arise, in whatever line 
 
 U makes a part of, at a time when the; remedy 
 
 is so difficult, and perfect order 90 essenliai. 
 
 Mrecting It is- evident therefore that every individual 
 ^rjaanis, should be well prepared for this operation. - But 
 more particularly to ensure itseorrectness, two 
 or more directing Serjeants must be trained ta. 
 this peculiar objt^ct/on whose exactness of ra» 
 dence, step, squarene!^ of body, and precision 
 of movement, depeodance can be had. The 
 ' habitual post of the two directing Serjeants in the 
 battalion is to be in the centre of the battalion, 
 and betwixt the Colours, one of them in the front 
 rank, and one in the rear, that they thereby may 
 be ready to move out when the battalion is to 
 march, one other also covers them in thesiip«r< 
 numerary rank. ^ ^ 
 
 At all timet when tUie battalion is formed in 
 line, and halted, the instant attention of the front 
 directing serJeant is (after being assured that he 
 - himself is perfectljr and squaiwy piaced in the 
 rank) by casting hit eyes down thte centre of 
 ki» bodyj from the jjinction of bit two beeli^ 
 
leo 
 
 lamarehtidti batvin^n en liji^iie en Arant cm 
 efiirricre, ilant fe |ilii« im|U)riaiii cJ le ntira yfthniiin^ 
 difficile de loiHi fe»moirvcinfrtK, to«i8 fe« eff/r*» gene,»lt§ ' 
 du CommandaDl. et tCHile rat»cntion Aeii OBI- *" 
 
 eier* «^t »<»Mal4, detiennent Ucs .» ressiircs pour 
 obteiiir ce but. 11 esit iudi§penfi!\Meni«nt re quia ' 
 danscctte operation,, de diri^er la marche bieti 
 perpendictilairemeni ati froht que le bitrniilon ^ ,' 
 orciipoit { r^quarriture parfaile des ^j>aufes et 
 du corps de rhaouft indivldii r PatloUchemdilt , ^ ,'^ 
 If gerc dei files : Texacle ep:alit<* tf u pas dunik^ , ' 2 
 
 par lesi*'er^enaafanc<hi, que lebatailfon co/uvr* *^ 
 
 en tous sena^etqu'il suit et aut mouveilnents dei» ^ > 
 quels il se conforme,. lonl abaoluraent necessai* 
 res. Si ces partieularit^s ne sont pas obser- 
 t6ef, sadirnriion seM perdue j lc» onverture*,. .^ 
 
 les presMnens, ks flotterueiM aiiront lieu en * ; - 
 
 touie ligne dont elle fera partie, au tein» od lo 
 reiii6d««#t M 4ilBcile at I'ovdrt pariiAl ti cMen* 
 Hal 
 
 t*eit nonrf not ll.«st 6^hSent qm diaque indi- Strgtm A 
 Tidu dort Itre biett pr^par^ poor cette operation, Direciionk 
 Haiijduspm'tietlli^irenient pour assurer aon ex- 
 tetitude, tleu!K Ser^/is directeurt oi»p!us«erotir 
 dresi^s pour edt oiijet, aiin qubPon puiise corafi- 
 teriufleur etaetftod« dftns ta cadence* ie pii* 
 It If prrdiloB des tnoo vemens . le poate hf M- 
 tael oe ceadeiix Sergeos de direction en batati- 
 Ion sera au centre, entre les deux Drapeaux, un 
 au premier rang, et Tautre au deraiec, pour, 
 quails puispent (tre prMs Si ae rangier en front, 
 qaahd le balaillon marcbera, an troisieme Ii6§ 
 CQUtriraau rangsurnumdraire. ' 
 
 Teiite» Vm Ibis mie<le'hiUailiibn «8l Ibrm^^dn 
 lij^ne, etqu'il fait milte, I'dtlentiondti Serpent 
 dirfcteur da pnaniier ma^, ft•ra(ap|)%«•<fo*il•e' 
 lera pbc€ parflUlcfnent et ifuavr^aaent dana lea.^ 
 rapfs) de jetl^r ka yens ickmg d« centre Ae- 
 ion carpai.de la jonction de ses talonsy et pi^cr 
 
 
 W:'t 
 
 ■i I' 
 
 \ n 
 
101 
 
 ftnd by rep«nt«<l IriaU to tnka op nnd nroTon<;i 
 line pcrpcndicniar lo hiniioirnnd to Ihc bnU:ili(iiii( 
 for Ihit purpose he i» by no ineani to b.'pn 
 with loukin;^ out for a di«iant object»bnt if »iirh 
 by chsince doeM present itself in the proi()n;;alion 
 of the line extending from his own person, ht 
 may remark it : he is therefore rather \o ohjcrve 
 and take up any accidental, small point on ih^ 
 ground, within 100 or l5Q,pnce8, iuteinicdiuie 
 ones cannot br v^ anting, nor the ler.en 'I •>( such 
 as he afterwards successively approaches to in 
 his march. 7->ln this inanner he is prepared, under 
 the future correction of the commanding uilicer, 
 to conduct Ihe march. 
 
 WHEN TBC BAfTALTON BALTBD* AND COnRGCTLT 
 
 ■h 
 
 DRKSSCD, IS TO ADVANCE IN LINK* 
 
 ' The c6toim4ndtng offieer hklving previonntjr 
 placed himself 10 or 12 paces behind the exact I 
 UDe of the directing serjcant, will, if such i\t\ 
 tould be depended on, as standing truly perpea- [ 
 dicular to the battalion, and great care mustbt 
 taken to place it so, to mark the line of its pro- 1 
 lohgation, and thereby ascertain the directioD Ib 
 which it should march; but. as such precisiMJ 
 f:annot be relied on, he will from hi» own e^ti 
 readinefis, and having the square of the battalion I 
 before him, make such correction, and obscrvi 
 such object a little to the right or left, as niaj 
 appear to him the true one ;. and in doing thii^ 
 be will not at once look out for a distant object, 
 ^but wi!l hit on it, by prolonging the line from the 
 
 Eerson of the directing serjeant to the front : or 
 e will order the covering serjcant to run out 20 
 paces, and will place him in the line in whiclij 
 jte thinks the battalion ought to adiance<>— The 
 directing Serjeant then take** his direction iilon^l 
 -the Une whicb^ passes from himself betwixt Ihe | 
 heels of Ihe advanced serjeanti, and remarkioj 
 his. object, pretrvcftrdcb line in advancing; 
 
102 
 
 Jffl eisain r^p<^t^t de prolonj;;er nnc ligne par- 
 
 tEodicuiairo a lei epatites el a I ali^^neuienl du 
 ilai^luiii pour Cf faire, il Be'Comineiicera pai 
 par preodrfl un objel eluigiit^, luai* si iin UA so 
 pr senle dans la prulon^<iti(»ii de la ii^iie de da 
 pemoline, H le peut ^einarqiier ; c'esi pi>urqiiui 
 ilubservcra de prvf rencc el proiout^craqiielqtio 
 petit point accidentei tur le terrein, « 100 (»tr 
 IdU past des point! inlermediaii'esneinanqucroiit 
 pus, ni le mojfen de reuutivelter ceux q I'il ap» 
 pruchera en tucceMiou d:in« da inarchc, Da 
 cc'ttu inaniere il sera prepare, »oit» lacorrectioa 
 du Cumtnaudaut, a conduire la inarche, 
 
 J 
 
 fVAND LS BATAILLOTVf BH BAT%ILr.B, RT COIl- 
 HGiTBMENT ALIGNB*, DolT MARCUbiR BM 
 AVANT. 
 
 Le Commandant sVtant p1ac6 a 10 ou 12 pal 
 dciriere la li^ne eiacte du setgent uediicctioii, ; 
 lera .|)lact' si la li;4ne est jnsle, vraitueiit pci'{i«i)«' 
 diculairemeiil an Balaillun, et un aura <^raiid\<ioin ' 
 'de le placer dc inaniere a marquer sa iitr^e de > 
 prulongatiun, el par consfqiient d'assurer ia 
 direction de la marcht i mais connue ''tine peut 
 I'axsurer une telle precision, ii, corrigera, |;ar 
 8oncuiip-d*ceiU na promptitude et a^hnt>^ev:>nt 
 hii IVquerredu bataillou, il obKorvera tel objet 
 un peu a droite on u gauche, qui puurroit lui 
 paroitre ^Ire dans la v r<tabie diiecittNi) etea 
 ce fiiisant il ne cherchera |>*as d'aburd uu objet 
 eloigoe, maiH il ie lri>uvera en proluu>;eaiitIa 
 ligoe de la personne du Serpent dc direction en 
 avanl : o** nieu i| ordonuera au Serpent de ser- 
 refile d'^vancer 20 pas, et de se placer tlans la~ 
 lig'ie, qi.iM croit quele batailloo dev roil par- 
 cuui ir en avan9ant. Le Sergcnt directeur alori 
 preud sa direction le lon^de la li^ncqui passera 
 ae lui ejitre its talons du Ser^eut couvreur qui, 
 avuit availed pourcela; et rendarquaiit sonob-^ 
 Jet,il presorvera cette ligne en avaupaaj^ 
 
 
 ■|l'|.. 
 
 
 Iff 
 
 mm 
 
 ) j?j, 
 
 I 
 
loa 
 
 Tb*tattahom The tmnnMfi^iif oMemr will pf<« lb* c»»|lot, 
 «i7/Mhw/t€c the bati«li«Mi wiU advance, oB which Ibe froti 
 directing Mr\|eaat nM>viet aut^ accurate and eiact 
 pa«et in ordinary time, imd halUi the tvo 
 other torjeanU who were hehiud hiiu mit^« iip 
 Ob eaohside of hia, and an <>Ai«rfr<Kii tho rear 
 Ye|>laoosia the front rank I he leAd4n||; »erj«nnt 
 The cuatre •erjeant in inovinj^ nut marches and 
 hmlti on hiff own obiierved pointu, and the tiao 
 other lorjeanle dreM and square lhen)Mlv«i 
 eiactly by htm.o«lf t-he cumnrniidinic officer i« 
 •atiified toat the centre aerjeanl hat n«i>«ed out 
 in tlie true direction he will acquaint hita 40, if 
 he ihinki he hat swerved to the right or left he 
 will direct him ai brinif up the thoulder on that 
 ' tide the sniHllest degree possible, in order thereby 
 to chauge his direction, and take new points oo 
 growud, to>waf dt the oppotite band. 
 
 MatcK The line of direction bein;; tbut atcertained 
 
 at the word March, the whoU> battalion instant* 
 ly steps off, and without turning the head, eyei 
 are glanced towardt the colours in the fruot 
 rank; the replacing officer betwixt the colours 
 prctervet. during the movements, hit exact dis* 
 taiico of til pacet from the advanced sergeant, 
 and it the guide of the battalion. The ceiitrp 
 tidvanced terjcint isannwerabte for (he directioo, 
 and the equal cadence and length of step; to 
 these objectt he alone attends, while the other 
 two, scrupulously couforniing to hit potitioo, 
 ninintain their parrallelism to thr front i>f (he 
 battalion, and thereby present an .object io 
 whi^h it ought to move iqunre t \'Utj are to allow 
 no other considerations to distract their gttentioa 
 artd will notice and eenform to the dir<>ction of 
 the coramartrder only, and if any smali alieratiua 
 in theirposition 14 ordered, it nmtt be graduaHj 
 imd eoony nradle'. 
 
 It 'Officers in- the ranks can only be c^bterTsnt 
 •f their own perioa<ilejtactoeti(tfmar^, they 
 
104 
 
 Lechefdonneralc mot pr^paruilf, te baiutUon Le batalJUn 
 mareUeraennvaiiit Riirquoi le sergent de direc- mdrchera en 
 tiun avancera 6 pait bieu exacts en tem« ordi« auant. 
 oaire, et fait halto { les deux autre;* •ier^eiitude 
 ferr^fiic 8C placerutu ;'i sea cote*, et unofficier 
 dl rang siirnunieraire remplace an premier raii^ 
 1(> der^eiit directeur. Le sergent du centre aora 
 avaiice et tail haltesurlet points qii'il avoit ob- 
 serves itii-meme, el les deux autres se^eentsse 
 geroiit exHclement alibis sur lui.--— Si ie com- 
 luandant estsatisfait que Ie sergent do centre a 
 prolong^ la Juste perpendiculaire, il lui dira, s'il 
 truuve qu'il a biaistf a la droite ou i la gauche, 
 il lui fera avaucer I'^paule de cc cote ie moindre- 
 inent possible, afin par ce moyeu de changer sa ' 
 
 direction, el lui fera prendre de nonvcaux 
 pointH sur Ie terreiu, vers locoU oppose. « ' 
 
 La ligne dc direction etdnt aiusi assur^e, au mot 
 mnrchcy Ie bataillon se mcten mouvement,et sans 
 tuurner la t^tc, les yeux aohl k-gerement. jet* 
 tes vers les drapeaux au premier rang : Tofficier 
 de roinplacement entre les drapeaux, conserve, 
 durnnt la raarche, son exacte distance desix pas 
 du sergent avanc^, el c'est lui qui guide Ie 
 bataillon. Le sergent avance du centre est 
 responsable pour Ta direction, et Tegalit^ do 
 caiU'ice et de la longueur du pas ; les deux au- 
 treit.se conformant scrupuleusement a sa position, 
 mninticuucnt leur paranelisme au front du ba- 
 taillon, et par ce moyen pr^sentent un objet 
 auquel il devroitprolouger la'perpendiculaire : 
 lis ne se laisseronl pas distraire par d'autres c^n< 
 liderations, el ils auronl une grande attention 
 aux directions du commandant scul, pour lei 
 observer et s'y conformer, et si quelque petit 
 ehangement est ordonne. dans leur poaitioO) il 
 «e fera graduellemeiit et.de sang froid. 
 
 \i Les officieri dadf lesranginepenvent por* 
 terleur atleotion qii*a leur exactitude peraon- 
 aelle dani ia niarchfe, ilf ne sont ^ cettc occativn 
 
 K 
 
 \ 
 
 Mdrche, 
 
 i 
 
(>lr 
 
 CoUmn, 
 
 §0iiiers. 
 
 Sltp* 
 
 >~K 
 
 t ;.?^ 
 
 ;■■■:■.■•.■•;•.■ 105 ■■■--:-:■■••:. 
 
 are then but individuals equally attentive at their 
 •men; they are not to attempt to dress Ibeic 
 companies by looking alon^ or callincr to tbeip, 
 otherwise they will certainly err tneinRelyei, 
 and derange the march t such care belongs to 
 the officers in the rear ; and well trained soidieri 
 themselves know the remedy that is required, 
 and will gradually applj iL 
 
 S. The weight of the colours, and the em- 
 barassment attending them in windy weather, 
 rough ground, &c. make it impossible at an| 
 time to depend on the officer carrying them for 
 airue direciien, or an equal and cadeuced step : 
 but they must always be carried uniformly and 
 . upwrigint, thereby to facilitate the moving and 
 dressing of the line, . 
 
 S. The men are on no account to turn their 
 heads to the colours, but to preserve them, and 
 consequently their shoulders square to the front, 
 and to depend principally on the lij^ht touch of 
 the elbow, together with an occasional glance 
 of the eye, and the accuracy of step for their 
 dressing.-— If heads were permitted to be turued 
 to the centre, the inward shoulder would be 
 brought forward, the win^s would remain be* 
 hind, the files would open, and disorder would 
 arisen endeavouring still to adhere to the centre, 
 and to counteract what would be occasioned by 
 the fault of priociple, and not of the soldier. 
 
 4. Inattention, or inequality of step, will 
 produce a waving in the march of the battalion) 
 out the communication of this may often be 
 stopped, by the eter lions of the major and ad< 
 jutant, who seeing where and why it originates, 
 will immediately apprize the companies m fault, 
 and coolly caution the others that are well in 
 tiheir true hue not to participate of the error.H 
 A flank or the battalion may at first sight appear 
 CO be behind^ when the fault really arifei fren 
 
 
r' i i. 
 
 \ 
 
 106 
 
 que def individu»^galenient oblia;tf§ ^ rattention 
 comraeleurisoldats; ilsse'garderoatbiende voik 
 loir atiguer leurs compasntes, ei jetter les yeux 
 le loog dti rang, ou de le» appeller, autrement 
 its te troinperont eux-m^mes, el d^rangeront la 
 niafche i ces soin» apparliennent^ aux officiert 
 de serrefile ; et les soidats bien dresses safcnt 
 le remede, et en feront usage graduellemeni. ;. 
 
 2. Le poids des drapeaax, et rincoiiT^nient OYapcaux, 
 i|ui les accoropagnent quand it Teote fortf, ou 
 que Iq terrein est raboteiix, &c. rend impossible > , 
 de compter snr Pofficier qui les porte, pour trou- ^ ;,/' 
 ver une vraie direction, ou pour un pas ^gal et "'' /^. 
 eadenc6 : cependant ils seront toiyours port^s 
 uniform^ment et droits, afin de faliciter lei moa* 
 Tements 6t Palignement du bataillon* 
 
 S. Les soldat» ne toorneront pat la tite Ters Soj^itt. 
 tes drapeauz, mais Icf pr^serveront au fronti et 
 eons^quemment ledrs ^paules quarrement effa« 
 eies, et doivent d^pendre principalemeoi siir 
 Fattouchementll^^erd'eseoudes, et de.tems en 
 terns d*un clin-doeil, et de Texactitude da pas 
 pour teur alignenient. — S'il ^toit permis de tour*' 
 ner les tetes Ters le centre, T^paule intirieure 
 leroit airancie, les ailes resteroient en arrib'e, les 
 files s'ouvriroient, et le deserdre s'ensuivroit par 
 les efforts qu'on ferbit poor adherer au centre, et 
 remedier a un defaut occasionn^ par uo faux- 
 principe,etDoa parlafautedu soldat. '. 
 
 4. LMnattention, ou rin^galit^ du pas,, pro- .-^ p 
 duira unftotlemeDt dansla marche dubatailloui 
 mais le major ou Tadjudaut peuveuten- arr^ter 
 la coinmunicalitsn, qai, lorsqu'ils s'apperfoivent 
 poarquoi il a eu lieu, en parlent tout de suite 
 aux compagnies qui se trou vent en faute, el . * , 
 avertissant, avec sang froid, les autres qui sont 
 liieii et dans la vraie ligne de ne pas se laisser 
 eotrainer par leur erreur— Un flane de batailloft^ 
 pourroiid la premiere vue paroitre €tre. en -^^ 
 
 
 V 
 
 ^'r'tii'ii 
 
 u 
 
 
 I 
 
 •J 
 
 i. 
 
m 
 
 J^lanks. 
 
 ' , 
 
 ' ' 
 
 107 
 
 •m central aiyision bulging out, and thereby pre 
 Tentiyg the flank from being seen. 
 
 5. Whatever alteration is to be made in any 
 part of the battalion, must be made gradually, 
 and not hurried, that the consequent shake it 
 occasions may be as little felt as possible i the 
 mounted officers tmly can point out, and correct 
 such faults . 
 
 6* The flanks on no account are to be kepi 
 back ; much less are they to be advanced before 
 the centre; in either case the distance of files 
 must be lo«t, and the battalion will not be cov- 
 ering its true ground ; the convex or concave 
 shape of the battalion will show this to the com. 
 inander, and the beginning of each inaccuracy it 
 to be studiously corrected by necessary cautionv 
 •-The office^ who is on eacb fta^ of the bat- 
 tali^, beio^ unconj^ned by the ^ks, and not 
 tiibic to b^ mfluei^c^ by any floating ttu^t does 
 arise, miay, by preserviag an acci^rate step, and 
 baying a general att^tion to the cplours and to 
 tna proper Une which the battaHou shofiiid b^ in 
 ^witb respect to the advanced directors, very 
 mucb assist in preserving the flanks in their new 
 positions Wtiicif he observes that a line drawn 
 frov bimself through the centre of the; battalion 
 paMe4 cansiderab^^ before tbe-other flank, be 
 inay conclude himself too much retired ; wheo 
 such line passes behind that flank, he may con< 
 elude himself too much advanced, be w411 there* 
 U^re regubte himself accordingly.«-<p>When the 
 battalion in march is convex, the wings must 
 gain the straight line of the centre, by bringing 
 up the outward shoulder; and it must be strong- 
 ly impressed on the soldier, that in all situalioiu. 
 nf movement, by advancing or keeping back the 
 shoulder :pis.ordered, the most defective dressing; 
 will be gradually and smoothly remedied, where* 
 as s;^d4en jerks and quick al[terations. break thi 
 lljjpo a^d prpduce disorder* ^ 
 
It) 8 
 
 i4^e ; qnand la faute survitrnt cl*une division dir 
 ccnlrevqu.! depasse I'aligQcnieiit, el ^inp^che de 
 voir le flunc. 
 
 5. Uq chaik^emeut a faire daim aiicune- parlie 
 du bataillon sera faite graduelkineQt,;,efc p^Mnt 
 brusquement, afio. que l'ebranlen>ettt que cela 
 occasiunne, soil seiiti auf^tii |)eu q4ie pos|Hble i les 
 oIFiciers a cheval seuls pen vent iiuliquer et cor. 
 i:i<;«rlelle8 failles, ,, . .., ' • . 
 
 6. Lek flancs ne seront pas laisscs en* arricre, jptane^ 
 encore nioins seront-ils avanccs en avant du 
 centre ; d^ris I'un et Pautre cas la d'stance de s 
 
 files sera perdue, et le bataiilun ne couvrira pas ^^ 
 ion vrai terrein; la figure cpnvexe ou cuacave '^^ 
 du bataillon indiqujera la.fauto au coinuiandaAt, 
 qui au.,coi'pi«enice.nieut de cliaque erreur, s'ay- 
 |)liqiiera it^udieuseluent a )a reinedier par les 
 averlisst'ineots, u, ccssaires. — L'officier qi\i sera 
 'itchaqiie flancdu baLaiiion, u'etaat pas <<ene par 
 \es ran^K et neLunl pas afiecte par le fiuttcincnt 
 qui pourruU surveuir, pourra» eo conscryant 
 les pas cxacteipeat et faisaab uiie'atlenlion geu6- 
 ra|eajxd.rapeiux^lja lA.rig.ue (|iie le batailloii 
 
 doit t<BnJIL a regard' 4<)?.^>'^<^'*^U'>'^ av.ances, as- 
 
 ViiUir c.uiuidei-ableqij^jt a garder les flancs dans 
 
 leur tipuveile p(>SLli,QD: .Quajid il remarqueta 
 
 qu'une ligne tiree dp (ul-on^ixie par le centie du 
 
 bataillon passe cunsiderableijieut devant Tautre 
 
 flanc, il couclura qu'il e^i. trop retire.; Q^uand 
 
 U!je telle Hgne passe derriere Ipflaac, it la cod-' 
 
 dura trop avancce, c'est pou.r^uoi il «e reglera 
 
 eu consequence. — Quand le bataillon en marcbe i 
 
 est convexe, les ai!es.{;agneront la ligne. droite 
 
 Ai ceMrte en ata^flittl' l-fpaufc' exWricurej et 
 
 il sera-fortemient grave/dans la m^inotre drt tofc. '^ V^ 
 
 dat, que daiw toute's les sit aattuns de iiiOuvemeiit, 
 
 en avaufant, ott. re(:uhnt i'epa-ule, comrne i! sera 
 
 ord^nne; Nlignenfient le* f»iis d<^f(E[cltieux sera 
 
 gradAielieinentet unindentrem^di^, au {ieu que 
 
 lesbian* 90iidff)n8etJe'»^diangettferisWuj^s roni* 
 
 pentllt Ugti^ et prodttifle^1& #)^rdV«. ■■■'^- ■* 
 
 : ; " k '>■'■. I 
 
 I,: a* i.'.pvS? ■•■; 
 
 Mi 
 
 . n 
 
 |1!1 
 
 -■''■("'iiH'''' 
 
 .'''i- 
 
 hU 
 
 ''v|.|l. 
 
 !«l 
 
 Ki *i 
 
 K8 
 
,. 
 
 Miar rank^ 
 
 109- 
 
 T. The rear rank muA lock up, as tbe correct 
 movement of the battalion depends much on iti 
 close order. 
 
 191' 
 
 Arm9 car-- ^» Supportedarras are allowed ivhen halted or 
 ritd. when in column, as not interfering with its ex- 
 
 actness ; hut in the march in. linei arms should 
 bo carrtcMl shovldkrco* 
 
 Chang* of ^' ^'he commander must K^tmseir attend to 
 Mfection oh ^he correct movement of the directing Berjeant;: 
 thecentrtin if during the first 20 paces he perceives steadi* 
 march, ness ano^no floating in the bnttaUbn, . he liiay be 
 
 assured that the line of march is justly taken i 
 but the contrary will be tbe case if (the parallel 
 IVont •f the battalion being preserved) he sees*. 
 the files^on one flank opening^ and on the other 
 crouding $ he will instantly apptjr the remedy 1^ 
 ordering the directing Serjeant— ** right shouldep 
 forward,'* if the opening is on the^li^ft of the bat- 
 ^ talion^ oc, ** l£ft snouldeir fbrward,'* if the Open- 
 
 ing is^in the right : Atthisoonimand theserj^aot 
 making an almost imperceptible change of his 
 nosition, (by bringing up one shoulder) and of 
 his points and the colonrs in the battali'on.wheii- 
 they have advanced 6' paces to his gr^tnnd con* 
 forming to it, the whole will by degrees gain a 
 new direction.— ^Ev«iy change of direction made 
 in this manner must produce a kind of wheel uf 
 the battalion on its centre, one wing gradually 
 l^iving back, and the other as gradually advan- 
 cing, an attention. which the commander muik 
 take care is observed.. 
 
 The battalion marching in perfect ordef^whea 
 MatL it arrives at its ground receives the word halt) 
 the step which' is then taken is finished, and thci 
 whole halt ;. eyes remain turned towards the cen* 
 tre, the whole remain steadied, and the com* 
 maading officer places himself closf^ to the rear 
 tank, in order to see- whether the battalion is 
 •ufficiBQUy drencdj and io a dirtdion perfectly 
 

 Port d'oT'- 
 nutk 
 
 T. L^ second ran^serabren otrbioit^, I cause 
 qae le mouvement- correct du batailloo depend 
 bieaacou p de oc quUl s«it serr^. 
 
 8 Le» armes au bras-^ sont perini»- q^nand \6 
 l^taillon fait halte, . ou qu'it est eD colonne, 
 parceque cet positionsn'emp^eheat pas son ex^ 
 actitucfc ; mais dans lamarcbe en ligjie, le»«ar« 
 messerant port^es« 
 
 9. Le CommandEknt fera atlention lui-m^me au Changer Im-t 
 mouvement correct dti sergcnt de direction i. . direction au < 
 si durant letpreraiers<S&pas, il voit que te. ba* centre ftant: 
 tailion marche d*un pas a»sure etsans nottcuient^ 'f* marcAe^. 
 W pent se tenjr pour.> certain %ue Ur ligoe de pro* 
 longation de la marcbe a hit bien prise j mais st 
 aucontraireJl yoit quo les^les sur undes flancs 
 »*oiivrent etqueccux.de I'autre se pre^sent, ou 
 w foiilent, (le paralleli»me du front etant garde)" 
 il reined iera instamment, en ordonnant au ser- 
 gent directeur avance% Vepaule droitex.u Tott^ 
 Terture est a Paile gauche ivkyVipaule gauche 
 enavantyfn Pouverture est a la droite : A ce- 
 oommandement te sergent cbangeant sa position ^ 
 presque. imperceptiblemeot,.avaDce une de set'.^ 
 6paales pour prendre de nonveaux point's> aux* 
 quels les^lra^ieaux «e conformeront, et quand ils- ' ^ 
 
 auront fait<6 pas, le tout par, degre gagnera 
 uoe nouvelle diriectioB.-— Chaqueei^angeraent dtt 
 direction ppoduira- n^cessairement une - JSg^re • 
 conversion du bataillon sur son centre, une aile.- 
 reculant graduellement, et rautieavanfftntausti 
 graduelletnent, ct le commandant mettra toute 
 son attention a ce que cea regies aoient observees - 
 d; point en point* - ' 
 
 Le batallloB marchant en- bon ordre^ arrivant 
 •or son terrein refoit le command t meat *'^haUei) ^**^^ i 
 le pas qui «e faisoil; alora- est acbeve, et le^ ba« 
 laillon foit haltCf les yeux restant toutnlfs vera 
 1ft centre, le tout teste bien afferrai, et le com-- 
 roaadantse place pris du dernier rang pour voir 
 si r.alignementdii. oatailloa est bieo ppis,,.e| •&. 
 MdictcliQU eit carfiutomeiii par«Uelfr I cehii. 
 
 ..-I i 
 
 
 
 h-:l :! 
 
 w ■y\:^ \] 
 
 ■ 'I 
 
 li .!' . * •••■4 
 
Dress,. 
 
 Ill 
 
 psiratlol (» llic «>ne it quitted.— >No preparatory 
 cantiun is lo be used before hailing, such cauUuu 
 supposes and eiicuiita^es iucorrectuess, and cre- 
 ates unccrlaiuly; at the viord hall, the whole 
 hall iiriniy. 
 
 When the ballaHoa iaadvancing in line for ani 
 considerable distance, or inovio"; np iu parade'; 
 the music may be allowed at interval^ to pUy 
 for a few seconds only, and the drums in two 
 divisions to roll, but it is the wind instrumentii 
 only which play, the large drum, or any other 
 instrument whatever which marks time by the 
 stroke, is not to be permitted.— When the \ht 
 is retiring, music are never to play. 
 
 VrnEN THE 9A1TALI0N I« TO ORB89. 
 
 It is evident that in the dre9»inc^ of a single 
 battalion after the hail, whatever corr-ectioti ii 
 necessary, must be made by advanring or retiring 
 the flankK, and not by moving the centre, which 
 having been the p,uide in the march, btts justly 
 tfiopped at the point where it has- arrived. 
 
 I. When the commanding officer gives the 
 ■word dress, the company officer on' the left of 
 the colours instantly dresses the* or 8 flies to th« 
 right of the colour in proper parallel direction, 
 the two wings immediately conform to- the centre, 
 Maes front, {uid afterwards receive the word eyes froal. 
 
 > 2 Shrould the comnrKvitdier requir« a more* 
 exact dressing than the above give», he wiH 
 order one colour to' advance one step-, and face to 
 the left, aiso tlte second company officer on Ihe 
 left i%{ the colour to advan^'e one step^ and feci 
 to the left ; then the ikank cotnpany ofiicefs>te 
 advance, and to face t» the cMre ; ibewp'^*' 
 other eompany officer iri^taattiy to cover th^»j 2it 
 their due distances, amA fare to the centre ; tbea 
 tka efScei of tkq bifl wiAg^ t» fa<i« al»«4il', so* at 
 
 ^a*il al 
 ratifaf 
 res suj 
 engen| 
 tailloi 
 
112 
 
 flu'il aypit qultU. Oj^ ne se ser^ira d^aueon pr^pa- 
 ratif avaiit de faire halle^ de tela moti pre |)aralui> 
 res flupposent et encouragept linexaclitude, et 
 en^eadreat rincertitude. Au mot " halle " le ba* 
 taillon revte sux sun terreia d'uue maoiere assurie. 
 
 Quand le bataiilon marche eo bataille, pour 
 une distance, considerable, on ^u'il fait ^uelques 
 mouTements en parade, la musique pourra jouer 
 par iolervales pourquetqueftsecondesseulement, 
 et ies taml»ours endeuxdivisionf rouleront, mail 
 . ce n*est que le» inttrumens i vent qui joueront ;. 
 la grande caisse, et tout instrument qui marque 
 la cadence du Pas, sont absolument d^fenduei. 
 —Quand la ligue se retire, la musique ne jone 
 jamais* j 
 
 tUAND LB BATBILLOn 8*ALIGNtMf 
 
 11 est eTident que pour aligner un bataillon a- 
 prds la halte,le8 correction^ n^cessaires, se feront 
 en avanpant ou retiranlles flancs, et non pas en 
 touchaot au centre, qui ayanl Hi le guide de la 
 marche, sera flx^ au point de son arri¥ee. \ 
 
 1. Quand le commandant donne le mot " a//r AUgntmenU 
 gne7R<?i?f, *\le chef de corapagnie a gauche des ^ 
 
 drapeaux instamraent aligne.Q ou 8 files a la . 
 droitedes drapeaux d^ns une direction parallele,. 
 Ies deux ailesse conferment au centre inconti- 
 nent, et refoivcntfe mot '*^e." ' Fix9, 
 
 2* Si le commandant requiert un alignement 
 plusexacte que ce qui est su&.dit ne donne, il , ~ 
 feraavan^er un drapeau un pas et« faire une a 
 gauthe ; et ordunnera auski a Tofficier de la 
 seconde compagnie a la gauche d'av^ncer ua 
 paset de faire une a gauche r^^ra aux offi- 
 ciers c^es compagnies de flanc d'avancer et de 
 faire face a u centre; alors chaque officier des. 
 autres compagnies decouvriront instamment 
 sfiiu ci SLipk oiiiancfv conirenablei> ej. feroat^ 
 
 i^i 
 
 nm li 
 
 mm 
 
 mm 
 
 t '• 
 
 li.f 
 
 A 
 
113 
 
 Battaliony the whole itand fronted to the eft.-^Then bat. 
 rightfireti, talion, right, dreii, on which the companiei 
 Vf!i^', march up to their retpectiire officer^, who are 
 Afaff, dr«w. favorably posted for halting and dressins^ each 
 hit company ; afler'which, and without Toss of 
 time» toe officers front into line . 
 
 S. It must be observed in this mode of dreii« 
 ing, whether it is taken from the centre, or 
 from a flank, that platoon officers, who origin. 
 aHy face to the left, take distances eqnally to the 
 front of their own platoons from the officer before 
 them ; but such officers. as face to the right mint 
 , ^ -take distances from the officer before them equal 
 
 'to the front of the platoon, which in line is on 
 the right of them.— When circumstances aliow 
 the dressing to begin from the left* an advantage 
 arises, that the officer! do all originally face to 
 thelefU ' 
 
 Change of 
 iirution on 
 theflank 
 kaUed, 
 
 4. A small change of direction may in thJi 
 manner be given to the battalion when halted, 
 either on a flank or central com.panj'— To the 
 Front by advancing and placing the officers— To 
 the Rear by the covering Serjeants in the same 
 manner giving the ground, the inen facing about, 
 lining with the Serjeants ; tlieu fronting i,and the 
 officers jreplacing the serjeaniS. But a flank is 
 never in such case supposed to move above 8& 
 or 30 paces. 
 
 The battalion may also he occasionally dressed 
 in the following correct manner t— One of the 
 colours is advanced som? paces-— An nnder* 
 officer on one flank of the battalion is placed in 
 a determined line — An under*officer on tHe other 
 flank lines himself with the hast placed one^ and 
 the colour— The two centre grand divisions are 
 moved up to the colour, and dressed to each 
 flanlc-'-The wing grand dtvisionsthen move up, 
 and the grenadier and light company in the same 
 BAgfiuer, This dressinjj^ may soon be made if 
 
reniHrquer quo, datts cette fa^on 
 t, qu'etle soil prise du ceutre. ou 
 
 Battalion i 
 droitc alU 
 gnftntntf 
 marche, 
 Halte^ 
 4^ligntiMnt» 
 
 114 
 
 face au centre i alors lea ofiiciers de Paile sauche 
 font irmi lour a droite, dc maniire que ^ tout 
 fcia taO'! a p^auche.— Alors, ** bataillon d droUe 
 ali^nemeuW nui* qitoi ten coimpa^nic^ marclient 
 kitui'i ofScit'rti reMpecLiffl, qui font tdvorabtement 
 post-'s p«»ur faire " huflCy (tUffn^mcnt" chacun 
 Asa coropa^nie ; aprev quoi Ics ufficierssaus per- 
 dr« de terns, fuDt fruaten bataiile. 
 
 8. II faut 
 d'ali;:iN)nient, qu'eiie son pn 
 dun flanc, ies officiers dc pelutons, qui dans i'o- 
 rigine faisorent face a gauche, prenuentdistaiices 
 (fgalemenlcu front de leiirs pelotons de I'oificier v 
 
 derauteuii mais Ies officiers qui font face k « ' 
 
 druite prendront distance de Tpfficicr deyaot ' / ,' 
 
 eux egalcau front du peloton, qui dans la ligne 
 est iiur ieur droite.-o Quand let circohstances ^ 
 
 permettent I'aiignement de commeucer par ia 
 gauche, il^ a Tavantage que tous Ies otficiers 
 dans I'origine, fontface a la ganche. 
 
 4. Un petit changement peiit de cette maniere Changer d« 
 le faire au Bataillon lorsqu'il a fait Halte, soit direction 
 d*iine Compagnie du Flanc ou d'une Coropagnie ^^fun flanc 
 rentrale— Au Front en plafant et avan^ant Ies ''Pf** '*^°*'^ 
 Officiers.— En arriere, en faisant prendre le ter- /*"' **"*• 
 rein yar Ies Sergents de serrefile de la m^me nia<- 
 niere, Ies ioidats faisant derai-tour a droite, 
 s'alijrnant aTec Ies Sei^ents i et faisant front, et 
 iesofficiersrempiafant Ies Serpents. Mas il est 
 cens^ qn'un flanc ne doit jamais dans telcasfaire 
 un roouvenient de plus de SO ou SO pasr 
 
 Le Bataillon pourr^it aussi itre aligns de la 
 maniere correcte qui suit — (Jn Drapeau est a. 
 Tance de quel^ues pas-'Un bas officier snr un dei 
 flancs du Bataillon est place sur une ligne don- 
 n^e.~Un bat officier de Tautre flanc s'aligne 
 avec ce dernier etle drapeau.— Les deux gran- 
 dei Divisions da centre sont avanceet jusqn*att 
 drapeau et align^es sur chaque flanc-— Alors lei 
 grandes di v itioni des ailes avancent et Ies compa- 
 goies det grenadiers et chasseurs de la nadme ma* 
 iuere.~Get alignement peat le faire prompte- 
 
 t 
 
 ;!' V '. .if 
 
 m ^ 
 
 
 ;i 
 
 li 
 
lis 
 
 \ ft 
 
 ione at the ordinary pace, without Hurry, and 
 that the chiefs of divisions aiignc in the prolun^;. 
 ation of the base. 
 
 the battalion 
 vill retire. 
 
 m 
 i 
 
 WHEN THB BATTALION IS' TO RETTBCk 
 
 It is evident that it ou^t to be previously 
 dressed with the same correctness, as when it 
 -was to advance, and the same care in ascertain^ 
 in^ the direction of its march must be taken.— 
 Therefore, before the retreat is to be;^iii, aa 
 officer will have placed hi iniieif 30 paces in ths 
 rear, so as to stand perpendicular to the front 
 directing serjcant, and of course he will be in the 
 line, or nearly 60, of the directing Serjeants. 
 
 At the word, ** the battalion will retire," the 
 directing serjeants^face about. The same centre 
 Serjeant that directs to the front, directs also to 
 the rear $ he moves on in the line of the ad* 
 vauced officer, paces beyond the rear rank and 
 halts; and the other Serjeants are on each side 
 of hint. 
 
 At the word " right-about ffc-<Le,** the whole 
 face ; and the supernumerary ofHcer who replaces 
 the. directing serjeant, moves iip into the leading 
 rank ; a mounted field-officer passes lhrou<;h to 
 the rear, and the directing serjeant in the in* 
 .terim prolongs his Hoe, and takes hit objects 
 betwixt the f^ct of the posted officer,. 
 
 i 
 Immediately after facing about, the word 
 
 *' march" is given, and the whole proceed in 
 
 ihejame manner, and with the same attentions 
 
 as in moving to the front ; the directing serjeant 
 
 oondncting on hi^ points, under the carrcciidn 
 
 of the field-officer who is 10 paces behind the 
 
 Jiattalion. . 
 
 Xultffrontt -.When l^e baltalion is to front it rec'eites the 
 word**halt« froat," and immediately halts aad 
 
 ■Right-about 
 faca. 
 
 March, 
 
116 
 
 nent tu pat ordinaire uuan m preuer, et laoi 
 que lei chefs de diTifioos aligoeot dam la pro- 
 loogaliA) de la baie. 
 
 )»*■ . >j. 
 
 QUAND LB BATAILLOa OOIT SB BBTIRBR. 
 
 II est iTident qa*il doit Hre prialablement 
 ali^ui aussi corrcctement qu'il T^toit avant 
 d'avancer, et ies indines soios pour assurer la " ' 
 
 direction de sa marche seront reqiiis. G'est pour« -, '''' 
 
 quoi; avant que de comraencer la retraite, ua 
 officier se sera plac6 ii 30 pas en arriere, de ma* 
 Aiire li £tre perpendicujaire an sergent directeur 
 su premier rang, et par consequent, il sera aa 
 ligue avec Ies sergents dijrecteurs* 
 
 Au mot, ie bataitlon se retireroj Ies sergents f^« batMitlem 
 directeurs feront demi-tour i droite. !Le mdme ** retlnr^*, 
 lergentdu centre qui dirige la marcbe en avaat, 
 dirige aussi celle eo arriere ; il parcourt la ligne 
 de I'officier avanc^, a 6 pas au-de}4 du second 
 rsng el fait halte; et Ies autres sergeats soot 
 I chaque c6t^ de lui. 
 
 Au mot, *^demi tour i droite** le battailloo Demi tour 4 
 fait face en arrie/e,«t Tofficier surnurairaire qui drmte, 
 rempiace le sergent de direction, se place au 
 raog qui guide ; un officier supferieur a cheval 
 passe derriere et le sergeut dit'ecteur dans ce 
 terns prolonge sa ligne ei prend ses objets eotre 
 Ies pieds de Tofficier poste. 
 
 Imm^diatement apr£s le demi tonr \ droite, MarcU*^ 
 le mot, ** Marched est donn6, et avec Ies m^racs 
 precautions corame en avanpant; le sergeht di- 
 recteur. conduisant Sur ses points sous correction 
 du chef qui est ^ 10 pas derriere le bataiUon. 
 
 ttot 
 
 Quand le bataillon doit faire front, il recoit le n„j. .^j^ 
 D,l, " HaHc, fronts ct immftdiatei»||pt fcit "««««/'^«» 
 
 ta 
 
 !-|i 
 
 
 mmm4 
 
 K 
 
 
 
 
 mi 
 
 i?' 'All 
 
117 
 
 1:1! 
 
 
 finMil*!^ the ferjetott, &c. re§ummg \ht\r pfopn 
 ttatiufii I it if f hen dressed if neceiMurj in ilie 
 tnanner alreadljr prescribed. 
 
 Jttenthnf ^'^ inarcfaia|^ to the rear, the battalion mint 
 turetMng* ^over its proper extent of ground —The rear 
 rank men must avoid closing their files more than 
 tniial, ollierwile tke froni men, who are 4n gene* 
 ral larger, will be crowded in ^their rank.— 
 Music, drums, supernumerary officers, &c. will 
 take care to march with exactness, not to inter* 
 rupt, but rather to assist the battalion.— The 
 battalion is not to lace about, until every thing 
 is prepared for its instant march, and its bait, 
 front, it one command t when retiring tberefyre 
 it never unnecessarily stands faced to ibe rear. 
 
 . COYEIIVG PLATOON SSajBAIfTS. 
 
 -potfttoH of *^® covering serjeant accompanies and assitti 
 thecovering ^^ phitoon officer fti all his movements, and 
 ierjeant, preserves hit place in line, or on the pivot flask 
 in column, wheneTcr the officer's duty requirci 
 him occasionally to quit itt-xlh battaKon he 
 covers in the rear rank. At 0|ien order, he 
 movet into the officer's place in the front raiilc. 
 At close order, he leaves it for tho officer to, 
 take it. In the march in echellon, be it on lh« 
 outward Hank of the front rank. 
 
 Jfic»7amim 
 
 When the battalion b/eaks into column to the 
 right or left, the sefjeaut falls back two paceit 
 and Irhen the wheel is finished, he covers hii 
 officer on the pivot flank. When thecolirtti 
 marches, if the officer is in f^ontW the phildds, 
 the serjeadl is on the pivot of tbe front riihk, aod 
 lit answerable f<fr the platoon distance i if the* 
 cJScei' rcSroams on the pivot flairk, tlieiHMf|jeaDt 
 '^n taitt beliind the rear rank, and covert Ibi 
 MCjOQd file from, the jfhoU 
 
w 
 
 "•. ft 
 
 kalie el froni^ leu §eTf:^n{§t Ac. rJtumant leurt 
 
 pro|irtfs poBlef; alum il flMUgn€, til eai n^cet- / 
 
 Mire, de Ia maoiire dt- j^ preicrike. 
 
 Dani la niarche en retraite, le batatlloo ceoL- ^ttenticnt 
 Trirai«D ^teadue de terrein— Let hoinmet du '^anslam^,* 
 •econd rang prendrunt ^arde dene pnaiierrer ^*« «"»»■«- 
 le« fii«a plua quU I'ordinaire, aiitremeni ccux '''''*'* 
 du premier rang,(|iii en general aont plimgranda 
 wront prcM^f uana leur raa^.— -La miitique, lea 
 Umboura, officicra aurnuin^rairea» &c. annmt 
 tola de marcher avec exactitude, pour oe fiaa ^ 
 ioterrompre^ maia plat6l aaaiater le batailloot 
 le bataiUoa ae fera paa voile face atant que 
 tout sqit pr^par6 pour la marclie, et lea mota, , 
 
 " Huiie, From,** jie font qu^in conimaadeoient » 
 f'eit pourquoi il a*eat jamaia aana D^cetait^ placd 
 faiiaat face en arrie^e. 
 
 I«efer|^t4e aerreiile accompagne et aaaUte Petition de»^ 
 I'ofiieier d^ peloimi daoa toua tea monvem^ntay **'^g*f» c^n 
 ek garde aa place eo ligue, oa iiu flaac du pivot *"'<'"''^ "»<'• 
 ev colomoe, teutea lea foiaque le devoir de I'of* 'j'^v^^* 
 ficier requiert, au'il le quitte.— Rn.bataille il ''**1'«<"<'»** 
 couvre au aecoDU ran^. — A ordre ouvert il OO' 
 cupe la place de I'officier au premier raog. A 
 rang aerre, il la laiaae pour roiiicier. Daoa la 
 marcbe en ^cbelon, ii cat au flanc ext^titar da 
 premier raog. ' 
 
 Qoand le batailK>B eat rompu en colomne Ik En toUmm^ 
 droite.ott I gauche, le aergeot fkit deux paa en 
 arri^re;.et i^iiand la converaion aera faite, il 
 convrira aon ofic^ier au flanc du pivot Quand 
 la colomne march*, a'ilesten front du pelotoii, 
 le lergent est an yivot du premier, rang, et aera 
 reiponaabledeladialascet ai Tofficicr reateau! 
 pivot, le aergeut convrira la aeconde file di|k 
 fivot en arriire du aecond rtoe* 
 
 ? H 
 
5 ■■>> 
 
 119 
 
 WhetVng 
 into line. 
 
 i> ' 
 
 v» -' 
 
 jflatoon. 
 
 
 JtifiU, 
 
 Firingt, 
 
 Vfhetkfrom column, the right in front, platoons 
 wheel up to the left into lin«$ the serjeantat the 
 word -.nheely ^om to the right of the front rank 
 of the platoon, and wheels up with il, thereby 
 preserving the officer's place. If the wheel is to 
 t.he right, the serjeant is behind the ri<;ht file, 
 ready to move up to the officer's place at the 
 conclusion of the wheel. On all occasions, when 
 any platoon (which is then seperated) joins in 
 line to one on its right, at that instant must the 
 covering scrjeanl be on its right, to preserve the 
 place of his officer, who may be employed in 
 dressing his platoon. 
 
 When the platoons wheel either into line, or 
 into column, the serjeant of the leading platoon 
 runs out, and marks the point in the iia« of 
 pivots where its flanks are to halt. . ^ 
 
 When platoons countermarch in column, the 
 •erjeant moves into the officer's place, (when he 
 quits it to lead m file), face^ to the Ti|fht-about, 
 stands fast, and becomes the pivot pomt for the 
 front rank leader to close to after the counter- 
 march is finished, und his place is occupied by 
 the officer aftei dressing his division. 
 
 When the platoons from column file ?n order 
 to take a new line, either to the front or rear, 
 the serjeant of each successively, as it arrivei 
 within thirty yards of that line, (and no sooner) 
 runs out, takes distance, places himself on it, and 
 remains as a point to which his o$eer is to bring 
 and close in the pivot flank man of his platoon, 
 and as a point which the officer himself is after- 
 wards to occupj. 
 
 '■i ' I 
 
 Whenever the battalion baits to fire, the ser* 
 ifiantf fall back, and in concert with the super- 
 numerary rank, keep the rear rank well locked 
 i»|^, and attentive to tbeir duty. When the 
 
120 
 
 *: » 
 
 Qiiand la colomne, la droits en front, se met PafpeMont^ 
 en batallle par pelotons} Ic serpent au mot a o gauche en u 
 gauche en btttaille, preud la droite du premier bataiUe, . 
 raiig du peloton pour confer ver la place lie ' • ^ 
 
 roliicier. 8i la conversion se fait a droite, ie,~ 
 serjjent est derriere la file droite, pr^t a iprendre • 
 ia place del'officier a la conclusion de la conver- 
 sion. En toutes les occasions, quand un pelotoa < 
 etanl sJpare se joint en ligne a celui a sa droite,',. ' 
 
 a Tinstant le sergent couvretir sera a sa droite,, s 
 pour conserver la place de son officier, qui est/ '. ^• 
 peut-^tfe employe a aligner son peloton. 
 
 Quand les pelotons conversent soit de colomne PeMon$ 4g. 
 en bataille, ou de ligne en colomne, le serofent Ute^ . 
 du peloton de la i^te avance vivement, pour ' 
 marquer le point dans la ligne des pivots oii lei • 
 flancs feront Aft/te. . ^ v 
 
 ♦■ 
 Qiiand les pelotons font la contreroarche en Contre.- 
 
 colomne, le sergent prend la place de I'officier matehe, , 
 
 llorsqn'il la qnitie pour la conduire en file) fait 
 
 demi-tour a droite, se fixe et devient le pivot < 
 
 pour le guide du premier rang, qui doit se 
 
 serrer vers lui apres lapontremarche finie, et sa. 
 
 place est occup^e par I'officier apr^s qu'il it. align^ 
 
 la division, .> 
 
 Quand les pelotons ^e colomne fileront pour £„fit^. 
 prendre one nouveiie ligne, soit en avantsoit '^ " 
 en arriere, le sergent de chaque en succession, . 
 k mesure qii'il arrive a 50 .pa» de la houvelle- 
 ligne (et pas plut6t) se hltera de preadrex^ 
 distance, ay planter, pour servir de point pour; 
 que son oflbcier puissoy conduire et faire serrer. 
 rtiomme de pivot de son peloton, et comme^ 
 point, que. I'officier iui menie occupera 4 la ' 
 
 mite. 
 
 Qnand le bataillon fait Haiti pourex^etifer j^g„,.j^l^. 
 les feux, les sergents se retlrent, et de concert Ftuxx 
 avec let officiers et sergents du rang surnum^- , 
 
 nire, feroDt hiea emboiter le leipond rao£ et . 
 
 Li 
 
 
121 
 
 
 Close 
 
 Ecktl^M,. 
 
 battafion again moTes, lerjieaatt- resume tFieir 
 ptaces. 
 
 When th« battalion h in eolumn of sub-divi* 
 lions, if the officer is ordered to march in front 
 of his phitoon, th« serjeant is on the pivot oC 
 the leading^ siib>>di vision. — If the officer is on the 
 flank of his leading sub-division, the serjeant 
 takes the- flank of the second. In column of 
 seclions the serjeant also takes^the flank of the 
 second section. 
 
 In close cdiimn the serjeant is on the flank 
 of the rear rank behind'hisoflicer ; and in form- 
 Uig line after the halt^ front, of the platoon, he* 
 remains on it» outward flank, and' inarches up^ 
 with it 
 
 All non^-commissioned officers,, or persons out 
 f6ot;markinga direction of the march in column 
 CM* formation of the Kne or its parts, take-up such^ 
 direction in flie by coverrno^ each othei, and then 
 •tand faced to- the flunk of the column, or front 
 of the Kne^ so that their breasts become the line^ 
 of march ^ or line of formation. 
 
 Whenever the pJatocm is cautioned to wheel 
 forward or backwa^'d any fiAtnenf number of paces,, 
 the serjeant 'immediately posts himself before or 
 behind the eighth file from the standing iank^ 
 and takes the ordered number of wheeling pacesi 
 when his platoon has conformfid^ he pJaces him* 
 ifclfon it» outward flank. 
 
 ATTEXVIONS^ IN PLA^TOOW OFVKIRS* 
 
 FosUion of When the battalion is formed in 'line, eom« 
 
 platoon offi. pany or ptatooa officers are all on the right of 
 
 9trs, itif i r platoons.^— In colu mn, they are on the piTOk 
 
 flank, unless particularly ordered into the front 
 
 of Mch platoon, if » march for any coniidt rabit 
 
122 
 
 P-^ 
 
 Toi'r qwHrsoycitlatlentifs I leurdevoir. Qnand* 
 le batalllnn se meltra en marche, les scrgeiiU 
 rtfsumeront leurs places* 
 
 Quand le bataiHon est en colomne desous 
 divisions, §i rofficier roarche en avant de son 
 peloton, le sergent sera an pirot de la sous divi- 
 sion de tSte.-— Si Poffieier est an fianc de sa sous 
 division de t^e, le sergent sera au ffanc de; Taii- 
 tre>— En colomne de sections le sergent prenct 
 aussi le fl^nc de la seconde section. 
 
 Dans la colomne en masse le sergent est au 
 ianc du second ran^j couvrant son officier, et 
 quand il se met en bataille, npresies mots, halte^ 
 front t dii peloton, il sera an flanc exterieur, et 
 y prendra poste. 
 
 Tousbas officier» on autres a pied, qui mar- 
 queront unedirection uonr la marche-encotom» 
 ■e, on la formation de la ligne ou de ses parties, 
 prendront telle direction en file, en se couvrant 
 I'un l'autre,etapres avoir fait face au flanc de 
 la colomne ou au front de la ligne, de sorte que 
 leurs poitrine» prolon^eront la ligne de marche,. 
 •u la iigne de formation. 
 
 Quand le peloton est averti de faire conTCH*- 
 sion en avant ou en arriere^en certain nombre 
 de pas, le serpent se place immediatement de- 
 vaot ou derriere la^huiti^me file du flanc fixe, 
 et prend le nombre ordonnd de pas de conver- 
 •iont quand son peloton s'y sera conforme, il se 
 placera uir son flanc exteriear. 
 
 En s»us^ 
 divisions^ 
 
 Colomne «t^ 
 tnasse^ 
 
 EckelaiH- 
 
 a I 
 
 * i 
 
 •!Ni-' 
 
 Mil 
 
 r! :' ■. ■ ■. ,.1 
 
 M 
 
 
 ;r!ii>toi , 
 
 i 
 
 ATT^HTIOir.BBS OFFICXBRS DC PQIiOTOKS* 
 
 Quaii4J<l)>i^i|lone»lfbrm6 enltgne, levof- position At 
 ficierS'^e ^iQpagmf|.pu de peloton tont tousiur officUn d^ 
 la droite de leurs pelotont.*— En colomne ill sont Peloton, 
 an flanc de pivot, h moim qu'ils ne loient or* 
 iono^i I U Utt d« leuMptlotoos, au ca9 qo*iio« 
 
Wheeling 
 iMocolumn. 
 
 Wheeling 
 into line. 
 
 Wheeling 
 in column 
 •N afijted 
 f9int* 
 
 .123 
 
 distance i« to be made— When on the pWot 
 ftank9, they are answerable In Iheir own persons 
 for distance and covering : when in front, the 
 ierjeanU nnder their direction, preserve their 
 ordered distance. 
 
 In wheeling from line to column, each moves 
 out, and places himself one pace before thecentre 
 of his platoon ; each turns towards his men dur- 
 ing the wheel, and inclines to his pivot flank : 
 each sives his word Bait^ Dress^ when his 
 wheelmg man has just completed his degree of 
 wheel: each squares his platoon, but without 
 "moving what was ihe.standing flank } each then 
 places himself on the proper pivot flank — After 
 thp wheel into column is completed, no one is- 
 to cause his platoon to shift, by way of covering 
 on the pivot flank, unless so ordered by the 
 commanding oflScer, or that in the course of 
 marching a straight line is gradually taken up< 
 
 In wheeling from column into liae, each 
 places himself one pace before the centre of his 
 platoon ; each turns towards his men during the 
 wheel, and inclines towards the pivot of his pre* 
 ceding platoon ; £Ach gives his word //<i//, Z>rcs9, . 
 when his wheeling man, on whom his tsye is fixed, 
 is just arrived at the next standing pivot man ; 
 each then from that next pivot man corrects the 
 interior of his platoon upon his own piTOtman ; . 
 each then takes his place and remains stead j on 
 the right of his platoon; 
 
 All movements of company officers and oon- 
 coramissioned officers from one position to an- 
 other are to be madi^wi^h alertness and precisioo. 
 
 If the ccluma is^ in movement, and platoons 
 afe suiccessiTely to voheel into a new direction, 
 each oflScer, to. whatever hand he is to wheel, 
 gives his word from the point he is then placed 
 Ati vrfaetber ta froat> or on the flank.— If on th« 
 
124 
 
 V, 
 
 V 'v. 
 
 marclie doWe le faire pour une distance eonsi- 
 dfrable.—Qiiand il» sont au flanc du pivot, ils 
 repondrout personiiellement dcs distances et du 
 
 [)roloiigeiiient des pivots: quand ii est a la t^te* 
 es sergeuts sous Icurs directions, preservent '^ 
 leurs distances ordonnees. 
 
 Pour rompre de Wfrne en celomnc, Pofficier se Rompre t» ' 
 place un pas devant le centre de son pcioton f colomne^ 
 ctdurant la conversion il tournera vers ses horn- 
 roes«et gai^nera le flanc de pivot : il donnera le '. > 
 
 ijiot, **Jka//e,/row<.'* A Pinskantque son homme * -'v 
 
 du flanc. oppose aura complete son quart de ^; H.' 'v 
 conversion, ti placera son peloton bien quarri- 
 ment, sacs toucher au flanc qui etoit fixe; alors 
 il se placera ^ son ffanc de pivot.— -Apres que la 
 conversion pour rompre en colomne est comply* "- 
 
 tee, il se gardera bien de remuer son peloton,, « 
 
 pour couvrir le flanc de pivot, si re n*est.par lies . y 
 
 ordres du chef, ou que pendant la marche OB no . .■y\-^.^ 
 doive par degr^s former une ligne droite. i-.^ 
 
 Dans la ipoQversion de colomne en ligne, i\ le ggfomurin 
 placera devant le centre de son peleton ; et ^fgfaitte, ^ 
 tournera vers ses horames, en gagnant vers le 
 pivot du peloton qui precede le sien ; il donne- ^ 
 ra le mot, halte, ahgnementy quaud son homme 
 qui guide la conversion, et qu*il aura stricte* 
 nient observe, arrive I Thomme de pivot vol- 
 sin ; alors du pivot voisin it corrigera I'interieur 
 deson peloton sur son propre pivot; aprcs quot 
 il prend sa place et se tieut^x^ a la droite de 
 ion peloton. 
 
 Tons les mouvements des officiers de compa* 
 gnies, d'une position a une autre, se feront avee 
 precision et a tenement. . , 
 
 tons 
 
 La colorane 6tant en monvement, si les pelo* fottrnar m 
 ns ont i tourner success! vement autour d*un colomne stuh 
 
 f>omt, pour prendre un^ nouvelle direction, unp9kUfi» 
 'officier, de quel cdt^ qu^ Ift' CQnvcrsiim se fasse, 
 dome 1^ mot de t^uel cot^ quHl loit plac^, ea 
 
 
 i>^* 
 ■% ^ 
 
 !:? 
 
 ii' 
 
 •*!' 
 
 
 i 1! 
 
125 
 
 ■^ ■ "wheeling flank, he conducts it. — If he i§ on Iht 
 
 ''■ Handing flank, He stcp« out two or ibree paces, 
 
 . to see that bis platoon wbceU uuick, with a 
 
 , . lengthy itep,and that he may time bis word hait^ 
 
 'V ^ this done he is to fall back to his place ou the 
 
 ^ pi?ot flank, no longer to look to bis platoon, 
 
 '^ ^ out having his eyes fixed on the officer of the 
 
 ' - ' preceding platoon, he is to give his word March, 
 
 at the instant, khat officer is taking the last step, 
 
 which estahliilief the proper distance betwixt 
 
 . the platoons, 
 
 •« the When, an officer is marching on the piTO* 
 
 fivotjlank, flank, he is to be answerable for distance and 
 
 covering $ these circumstances alone must en- 
 . * ^ ' \ g9?0 his whole attention \ he ran only occasion^ 
 
 all^r give a glance of his eye towards bis fUatoon, 
 
 which must dress to him of course, and without 
 
 My pftrticakur ilireetioa» 
 
 
 
 Cimnter' When plntooos in cohimn are eack to eeoBtfi^ 
 
 march of march on it§ owa ground, tbc ofic«r, wken kit 
 f Moons, platoon faces,' goes to that flank, which is to 
 Wcorae the pivot flank, condiwtt kitpkitooM in 
 Alie, and elosea its leader to the aeiriennt, who 
 kas remained to maii^ the pivot, kails, lroiita« 
 and dresses- it square ; he the* places kimsell 
 where the serjeant atood* 
 
 Tn ttne. When the battalion marckea in Ihie, ofBcera 
 
 then become individuals equally attentive aa 
 the soldier i nor can officers then be attentive 
 to any tkii^ but to the corectoess.of tbeir owa 
 personal march ; every operation then depends 
 en the won^ from the commanding officer, who 
 mov^s, halla, and dresses th<^ battalions. — - 
 Whenever the battalion is in Ijue, officers givo 
 Bo commands, except in firings* 
 
 "^ /&* When the platoons of a column file seperately 
 
 to a liank, tj»e offiicer c inducts the head, and 
 when he arrives within '0 |»aces ol the new po« 
 titioB IB which kiC ial» Corm^ he detaebea kiik 
 
I 
 
 • V 
 
 126 -^:. 
 
 front ou au flaoc.<^Si il cat au flanc qui fait Ja 
 
 tonveraioD, il la conduira. Si il entail flanc fiie 
 
 ilarance '*'ux ou trois pas, pour voir a ce ^e 
 
 ioa peloton fasse vite sa conversion il'un paa t- 
 
 aioDg^, pour qu'il puissea fcenis donubr le mot, 
 
 kallty ceh W\t il se pkcera an. flanc de pivot, 
 
 pour no plus avoir I'neil sur son peloion, mais 
 
 ifixant les yeux sur I'officier du peloton qiii Je 
 
 precede, il donnera son root, *^ marche^** a Tins- 
 
 tant que cet officier pread te de*'nier pas ^l 
 
 etablit ta distance entre les pelotoufl. ,/ 
 
 Quand un officier est on roas che au jLmc du ^„ yj^^^ ^^ 
 fivoty il sera responsable des distances et du pioit, 
 prolongement de la ligne de pivots : ees circons- 
 tances seliies engageront totite son attention, 
 il'peut seuteraenljetter un cUn d*ceil vers sou 
 peloton, qui aUgnera sur lui aicessaireBi^it, 
 etsansvrdres ezpris. ' 
 
 Quand tes pelotons en colomne doivent faire Contre-nmr 
 la contremarche, chacjun sur son propre tcrrein, che despelo* 
 I'officier, quand son peloton fait face; va au '"'*'• 
 flanc, qui doit devenir le pivot, conduit son 
 peloton en file, et serre son guide sur le sergcnt, 
 qui a ete plante pour inarquer le pivot, fait 
 hal>e, front, et s'aligne quarreiuent, alors '4( le 
 place ou etoit le sergent. 
 
 Eh Ugnt, 
 
 Quand le bataillon marche en ligne, les offi« 
 ciers deviennent des individns, ^galeraent at- 
 tentifs que le soldat; ils ne peuvent faire atten- 
 tion qu'k leur marche persoanolle; roperatioa i 
 depend du mot^u c6ef, qui ^l^ranle, arr^te et 
 flli^ne ies bataillojm. Toutes les fois qu'tin ba- 
 taillon est eo ligne, les officiers ne donnent au- * 
 cun mot de coannandement, excepts pour Jet 
 ieux. . 
 
 Qinmdiai' pelotons d'nne coldmiiie -Slavish par^- Enjit$, 
 nentvers un flanc, l-o^i^r ^conduit la t^le^ et 
 quand il arrive i SO pas de la nouvelle position 
 qu'il doit prendre, il d.^tachera son sergent pour 
 
 l;. ... I^f : il 
 
 ad 
 
 !:/ti 
 
 
 
 '■'. 
 
 ifMmm ^ 
 
 ,'';l 1 
 
 iff 
 
 I I 
 
 i' 
 
 
 
 'It 
 
127 
 
 %*.«■ 
 
 Ijtttding 
 
 \~ 
 
 ierjeant to mark the point at which he ii to 
 place his pivot front rank man, either in filiog 
 to front or rear ; the officer slopi at that serjeaot, 
 mnd haltf, fronts, and dresses tiis platoon close 
 to the Serjeant : he then himself, after correcting 
 his platoon, replaces the serjbaot, who falh 
 back to the rear rank;— In filing distances and 
 dressing arc taken from that hand to which, by 
 a face of the platoon, the whole would stand 
 
 - fronted in column, and the line breaks into 
 column.towards the directing point. — The lead* 
 ersof the third, fourth, &c. platoons, from the 
 directing flank, are never in the course of 
 inarching to> overpass the straight line which 
 joins the heads of the first and second, but are 
 if any thing, to be behind it, till tlie'y arrive and 
 
 • halt exactly in the new line.^In movements to 
 the rear, distances and dressing are always taken 
 
 / from the same point, to whrch they would be 
 
 . made if the movement was the front, that -ii, 
 from the left ingoing to the rear, if it should 
 be from the right ingoing to the front. 
 
 On the leading platoon officer of the column 
 
 much of the precision of march depends, he 
 
 must lead at an equal, steady pace ; he must lead 
 
 : on two objects either given to him, or which he 
 
 ^ himself takes up on every alteration of position} 
 
 \ this demands Iiis utmost attention ; nor must 
 
 he allow it to be diverted by looking at his 
 
 platoon, the care of whose regularity depends 
 
 on the other officers and non-commissioned 
 
 officers belonging to it. The second platoon 
 
 officer must also have a knowledge of the points 
 
 OB whicli the first leads ; he is always to keep 
 
 that first ofiicer and those points in a liii|^ ud 
 
 those two officers together with the pis&d 
 
 mounted officers thus become a direction \ot tht 
 
 ' other pivot officers to cover,— In marching in 
 
 open column, the covering sefjeants are phiced 
 
 behind the second file from the pivot officers, 
 
 that the officers iflay the more correctly teS and 
 
 •over each other in colunui. 
 
12« 
 
 virquer le poJDt o& it doit placer Thomme <le 
 pivot de ton premier ranj^, loit qu*il defile en 
 •vantou eo arriere t rofficier arr^te I cewr* 
 gent et fait faire kalte, front, et alignera loa 
 peloton Bupr^t du lergentt apr^i qiioi il le 
 place i la place du lerrent qui le retire au ie« 
 cond rang. — Bn la marche par filet let dittancea 
 etl'aii<((ieinent toot prit du cdt£ du flanc vituel^ 
 c'etUaodire, du c6t^, Tert leqoel let pelotont 
 faitant une i droiteou unel gauche, feroot fa- 
 ce en colonne, et duquel la ligne te roropt en 
 colonne, Tert un point de directioQ.«^Let con* 
 dticteori det troitieme, quatri^ine» ftcpelotooa 
 du flanc de direction ne patteront Jamait pen* 
 dant la roarcbe la ligne droite qui joint let t^tea 
 del premier et tecond, mait tera, de pr^fireace^ 
 tant loit peii en arriere, jutqu*^ ce qu'ilt ar* 
 rivent et fkitent halte exactement dant la non* 
 Telle ligne.— Dant let roouTementt en arriere» 
 lesdifitancet et ^*aligneraent teront toujourt prit 
 dumdme point, vert lequel ilt auroient 6U prit 
 •i le mouveroent 6tait en avant, c*ett ii-dire, de 
 la gauche en marchant en arriere, au cat qu'il 
 ddt Hre a la droite en marchant Tert le front. 
 
 La pr6cition de la marche en colonine d^pen- Offidera it 
 dra a oien det igardt, de Tofficier directeur qui direetion^ 
 conduit le peloton de la t£te, il conduira d*un 
 pas^gal et conataoti il cunduira tur deux ob- 
 jets, ou indiqut^s ou qu'il prend lui-m^me, ^ cha- 
 oue changement dei petition t ce devoir deman- 
 ae ioute ton attention, et il ne te laittera paa 
 diitraire par aucune attention pour ton peloton, 
 dont le toin de ta r^gularit^ d<^end det autret 
 officiert et bat officiert qui y tout attach^t. L'of* 
 ficier du tecond peloton doit autsi avoir con- 
 fibittancedet pointttur letqu>lt le premier coo- : . 
 duit I il gardera toujourt cet officier et cepoint 
 CD ligne, et cet deux officiert, avecjet officiert 
 Icheval placet expr^t, deviennent let pointt de 
 direction tur letquelt let autret oflBctert de pivot 
 te couvrent, Dant bi marche en colonne ouTerte« 
 
 » 
 
 t'''i 
 
 s ?■'» 
 
 i 
 
 
 il? 
 
 '}mi 
 
 \j.\ 
 
 fe- 
 
 ' 'I.- 
 
 ■ 
 
 • 'i 
 
 li 
 
129 
 
 ^. 
 
 Phots, 
 
 » 
 
 tVheeling 
 iacktcurd». 
 
 Tn close 
 column. 
 
 (*■■ 
 
 tn l9ie colmnn of march, after the word halt 
 !• ffiven, no one is h> move, and pivoln particu* 
 iarfy musi remain where they are then placed. 
 •—In Ihif lilualion, when ordered to form, each 
 platoon wheels up to its adjoininj^ pivot i the 
 whole will then, perhaps, (as in the case of 
 march in? on a road along the different turning 
 of a hei^t, &;c. &c.) b^ in a winding line, and 
 moit not attempt to gel into a straifrht line, 
 uoKms so ordered hy the commanding officer to 
 answer some particular object. 
 
 When the platoon wheels backwards, from 
 line into column, the situation and buiinesA of 
 Ihio officer Is the same as when wheeling for* 
 wards.— -And he halts and dresses from his pivot 
 flank which he gains during the wheel. 
 
 In close column, division officers are on tho 
 pivot flanks.— In forming line, before the divi- 
 sions face, the;; are shifted to the leading flank, 
 if neeessar j« The officer of each stops in his 
 own person when the division nearer to the form- 
 ing point than himself receives the word halt, 
 front. He allows his serjeant to proceed with 
 the division I at the due instant gives his word 
 halt, front, dress, and as soon as the front of his 
 division is clear, the word March, conducting it 
 into line. Before the division arrives within 
 three or four paces of its ground, the officer will 
 have stepped out nimbly to the flank of the 
 preceding division, and *witl be thus ready to 
 
 five the word halt, dress, at the instant h 13 in ward 
 ank men join the preceding division. The 
 men dress by the formed part of the line, and 
 the officer corrects them on the known distant 
 l^oinL He then resumes his pliatoon place, 
 which has been pysierved by a serjeant. Whea 
 the clove column, or part of it, forms line en a 
 rear division, the officer of each, when the one 
 %ehiad him hidtt, frontt, wiHuep ninib^ rmwd 
 
rV 
 
 *;» 
 
 Conwrtnn 
 «fi artier «• 
 
 180 ;• -.^ 
 
 If I ferment de lerrefile tont placet en arri«re dc 
 it seconde fife de I'ufficier du piv<)t, afia que 
 ien ofiiciert puittent a?ec pUit d'^xactUude voir 
 et ae coiivrir eo culonoe. 
 
 En colunne de roarche, apris le motholle, Pivif^ 
 personne ne' bougera, el siirt»ut leipivoit re|» 
 trront fixcx. — Dantcetle titualioo, au comman- 
 dement de former, fhaque pelotun fait confer- 
 tioo vera toH pivol Toisiii, le tout tera|»cut- 
 £tre /comrae dant le cat de marcher t ur ua clie- 
 inin le long des lizieret d'un lN>it, oudu contour 
 de hauteurs, &c ) en ligne eourbe ou ondoyao* 
 te, et ne fera aucun mouvement pour former 
 ■ne ligne droile, except^ que le commandant 
 ne Pordoone poiir renpUr quelque objei parti- 
 culier* 
 
 Uoand k peloMm ronpten irrieret de li||*Be 
 en coloane, la aituation et le deVoir d^ TolJScier 
 tont let m^meaque ceux qu'il obterye en faitant 
 convertion en avant — £t il fera balte et aiigne- 
 m 4e aoB pthrot qti'il ftiiim %9f;iyi -dlinlDt I'cxlca* 
 
 ti«D de la coafonrnw 
 
 ,<',.-■ 
 
 SncbloBiie «b Maane, lei ofidera de dlvifioaa 
 leront a«z flattot de pirot<*-Bn formant la li^e 
 avantqueles dWittoBs faatont Aice, ilt tout cbaa- 
 
 EH »'u eat n^cettairc au flanc te dtrectioa.'*- 
 lOfficier de chaqtie arr^te en personne quand la 
 diiritioo qui est plut prodie que lui dir ^otnt de 
 fornatwB' refoit le aaot kmite^ froni, jl iaiiie 
 •an p*loton au tevgeat, et a Tinttant coaveaa- 
 ble, donoe le mot kaHe^ftw^ aligmtment, auMn> 
 t^t uue le front de sa divkiiou <ttt d4g«ff^, 4a 
 marcac la (ouduira. en iignOk Avaat^^iw la di- 
 vitioii arrive a deux ou trota pas de ton terrein, 
 I'officier anra d^^a promptcment ^agn^ le flanc 
 de la divitiori qat le precede et %\ aerapr^tli' Wi/U 
 donner le root Wle, a Mgmem e n l^ 4l*tnfltanl que.ir:..* ; 
 •oa homme de Aanc'int^rieur joaot ia4iTiti#a 
 qui ia pr(^cedie,. lea bommea t^aligneat tor ila 
 partie d« la lif(ne ^j^ form^e, et I'ofllcier Vet 
 corrige tur le point eloign^ enaou. AloraHte- 
 ninierA aa^^blc* a« peloto« quia 4td preadw6 
 
 Ml 
 
 En 
 
 
 9 I 
 
 i:. 
 
 'I 
 
 I ;•. 
 
 r 
 
 if 
 
I tm 
 
 J31 
 
 to the rear (and, without iropediag hiidiviitoa, 
 illow his lerjeant to proceed) i from thence ho 
 tan judge k\\% proper moment of giving hii words 
 inlt, front, lu his division i he then places him- 
 self on itf inward flank, and raarching up when 
 his front is clear. 
 
 imfrcni »f 
 t/uir dioim 
 §i§Mt, 
 
 Tn general a mounted field officer halts, fronts, 
 the «ii?isions of the close column when they 
 march up into line. 
 
 When officers tntrch in fVont of their diftisionif 
 thejr roust in their own persons keep so close to 
 the preceding one, as not to hinder the flank of 
 their owi difiiloa from pretervinf ill proper 
 diftance. 
 
 mov€0ih 
 
 WhHUngin When the bead of a colamo «f march cbaagei 
 •sAtma •/ it> direction, and that roarchinc in an alignement 
 march omm is n»l in fluestioo, instead of making regular 
 •.wheiBlt on nxed poiot^ the officer who oonducta 
 .the leadinf division will often be directed gradii- 
 allj to briniT it round into the new directioiy bf 
 ' the turn of the outwartf shoulder, making ootn 
 bis flanlj contbue moveable %. but each succeed* 
 • |ng division, without the formality of command^ 
 ' ornal^ doea the same thing, the whole attention 
 reitinff on each prvot flank, which at no rate 
 must mcreaae its distance {. but duvin^^ thia ope- 
 •' ration preserve* the same equality of time and 
 length of step at which it wAs before moving. 
 
 N 
 
 Jh^«*# It ia the particular business of the Adjutant, 
 
 fUM poinL at ail times» to ascertain, under the orderiof the 
 
 fleU oAeers, the direction on wbicl^ the column 
 
 - is to nsov^ or on which the fdrroation of the 
 
 ; lino ia ko be made. For this purpose he- ia 
 
 mounted, otherwise be could not properly, dis* 
 
 •■, «barf thia imifortant duty i and be can b« muki- 
 
132 
 
 p!ir ion srr^enL Quand In cotonne en maKM, on 
 
 IIII0 |>artie, forme en ligne sur une diviiiion de * i 
 
 I'nrriere, I'officirr de cliaqiio, lor§qiie ccliii der- 
 
 riere lui fail halte, fronts se portera l^p^^rement 
 
 en <trriere, et (fan* arr^ter m division) laiiiterB 
 
 fnire Mon lergent, dcU il pent ju^er du moment 
 
 cunvennhle pour donner NPii mots de Aa//r, /ronf, 
 
 ^ ij division ; alors il sc placern i son flanc in- ,' 
 
 Urieur, et marrhe en li^ne avec sa division 
 
 ^iiand son front sera d(^ag6. 
 
 S- 
 
 En ^<^n^ral c'ent nn offirier sup^rieur Iclie- ,V 
 
 y^U <)ui fait faire hahe et front aux divisions de • ' ',^ 
 lit, coionne en masse quaud ils marchent pour 
 eiitrer en ligne. 
 
 Quand Ics oflSciert marchent en avant do leurs En front dv 
 divisions, ilv faut qii'cn leurs propre* personnel leura diviaU 
 iUse tiennent si serres sur Ics prec^dentes qu'ils on<« 
 n*emp6chcnt pas le flanc de lour propre division 
 die couNervcr sa propre distance. 
 
 Quand'la t^ted*un<9 coionne en marche clian. />^«.„«...*«, 
 ^ de* direction, et qu'il ne h agil pas de mar- ^^^olonned* 
 cher dant> un alignenientf au lieu de faire des^^rcAtf an 
 conversionff r^guiieres Mir des poinls-ftxes, Tof- tonrd'unpi*- 
 ficier qui conduit la< division detdte, aura fr^- votmobiU, 
 qnement ordre de Tamener graduellement h. 
 h nouvelle direction, par un tour de T^paule 
 exterieul>e, les deux flancs continuant mobiles i 
 mais chaque division en succession, sant la for- 
 mality d'un commandement ou d'une halte,. fait 
 la ni^rae chose, toute Tattention restant aux 
 deux pivott des flancs, qui ea aucune manierA 
 n'augmenteront leur distance |. mais durAnt cette 
 operation pr^serveront la m^me f galit^ de tem«>- 
 et de longueur de pat qu'ila avoient avant le 
 mouvement. 
 
 G'est particulierement rar TAdjudant que: roor VJdjudarti: 
 lent les devoira d*aiMirer, toufi les ordres def donneies 
 offieiert tnp^rieurs, la direction de marchede pQints, 
 la coioBoe et tar la quelle la formation de la li* , 
 
 gnefet»^faite« £our cette raiionil doit ^trei' 
 
 M5. 
 
 iit 
 
 I' 
 
 I 
 
 t 
 
 
 •^ 1 1 
 
mimm 
 
 13& 
 
 amiiLed'wU, by bavins two or three oomccnm 
 miMiooed officers properly trained to line Ihein- 
 •elites ttttickly wUIk any two given points. He 
 19 lo take care, that the point where the battalion^ 
 in column enters aa alignement is ascertained to 
 it. When it is iBOv4n^ in thaiatignement, that 
 two points aliead ot the column are alwaj*. 
 ascertained to,, o/ by the leading^ officer.. Wben^ 
 it wbeela up into Une^ that a point beyond each, 
 flank, tn that line is ascertained. When the line 
 is to be prolonged, and ha» wheeled' backwards- 
 by divbioBS,. tmttwo points in Ibe ejraet line of 
 tl»e pirots are readji for its^niarch. When the - 
 close cditTBO is-to tonaia line, that a.potiil ton 
 •acb iAnk is-given* 
 
 , ♦ 
 
 mowHttdi 
 
 ■Commands, 
 
 Fointi of 
 
 MlSTEMVlOll^ or COUHAKOINO 0«riCBB OF. 
 BAJXV;4LIOJ<. 
 
 ThebattaKon may be considered to the line». 
 what the platoon is to the battalion. 
 
 Cotntnaadinof and field offiversare-always'tO'' 
 be mounted,, and unless they are active onhone^ 
 back, it is irapossible for tbem t»see,.io eM^ 
 Eeot, to prevent mistakes^ or to move with tfaat^ 
 dispatch wkicii is necessary from, one |!M>iiit.te> 
 another. 
 
 Whatever epdratioii is- la be- perlbrmed by 
 4ie whole of the battalion at once* ie^doae upon 
 fbe word fromitke eemraandiag officer, w^ithout 
 any vepelitiMni being made by platoon^ officers & 
 ke pnta^irt'in motioB ani<^halls it whether ialiBe or 
 •Oluma |. be wuheeb it fFem line into eeluoio, and 
 l^om «oUim»> 'into line ^ he ordoM arma to ha 
 carried, supported, &:c. be dressea it fnem the 
 centre,, when it has marched in line, aad halts % 
 wmA fvom ivkat wa»<the*l«adiiig 0mk ^wJieaitiW 
 wbeeled up ftomeeluma tiklD JiMb. 
 
 , ft 
 
 Befbrelke eoknan' nacdiet, tile eoaamaiidiQC 
 •Awr «N«clM» YoiHi to Ite \mikMg «fli«% 
 
tSf 
 
 dJcwF, autrenMBivt M w poiirrapfi»lMea t^Miiiiiifiu 
 fcpr Aece devoir inypprtaiit r et il tera beauc4>i^ 
 facilite li il'a ^n «»iii dc dresser 8 ou 4 basi o^ 
 fier h t'aligner promptement lur deux poiat»> 
 iomhtk 11 aura toio %iie lep4»itlt<oCk.k9imt«ti•> 
 lon tto <<otooae- jentnr <»«•' ralignemfnt. kii soife 
 fUireiiMot jadkiu^. QAiaad il ma«ch)e dant^qet 
 ali^nanaent, que Its .deuoL fiuiita-ea avanl de 1^ 
 coioane seieBt riou|oMr«'T!^rifi«§>»ur J'ofHcief di<^ 
 lecteur ou par liii<«-%iafid^l le wet; en batoiHe- 
 flu'uo pfiiot SMI .dcia chaque flaac foit etabli* 
 Quaad la Agae doii^re piroloiigfSe, et a rompui 
 •n arriefe par ili^iow^ qne dou» p»iiUg<danai 
 ^flxaete" ligne- d«f pivMs to'iout pr«pai;efl>j>i>iir-9i|t 
 marche. Quand H coloRike<tiioniaMe doit fox* 
 in«r eti ligne, qu'ua point fur ehacjue flanc toit 
 
 'rkr~--M 
 
 1 -tJ 
 
 JMrTBKTiOlCJ BV COHMANOArNT DV BATAtI>I0N4 
 
 Oa pcut eonsidirar le l)4laiUon> par raport a Les officien- 
 h M^ew cornme lie peloton paKvappoFtaiLbar supir'ieurs 
 tdilloo* numteront A 
 
 ehevaL 
 
 lie Gonnnand'aalr et kBai>ffioiar»8U''S«ieur§.«eo 
 Roat ftouJtNir» a cfaeval, €arfl*ilaj|e^«oBit^pa»a«» 
 ^kk cfatsvai^ ib.JM {Muvoat toii^pjuttrcorriger 
 •0 pr^DCNiiV lea ^rrcurt) ou moaioir a««€ I* 
 cdwifeft nJcoMaina d'ua poiiii k Uaiilm-, 
 
 Toute ap6ratiiMi fiMle-Mr le batatUon enfeiib> 
 ble, le sera au commaoaement du cbe^ sant 
 i^p6tilioad« Upart da#^officiars*4e pelpt^nt i. il 
 le mat op mouvwii/aQt, et fail Jure laltaaoit en- 
 Ijgaa >%oit jsf^ cdlqoQ^ t <iL le .can)|>t .de I'^e en 
 •oloiiiit, at d«^c*k>fti)fi Ia 4k>niieei) bataulet^ il 
 liit portar ku ariiM«» aunaiaulifiii^ iSei:;* it V»^ 
 lijpip ihl lOBPtHf ^iwid Ua iiiaf^e.eoli^e, ek 
 l^it 1niI|0i.4|I 4u flAOfi (|ai^t«Ul^ttid«rfiiUftiid 
 
 ila'esi 4<»ciii»^iBii>lMaaill|w 
 
 '■^ * 
 
 Avank que la colonae se mette en marcbe, le 
 
 Command^ 
 tnenti,. 
 
 Points db 
 
 i'lrJ '!' 
 
 .»; 
 
 /' 
 
Points of 
 tloubling ^ 
 wAetUngu. 
 
 ^ -^ „- : .; 135 ■. 
 
 imd xfhen he intendi to change ,lhe direction of 
 th% march )\c gives new points^ and he watrhei 
 OTer the just lending of the column. He take* 
 eare that all wheels of platoons are made at the 
 identical point wiiere lneleading> platoons wheel- 
 ed { that all doublings of sub-divisions are marie 
 successively- In the same manner, and at the same 
 point : and that forming upto piatoons is made 
 at the spot where the first forming up is made.-~ 
 That in all diminutions of the front, the natural 
 order of l^ie column is' preserved, whether the- 
 right or (eft of the battalion leads. — That a 
 column of half platoons occupies no moresi^co 
 than a column of whole platoons, viz. jus^suf# 
 ficient to wheel up mtsy battalion. 
 
 oolumn. 
 
 i^ 
 
 When the open columnmarching in an atigne« 
 ?#!!f..j^ '** ment is to form in a straight line, and for that 
 
 " " purpose halts; the instant that it does halt, the 
 
 eommand^ng officer from the head otlhe battalion 
 at that instant corrects the pivot files of men 
 (which ought not to be necessary) in the- true 
 line, and upon a rear point. But if the march 
 is making in a winding drrectioU) and that the 
 intention is- not to form, or not to take up a 
 straight line, the platoons remain^ on the ground 
 on which they halt, and do not move in any 
 shape, until they re<>eive a fbrlher order, eithes 
 to form in line, or first to cover, and then to^ 
 form : or to continue the march.. 
 
 ''*4ii^i»f 
 
 Bresting, 
 
 Comfmmdtf 
 
 The commanding officer always cond bets the 
 head of his battalion column tothepointat which 
 it is to enter a new line^ and he takes care ia 
 time to dispatch a mounted oflSlcer to ascertain 
 that point.— When the j^latoons wheel up into 
 line, he immediately (if necessary) corrects the 
 dressing of thebattalioii fVom the flank which led' 
 when in column^and that generally upoaa^ point 
 beyond the other flank. 
 
 When ftctibg^ in line irVlik- othcff f the eoif^ 
 
. 136 
 
 direction, et (|U3nd it Teu^ chang^er la direciimi 
 
 de ia marche il donne de nouveaux points, et il 
 
 veiiie a ce . que la direction de la colonne toit 
 
 juste. It a foin que toute« conTemioni de pelo- 
 
 toni soient faitei sur le indnie point ou le pelo- 
 
 too de direction a fait la aienne i et aue tout lief 
 
 doubiementu de les- diYisiont soient taiti en sue* 
 
 ceMiofl de la m^me manidre, et au inline point » 
 
 et que leurs dedoublements en ifBlotons soient 
 
 faits sur le point od le premier d^doublement- 
 
 i*eit fait— Que dans toules l6s diminutions de p^nts^ i$ 
 
 front, I'ordre riguKer et naturel de la colonne douhkment 
 
 loitsoutenu, soit que ladroite, soit que la gau* ei dt conv«r- 
 
 chesetrouve en tdte.— Que la colonne de demi- 9ion, 
 
 Kiloton n'occupe pas plus d*e^ce,qn'une ca- 
 noe de peloton, c'est-a*dire, celui qui tuffit 
 pour la formation en liataille. 
 
 Qaand la eolonne ouTerte, narehant dans on j^^^^ ^^ ^^ 
 ilif oement, doit formes en ligne droite, et que tonnt, 
 pour le faire il a fait halte, i Pinstant le Com- 
 oindantde !& ^ v Au batailkn corrige les filet 
 depiTotdei il j s (de qui ne devrait pas £tre 
 i^cessaire) daL . vraie ligne, sur un point v«a 
 arriere. Mais si la ma'rcbe poursuit une direc* 
 tioo serpentante, tt que Pintcntion ne soit paa 
 de former on d'occuper une Ugne droite, lea 
 wlotons restent sur le terrain ou ils ont fait 
 nalle, et ne bougeront en aucune mat icre, a^ 
 vaot de reccvoir nouvcL ordre, soit de se for* 
 mer d'abord en ligUei, oi» bien de couvrir, et 
 ipr^s de le nicltse en bataille, ou de coatinuer 
 itmarcb*. 
 
 Le cbef conduit tonj^uft la t^te de sob batail- ^.„ . 
 ion en colonne au point ou il doitentiecdana * 
 ue ligne nouvelle, tt il a soin- de d<6tacberk 
 temi un oflicier ^ chevat pour ^tablir ce point. 
 Quind les pelotona se foirment en bataiHe,. il eoiw 
 rige aussildt(fti il est n^cessaire) Palignement 
 dubataillon du fianc qui guidoit en colonne, et 
 il le fait en gfto^ral sur un point au deli de I'au* 
 Veflane. 
 
 la UgQ» vntc d'antMi bttailloni, le chef die CmmtKuk^ 
 
 •1 
 
 P 
 
 I > 
 
 ■!! !' 
 
 .t> 
 
 1 
 
 /• 
 
137 
 
 JUentio98 
 in ff w. 
 
 I - 
 
 JDresiing 
 ifiUne, 
 
 VJ-r-f 
 
 ^andu)^ officer of e»eh batlnKon eoAfbrmi to 
 the movements of the re^tilatiag «ne, and fron 
 it takes and rapidly repeats h^n words halt, 
 wheeU march , &c. and the least dehij in rcf eat* 
 ing the words halt or march, innst undoubtedly' 
 disorder the line in proportion to that delay, for 
 the whole of a line should march or halt, at tht 
 tame iostant. 
 
 In Hdc iKe eoitimandin^ olBcer, i^y marked 
 cautions, makes his battalion step out, or stiii 
 short or incline, as is necessary t6 preserve iti 
 filace in the general line i his great attention it 
 to see and preVeot the beginning: of faults, and 
 Bot wait tin they have had their effect; by 
 watching and regulating his advanced serjeaoU, 
 he beat regulates his battalion } the squareneii 
 •f the march, thevompactnesa of tb« files, and 
 the equality of step, are the ^reat o^eets he is 
 to have in view. The other tpoiiBtcd offictn 
 •re behind the wings, and can assiit nock in 
 preventiog foulta and in eorreetMg Iheow 
 It \ , 
 
 AH the battaliooa of a line must halt atlbfr 
 
 game instant in consequence of thttt word, repeat- 
 
 *'ed by commanding officers, wHiether they ane 
 
 then correct or notin line. Each half battaliuo, 
 
 from 4ts own colibur, and the men lookin;rto 
 
 it, will be immediately dressed on the colouti 
 
 of the next adJoiniiu^'baitaHon} by this roeani 
 
 a general continued line. #il1- be obtained, and, 
 
 at any I ate, a straight one between each two 
 
 eolojirs it and jCall the coloiiraskauld* have truly 
 
 ;,b9M?4 in one line, the whole curpa will be con* 
 
 • p,lei<Gjiy foruM^d in a straight liue. Bui If the bait 
 
 ,ia,nutiMslt3( >n<>'l«i ^^ that, a better line muit 
 
 be obtaine'd, thv coloors af the defective bt- 
 
 taiioua will he hrcMjf hi iulo'tho geuefai \We ; the 
 
 platoon officer« wiiiquickly arraB^e themsoiveiiv 
 
 ^yes will he ordered to the right, and the T.^t 
 
 will in an instant, move up {:. too much releritf 
 
 HMfitfL be m<d ii^ «oai{^Ui!^ U^is operatioBt. 
 
138 
 
 tliaque baUiUon le regie sur left movvemeiits menls en If^ 
 de celui qui dirige, el de lui, il re|>«te rapide- gne, 
 roeot ses mott, halie, marehe, « droUe ou « gau' • 
 ehey &c, le nioindre delai en r^p^iant les moU 
 Ulte^ ou MMrche, mettra indubiUbiemeot un ^^ 
 
 deiordre daiit la ligae proporti«»nDp a ce delai, > 
 
 puitque tout« une ligne devraifc se raetlroen 
 marcfae ou faire halte au DiSmc iuaUot. 
 
 Eo ligne le commandant, par des avertiste- Jitent'ona 
 meos n)ar<j[udt| fait alonger le pas, racourcir g„ //»„«/ 
 lepas, iocliaer a droite on 4 gauche, selon qu'il. " 
 sera n^cessaire pour conaerver la place de aon 
 bataillon dana la ligne generale ; il doil surtout 
 faire aUention de voir el de prevenir lecom* % 
 roencemeat 6m fautes, et de ne pas attendre 
 qu'elies aieat eu leur effoit par sa vigilance k ,:« 
 
 bieo regler la marcbe de sea aergenla avances, 
 ilreussira a regler celle du bataillon ; P^quarri- 
 turede la marche, Pemboiteroent dea files, et r^- 
 galile du pas, sont lea ^ranJs objets qu'il aura 
 cRTue. Lea autres officiera k cheval aont en ar- ^ 
 riere dea ailea, et peuvent grandemcnt asaiater 
 a prevenir lea fautes et a lescorriger. 
 
 Teus lea battaillona d'unejigne ferout halte au JUgnemeni 
 m5me instant, en cona^quence de ce mot, r^p^f ^ «" ''l^"*» 
 par les commandanta de bataiilona, qu'iis soyent 
 correclement alignes ou non, dans la ligne g^« 
 Derate. Cbaque derai bataillon, de son drapeau 
 et les hommes ayant les yeux vers lui| sera tout 
 de suite aliga^ aur lea dra^aux du balaillon 
 vois'm : par ce moyen une ligne continue aera 
 obtenue, et toutefoia une ligne droite entre les 
 drapeaux de cbaque deux bataillona; etsi tons 
 les drapeaux ont fait h»He dana la mdine ligne 
 vraie, tout le corps sera completement form^ 
 en une m^me Hgfie*droite. Mais ai la ht^te B*etl 
 pasfaite avec juatesae, et q«'il faille Ireuver use 
 neilleare Kgne, lea drapeaux dca batailloM 
 en d^faut iieront nia dans la Itgne gln^rale i let 
 officiera de pelolMM s^arraBgwiMit vitement, let 
 yeux aeront toura^t 4 droite, et lea homineta*- 
 
 >,'^. 
 
 r- i 
 
 ii 1 
 
 I 
 
 W 
 
 liiif ii 
 
 i:v. 
 
139 
 
 
 Jntervmht 
 
 A lingle battalion, when it halta, ii thoi 
 4rei8ed on itt right or left centre companj, and 
 if therefore in a straight line. Two oattalions 
 dress each from its centre on each other's co- 
 lours, their outward wines conforming, and are 
 therefore in a straight line« Three or more 
 battalions dress from the centre of each on their 
 next colour i and therefore if all the colours halt 
 in a line, the line of the whole will be straight { 
 if they are not in a line, the general line will 
 not be straight (until a special correction is made) 
 but no flank will be thrown oat of the general 
 direction. 
 
 When a battalion retires and halts, it ought 
 never to reraai'n'ih thsit 8ituati6nf, bqt be imme* 
 diately faced about, imd.dresaed to the proper 
 front. " • -^ '•* '" ' * ,. 
 
 . «- ■ ; 
 
 .The greatest fault that a bi^tlalion in line caa 
 niakels increasing its iaierval ; bad dressing may 
 b<^ remedied without danger, but afalse distance 
 
 C resents a weak part to an enemy/ and \i not to 
 e closed, without a. hapirddus movement, and 
 great opehttidn of the line. 
 
 jtkiei in 
 
 •xercUu 
 
 Commanding officers cannot take too much 
 precaution to ascertain true points in the line io 
 which they &re to form, before the arrival of 
 their battalions in it, and this by the aid. of the 
 mounted officers. 
 
 When a battalion is exercising, singly, a com- 
 mandlng 'OJfficer may have two non*commissioDed 
 yfficer#behind each flank, properly trained, and 
 ready to run out to that flank, to give points of 
 marching,^ forming, or dressing upon the true 
 line.. In doing.which, one flAnk of the battalion 
 is generally considered as ia that line, and oflea 
 both*. , 
 
140 
 
 tanceront an m^me instant : on nc pent user 
 detrop de c^lirit^ pour completer cett^aptfra- 
 tioQ. 
 
 (In batniMon sent, t^uahd il fait halt^, est ainsl 
 aligne stir la tofnpagoie a drufte ou li gauche du 
 ceotre.cl fertile par consequent une lignc droite* 
 Truis batafllons, ou plus, aiignerOnt du centre de 
 chaque suf les drapeaux de lenr votsin ; ii s*en- * 
 
 §uit que si tous les drapeaux sant en ligne, U 
 |i<rne sera droite; s'xh ne snut pas tous en ligne, 
 la ligne g^nerale ne sera pas droito, jusqii'a ce 
 qu'ils soient sp^cialemctrt corrigfs, mais auc.^ti 
 flanc lie sera horsde la direttiun gensralc. .' 4. 
 
 Quand un bataillon fait haUe, apris s*€tre re- 
 tire, il ne demeurcra pas dans cette situation, 
 mais ii fera tout de suite denii tour a droile, et 
 aiigiiera a son propre front. 
 
 La plns^rande fanteque puisse faire un ba- InUrvalleU 
 taillon en Figne, est d'elargir son intervalle, on 
 peut renicdier sans danger a un faux aligneinent, 
 mais une fausse distance prisente d rennienii une 
 partie foibic, et ne pout se cldre sans fdire tin 
 moiiTement ha^krdeax et une grande-operatiob 
 delallgne. ' /" " \ ' < ' : 
 
 Les officiers coniniindants oe s^urOient preA* 
 dre trop de precautious pour ^tabiir les Vrais 
 points dans la ligne ojiiils doivent former, avant 
 que leurs batailions y cnfrent, ce qiii se foit pttr 
 I'aide des offider^ a cbeval. 
 
 Quand un bataillon est seifl Vrexerclce, le 
 rominandant pourroit, avoir deu|[ bas officiers 
 en arriere des flancsbien dresses, el prets k 
 courir a ce fl^iiiic pPUf donner des points de mar- 
 che de forniation ' et d*alighement sur la ?raie 
 ligne. En ce faisant un flanc du bataiHob est 
 eu general consid^r« coruihe etaafc dtos cette 
 lii&ae>tet seuy^tit, fp,detix. 
 
 Aides i^tT^ ^ 
 ercice. 
 
 » pi- tr 
 
 Ntirtt 
 
 
 
 '. m 
 
 I = 
 
 i-'i 
 
 ni 
 
 
 1 
 
 I'll 
 
 i 
 
 l» h 
 
141 
 
 JtUntimu, Wordi of command cannot be i pecified for all 
 the variety of circuni«tances and Kiliialions rhHt 
 ■occur I but commanding officers beine Ihemseivei 
 cloar in what ii to be done, should by diMtinct 
 and explicit orders, which they divide and adapt 
 for the occasion, lead their battalions through all 
 the points of execution with precision : thiti win 
 Always be found the shortest path, nor on any 
 account, should any operation, more especially 
 the correction of aa error or mistake (once a 
 battalion is assembled under arms) be performed 
 in a careless or slovenly manner, wbich will al< 
 ways be the case, if the commander's orders are 
 not pointed, loud« and sufficiently explanatory. 
 
 Close 
 column. 
 
 A battalion close column forms In Tine ^ on iti« 
 front division, on its re^r division, or on a ran* 
 tral one, according as circumslauces^reauire; 
 •and in all cases the line formed upon is that on 
 which the head of the column or columns ii 
 halted before the formation biggins; and there- 
 fore the division on which each. battalion at any 
 -time forms, moves up at the proper instant, anSl 
 lialts on that line. When Several close battaiioni 
 ■standing' on the line, Sirt to extend and forni, 
 Ihe regulating and named battalion only can be 
 obliged to form on a central division; each of 
 the others will form on ili front, or rear division, 
 Tiz. on thai which first arrives at its ground, 
 where it halts, fronts, knd occupies its proper 
 
 {>lace, while the others |inoTe on, and successive- 
 7 come op to ii« | ^,.^ > 
 
 ««r"'** *" ^n forming line frotia ctofe column, poinii 
 must Im given beyond btfth flanks in the direclioa 
 ' .of the Ime, and a mtmnted officer halts, and 
 
 fronts each division, which is especially necessa- 
 ry for those that form upon a rear dne, atthough 
 iftijl io lor those that ' form upon a front one* 
 
-^ 
 
 Colomnt cnf 
 ma$s9. 
 
 142 
 
 On lie pent trouver des mott de commandement JihntUnt, 
 pour toMie la variety des circoiislances et situa- 
 tions ii|iii surYiennent, mail les oflBciers com. 
 mandaiiti comprenaut ciaireineat ce qur doit 
 •e fairc, doirent, par dei ordres Dett. et claire- 
 nienl expliqu^a, qui seroDt divig^i, ct adapts*- 
 aux occasions, tirer leura bataillunt d^iiffaire, et 
 lesfiiire cxeciiteravec precision, par ces points' 
 inuiiUs, tout ce que le cafderoaoderai on trou- * 
 vera toujours que ceci eft le chemin M pluv 
 court ; et en q'uel eas que ce aoit on n'ex^cuters 
 aucune operation, et plus particulierement 1ft 
 correction d*une erreur, ou m^prise, (le batailloa 
 ^taot sous lee armes) d'une maoiere non-chalente . ^ 
 
 ou iourde, ce qui sera toujours le cas, si lei or- 
 dres du chef oe sont pas pr^cis» k haute voil, 
 et iuffisamment explicites. ^ 
 
 La colomne en masse d'un bataillen se fornae 
 sur sa division de front, ou de Farriere, ou 
 d'une division du centre, selon les circonstancet 
 reqnises, et dans tou* les cas la ligne de forma- 
 tion est celle sur laquelle la colomne ou les co- 
 lomoes auront fait faire Aa/te, i la t^te avant le 
 comraencemeDt de Top^ration; c'est pourquoi 
 la division sur laquelle chaque bataillon forme» 
 avance a. Pinstaot convenable et fait balte sur 
 cetle ligne. Qiuand plufieurs bataillons en masse- 
 6laut sar une m£m« ligoe doivent a'^tendre , et 
 former, le bataiiloo de direction qui estnomm'^, 
 est le seul qui sera oblif;^ de former sur une 
 division du centres leaautresse formerontsur 
 line division de front ou de I arri^re, c*est a-dire»^ 
 sur celle qui arrive la premiere; au terrein qu'elle^ 
 doil occuper, oO elle iait halter front, etdemeure 
 i sa piace^tandis que les autre»cotitinueut leur 
 warchc et arrivent en fiiccession. 
 
 Pour former la ligne d*iine colomne en masse, 
 ilfaiil douoer des points au deh de»detix fiancs 
 dans raligncmpnt du fiont^^et un o6cier a che- 
 vai fait faire /p'a//c! ti front a chaque division, 
 ce qui est surlout n^cessaire- pour ceux qui for- 
 meut sur uue division de I'arriore, quoiquc iiloins 
 a^ccssaire pour ceux qui formenl iu( unedivi- 
 
 N Z 
 
 Former 
 batailte,. 
 
 ett; 
 
 li 
 
 
 . it 
 
 i) 
 
 
 I 
 
 
 ii 
 
 I 
 
 i 
 
 (' 
 
143 
 
 V' 
 
 The dretitini^ and correction of tho line \n frontt 
 the finl^fttrmcd division towardii the olhrr flunk i 
 and ttll the eycfi of the batulton are of cuurne 
 turned to that fiiit fgrined, division. 
 
 j/s many '^^^ '*<'^ number of pointf are required for 
 
 poinlM are ^^ maroh in an alif^nement, and wheeling up 
 
 required for into line of an opea column of one baltaHnn., at 
 
 onebattalion for that of several battalionii, viz. one v^herelhe 
 
 tii for iever- line i« entered, and (always*) two beyond the 
 
 *'• head of the Column. Therefore, ailhoHs^h these 
 
 precautions may appear formal for the move* 
 
 nientt of the battalion when singlet yet are they 
 
 necessary in all its exercises, when it is recol* 
 
 lected that such battalion is in the place of aud 
 
 must consider itself a« the leading one of tha 
 
 ' ^ oolumSk on whosft correct position those of every 
 
 followinr one depandsL The same exactness is 
 
 r«qnirea in every extension from close c»kima 
 
 into line, and in every forming and change of 
 
 position, that the battalion makes. In fine, it 
 
 ^wder to qualify the battalion for acting in gen- 
 
 , eralline, it must at its single exercise work on 
 
 poMita fixed and relativo. and make no chance 
 
 ^ and accidental movements and formationa. ■ 
 
 /n all situa- Although on most occasions of movement and 
 
 tionx exact formation, and at all times in instruction, deter- 
 
 poinh of mined ppints marked by detached and mounted 
 
 ^^"''^^ C|7n- officers are given, yet such help cannot be ex- 
 
 notbegweriB pected or depended on when the line is ad vancjog 
 
 on an enemy, when a corps is harassed in its 
 
 ; retreat, and whi^n it is unsafe to send out officers, 
 
 Sfe» In such situations every thing will depend 
 
 en the eye and judgment of conducting olficers, 
 
 whQ must preserve such direction of movement, 
 
 and aeis^e such accidental points as present them* 
 
 selves, and lead to the object which is to be 
 
 ^ accorapliihed. 
 
144 
 
 " ■ ( . 
 
 iion de front. L'ali^iiement ei la correction de , ' \. 
 
 h W^r.v nottt de la divisiuii 2a premiers form^o . 
 
 vcTH liHilre flancf vl lous lui jfcitx du balailion 
 
 •oiil par cc>u»<>queiil tuiirnes du cote de celle ^^ *- ■* 
 
 qui est la premiere forrade. 
 
 he m^me nombre de point*- M)nt n^ceMtiiret Autant de 
 pour lii iiiarrhedaiis rali|>^n(*ment el lex convcr- pointssoni 
 wons poor former en batail!c d'uuecotomne ou- requin pour 
 vfrle, dNin bataillon,i|iie pour uoe de plu»ieurs, '*'* *'»'«'^^''"«" 
 « V«t.a dire, un ou la l^le cBlre en lij^ne, el (lou- ^"."^T P"**^ 
 joiim) deux au dela de la tele de la coloraue. ' •****'♦'*• 
 Done, nonobfltanl (|ue ceHprc^cautioiiaparoilront 
 formelles pour lea moiivcqients dii batailloift * 
 ({tiand ii est seul, rependant ils sunt n^'cVsiairefy, 
 ditns toiM ces exercice», qiiand ou consid^re* 
 qii un tel balaillon est a la place de plu»iour», et' 
 (ioit se re^arder conime ceiui <|ui dirt^e la co- ' 
 loniue, el qiR'c'eat desa position correcte, que* 
 ccite deS'iutres d^pendra. La mdnio exactitiMk- * 
 est rcquisi! dans diaque extension de la colonme ' * 
 en masse eo li^ne, et dau» cliaque formation ct . ' 
 ehangeiueut de position du batailUm^ Enfin 
 puur rend re un bataitton capable d^a^ir en ligne- i. . ^ * . .^ ; 
 generate, il est R^ce>saire qucf quand il eit ex* ? ^ . 
 
 erce ssul, il floit en etat'd*op.'rer sur des point* ^ 
 fixes et relatiff) et qu'il ne fasse aucuns niouve* 
 ment« ni' operation au hazard, ni de»formationt<- 
 cuumie par accident. " 
 
 Quoique dans la plus •^rande partie des occa- Dts p«tn/i> 
 
 uous de mouvements e^' de formations, et en exacts dc 
 
 tous les exercices d'instnictions, on donne des ^^^rchtne 
 
 puiulfl d^termin^s par des ofBciers a cbeval ct P«""','»< f'''* 
 
 detaches; cependanl on ne pent s'altendre de ?f^1 , ?"* 
 . J . 1 • . AX V touted les 
 
 iruuver detels points quand la Iigne avancesur gi-uations^. 
 
 reuneiivi, quand un corps est harcele dans sa re- 
 traite» et quand il sera dangereux de detacher, 
 des officiers^ &c. Dans des situations pareillei* L . 
 touldependra dePcBiletdu ju^ement des offi- 
 ciersconducteurs, qui conserve ront telle direc- 
 tion de mouvement, et saisiront tels pointtv 
 accidentels qui pourront te presenter, et qui. 
 poucront condoire i I'objet que I'oa checchc h 
 atteiadre. K S. 
 
 *< 
 
 it» 
 
 r' 
 
 w 
 
 Uli 
 
 i 
 
 i-" 
 
 s 
 
 If 
 
tU>n I '1 no 
 uiiiiation 
 ed\>erH more 
 ground than 
 the proper 
 extent 0/ Us 
 jYonti 
 
 MtarcMngin 
 0n nligne* 
 mcni,. 
 
 In whathTer nlmpe a btittation if moTihfCi llife 
 commnDdins officer it-ncvcr to logo ti>;h( of thi» 
 great principle, thnt the bultalion nlioiild at no 
 time cover more ground than \\» proper extent 
 when formed in line. Thcrefort?, if hr \n maich> 
 ing in linOi he mutt V.ike care thnt his Hies do not 
 opeii t and ifhe is marching' in culnmii, his great 
 attention is that his divisions do nol open. For 
 this purpose his marfh must be jnsl and com* 
 pact, bis wheels quick-, and alldoubriugs up, or 
 mick, which altar the e^ctent of front, must be 
 made 10 ai not to imfiedc the genei .1I imivementi^ 
 of the columnt or* to change its dislarices.— > 
 When the front it'to he dimininhed, he must see 
 that the doubling division slackens itspace, and 
 when disengaged from the other division, thatit^ 
 inclines weil up, quijrk, and covers, therebv not 
 impeding the division behind it. When the front: 
 is to be mcreased, the moving up division does^ 
 it quickand b^ oblique marching. 
 
 The commanding offi^cer mjin\ recoltect, in the 
 winding movements of the open column of 
 inarch, tlrat the wheeling dislances must be just;, 
 that the pivots are to follow on the exact tract 
 which the leading one has traced out f that the 
 whole, when ordered, halt on the precise ground 
 they then occupy {and that when they wheel uu 
 and form, the line will not tben be a'continuca,. 
 but probably an irrcgullr curved one. ISut ifa- 
 atraight line i» to be entifrred and formed unon, 
 iVom the point where the head enters* ana not 
 'aooner,. and where a. mounted officer remaifir 
 posted, dbesevery platoon pivot officer begin to^ 
 cover in the true hne, to march in that Kiie and 
 to preserve hia true distance :. nor muat any ob« 
 •tacle that can possibly be surmounted ever force- 
 the piyot officers out of that line ;. although the 
 men^ of their pjatoon, when it becomea neceuary^. 
 Mftj ojjea. ot wideiL ibeic filet, from: thena.-^ 
 
14S 
 
 r.e batailfdm 
 UftcouvrepaS' 
 fifiii tie lei'm. 
 rriity ffuelquM 
 aoit tatitua— 
 
 OUelqoe foil U fi^iirr qu'un Uataillon en mar*' 
 cHe pui^Me prendre, le chef iie perdra pag dc vtio 
 lefi^rand prlncipe, (pie le balaillun ne coiivrira 
 tnaiicutie ocrasion plus que ia juste etipace qu'il 
 (iccupo (^taiit eii ligiH; : done I'il iiiarctie en ba- . 
 taine, il prondra garde que Me»fiie0 ne s-ouTront 17^^^"'***' 
 ptftet f'il inarche en coluinuo, m* grande at* /■^.g,^; 
 tcntionncra que iies diviaiontnet'ouTrent point* 
 Et pour remplir crs objetM, sa marchc vera juste,, 
 unie et serree ;.se9'Converiiionspromptef, et tout- 
 Irs duuMrinents et dcfdouftlementf , qni changent 
 retcnduo du front, teronl tcIteiuetU ex'Ciilft,. ' ' ' 
 
 Ju'ils n'emp^cberonl pas lu niouveineiit i^^n'jrah 
 e la colorane, nine chan^cront- ses distauccti» • 
 
 Quaiid le front doit dtrc diininue, il verra a ce- 
 qne la division qui double, raicntisse lo pas,< 
 OtqiiCf lursou'il sera d^f^age do I'autre division,,, 
 elk? iodine d'un pas vif,et couvro de mani^re i- 
 nepas arr^ter la division ^ui la suit, Utiand le^ 
 front doit dtre augment^, il le sera par un mou* 
 vement vif de la division de dMoublemeot, air 
 pas oblique, 
 
 Le coromandant se ressouviendlra que dans let- Marchani' 
 mou^^ementa tortueux lie la colomne ouverle dansuna'i*^ 
 en inarche, les distauces pour la formation se* ffn^men^k 
 font scrupuleusement juttesi que let pivott> 
 suivront Texacte ITgue que la division de direc* ,. 
 
 tion aura trac^e ;. que le tout (quand il sera< 
 command^) fera halte tur le terrein qa'il oc» 
 cupe a cet inatant ;. et que la li^iie qu'il formera.^ 
 en bataillene sera pas probablemeut une ligne,. 
 inais plus vraiseBiblablenaent use ligne courbe; 
 irr^^ult^re. Mait si le bataillon doit parcourir 
 et se former en balaille tur uueligne aroite, dn^ 
 point oik ia t^te entre, et pat plutol, et od v.v>. 
 officier ii cheval demeurera. post^, I'officicr de- 
 pivot de^.chaque peloton commeucera k couvrir 
 dans la Traie ligpie, \ marcher dantcette 'igne; 
 etgarderta jutte dittaoce r et aucun rh4acle, 
 qU'il ett pofiible de lurmonter, ne forcera let' 
 officiert de pivot hortd* cette ligne t. quoiquo- 
 les bomraei de leur peloton, auand il est n^cet^ 
 fUM) eeiLf«iitoiurxir ouitcndre leuri filti»— St 
 
 .'',1 
 
 i 
 
 '■■\, 
 
 Ik' 
 
 ts.- 
 
 
 ' . 
 
 i .. 
 
 I 
 
 
 t 
 
 "1 i !? 
 
• . 
 
 14T 
 
 ii^, 
 
 f" la 
 
 t*^^ 
 
 v*. 
 
 Field 
 
 AVid'iflhe pivots, on account of any matenal 
 ohflbicle, are thrown for a lime out of the line, 
 flicy fthottid always, if possible, move to the 
 hand which carries them behind Ihe line, and 
 again re-enter it when they can ; and for which 
 purpose an officer, or non-commissioned officer, 
 should be placed where they are to re-enter it. — 
 In raarchinj; in the alignument^ the commanding 
 and niounled officers should frequently place 
 themselves in it, with a glance of the eve see 
 whether the files preserve it, and correct them if 
 necesftary. 
 
 As one field officer at a lime must commanA 
 the ballalion, the others present can only act in 
 aid of him, nor can their situation in ail cases be 
 ascertained ; but should the commnndin^ officer 
 not be at the head of the open column fwhcn it 
 mar<'hes, and particularly when it halts) to cor- 
 rect, if neccjisary, the pivois in the general line, 
 annihcr Held ofificer, or the leading oflicer, iriio 
 field officer is th<?re, should instantly attend to 
 it, that the wheeling; up may not be delriycd. If 
 in the course of exercise and instruction, the 
 eommandin!!: officer is not behind the centre 
 when the battalion marches in line or halts, 
 ftiiolher field offioer from that situation can im- 
 mediately jrive ever> proper aid in movement, or 
 in lining,* as it ou$;ht when haled ; and in every, 
 case it must be evident in what manner the coin* 
 mandiug '/ffic«r can be assisted. 
 
 EVOLUl'ION. 
 
 Evolotionsare the movementt which troops 
 
 Serforiu their manceuvresby changing their or- 
 c.r and situation relative to ground and circum- 
 stances.— Without evolutions, troops wouM be 
 Hut a mass withr^ut movement, reduced to thai 
 primitive order they were. first ranged in, and 
 incapable of acting on every variety of ground 
 wbicli circanutancei might Tcqaire, ' 
 
148 ■ :•■:-■ 
 
 li \cH n'lTols, a catlse de quelque obstacle cons?* 
 
 di'rable, soHt forces k quitter, pour UR lenis, la 
 
 ligne, il§ doivent tuiijours, sMI est possible* tui> 
 
 vro vers le c6l^qui les mencra-en acriere de la 
 
 li^ne, pour y rentrer aussitdt que possible ; et a 
 
 cette fin un oilicier, ou has ofllicier, sera place ^\^ 
 
 h ou ils doivent reutrcr en la ligne. I'eiidant 
 
 la marche dans I'aligQement, le coininandant et 
 
 Ics officiers months s'y pJaceront sou vent, et ' , 
 
 d'un diii-d'ceil verront si les files la parcou rent 
 
 pour les corriger,Vil est n^cessajre. 
 
 Vu que le bataillon ne pcut Hre coinnia<id6 
 que par un eflicier superieur dans le lenis, les Offideri. 
 autrts ne peuvent agir qu'a son aide, et la si- Superieur»* 
 tuation dans tons les cas ne sauroit elre reglce ; 
 mais si I'officier commandant ne se trouve pas -^ 
 
 i la t^te de \» colomne ouverle (en roarche, et 
 l^lus encore en lialte) pour corriger, sMI est ni'- 
 cessaire, les pifots dans la ligne g^airale, un 
 autre officier snptfrieur, ou i'officier de direction,, 
 s'il nes'y trouve pas d^offieier snp^rieur, y fera ^ 
 
 attention in8tamm<>nt, pouv qu'il n'y ait pasde " ' \ 
 
 d^lai dans le» converaioiui. Au cas que: daus let 
 coursde Texerciceet de I'iustruclion, le comman* 
 dant ne se trouve pas, et ne soit pa!) en arri^re, 
 du centre, quand le bataillon mardie en ligne, 
 ou fait halte, un autre officier supfifieur de cette 
 situation peut tout de suite donncr toutes lea 
 aides convenables pour la u^archci ou rali^ue* 
 ment, tel qu'il devroit ^Ire en halte i et en tou». • . , ,: , 
 cus il saute au yeu3(Kn quelle maniere Tofficier 
 commandant doit ^tre assists. 
 
 EVOLUTION. 
 
 Les ^Tohitions soiit let moHTem«nli que les 
 troupet pr<itiqaent pour effooltier Icurs nianceu- , 
 
 vres, changfant leur ordre et situation relatlve- 
 ment au terreia et aux circouatances.—-S{(r^ evo- 
 lutions, les troupes ne seront qu*une nia'sse i«aus 
 act i vit^, reduite k I'ordre primitiroCi elles etoicnt 
 d*abord raug^es, etiucapables^'agir dars loutes 
 K-s vari'ftes du terreia que let circoastAnceft 
 pourroDt dema&der. • 
 
 
 m 
 
 '■II 
 
 1. a 
 
 
 I f 
 
 i 'ill 
 
 ir; 
 
 '!■■:.• 
 
 ;-!i 
 
 i 
 
 
 i *i 
 
 *II 
 
 
 f i-Wn f\ 
 
 i'i 
 
149 
 
 DISCIPLINE^ 
 
 Is the iftcchaniral part of the bu«inM« rf wjir, 
 or the practice of every Ihin^that miy he execu- 
 ted in the field ; miKtary discipline may therefore 
 be defined the formation, training, and goverDe 
 meat of troops. 
 
 LINE. 
 
 When an Army is drawn up in battle array it 
 is in one or more Unef. Troops march to the 
 attack in straight lines, otherf^ise, in advancing, 
 •£ ey must inevitably fall into coafusion : but 
 troops may be formed for defence according to 
 the nature of tli« ground, in lines either curved 
 or straight. The movement»and manoeuvres of 
 a considerable line are similar to, and derived, 
 from, the same general principles lis those of the 
 single battalion. No considerable body should 
 ever Reformed without a proportion orit being, 
 placed in reserve, or in second Iines« and more 
 or less strong, adcording to circumstaBces. 
 
 Second Lines are seldom composed of ai 
 man^ battalions as the first ; they are often divi- 
 ded mto distinct bodies covering separate parti 
 of the same Kne» 
 
 The distance betwixt the Hnes may in general 
 be supposed equal to the fropt pf'two battalions* 
 
 All gre»t bodieaof troops are formed in one 
 or more lines. 
 
 E^ch line is divided into risrht and left wings.. 
 •— F.ach wing is composed 6foue, two, or more 
 divisions. 
 
 Bach di visron is composed of one or more bri- 
 ffades. Each brigade is formed oCtwiu^ three, ^r 
 K>ur battalions. 
 
 Each Ikattalion is ngain subdivided into com- 
 panies, subdivifttons, and sections^ observing only 
 that no section should,, if possible^ t^tnipjis^ of Ik^ss* 
 tbaa fi.v« filetp- 
 
 « ■ ' ■ ' 
 
150 
 
 DISCIPLINE. 
 
 XTesl la partic ni6chaniqiie de la profession 
 militaire, uu ia pratique de tout ce qui peut etre 
 «xeculel a la giicrre ; c'e^t pourquoi, la disci- 
 pliHomiiitaire peiitdtre r^^tiiie. I'art de former, 
 dresser et g^uuverner les troupes. 
 
 LIGNB. 
 
 Qiiand une arin^e est ran^^e en bataille, file 
 forme une ou plusicurs li^nes. Les troii|)»i 
 marciient a Tattaque en lii^ues droitcs. autre- 
 ment, ea avan9aut elies sciont inevitableincnt 
 iQioes en confusion: mai« les trouiies peuvcMit 
 ^Ire furni^es pour la defense seian la nature du. 
 terrein* ea ligues ou courbes on droilcs. Les 
 mquvements ft raancciivres d'nne ligne conside- 
 rable, sont semblabies, et sontderiv^es des m^- 
 mes principes |;en^ratix que ceux du balaillon. 
 Aojcim corps considerable ne devruit £tre forni6 
 gaus qu'il y e&t une partie mise en reserve, ou en 
 seconde ligne, et plus cu moins forte, seion les 
 diffe rentes circotiHtances. 
 
 Les secondes lic^nes sont raremeut coinposics 
 d'aulant dc bataiflons que les premieres; ellcs 
 tout souvent divis^cs en plusieurs corps, cou* 
 -vraotdiffer^mtes parties de la inline Ii^4ie. 
 
 En ?^nf rai ia distance entre les deux lignes 
 estegaieau front dcdenx bataillons. 
 
 Tous les grafids corps de troupes.sool format 
 en nne cm plusieurs It^ne*. 
 
 Chaque ligne est divisee en aile droit«; et aile 
 'ganche. 
 
 Chaque aUe est composite d'nne on plusieurs 
 divisions. 
 
 Chaque division est compos^e d*uiie on d« 
 plusieurs brigades. 
 
 Chaque brigade est de deux, trois, oa quatre 
 Bataillons. 
 
 Chaque batalllon est cpmpos6 de compagnies, 
 sous'divisions, et sections, observant seulement 
 ^u'aucune section ne doit oas, s'il est possible, 
 coniister de moins de c^q files. 
 
 ' 'ru 
 
 ■' 
 
 • }'■ 
 
 
 Mr 
 
 1 ' 
 
 
 
 ill 
 
 '\ r- 
 
 ti 
 
151 
 
 I HI 
 
 These bodies have their immediate comman* 
 ders Mubordinate tu each other. 
 
 Battalions are formed in line,' at a distance nf 
 twelve paces From each other, and this interval 
 is occupied Uy two cannoa, which are attached 
 to each battalion. There isVio increased distance 
 betwixt brigades unless particular circumKtanceii 
 require it In exercise, should there be no can< 
 110U betwixt the haltaiions, the iulerval majr be 
 reduced to six paces. ' , 
 
 BASE LINE. 
 
 The line on which troops in column move, or 
 are successi vely to form, is takenr up to any extent 
 by the prolongation of an original short aud 
 given base, established where they begin la 
 enter or form on that line. 
 
 In successive forming of divisions into line, ai 
 from close column, from echellon, &c. the first 
 division that arrives in, and is truly formed on 
 it, may be considered as the basr, which is 
 constantly prolonging for the others. 
 
 ALIGNEMENT. 
 
 To march or form in the Alignement^ is to 
 make troops march, or form ifi any part of the 
 atraight line, which joins two given points. On 
 the justness and observance of this line depends 
 the accuracy of the most essential inoveiucnts 
 mid formations,, and therefore, every relative 
 hel^ must be applied to ensure it. 
 
 POINT D'APPUI, OR SUPPORT, 
 
 Means that point wh)?re the leading flank of 
 the body to be formed is to rest. 
 
 POINT OF FORMATION* 
 
 Is that point, whether near or distant on 
 which the body fermisg if Xo be dreiised or 
 corrected. t^ ,^^ »«'»*iv. «* ; ' 
 
omman* 
 
 lance nf 
 inlerval 
 attached 
 distance 
 mHtaiues 
 e no can< 
 \ may be 
 
 mave, or 
 ny extent 
 shurt ayd 
 begin to 
 
 to line, a§ 
 
 \ the first 
 
 formed on 
 
 Tvhicli is 
 
 rffif, is to 
 irt of the 
 tints. On 
 |e depends 
 lovewcnts 
 rcbii^e 
 
 IT, 
 flank of 
 
 listant on 
 
 152 
 
 Cef corps auront leun chefs imm^diatt subor- 
 donn<-8 i'lm a i'tiutre. 
 
 I.e!t bataillons en lij^ne sont formes i la distan- 
 ce de douze pas run de Paiitre, ctcet intervaile 
 est occup6 pnr deux pieces de canon, qui sont 
 attnch^es a chaqiie bataillon. II n'y a point de 
 distances plus ^randcs enlre leS bri{;ades, a moins 
 que des circonslances particuli^res ne le deman- 
 (jent. — A Texercisu, si il n^y a point de canoni 
 entre les bntaillons, I'intervalle pourroit ^Ire 
 r(fduit ^ 6 pas. 
 
 LIGXE DE BASE. 
 
 La lisrne sur laqitello les troupes en colonnet 
 marchent, et se forment successivement en ba- 
 Isille, eiit poussee a PeleiuUie requisc par la pro- 
 lonc^ntiou d^me base courtc et donn^e, etablie 
 ou elles comirfncent a eulrerou former sur cette 
 ligne ; elle est nommie In base primitive. 
 
 Daws les formations siucessives de division en 
 
 ligne, soit des colounes en masse, de l'(^chelon, 
 
 &c. la premiere division qui arrive sur la lig^ne» 
 
 et se forme corrcclemeHt dessus, sera considcree 
 
 cninme la base sur laquellc les autres prolougent 
 
 amcsure 
 
 * 
 
 ALIGNEMENT. 
 
 Marcher ou former dans V alignei^enU est de 
 faire marcher les troupes, ou les mettre en 
 batailitt dans aucuncpartie.de la lis:ne droite qui 
 passe par deux points. T)e la justesse et I'egard 
 qu'on aura pour cette li^ne, d^pcudra Texncti- 
 tiide des mouvemcns et formations les plus es- 
 sentiels, c'est pourquoi toute.4 les aides relatiyes 
 duivenl €tre appliqu^es ponr Tassurer. 
 
 ' POINT D'APPui,, 
 
 Vcut dire le Voinl ou Ic flauc cpnducteur.du 
 corps qni doit se former, est pose, 
 
 POINT HE FORMATION, 
 Est ce point, quelquc soit sa distance, loin ou 
 proche, Kur lequel Ic'corps de trrtupesfonnaat 
 en bataille seraaligue ou corrig^. ' ' ' 
 
 1 n 
 
 i .• • ■ 
 
 . • .' 
 
 Mij, 
 
 II 
 
 [ff 
 
 %'■ 
 
 .■) 
 
163. 
 
 without the peraon on its flank aptpointad^o drett 
 it determioing* or at hast suppoiingja ligcun 
 which the jrank or body is to be formed : Ibe/efore 
 when tropps are to form in a straight line, two 
 necessary ' points in it mustalwaysbe pr/evioi|siv < 
 ascertainea . One« the point of apipw\ at whiph 
 one Hank of th<i body,, whetber small oi.gceat, 
 is to be placed t the. other is the poin^of forma 
 tion, placed at, or beyond the onppsiteflaiiks, on 
 which point Che body is to be aligned or dressed, 
 
 ,'; In general, the point where a formation, or 
 enlVv into an aiignement is to be mode b^iiig 
 mark«d, suppose by a capip-cotour (the point of 
 jtppui,) the commander will place a second 
 campiiColour 3& or 40 pacen beyond the tir^t, 
 exactly in thddirection^hich he determines to 
 give his new line, and which wilt generally be on 
 icnne distaiit object. These two original or base 
 points (marked by the camp-colourK) which are 
 to beprolonged and formed bnon, siiouldnotbe 
 tooclosetogether, otherwise tlte direction of the 
 line must bet indtitin<;t, and the further they are 
 asunder, the better can a line be taken upon 
 them. 
 
 ( ''' 
 
 ^en battalion!, or ^divisions of a ballalioir, 
 coine un successively into line, theoutward flaak 
 ofthe last formed and balt<ed body is always 
 considered as the point of 4ppui{ot. support) of 
 the succeeding one I and in this iiuMmer is the 
 gepecaL line, prolonged from«acb successive point 
 ofappnS Itmards tbegiven distant point of/(Mrina« 
 tion. The looking and lining . of the soldier 
 forming is alwiyt towards the point ofJ^lppuit 
 aodthftisof relation ordressing is always from that 
 point towards th^ opposite hand* This great 
 
 Erinciple is to be observed, from the smallest 
 odj to the. raoit considerable corps, . audi regu- 
 lates the.formatioo of tha divifiom tite-^attalaoB^ 
 aid the line. 
 
»> 
 
 164 
 
 'fOa lae 4o\t Jnintii aligner onr ^nnt' #v otiv 
 trodpe sani que 4fli 'pefnonne tur ton flane (pro. 
 pos^c pour raii|^er)' d^termiaet on aa m^int 
 fuppots'une I'fgiie Mir lai|uellrle rang «u la Ireu- 
 pfr 4ie doit* former ; pour cette raitoa quand 4ea 
 troupei <iotvent former rar irae ligneilroflc,- il 
 eat"tiec6iisaire tlHiisitrer deux fpoints a^aat^ la 
 i^^matioB ' -Vai^ km* point *d''&itpui,!'dt0ii uir^fllinc 
 de la troupe, grnnde on p4llilaiii«erap4a«^i i^lltre 
 est le point dt formation^ piac^ au flanc opposd 
 «tD' piut'4«iD, aur*4eqitel point ki tlFOifpe' lera 
 
 il' c. 
 
 • ( 
 
 » . 
 
 • 
 
 ^ En f 6i^ral, fe pi^int etiMl'nefm^tme'f^r'' 
 
 -* nation^ >ou^eMr^e>>dsnli J^alignienent ^tanft<niar- 
 
 * ^ufV't>A>^'"n ijatton, le 'Commandant phiceta^'iin 
 
 ier^Mid^'jalloiil 60 l><IO'}Mi»fta deli- du premier^tZ' 
 
 acteraent dans la directioR'qii'ii aortt dHefmki^ 
 
 de donner a sa nou?elle ligne, et. qui Mra en 
 
 * ^^^ral ' tfur 'qtt<;lqtie •wirfel' ^^loign*. €er tleux 
 
 pohitH'tfctttsrprirattifrtniArqfiei par del jalloilf) 
 
 > ponr'^tre pf olonf^it etaertir de points de forma - 
 
 ' fion, nt sercmt jyaa Itop'proehes Mun de l^^ntrc ; 
 
 Autremeofla'dir^ctityflTtle'la |igiicr sera^oniVi^e, 
 
 iJt'ptuif'ils'feronr'&^par^s; et |>nis facile feraiti^ii 
 
 ' de prttadre unc^ (igne dessua.' "^ 
 
 'Quand des bataillona ou det divisionf* d'uo 
 kataWlon* arrivenl sutccssiTemeiit en Jigne^ )le 
 ' fian'c ext^ricur du corps qui le vlernier a. foriti^ 
 at #ait' ballet >est loujaiira con«idir^,comme>!e 
 p^ nt d*at)pu i ,• »de cehi I qu r « Kb ani 1 1 et de CMtte 
 mani^re la ligne gen^rale est proUngee lie 
 ., chaque point d'appiii successivementt vers le 
 "<potnt ^loigii«! d» formaiian. i'Jb^aaik'etraligne- 
 '-'nionf da smldat est' toujoavt Tortile paint (Tap- 
 *«pui^* et lacoi*recllion ou ttli^nemaat est tonjo«ra 
 "^^^ilepiiist ce-^ointvers oec6ti«»»pA»e - C'e grand 
 printipe a0ra:>ob8erv6« du^pltia petit an plus 
 ( grainl ooriM/et r^glera knfevaialioailailaaiaio 
 *'atMi^Mly¥aliiUon«tdeJalifl»e«^ i u^ , . .< ? 
 
 02 
 
 M 
 
 i''> / 
 
 /. 
 
 V .. 
 
 
 
 4 i''ii 
 ■f' ; ' "I 
 
 ^1^ 
 
 1 ' 
 
 ■i 
 
 
 1' 
 
 
 4 
 
165 
 
 ■I I 
 1 
 
 Oo all occasions, without exception, of forin- 
 ing anddresHingiuline, it must bo reinombered, 
 that the soldiers come into line with their eyes 
 turned to the general point of appui wbece . the 
 leading flank is to rest, and of course to what- 
 ever part of aline is nearer to that point than 
 themselves, which may be already formed before 
 them, the flank of which is to tiiem a dtrection 
 or new point of appui. 
 
 The officer in dressing, without exception, is 
 placed on the flank' of his division or body to- 
 wards which the men's eyes are turned, and 
 fiom thence he makes his corrections on the 
 ^distant point, which is previously ihariked by the 
 Adjutant: therefore, qu all oqcasions, by the 
 men lining themselves to one hand, and the 
 officers correcting to the other> the most perfect 
 line may be obtained. 
 
 Should it be neglected to give or prepare 
 f uch points of correction, the dressing of the line 
 would be irre°:ular and slow, and depend entirely 
 on the men taking it up from each other, and 
 from the first formed flank, which is an imper- 
 fect method, andean never produce'a just line. 
 c'<ipHbIe of marching forward in due order. The 
 having such points quickly and successively pre- 
 pared the instant before they are wanted, and 
 without any noise or apparent bustle, so that no 
 delay may be made in the operations of the bat- 
 talion sr line, is one of the great attentions of the 
 commanding officer and Adjutant, and in this 
 they may be assisted by welUtrained camp- 
 colour-men. 
 
 Whien the persons who prolong a line are on 
 horseback, the head of the horse of each standing 
 pei^endicular to that line, is the object, and 
 when they dismount, their own breast is the ob- 
 ject which the shoulders of the leaders of the 
 diviiionsof acolumuin march rase in passing, 
 find which is ia the line of the head of the lionet 
 
156 
 
 En touted occasions, sans exception, dc for- 
 mer ct aliiiiicr en bi:itQille, ii r<ml sc rcMouvcnir 
 que les solJatseutrenlavcc les ycuxtourniK vers 
 }e point ii*appui g6n5ral odest tixi le flanccon- 
 ducleur, el par consequent sur loute partic de la 
 li;;no qui est plus pres de ce point qu*ciix, etqiii 
 sera dcjafonn^e avanl eux, et dont le flanc sert 
 ppureux de point ifappui, 
 
 L'Cyficier, sans exception, quand il diri<;c I'a* 
 li^iiemcnt, est place an flanc de sa division vers 
 iequel lesyeuxdcs hommcssont toiirn^s, et d'uii 
 ilfait ses corrections sqr le point eloigiKS qui 
 aura ete niarqtie et indique prealableiiient par 
 IWdjudant. Dune en to it les les occasions, leshotn- 
 mes s'alignaiit d'uu cule et les officiers corri«^ 
 gciint de Pautre, la I'lgne la plus parfaite sera 
 obtcnuc. 
 
 Si on nigli<;e de donner ou de preparer tefs 
 points de correction, ralignement en bataille 
 sera irregutier et lent, el d^peiidra entiere- 
 meat des honames qui le prenneiit les uus desau- 
 tre!i, et du fljnc premierement form^, qui estt 
 utie m'thode imparfaitc, et ne peut jamais pro- 
 duire une I ignis Ju.ito, :apable de marcher en 
 avunl dans Pordre convenable. Une des ^raudes. 
 attentions du commandant et de l*adjudant sera 
 de trouver promplement et successivement de 
 tels points, et de les preparer a I'instant avant 
 qu'iis soient dcmand^s, et sins faire debruit» 
 ou du fracas, de maniere a ne causer aucua 
 delai, dans les operations du bataillon ou de la 
 ligne, et ils pourrout se faire aider par desjaloiw 
 neurs biea dress's. 
 
 Quand les personnel qui prolongent nne ligne 
 sent § cheval, la t^te du cheval de chaque etant 
 plac6e perpendiculairemeat a la ligne, est Tob- 
 jet, et quand ils raettent pi^d iterre, leur pro- 
 pre poitrine est Pobjet qui sera rase par let ' 
 condncteurs d^s divisioDS, et qui est dans lai li- 
 cue de lat^ttdu che?al. C*est encore la poitri- 
 •.. ■ i. - V • , s '^ '* 
 
 ^\ 
 
 ;l 
 
 ^i 
 
 /' 
 
 \ 
 
157 
 
 It II also the breait of such other men an may be 
 posted oa foot, which the several leaders in like 
 ttiaaaer rase, as they successively arrive at Ihem. 
 
 DEPLOY, DEPLOYEH. 
 
 The literal translatian of this word is unfold: 
 We have no word to st»b«tilute fur it. A culuina 
 is said to deploy ^ ^heu ihe divisions that cum* 
 
 Iiote it open out or extend, in order to form 
 ine upon some ooe of thone divisions. 
 
 PROPER PirOT FLANK. 
 
 When the ballalioii stands in open column, the 
 proper pivot flank, is that which, when wheeled 
 9p to, preserres the divisions of the line in the 
 natural order, and to their proper front. 
 
 mVBaSIOV OW the B4TTALl0lf OR COLUMN. 
 
 If the battalion standing in open column with 
 its right in front, is to be wheeled into liDe,'lhea 
 to preserve the divisions of the line in their na- 
 tural order, and to their proper front, it would 
 receive the command, to tne left wheel into 
 line. If the left w;is in front, then the com- 
 mand would be, to the rieht wheel into line. But 
 if the column stood with its right in front, and 
 received the command, to the right wheel into 
 liue, then the divisions would be inverted, or, as 
 it is commonly expressed, the regiment would 
 be cluVd : for, when wheeled into Hoe, it would 
 stand fronted to its former rear, and although 
 tvery company, singly considered, would be pro* 
 perly formed, yet altogether the order of the oat- 
 talion would be in? erted, that is,tbe light infantry 
 would be on the right, and the grenadiers on the 
 left { the right band roan of the grenadier! 
 would stand next to the left hand man of the 
 first-battalion company ; whereas, if they stood 
 in their natural order, the right hand man of the 
 irit battalion conkpanj would touch thelefthand 
 MM oi the irenadieri^ mA fo of the oib«rfk' 
 
 
•158 ., 
 
 oe dei lutres bommes po»l^s a pird, que fet 
 conducteurs de la iii'}ine maniere niMtrront k 
 meiiire qu'iliarrifcut siicce«»ivciiieDla eux. 
 
 DEFLOIEMENT, DEPLOYER. 
 
 On dit qiie la colonne dtfploye quaiid Irs divi- 
 •iotttf qui n compu«ent f^etendcut, pour i'ornxr 
 •i bataille aar une de cea divifliuiit. 
 
 FLANC EHJ PIVOT. 
 
 Quand le batai lion est de pied ferine en co«^ 
 lonae ouverle, la droite en front, doit roiiver- 
 ler en bataille, alors, p«ur cooterver lesdivi* 
 liont de lalit^oedans leur ordre rcgiilier, el A 
 leiir propre froot^ il recevra le inot a gauche ea 
 bataille. 
 
 VUI 
 
 i '• 
 
 INVERSIOlf OV BATAILLOM OV COLOMNC. 
 
 Si la gauche 6lait en front, alors le mot 
 •era ^ droite en bataille. Mais si la colonne 
 la droite en t£te, recevait le mot k droile en 
 bataille, alors les divisions seraient inverties t 
 car quand pour converser i droite elle a fait 
 front d ce qoi itait son arriere, chaquc com- 
 pagiiie, consid^r^ seule, derieut regulierement 
 forinee, cependant Pordre du bataillon sera 
 reiiverfd, c'cst-a-dire, I'infanterie l^^cre sera 
 i la droite, et les grenadiers a la gauche, Phom* 
 me de droite des grenadiers se trouTcra ac6t^ 
 de Thomnie de gauche de la premiere compa?nie 
 du bataillon i an lien que i'ili ^taient dans leu r 
 ordre r^golier, Pkonnne de la droite de la pre«> 
 miere compa^nie da bataillon toucheroK Pbum* 
 ire de gauche det greoadiers, et ainai des autrea, 
 Nonobstaot qu'en eendral, PioTersion de tout 
 corps de troupes en ligne doive ^tre ^Tit?, n^an* 
 iDoins il y a aes lituations ou il faut se ditpen* 
 aer de cette regie et avoir recours k la formatioa 
 la plus ,prMnrpte obtenue enrers un front parti- 
 cutter. Lebatailloa ou la ligne eatiere ,pour- 
 foitdtre obligee defiire^eim tour i 4rdit«, el 
 
 iiii 
 
 ^ 
 
 l:i:- 
 
 .:m 
 
159 
 
 « 
 
 1 
 
 / /. 
 
 Allhoiitrh, in gencralf the )nT« »innofp.ll bodiei 
 in lino in to be avoided, vet tli.re :^t V'^ualionii 
 where Hi'iN rulu ftittsl be ()iii|i(!n»<*d v ''v nnd th« 
 i|iiit'k('9t funntttion to a particular f ' . I'tcreby 
 obiaincd. The batialion, or a whole line,Mnn^ 
 be obliged to face to (ho rii;ht about, and op|)o»c> 
 id rc.ir ranks to the enemy, instead of chau^in^ 
 its po.iilion by a counter-march. The coiuiun 
 mav be obliorca to deploy with its rear ranks '.a 
 front, and all its divisionn inverted. Troojs 
 must therefore be accnslomed lo such operatioiu: 
 but tho application of them requires g:real method 
 and recollection, otherwise, in such critical si. 
 tnations confusion is very easily produced, and 
 wUI beultciulcU with the most fatal consequences. 
 
 FLANK. 
 
 Flanks of a hattalion are the ri<;hl and left of 
 the battalion. Every division has its rif^ht and 
 left (lank. If the battalion in line is faced to 
 tlic ri;;i)t» the froul rank is the Ictt flank ; if in 
 column li>e ri;;ht in front, then the left or pivot 
 is the It ft tlank, the reverse flank is the ri^lit 
 flank : and the contrary when the |cfL is in froaL 
 
 TIRVERSE FLANK. 
 
 The reyerse flank is the ftauk not the pivot ; 
 on (his flank in close column, thesupernumerarj 
 officers^ colours^ music, &c. are placed^ 
 
 COLUMN. 
 
 When the divisions (hat compose a battaKon, 
 or other corps, stand the one directly behind 
 the other, and parallel to each uther, thai bat* 
 taiinn or corps is then in column* 
 
 Column divisions cover and dress to their pro. 
 
 Jier pivot flank, to the left when the right is is 
 iroot, and to the right when the left is in front. 
 All columns are supposed formed from line for 
 the convenience of movement, and forib;^^u^ 
 poie of again extendiog into lin«» 
 
160 
 
 #pf)oier ion dernior ranf^, on de chan|ifer w 
 
 riiiition pnr la conlremarche des Coini>(i);nies. 
 a coloniie pourrait itrc obligee de deployer 
 aTcc ion dernier rang a u front ct touteticBdi- 
 viiions invcrtiei, Cc»l poiirqiioi un acroiilu- 
 mcra leu tronpei )i de Rentblablei opc^rations t 
 mail leiir application domande beaucoup de 
 m^thode el de pretence d'eiprit i autrement dana 
 del situation! austi critique! la confusion lera 
 Ul» aisement engendr^e, el produirales cout^- 
 queoces les pJiis nineitet. 
 
 FLANC. 
 
 Lei flancf d*un bataiUon font la droits et la 
 faufhe, Cliaquediirisiun a son flanc droit et non 
 flanc gauche. Si le batailtou en Itgne fait un i 
 druilc, le premier rang sera le (lane gauche. Si 
 en coionnei lai droite en front, alors la gauche 
 ou pivot est le flanc gauche, le flauc oppose est 
 celui de droite i et le contraire quand la gauche 
 
 eitoDfroat. 
 
 • » 
 
 rLAMC orrosa' on flahc db airsas.. 
 
 Le flanc oppos^ est celui qui n'eit paste piTdt i 
 Ici ofliciers suroumeraires, les drapeaux, la 
 luuiique, &c s«mt places li ce flanc quand leba< 
 
 taiilonest en n^ise. 
 
 COLONNE. 
 
 ..' Mt.i <• ' ■ 
 
 Quaad Ujt. divisions qui composent un bataiU 
 loa ou autre :Co,rps, sont placees les uncs a la 
 queue des autres en ligne directe, et paralele» 
 lei unes aux autres, ce oataillon ou corps est a« 
 Ion forme en coloone. 
 
 Les divisions de la colonne couvrent et s*alU 
 gnent sur leur propre flanc de pivot, a la gau- 
 che quand la droite est la t^te, et a la droite 
 quand la gauche est la tele. Toutes colunnes 
 lunt sensies Hre fonnees de Ford re en bataille- 
 pour la commoditd des u()uvemeati, et pi^uit 
 ilre apr^ etendueaen bataiile^ 
 
 ■;' . \. 
 
 ' % 
 
 4 
 
 ' 
 
 ■;'>*! J 
 
"> 
 
 Ml 
 
 Wlien tho diyifiont of a colomn- are diiiait 
 from each other, bj the length xtr eilent of the 
 *> <^ Ihetii, the J beiu^ eiU:h ftuppotcd to coniiitof 
 ^•■B equal nmnber of files* their rt-ir caUed an 
 
 OPEN COLUMN. 
 
 The line Hroakf into open column, li]Mihaili 
 v^C tk^ quarter circle. 
 
 *'An open cbhimn oerapies the nnie eitent'ofl 
 
 {ground as when in Hiie,' ^liiii« the'frOAtt)fito 
 eading di?ision. The chief objects of the opei 
 column are facility of movement, the quick 
 ^Ibrmaftton of -^Ihe Hoe to tbr> flank, and tin 
 •' «han|^e df litaatton in ihe shortest line fromaiil 
 ]poiitiOB io another |- it is named the 
 
 COLUMN OF ROUTE. 
 
 'Upben applied to> eonmwn ntarchet ^ wher^lk 
 attentipn of men and officers arer not^aaOMittl 
 kept on the stretch, the column of route, furmi 
 by-diviikms^of the faattali^n-.^ itilhd yfoundatiwj 
 
 '9f al) £^reat distant movements, an«| even ( 
 eT9|utioiiWand ntnuoeuvrips. All marches ai 
 Ihfre^oi'e nia^e in^^olumn of divisions of the line,! 
 
 . and iiover biVsi less front than six files wfieretj 
 formation is three deep, or fouV filtrs wl)^re it 
 two deep. Where a c^mstderable space it tu 
 gone over, the front of the column shuufdnut 
 
 omore tkan sixteen ^r eighteen iles. 
 
 Jn the route march, it is not to be iiipp< 
 that mea cdti.'for anV considerabfc^ledffth uFlin 
 c6ntihue to nfai'ch'i'^i th<^ rfeg'rilitt- c^df'oce oflj 
 paces of 30 inches each in the niinut^l ^^fij 
 may be abiolutety becfcslfary where the'arri»» 
 Ji column' at a giveti point 'is id he perfl 
 punctual, lliat the column'iiho'lifd move at III 
 fate I in which case, ^he dtstahicb being; knoi 
 a well drilled serfeant Mh<>tlld irmrch at Ihet^ 
 of the <iolumn, ih the' <iiact cadcfnc^ of time ; I 
 ight be relieved fiitif hilf Irmir by aii^C 
 
 Quand 
 I i'aUeatioi 
 ^Mii stri 
 formee d( 
 tioi) deto 
 lu^me dei 
 [qnai lau 
 de' divisii 
 
 I Bi^indre 
 
 troid de 
 
 formatioi 
 
 loQfiea ui 
 
 front de 
 
 iKizeidi: 
 
 En roil 
 
 ||^> i Niir 
 
 pour long 
 
 poucciip^ 
 
 yer des ca 
 
 hi fail t gu 
 
 m objet i 
 
 irai«ond( 
 
 pdnt com 
 
 f»«ilal^< 
 
 [relev^ au 
 
 :. I 
 
162 
 
 duaoil (eft. dnrUions d'une> colooie font I' la > 
 diiUtice les unes.det autrei, igti\9 I leur front, 
 le« ; diviiions. dlanl suppoi^rs consiiter d'uo 
 numbre de Alei^gules, alurs elle est numm^e la 
 
 COLONNB buVERTE* 
 ^li(4eeitroniiiu« en coloiine ouTortCi par 
 la coBvemion det cfivitioiis, d*un quart de cerele. 
 Lii colonue ouvcrte occupe la inline ^leiidue de 
 terrein»'delai^te a la.4|ueiie, qu'elle couvrait 
 I en bataillc moins le front de< sa division de la 
 t^t$. Les «objel8!4)riiieipanx de laculonneou- 
 verte sont la facility J u inouvcment, laforina> 
 tioQ subite en balaiUe' versle fl:incv I'tle chan- • 
 ||reroeiit deiilualion par leiiiisues Its plus courlei 
 d'UDo position iuneauUet elloest nomni^e la » 
 
 C6L0NNE DE ROUTE. 
 
 Quand on s'en scrt aux marches ordinal res, o(i 
 
 faUeation det honiinies et des officiers ne tont 
 
 Mtii strictemeut exie^e, la colonne de route 
 
 formee des divisions d'unbalaillon, est la fonda- 
 
 tion (le tons let grands mouvementt tloignes^ et 
 
 mdme det dvojutiontct inaooeuvreA. C'««ti)f>ur« 
 
 \i{\\o\ toutes let inarches sunt faitcten rolonne 
 
 iilef divisions dc la li^ne* et jamais sur un front 
 
 BiQindre que six files quand la. formation est & 
 
 \Uo\i de hauteur, ni de quatre filet, quand la 
 
 forinatioD ett a deux de hauteur. Qnand la ro» 
 
 loQiie a une etpucv contiJ^rable i pancourjr, I9 
 
 front de la colonne ne sera jamais deplutde 
 
 Uizeidixhuit files. 
 
 En route ou dans la roarchede route, il n'est 
 ||»ai i supposcr que les homraes continuerunt 
 pour longtfjms le pat do cadeove de 15 p^r de 30 
 poucfii p^r,ipiuMte,cependaolt ■! pourra seiroii* 
 Ter des cas ou il est absulnineot p^cestairet.-quand 
 ilfaut que la colunne arrive h point n^mme* ft 
 uo objet indiqn^, que la colonne regie samarchc 
 Iraidon de cette meture 1 en ce cat, la diptance 
 Uiint connue, un sericent bien discipline roarche- 
 \n4 lat^e de la colonne au pat caaenci i il' tera 
 Ifelev^ au bout d*uDe demie beure par uri'ttutrt 
 
 I'lf 
 
 - u 
 
 
 « 
 
. "n. 
 
 : f • •• 
 
 f . 
 
 I t 
 
 163 
 
 equally well-drilleil serjcant or corporal, which 
 march the coinniaiuiinijf officer mi^ht occasion- 
 ally (if r, quisile) res:uiatc by hj« wtitch ; in this 
 case, the attention of ihf* rent of the culnmu is 
 allowed to be reliixcd, the Hohiier moven on 
 wi'hout the restraioJ of ciiil^nce of «tep, or car- 
 ried arind ; rfciir rai.ks are opened to one or two 
 paces; files are loost ntd, but nfver confounded; 
 but in no situation is the ordered distr^nce be- 
 tween divisions ever to bo iniTeiiied, and the 
 proper flunk o»ficers and undcf t'fficern reniiin 
 answerable for them. Whf^n platoon officers are 
 permitted to be mounted, each will -remain on 
 the flank of his division, watchinjj (JveriJs cxiict- 
 nesfl. ^'hen cannon can possibly move on the 
 flank of the b:ittalion they <>n<;ht, and mounted 
 officers or bat horses must not be permitted be* 
 twixt the divisions. 
 
 THE COLUMN OF ROUTE IS NAMED THE 
 COLUMN OF MANCRUVUE, 
 
 When beinsf within reach of the enemy, the 
 gi'ealesl exactness is required, in order to its 
 •peedy formation at any in<(tnnt into Ine, during 
 its transition from ore position to another. At 
 no time whatever ouijhl the column of maneniuvre 
 or of route, to occupy a ffr('at<'r extent of ground 
 in marchinqj, than what is equal to its front whffn 
 in order of battle ; no litualion can require it as 
 an advantage. 
 
 ' CLOSE COLUMN. 
 
 When the divisions that form a column are 
 no more thari one pace digtant from each other, 
 it is called a close column. 
 
 The battalic^n close column forms in line on 
 Its front, on its rear, or on a central division bj 
 the deployment or Jlank march, and by which it 
 successively uncovers, and extends its several 
 iivitioiof. 
 
 ■i. 
 
 .i 4^' 
 
164 
 
 Sergent ou Caporal^^alenientbien drett^, etia 
 commandant (ni ii y a besoia) r^glera la roarche ' 
 de ce bas oflf^ier par oa tnontre : dans ce ras, 
 lalterition dii reste de ia cuioniie peut se rcla- 
 ciier, Ic soldal avancesans j^t^nts de pas cadcnc^ 
 ou d'annes portcet, Icm deriiiers ran;^9 sunt oii- 
 Terti h un ou deux pas { Ich files sont desert eet, 
 mail jamais coirfondues ; mais lea distances en- 
 trc deux divisions lie seront jamais aiigmenteei 
 eo aucune situation, et les ofHciers et bas offi- 
 ciers aiix fluncs rosient res|)onMab!es de K iir 
 exactitude il)uand ii est permis aiix officiers 
 d'etre i chevai, rhacun rentera au flanc de sa 
 division, pour veiller a son exactitude. Quand 
 les cauous, c'est>a*dirc Tartillerie, ou piereg de 
 canipagne penvent faire route au flanc dii ba- 
 tailion, ils doivent le faire, et on ne souifrira 
 pas que les officiert monies et les chevaux de 
 basse mdlenlentre les divisions. 
 
 LA COLONXE DE ROUTE EST NOMME'E CO- 
 
 LONNE DE MANCEUVRE. 
 
 * 
 
 Quand ^t&nt a porli-e de Peuncini, la phu rU 
 roureuse exactitude est indispensable, afin de 
 Fa fonuer soudaineinent en bataille, durunt sa 
 transition d'une position a une autre. La coloo- 
 nede route, n'occupcra jamais une' etcndtie de 
 tcrrcin dans sa marche plus grande que ce qui 
 entt'gal ^ son front quand il est en bataille ; car 
 d'aiigmenter les distances ne saurait etre avau- 
 tageux en aucune situation. 
 
 COLONxNE EN MASSE. 
 
 Quand leg divisions qu: forment la cnioune, 
 De jont qir& un pas de distance I'une de Tautre, 
 cllts sonl nomm^cs, Colonne en jnussc. 
 
 Lebataillon, de colonne en masse, se luet en 
 bataille sur son front, en sKri^re, ou sur une 
 division du centre, par le d<plo lenient uu mar- 
 che ^v. flanc, et par ce moytMi ses dittV- rentes «K- 
 visiuasse de^ageul en successiuu, el s'eteudeni. 
 
 i- f 
 
 1 1 
 
 'M 
 
 I 
 
 I 
 
1 
 
 * 
 
 165 
 
 FreTious to it* deployment, it will stand two 
 compantei in front, that ii, it will form a Cdluinn 
 of strand divisions, and must be well closed up 
 before it deploys. 
 
 The march to and from the field oft* xercise in 
 €oluran, should be considered hm ona of the most 
 material parts ofexerr.isu, and "be made with at- 
 tention, equality of step, just di«i»T.nce», and iier- 
 fect order; the front of the march slvonlo be 
 frequently increased and diniini!ied. and the 
 battalion at different periods formed by wheels 
 to the flank, to shew that distances have been 
 duly preserved. . 
 
 fiCHELLON (prom echelle, a ladder.) 
 
 When the divisions of a battalion arc placed, 
 not directly behind eich othor, but parallel lo 
 each other, like a stop-ladder, or a fliirht of nteps, 
 such battalion is then in Kchetlon or in Kchellon 
 column, and it is thrown into this fori-.i from 
 line, by the wlieel of divisions, less than the 
 
 ?uarter-cirrlL', which places them in Itie posilion 
 or making oblique changes, 
 
 The attacks of considarable bodies are almost 
 alwaysconducted on the principles of the echeiioH. 
 
 Echellons are either direct or wheeled. 
 
 The direi^t echellon is formed from line, by 
 the perpendicular and successive march of divi* 
 iions to front or rear. 
 
 The wheeled echellon is formftd from line, 
 or open column, by the wheel of its divisions, 
 backward or forward, always less than the qnar* 
 ter circle. 
 
 The echellon may be considered as a column 
 of a particular kiad, as well as the open colunui. 
 
 » * 
 
 I ;, 
 
166 
 
 Prfalablement Rti (1t'|)loicment, el le aura deux 
 eonipa<r»»it'» »lt^ front, t'est-a-dire, elle formera 
 unr coloiiiic de <j;rnniie divisions^ et sera biea 
 emboilee avaiil de d^ploycr. 
 
 La iTiarchc en alianl a I'exercice, et en retotir- 
 nant du champ, scca t ii colocoe, et doit ^tre 
 consid^i^e, comme uue des parties les plus es< 
 wMiticlle/* de I'exertice, ct sera cxecutee avec 
 aUcntioD, ^<;alili de pas, distances jusfes, et 
 parfiulement /.'n ordre ; le front de la marche,. 
 lern tVeqtiemmenl aiigmente et diminue. ct le 
 Baliiillou de terns a autre for md en bataille par 
 dcN (|tiarts de conyersion, pour montrer quelef 
 distances oDt ete duemeut gard^es. 
 
 ECHELON. 
 
 Quand Irs divisions d'uo Bataillonsont plac^ei, 
 Don directement en arriere, les unes des autres 
 mais coinme les pas d'une echelle, et paralelles 
 Tune a i'aulre, comraelespat d'uD escalier, ie! 
 ordre est nomine Ef:helont> et un Battaillon 
 ainsi arran^^, est un Echelon ou en colonne d'e- 
 chelon, et il est mis en rette forme par une con- 
 -fersion de ses divisions moindre que le auart da 
 cercle, et qui les met en position derairedet 
 changements obliques. 
 
 Les attaqut'sdes corps considerabfef sont presqoe- 
 
 tonjours conduites, sur U: principede rEcbelon. 
 
 , Les Echelons sont <<u dtcects ou do? ronversion. 
 
 L'Rchelon dirert est form<f de la Vifi;ae ea 
 batttilie, par la marehe perpendicuiuirie et dUC* 
 cessive de s« JivisiouH, en uvant ou er. arriirei 
 ii est forme de ia c(>L)mic, par la ma.")ie paral- 
 l^le de ses divisions a droite et k gaucitc, qui 
 font htilte en succession. 
 
 L'Echelon de conversion est fbrm6 de la ligne- 
 en bfltattle par la conversion de ses divisions en 
 avantoiien arriere* mris^toujours moindre qu'uu. 
 quart de cerrle uu de la colouuc onver4eparJe 
 nicme niOyen. 
 
 L' Echelon pnurr» ^Ire consider^ comme une 
 colonne d'uac espece parliculiere aussi bien que 
 ia coLumteoiUverte. il peut aussi 6tre couaid^- 
 
 ( » 
 
 ■ 
 
 H 
 
 I ; 
 
 .1 
 
 1 
 
 1 ; 
 
 I 
 
 .■(! 
 
 11^ 
 
 hi 
 
i) 
 
 f.T 
 
 1^ 
 
 ■ : '167 ■. ; 
 
 When the Battalion mocing in line^ pasaes 
 a wood J or other impi diment^ to front 
 or rear, by the filing of companies, 
 
 •*■ 1. Jf to pas i a wood or other emha missed ground 
 
 to the front : when it is found npi'rssarj' to break 
 
 the b-dltarutn, the coininauder Hill order it to 
 
 Pass to the P^'^ from the right of coin)>nnicfl tathc front, on 
 
 front. whicli each c«ni|>!uiy oificer orders hiH company 
 
 Hight turn, right turn, wheels out hiH leading file, and passes 
 
 on as fast as the di^Tioulty of the ground will aU 
 
 ' low him, endeavoring tu preserve a relative dii- 
 
 ' ' I tance from the left as being the head of the co- 
 
 ' ' lumn, or from the other flank if particularly so 
 
 ordered.— Each officer on arriving at the farther 
 
 edge of the wood will hall hm eompany, and 
 
 remain till the others are cortie up, and till the 
 
 whole are ordered to march out, andfr^rmia 
 
 ' battalion ; which will generally be done bv ittLnd* 
 
 ' ing in open column tne left in front, dfreising 
 
 pivot flanks, and wlieeling up into line.— Or, if 
 
 the comnanies form separately on thd ed^e of 
 
 the wooa, they will march out and join m tht 
 
 battalion. 
 
 ,%, If to pass to the r^ar.— When the battalion 
 
 retiring in line, arrives at the point where it 
 
 Passcompa- roust break, it is ordered to pass companies 
 
 nies byfles. by filcs.—^lThe leader of each gives his word 
 
 Left turn, left turn, and proceeds as-above directed (the 
 
 Q, march. ^j^ajjg of files are regulated from the left ; and 
 
 ufter quitting the wood, at an ordered distance, 
 
 „ .. f tbey hall, front into column, the right in front, 
 Maujnni. ^^^ ^j^^^, ^^^ ,j^^ j^^^ ^^^ .^^^^^ linc.—The line 
 
 ihcD again retreats if necessary. 
 
• 168 
 
 • I ' ' ' * 
 
 • . ■ H 
 
 I' fii cnnnme iin eiipece de lig^ne en baUiHe auiii. 
 bien que la iil.iie ea baUille en ordre oMique. 
 
 Quand te hfttaillon marclte enHgnCj e$ 
 pause un hois, ou autre obstacle^ en a* 
 vant ou en arriere^ par la marche de 
 files des compagnies. 
 
 1. 5/ cVs( pour patter un hoit ou autre terreiit 
 embaTHsse en avarU ^ quarul il sera n^ceMaire de 
 romprele bataillon, le commandant ordonnera 
 ie passer de la droile de compagiHet en avant^ 
 lurquoi Pofflcier de chaque corapa«(nie ordon* 
 ne a v\ cnmpagiiie '* a droits** •* prtmiire jUe 
 kgnucke" il conduira »a premiere file que li 
 compagnfe »uit antant que hi difficult^ du terreia 
 le permet, ttichant de ^arUer uoe distance rela- 
 tive de la ^.luche comine t^le (ie la colotine ou 
 de Taiitre ftaiiCy ki c'est part ku linemen t ordoilf 
 B^. — Chf^qiic ofiicier arrivanta Tautre liM^re dtt 
 bols, fera faire ^ halte** » sa cuinpa^nie jusqu*! 
 Farrivre du rcste de m compa<;nie, et que le tout 
 ait ordfe de marcher, el furnier en hataiUe ; ce 
 qmi le fera <;6n^ra>lemenl de la pcsttion de la eo* 
 lonnc ouverte, la sraucbe en l^te, alignaot let 
 flanc« de pivots el t'ormant eu batnilie. Ou bien, 
 fi lea euro paguies forjnentf^p;\remeiii4 la liaicre 
 du buis, cnfit noiarcheront et joindroat le ha* 
 ta'rilon. ' 
 
 8 Si c'eH pour passer en arriire. Quand \t 
 bataillon se retirant en ligne, arrive au point 
 «i^ il faut rompre, il a ordre de passer par files^ 
 par compa^nier Le chef de chaque donne la 
 mot *' gauche )" et procdde comnic il est or> 
 donn^ ci deisus ;. let l^tes defiles sont r^f t^es d« 
 la gauche ; et apr^s avoir paM6 le boia, k une 
 diitanee ordonn4^e, elles feront *^ hatt^^ front 
 en f donne la droitte ea tdte, et formeront 
 bataiile par un quart de conversion b gaucho» 
 la Kftat «wmIiiii« m rt traite si c'eal ulooffalria 
 
 ' -^,v »> 
 
 
 Pattet tl^ 
 avant (I 
 droite. 
 
 Compoifiiu 
 
 posset put 
 
 Jihs^uttrtug 
 
 igauchc^fM 
 
 redoubts^ 
 
 marche. 
 
 ^ HalUfrom, 
 
 i 
 
 • 
 
 ( 
 
 \4 ,i! 
 
 J! 
 
 )l 
 
 il 
 
 
 i: 
 
 ii 
 
 i^t''!^ 
 
 
I, 
 
 169 
 
 WHEN THB BATTALION FORMS A SaiTARK. 
 OR OBLONG. 
 
 m 
 
 Hi- 
 
 CMtiOK, 
 
 Form 
 square^ 
 Companiei 
 \ inwardtface. 
 Q, marcfu 
 
 Maltf/ront, 
 
 y 
 
 Cautioii, 
 Form 
 iquare, 
 Comp€miesi, 
 backward 
 whoeL 
 ^; march. 
 JfMtty droBt^ 
 Might about 
 /ac0, march ^ 
 
 iroa. 
 
 t. The 4th, 5th, Otb battatibn companies 
 ftand fait (in ronseqiience of the explanatory 
 caution that ii ^iven preparatory to frtrmtn^ the 
 lqaaro)« the rest of the battalion faces inwards, 
 and dioengao^es the heads of companies to the 
 rear t the colours and their coverers fall back, 
 the 4th company closing to the left to fill un their 
 
 ftlace. They march quick. — The Tih, 8tn, and 
 ighi companies place tliemselveS' in open column 
 behind the 6th ; the Sd, 8d, and 1st, place 
 themselves in open column behind the 4lhf 
 the grenadiers place themselves between the 
 light company and the Isfc.— When these three 
 last companies close up (o the 8th and 2d, and 
 face about (having each first counter- marched^ 
 if iL is thought necessary to hav« the front rank 
 outer-most) at the same' time that the Tth, 81b,. 
 and the Sd, 2d»^ wh<?el outwards, the oI>loDg 
 •tands complete, or,, the square may be a perfect 
 one, if it it composed of the eight battalion 
 fOropaniet only ;. the grenadier and light com* 
 pany being in reserve in the rear, ready to be 
 applied according to clrcurastanceji. 
 
 S. TV rquare of oblong majf be formed by*the 
 4IA, Sth, %th eompanie* Handing /asl.— The rest 
 of the battalion wheeN backward, eacheompaay 
 the 8tb of the. circle, on its inwacd flank. — 
 They face about*. They narch to complete 
 jthe square as above; each wheeling whec it 
 eomes to its ground, and then fronting aud m this 
 mit.nuer will the proper front rank of the rear face 
 be otitward.—The commanding officer^ colours, 
 and thtir coverersi drums, &c. &e. ar« within 
 the square, as aho the battalion guna which are 
 thifted to wherever they are most necessary.— 
 The square is composed of the fi ont, the right, 
 the left, the rear faces : tba front iVtia that oft 
 which th* f quara origiaallj foriiif» 
 
I , 
 
 170 
 
 QITANOLB BAtAlLLON FOHMV EE QICTAR. 
 RBV OU L'OBLCHiiG^ 
 
 mtnf, 
 
 Forme % U 
 
 p'igmes, et» 
 arrif-re ptt^ 
 redoubUf 
 marcht. 
 
 I. Le»4mo, ftmr, ttme comp«gni«i dti bataiilon 
 le boii^ent (en cons^'quencede Pex|»liealioii qui 
 a iU doBii^ avuDt de furvner \c nuarrO ie« au^ ""'7''' " 
 kretcompaghiM dH baMKin font fare en de. "HZ'SfyH 
 danft oil init'rieuremeol, ei d^boitent lea t^ie de 
 compAgniea ena;rri^re» tea drapeaux et leura 
 ^uvraura font qtielquea paaenofri^re^ la 4*me 
 coropagnie faiiant quelquea paa de €6i6 a la ^zn^ 
 (he pour les remplacer, ellesiiMrcbent nu pas re« 
 douol^ f lea line, §me el larcompR{;ni» le^^rc ae 
 
 Slacent en colonne ouverteenarriire dela6me |. 
 1 3me« 2me et Ire te placcnt en colonne en ar- 
 riere de la 4me. lea ^enadiera se placent entre 
 h Compaj^nie Hg^re et la (re. Alors ces troia 
 corapagnies derni^rement dikes* eloront vera 
 la 8me et la 9de ct font derni lour i droile 
 (ayant prealablemeut fait cKarune aa coutre- 
 marcbe, ai c'est jcU^^ necebsaire d^avoir le pre- 
 mier ran^en dehors) au an^me temaque le Tmo» 
 8me, etlesSme^ 9de font la conversion en de- 
 hors, l'obl»n^ estcomplct, ou« le quarr6 pour* 
 roil ^tre parfail s'il n'est compost des huit com 
 pagnioa de balaitlon seulrment : les grenadiers 
 et la compagnie l^gdre 6tant en reserve en ac- 
 riere,. prdtsi agirselonleseirconstances* 
 
 2. Le quarr^ CMi Toblong peut se former en 
 frisant tenir ferme les 4me» 5me et §roe compa- gnemcnt"dei 
 zoies. Le retted u bataillon fait la 8me partie mi Uur A 
 du cerde par conversion en arri^re, sur son flanc dtoite^ maty 
 interteur.— >lls font demi tour a droite OM a gau- eAs, halU, 
 che. lis marcheot pour completer le qnarr^ front^aligw 
 comme il est dit dcssus ; chacun faisant la con- ^<"'» 
 version quand il arrive sur son terrein, et alora 
 liit front, et de cette raani^re le premier rang . 
 de la face de Parri^re sera en d^hora^ — Le Com- 
 mandant, lesDrapeaux, et leurs couvreurs, lea 
 tambours* &c. sont ^ndedana du quarr^, ainsl 
 que les pieces de campagneattach^es au bataiJloa . 
 ^ui seront apr^s mises ailleurs, ou en aucune * ' 
 
 situation oik ils seronk utiles. Le ouarrtf eti 
 •ompok 4«» iMei dc fronts dedroiU» it caucb«> 
 
 
 V y 
 
 IfaUe, MlU 
 
 

 .It 
 
 ' 
 
 171 
 
 The $qtmre 
 will march 
 to fronts 
 vear^ righi, 
 •r Ufl. 
 March, 
 Malt, 
 Front 
 
 S. fFhen lUe f^mre or obhng h to mMtek h$ 
 Mff f ««7te«f tf^^Tlie tide nhirh ii to leirf Uqft. 
 nounced \ the cotourt mute up behind its cen- 
 tre! the opposite lide facet about \ and the two 
 fl^ik «det wheel op hy aab-ditiiiona, fu at to 
 ataiid each in open column. The iqt^nre ninrchei, 
 
 «two ffidet in line» and bjr their eenlrir si and two 
 •idea in open eolumn, «hlch cover, and dren tt> 
 their inward fianka on which thej wheeled uy, 
 
 ^carefully prcierving their distnnce«.<^The tquaie 
 haila» and w*"Mi ordered to front aanare, the 
 attb-diviiiona in c»liimn iromediatrly wneel hack, 
 and form thntr aidea, and the side wlkich faced 
 nhcHa aftinfkcenoHiwardfw 
 
 I' cl 
 
 
 I •>."t 
 
 ' • > riiJ 
 
 ;^ ;»i} . ijtiilii ^U fJuaii :»i* hi". 
 
172 
 
 l.f qunrri 
 maithffaau 
 front, Varm 
 riiicodroitt 
 OH it gauche ^ 
 Murrhe, 
 Halle, 
 
 etd*arri^re: la fifc du front ctl celle iiir la- 
 quelle le qiiarr^ m forme nrii;iiiiiireni«nt. 
 
 3. QuniiH Ic quarre on ubion;; doit marcher 
 par nucune face — Le cute qui doil condiiirc est 
 aniioncc ( lei dmiieanx avanc^s derriire le cen- 
 tre do lelle face ; la fare oppof^f fait dcmi 
 tour i droite i et le« deux facex qui forment les 
 flaiici font conT«rt*un de inanicre qu'ils forme- 
 ront chacun une jolonne uuverte. Le qiinrr6 
 narchcu deujc c6t^i en lif^ne, et par lenr centre; front ^ quaW" 
 et deux cdt^i en colonne ouTerte, qui couvri- ''^ 
 ront, et icrupuleutement ronaerveront loura dii- 
 tances, et aui aeront ali?n< a a leur ilanc inttf- 
 rieur, aur lequel ila ont ?orm^. Le quarre fait 
 huHe^ etau mot*'^i««rr//rim/»" lea sium d* 'iai* 
 oni en coIoddo inataroment font conf en en 
 arri^re, et forment lei. cdtd!«, et le cdtf' quiavoit 
 nit demi tour d droite, eo fait un autre pour 
 fiire face ea 4^hort. 
 
 > 
 
 ^i % 
 
IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 k 
 
 // 
 
 
 fe 
 
 1.0 
 
 I.I 
 
 Ul 125 
 
 Hi m 
 
 ^ MA mam 
 
 It 
 
 L£, 12.0 
 
 IL25 i 1.4 
 
 1 
 
 1.6 
 
 Photographic 
 _Sdences 
 Corporation 
 
 23 WEST MAIN STREET 
 
 WEBSTER, N.Y. 14SS0 
 
 (716) •72-4503 
 
 •N? 
 
 V 
 
 V 
 
 :\ 
 
 \ 
 
 V 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 o^ 
 
 «^ 
 
 
? 
 
 4^ 
 
 
J73 
 
 FIRST MANCEUVRE. 
 
 ' . 
 
 Close column in rear of the right division. 
 
 Commanding Officer. 
 
 Caution. 
 
 Commandfl, 
 
 Words of com- 
 mand t^by Offi. 
 cer»of divisiooft 
 
 The battalion 
 ill form co- 
 lumn of divisi- 
 ons in rear of (he 
 right diviNdn. 
 
 Form column of 
 grand diviiionv. 
 
 3 
 
 The column 
 will close to the 
 front. 6 
 
 Tbexiolnmn will 
 take ground to 
 
 Remaining divi 
 sionsto'heright 
 face. 1 
 Quick march. 2. 
 
 Left divisions to 
 Ihe left face. 4 
 quick inarch. 
 
 March,* 
 
 to the right face 
 
 [quick march. 7 
 the right, and|6th grand di?i- 
 ctnthem^rchde-sion kalt front, 
 ploy on the rearliih grand divi- 
 f|and division, si on halt front. 
 
 3d ditto do. do. 
 
 8d ditto do. do. 
 
 1st ditto, dow do. 
 
 2d division, halt 
 front, dress. 
 3d division, do. 
 do. do. &'e, 
 
 2d division, halt 
 front, iiress. & 
 raarcii. 
 
 Halt, dress, eyes 
 front, &c. &C. 
 
 2d graad divi- 
 siQD, balt» dresik 
 
 3d do. do. d(K 
 &c. &c. 
 
 Dress. 8^ ^b 
 grand division, 
 marcb,. halt, 
 dress, eyes front. 
 
 Dress, 4th grand 
 div. march, halt 
 dre^s.cyes iroaL 
 
 ditto do. do. 
 
 ditto do. do. 
 
 ditto do. do. 
 
1-74 
 
 PREMIERE MAN(EUVRE. 
 
 La Coionne en Masfic en arriere de la Division 
 de la droiie. 
 
 Corn'mndoinont ihiChet. 
 
 •Mots (I'ex^cii 
 tion. 
 
 Li division droi- 
 te ne bouge: di- 
 visionti t!c giiii- 
 
 Mots d'avcrtis- 
 8cm<M»t 
 
 Lcbataillonfor<! 
 
 Riera uncGolon- 
 
 De en ma.sge en 
 
 arriere de ia di- 
 
 risioD de la 
 
 droite. Iche adruitc. I. 
 
 Fas redouble, 
 raarchc. 2. 
 
 DivisloiisdegaU' 
 che a «;auche. 4 
 Pas redouble, 
 marche. 
 
 Marehe. . 
 
 Mots des Offi- 
 ciersdedivisioa 
 
 Formez la co 
 loonc de ^rande 
 division. 3. ' 
 
 La coionne ler- 
 rera le front, g. 
 
 Xa coionne mRr- 
 chera a droite, 
 eten marche de- 
 ployera sur la 
 
 irande division 
 erarriir^. 
 
 A droite, pas re 
 4locijl)l6, marche* 
 t. 
 
 5nie grande di- 
 visionhaitefroQl 
 4e grange divi- 
 sion hake front. 
 Se ditto do. do. 
 8e ditto do. do. 
 ire ditto do. do. 
 
 t 
 
 2de division, 
 halte, front ali- 
 ^iiemeot, . 
 3me div. do. do. 
 do. &C.&C. 
 
 2de diy, halte, 
 front, ali«^ne- ' 
 men t.d. marche. 
 
 Halte, alic^ne- 
 ment, fixe, &c, 
 2degrande divi- 
 sion, halte, ali- 
 gncment. 
 
 3me do. do. do* 
 &c. &c. 
 
 Alignement 8, 
 6me grande di« 
 vision, marche, 
 halte^ aligne- 
 ment, fixe, 
 Alignement- 4me 
 6 D. marchew 
 halte: aligne* 
 ment, fixe. 
 Ditto -do. do* 
 
 I Ditto do. do; 
 Ditto do. do 
 
 
 — \ 
 
 
 •til 
 
 m 
 
 ll 
 
 I 
 
 i 
 
 
175 
 
 Remarks on thejirst Manoeume, 
 
 1 . The commauder and Serjeant coTerer of 
 the lot d'lTision face to the rig^ht about; aud shift 
 by Ihe rear to the left of the division ; the Ser- 
 jeant coverer places himself eight pacesin front 
 of the pivot flank to nrark the perpendicular of 
 the column i as soon as three divisions ha?e 
 marched into column and correctly covered he 
 will resume his station in rear of htv commander. 
 
 2. On the word, ** march, " the rear rank of 
 the 1st division locks up. 
 
 3. The commander of the 5th division yiovei 
 his division six paces te the right by the side 
 ftep, to give space for the colours. 
 
 4. All supernumeraries face to the vight, and 
 on the word quick march, go to the rear of the 
 column and form rank entire. 
 
 5. On the word ** dress.'* to the left divisions, 
 after filing out, the Serjeant coverers of them 
 step forward and place themselves in a line with 
 the ri^ht divisions, and become the outward 
 point for the dressing of the lefH division*. 
 
 6 On the caution the column, ^ill close to the 
 front ; the commanders and serjeant cpverert 
 in i he centra, face to the left about, and shift 
 -by the rear to the right of their divisions ; the 
 •erj^antcovererson the lef>, face to the left* 
 about and shift by X\tt rear to the centre of 
 grand divitions. 
 
 7. In this deployment care must be taken that 
 the 1st grand qivision does notshut out the point 
 of dress by marching 00 theline. 
 
 ,9. On the word ** dress** to the 5th grand 
 division, a supernumerary serjean^ from that 
 divifioM will ftep forwarjd andpUce himself on 
 
176 
 
 I 
 
 Remarques sur Id Premiere Mttmoeuvre, ' 
 
 1. L'Officieret le Sergent coavrdar delapro* 
 miere (livifion, font demi tour adroite, te pk* 
 ceiil a la jj^auche de la diviiion, le sergeDt cov 
 vreur »e places 8 pas en avantdu flanc de pirok 
 pour inarqueria perp'endiculaite de lacolonoe: 
 aussilot que 3 divisions ont marche dads la 
 colonne ct couvert correctetnent, il r^sumera 
 •a station en arriere de son ofEcier. 
 
 2.. Ati^not ** marche" le dernier rang dela 
 premiere division emboit^ra. . ^1 
 
 3. L'Olficicr commandant I& 5me division fail"^ 
 faire a sa division six pas dc c6t6 il la droitCv 
 pour faire place uux drapeaux. 
 
 4. Tous les surniiinerairesfonta droite, et au 
 mot " pas redouble^ marche^** se portent a Tar- 
 rieredeia coloune, et se forment sur un ran^ 
 
 6. Au- mot» ** j4iign€inent^" donn^ aux divi. 
 •ions de gauche, apres leur mnrche de files, let 
 Serpens convreurs de ces divisions avi^nceront 
 et se plac^ront en ligue avec les divisions de 
 droite, ietdeyiennent les points exlerieurs pour 
 ralignement des divisions de gauche. 
 
 6* Au mot d'avertissement la colonne serrera 
 au front : les officiers commandants de division 
 et leurs sergenls couvreurs au centre, feront-. 
 demi-tour a droite, et se porteront par Tarriere 
 a la droite de leurs divisions ^ les sergens cou* 
 vreurs a la gauche font derai«tour a gauche et se 
 portent par Tarriere au ceqtre de leurs grandes 
 divisions. ^ ■ ' ' ' 
 
 7. Dans rex^cution de ce deployement il faut 
 prendre garde que la premiere grande division, 
 ne ferme pas la vue du point d'alignement, en 
 roarchant sut la ligne. 
 
 8. > fi mot, ** alignement," donn<S \ la Sme 
 grande division, unsergent su'rnumiraire de cet- 
 te division ava^cera et se pl%eera lur la neuTeUe 
 
 , • ' I 
 
 P 
 
 ,■■■ sh 
 
 jS-l 
 
 1- 
 
 <", :. if. .1 
 
 ;V 
 
177 
 
 tfae nerr line, with the camp coloun on the right, 
 and becomes the inward point of dressing; the 
 cyfficer on the right of that division taking care 
 on the *' halt" to post himielf in a line with the 
 ipoiots on the right for the outward point of 
 dressing) a« soon as the grand division is correct* 
 \J dressed* thecontmander gives the word **ejfes 
 front," and shifts by the rear to the right of hit 
 <oWn divif ion. 
 
 ... .«"-,' ... •■ , 
 
 N. B. It iii to he ohserved as an invariable 
 trule, that when the commanders of diyisiuos 
 ihave to shift from one flunk to the olher of tbeir 
 divisions, it is always to bo done by the rear and 
 iieTer bv the front. . - 
 
 h 
 
 .it.> 
 
 ^ ■ ' 
 
 iM. 
 
178 
 
 Kgne, ayant let jallopi i droite, et devient lit 
 |)oint mtericurd*alig:nement,rpffic'ier i la droile 
 dc cette division, prenant ^arde an mot **haUe** 
 dc se posteisen raligneroe.ntdei (foinlR k }a droitc 
 qui scrvent de points ext^rieurf pour raligne-' 
 ment : aussit6t que la grande divitipn est cor- 
 rectenient alignee, le cbef donne l6 mot **flxe" 
 et change dc place par Tarriere a la droite d^ sa^ 
 propre division. 
 
 N B. ll faut obserrer que c'est tme r^gfe in* 
 variable que les chefs de divisions, quand ils doi* 
 vent changer d*une place de lenrs divisions ^ Hau* 
 tre, ce changement se fait toujoars par Tiirriere, 
 tt^amiiii par le front. 
 
 St' 
 
 JT 
 
 If 
 
 r- 
 
 I 
 
 at 
 
179 
 
 SECOND MANCEUVRE. 
 
 ' M 
 
 Close Column in front of the left division* 
 
 Camnianding; Officer. 
 
 Caution* 
 
 Gominandg. 
 
 Words of Com- 
 mand, by Offi- 
 cers of divisioos 
 
 Tbe battalion 
 will form aclo.te 
 column of divi 
 sion« in front of 
 the left division. 
 
 I 
 
 ^maininffdivi* 
 Dioni , to tbe lefi( 
 face. 1 
 Quick miirch* 9 
 
 form column ofjLeft 
 graadjdiTisiou.S 
 
 Tbe column 
 will tloie to tbe 
 front. 6 
 
 The column 
 will t^e ground 
 to the left, and 
 on the march 
 deploy on the 
 front grand di- 
 
 TlfioD* 
 
 diriVioBS to 
 the left face, 4 
 quick march. 
 
 <■■ ■>. 
 
 -t— • 
 
 March. 
 
 9tB dWisibo, 
 faaIt,front,dress, 
 8tli division, do. 
 do* do. &c. 
 
 8d division, halt 
 front, dress. & 
 3d March, halt, 
 dre8s,eyes front, 
 &c. &c. 
 
 2d grand divi- 
 sion,iialt, dress. 
 3d do. do. do. 
 &c.;&c. 
 
 To the left face, 
 quick march. 7 
 1st grand divi 
 ston halt, front. 
 3d grand divi- 
 sion ball, front. 
 3d ditto do* do. 
 
 Dress* 
 
 Dress Sd grand 
 division, march, 
 halt, dress, e^es 
 front. 
 
 ' /' 
 
 •■> 
 
180 
 
 of Com- 
 
 by Oifi- 
 
 divisioos 
 
 SECONDE MANCEUVHE. 
 
 La Colonne en Ma«s« en avant de la Division ie 
 
 gauche. , 
 
 CominandemeiirRdu Chef. 
 
 d'averlit' 
 seinent, 
 
 Leb^tailloafor- 
 mera ia colon 
 ne en masse de 
 division en a 
 rant de la divi- 
 lion de gauche. 
 
 Mots d'ex^eu- 
 tion. 
 
 La division de 
 gauche ne bou 
 >j;e : diviVions, i 
 gauche. I 
 
 Pas redouble, 
 raarche. 8. 
 
 Formez la co 
 lonne de grandc 
 division. 3, 
 
 La colonne ser 
 rera au front 6. 
 
 La colonne mar- 
 eheia 'k gauche, 
 et en marched e- 
 pioyera sur la 
 
 Srande division 
 e front. 
 
 Divisionsdegau 
 che, a gauche. 4 
 pas redouble, 
 marches 
 
 Maicbe. 
 
 A gaucbe,pa8 
 redouble, mar- 
 che. 7. 
 
 le. grande diyi- 
 sion,halte,front. 
 2e grande divt 
 ftion halte,front. 
 Se ditto do. do. 
 
 as 
 
 Mots del Offi* 
 ciersdd division 
 
 9rae divisroD, • 
 
 halle, front, alf« - 
 
 fgnement, 
 
 8me. 7e. 6e. 6e. - 
 
 4e. 3e« 2e. Ire. 
 
 div.haliejfront»> 
 
 alignement. 
 
 2me. division,' 
 Halte, front, all- 
 gnementr &.' 
 
 Sme. marche. 
 halte, Aligne- * 
 inent, fixe, &C. 
 Sde grande divi-* 
 sion, halte, alU' 
 gneraent. 
 3me. 4*6. G. di- • 
 vision. halte,' > 
 alignement^ &c» 
 
 AtignemeDt^ 
 
 Alignement^ Se*' • 
 G. D. marche, . 
 halte. Align** - 
 meatj fixe. • 
 
 •it II 
 
t81 
 
 * Remarks on the Second Manoeuvre, 
 
 h The commanders and serjeaat covcrers face to 
 Ihe rightabout, and shift to the left of thcirdivisionii 
 the Serjeant coverer of tlie left divibion pl.ioes himself 
 eight paces behind the pivot flank of that diviston, to 
 nark the perpendicular if the column ; as soon as 
 three divisions are iir column and' properly covered, 
 be will resume his place in rear of his commander. 
 
 S. On the word ^* march/' the rear rankof'theJefi 
 division locks up. . 
 
 3. The comnmnder of the 5th division moves hi« di. 
 vision six pace» to the right, by the side step, to gi?e 
 tpace for the colors. 
 
 4. All supernumeraries face to the right, and on tie 
 vrord ^uicA; march^ go to the rear of the calumn, and- 
 toipk rank entire. 
 
 5. On the word ^* dress,**" te the left divisions-after 
 filing out, the Serjeant coverers of them step forward 
 and\place ihemselves in a line with the right divisions, 
 and become the outward point for (he dressing of the 
 ieft diyisioDS* 
 
 6. Op the eaaiioDj the colamn will close to the froDt^ 
 the commanders and Serjeant coverers in the centre, 
 face to the left-about, aud shift to the right of their 
 divisions ; ^he serjeant coverers on the left face to the 
 
 ' left-about, and shift to the .centre of grand division!. 
 
 7. The officer on the tefl of the 1st, grand divisioa 
 will march correctly on the camp colours onthelefl 
 placed for the- line, and when halted and fronted, to 
 glance his eyes to the left, to see that he is^n the cor- 
 rect line, and becomes the outward point of dressinc 
 for the grand division ; the officers on the left of each 
 tocceeding grand division, observing, la like manner, 
 B» they are halted in the line to dress on the camp co- 
 lours correctly for the outward point of dressing j as 
 
 ^loon as the grand division is correctly dressed, the 
 commander gives the word '** eyes-front,** the officer t>B 
 «ke left vriU iluft to the right of bis diiriiioo. 
 
182 
 
 Remarques sur la seconde Manceutre:^ » 
 
 1. Lcsofficier»et sergens coiurrenm font de» 
 mi'tour i droite, et diaiii^cnl an flanc •;nuche dc < 
 leursdivi»ioni I ieserf^unlcouvreur dc la divi. 
 lion de j^aiiche se place a 8 picds en arriere du 
 pivot de cettc division, pour iiiari]iirr laporpen* 
 dvfulaire de la colunne ;. aiignitot que 3 diviMiuut 
 seruDt en colonne et propreinent coitvurles, il 
 r^sumera sa place en arriere de son commandant 
 lie divisiun. 
 
 8. Au mot, '* inarche " le dernier Fan^ de la 
 division de droilo emh..:te. . 
 
 3. L'Officier de la Sme division fait faire a sa-> 
 division six pas a la droUe, par le pas de cote, ^ 
 pour donner place aux drapeaux. 
 
 4 Tous les sergens surniimeraires font a droi- 
 te, et au mot, " pas redouble," vonl en arriere 
 de la roloiine, et forment un ran^.. 
 
 5. All mot, " aligttement,"doiiii6 aux divi- 
 lions de gauche, apres avoir dedoubh^ par la 
 marche de files, ies serpens couvreurs de ces di- 
 visions avancerontet sc placcnt en li^^ne avec let 
 divisions de droite, et dcvieiuient le point ext^« 
 rieur pour I'alignement. des divisions de gauche. . 
 
 6. au mot a'avertissement, '*la colonne ser- 
 rera vers le front,** Jes officier» cheftf de ces divi- 
 sions et leurs sergens couvreurs au centre, font 
 demi tour si gauche, et changent \ la droite de 
 leurs divisions ; les sergens couvreurs de la gau- 
 che font demi-tour i ^auehe, *et changant air 
 centre de leur»grandes divisiont. 
 
 7: L'Oflirier h \i\ gauche de la premiere grande di- 
 vision marrheracorrectementsur les^iallons ^lagaucbe 
 places pour marquer la ligne, et quand il aura fait 
 balte, et front, il jeftera hs);6retaent les yeux 4 gauche, » 
 pour voir si ilest dans la vr4ieligne,et devient le point 
 exterieur d*alignement, pour la grande division, les^ 
 officicrs ^la gauche de chaqueerande division suivante, 
 observeroBt de la m^e maniere, k mesure qu'ils font 
 balte dans la ligne de s'aligner sur les jallons correcte- 
 ment pour point exterieur d'alignement ; aussitdt que 
 la grande division est correctemeotaligoee, lecommaiK 
 dam donne le mot ** Fixe" Tofficier & Utgaache daaagf^ 
 ift de place i la droite de la dlvi9k)iu 
 
 •1 
 
 Mi 
 
 .' V 
 
 li, 
 
 :■ 11 
 
 ' « 
 
 I 
 
 ' i 
 
H 
 
 », 
 
 183 
 
 > 
 
 THIRf) MANCEUVRE. 
 
 « 
 
 Close column on a central division, facing 
 
 the Hear* - 
 
 Comitisiiidiug; Ollicer. 
 
 Cauliou. 
 
 Commandi. 
 
 Word* of Com- 
 mand, by Oflli. 
 ceriofdivifioni 
 
 The battalion 
 trill i'oriuu close 
 column of divi. 
 siuns on llie 
 ripht cenlre di- 
 vision, ri«;ht in 
 front and facing 
 to the rear. 1 
 
 The close eo 
 luronn ill change 
 its front by the 
 counter march 
 of divisions. 6 
 
 Thevhole will 
 counter-march. 
 
 Remaining: divi- 
 sions, ont wards 
 face. 4 To the 
 right counter 
 march, quick 
 march. 
 
 The column will 
 deploy and form 
 fine on the right 
 centre diYision.7 
 
 lo the right face, 
 left divisions file 
 out. Quick 
 march, halt. 
 
 Quick march. 6 
 
 Right centre di. 
 vifiion to the left 
 face, 2 to the left 
 counter* march. 
 Quick mnrrh, S 
 Halt front, dreu 
 hack* 
 
 Remaining jflTi- 
 vision outwards 
 face! 
 
 Quick march* 8, 
 
 4th division halt 
 front dress, eyes 
 front. 
 
 6th ditto do. do. 
 &c. &c. 
 
 Ist division halt 
 front dress, eyes 
 front. 2d Ditto 
 do» do. &c. &c. 
 
 5th Division, 
 march, haH, 
 drcsf, eyes front* 
 
184 
 
 TROISIEME MAN(EUVRE. 
 
 La Colonne en Masse sur une division du 
 centre y faisant face en arriere, * 
 
 toiiimandemeats du Chef* 
 
 MoU d'exdcu* 
 
 tion. 
 
 Mott den Offi. 
 cieradedivifioQ 
 
 Mots d'ftvertis 
 
 sem enU 
 
 lebetaillon for-l jDivUiun drpitc 
 
 nera une colon- La divUtondroi-du centre kgau* 
 
 ne rn Masie de 
 diviiiom, sur la 
 diviiion de la 
 droite du centre 
 ladroite en front 
 et faiwnt face a 
 
 la colonne en 
 muse chan^era 
 toDt front par la 
 conttemarcbe 
 iei 4iviiionS| 5, 
 
 te du centre ne 
 
 bouge. 
 
 diriiionSfiidroi* 
 
 te rt ii gauche, 4 
 
 contremarche, 
 
 pai redoulil^t 
 
 nuirche. 
 
 che, 9. 
 
 Tootes let diri- 
 I lions feront la 
 coDtremarche. 
 
 la colonne de- 
 ployera et for. 
 meraen bataille 
 lior U division 
 droite du centre 
 If. 
 
 A 4rolte, divisl 
 ons de gauche, 
 p9r files» debpi 
 tez, pas vedou 
 |)l^aiarche„bal 
 te. 
 
 Pas' redouble, 
 marche, 0. 
 
 La ^JTision de 
 la droite du cen* 
 tre ne bouge. 
 
 Divisions vers 
 les flancs) ii droi- 
 te et a' gauche. 
 
 Fas redouble, 
 marche, 8» 
 
 Agauche contre 
 marche. Pas re- 
 double, inarche» 
 3. Halte, front» 
 ali^nement W 
 arriere* 
 
 4niQ. divisioi!* 
 halte, front, alir 
 gnemenf, fixe* • 
 6e. ^iviiion hal< 
 te, front, aligne- 
 ment»fixe|. . 
 
 Ire division JiaU 
 te, front, aliguf- 
 nient, £se. 2nie- 
 Sme 4me 5e ^ 
 7e8e9elOebal* 
 te, fr6nt,alignei>^ 
 roent, fixe. 
 
 5e« division, 
 marche, l^jilte, 
 alignem^nt, fixr 
 
 V 
 
 A 
 
 n 
 
 I h 
 
 ',..U' 
 
 
 
 ! 
 
 i 
 I 
 
 ' 
 
 '-'l 
 
 
185 
 
 Remarks on the Third Mamceuvrc. 
 
 •vs 
 
 1. On thil caution the commander of the right 
 centre division will counter'ma.rch his division 
 ky the left. 
 
 2. On the word " face," the commander ^\\\ 
 himself face to the right-about and shift to the 
 lejft of his division, the Serjeant coverer taking 
 his place and faces to the right-about ; the two 
 left tiles as soon as they have faced, Trill discft* 
 gage to the rear. 
 
 X As soon as the counter-march is completed, . 
 to dress Jiis division correctly on the fi-ontrank. 
 
 ~ 4. On the word " feice,*' all the commanden 
 and Serjeant coverers of the left wing will faceto^ 
 the right-about, and shift to the left of their 
 divisions ; the two right files in each divisiojiof I 
 the right wing will disengage to the rear { the' 
 two left files in each division of the left wing 
 will disengage to the front $ the colour divisioa 
 faces to the left, and counter-marches with tbe| 
 ^Ih division. 
 
 5. Oil this caution air the commandert ofdi« 
 Visions turn to the left and shift to th€» right ofl 
 their divisions, theserjeant eovererilim^iedial^ 
 < ly replace them, and on the column facing to the | 
 right they come to tl^e right about. 
 
 On this caution also the colour division will 
 step two paces forward, and when the divisiooil 
 counter-march, they willcounter-march on their| 
 own ground. 
 
 . 6. As the commanders lead their divisions UM 
 to the Serjeant coverers, they pass in the rear oil 
 t^iem,. and give the word '* halt," &c. &c. 
 
186 
 
 Ih .>i 
 
 Remarques sur la troisieme Manceuvre* 
 
 1. A cet avertisflcmeat, I'officicr' cle la ^ivi- 
 liondroite dii centre, fera faire la coDtr«inac- 
 che a sadivisian par la gauche. 
 
 8. Au mot, **k gauche," I'officier luim^rof 
 feiademitoura droite, et ira a la gati^he desa 
 divhioa, le sergent couvreur prend' sa place et 
 fait deiui-tour a droile; les deux files dc gau- 
 cho, aussitdt.^qu'Ua ont fait a gauch«e, d^boitO- 
 root ea arriere. 
 
 S. Aussitot que la contremarche est cumpl^* 
 tee, il dressera sa division correclement sur l« 
 premijei rang. ^ 
 
 1 - 
 4. Am mot, ** i drolte el h gauche,*' tous leS- 
 chefs de division et sergens coiivreiirs de Taiie 
 gatu'he feront deini-toura droite, ct iront a la 
 {gauche de leurs divisioni; les deux files de Ia 
 droite de chaque division de Taile droile d^boi* 
 teront en arriere ; les deux files a la gauche de 
 : chaque division del'aiie gauche deboiteront en 
 front, la division des drapeaux fait a gauche et 
 coQtre -raarche ayec la 6e. division. 
 
 Sme. A cet avertisscment, tous les chefs de 
 
 •divisions tournent a gauche ct dhangcnt a la 
 
 droile de lebrs division, les sergens couvreurs 
 
 les rcmplacent instamment, et quand la colonne 
 
 fait a droite Us feront demi-tour a droite. 
 
 Ace cautionnementttussi, la division du dra- 
 peau avancera de deux pas, et quand les divisiont 
 font la contremarche, elles I'ex^cuteront sur 
 kur propre terreifi. 
 
 6. Quand les chefs de diyision conduiront 
 leurs divisiens vers les sergens couvreurs, ilt 
 passeront en arriere, et doanerout les moXtf 
 « halte, &c. &c" 
 
 i' < ! 
 
 \\ 
 
 i 
 
187 
 
 - - ' 
 
 7. On Uiit cftutioii the coramandert and terjemt 
 coyerers of the left win^, and the serjeant coverer 
 of the right centre division will turn tolbe right* 
 ibout and shift to the' left of their diyisions. A 
 supernumerary serJeant from the right centre 
 division will, at the same lime, sten forward to 
 the head of the column, to mark uie new line 
 wherie that diyision is to halt. 
 
 8. The right centre division should be marched 
 up the instant it is uncovered-»the commander 
 «f it dresse*^ the colonr diriirion on the general 
 line* • . ' , 
 
 9. The Serjeant coverefs being on the'outward 
 flanks of their dtvisionsj must Ire correct in tak. 
 ing up the line with the camp colours, thby being, 
 the outward point of dressing for their divisional 
 those of the left wing will not shift to cov<ir' their 
 commandersiUntil the comiUander of the divisioa 
 Oil their left gives the word ** eyes front.' 
 
 » 
 
188 
 
 V. A cet aTertiflsement, les commjindaiilf d« 
 diTisioDs, et les tergens couTreura de raileeau« 
 che, et le sergent couvreiir de la division oe la 
 droite du centre feront demi-toor i droite et 
 thangeront a la gauche de leurs diTitions. Un 
 lergcnt sornuiq^faire de la divisian de la droite 
 avancera en m^rne terns d la tSte de la colonne, 
 four marouer lanouvelle ligne o^trette division 
 doit faire halte. ^ 
 
 8. LawdiTision de droile da centre doit avan* 
 cer au moment qu'elle est d^gag^e.-^Son officier 
 alignera la diyrsion du drapeau sur la ligne 
 gcn^raje. 
 
 9. Let sergents couvreurs ^tantsnrles flanci 
 titer ieurs de leurs divisions, seront corrects a 
 tenir la nouvelle ligne des Jallons, ^tant le jioint 
 ext^rieur d'alignement pour leurs divisions f 
 ceox de la gauche ne changeront pas pour cou- 
 Tfir leurs officiers, jusqu'a ce que le comman* 
 dant de la division ii leur gauche donne le i&et 
 
 1 ■- 
 
 
 ! 
 
 
 
 m f 
 
 
 
 '■1 
 
 If! ^ 
 
 mm ' 
 
189 
 
 LIGHT INFANTRV, 
 
 Of Extending and Closing again, 
 
 Tb extend 
 
 from the . '' ^hen Hie company is formed at close order, and 
 
 •right left *' required to extend from ti)e rif bt^ Itie words of coio. 
 
 ^rcf'ntre,^ maud will be given as follow: 
 
 ' , To the left extend. 
 
 At (hi« word of command the company, except tlw 
 right hand file, faces to the left, moves on in quick time, 
 casting the eyes over the right shoulder, so that each tile 
 when at twopacesdistance froiii his rii^hthnod tile may 
 ■ * halt, front, and dress by the right. The rear rank steps 
 to the right, in order, if necessary, to inarch or fire 
 ^without impediment through the interval of the front 
 rank. This-ie the usual distance between filets'at whirh 
 light troops when ordered to extend will form; buiin 
 f»articular cases, when they ane requii'ed to cover, tiie 
 , front of a corps, or mask a m;ni<£uvre, tbecoinmandinf 
 
 ofl^cer will signify at what di^itaiice the files are tofoia 
 from each' other, before he gives the order for them to 
 «xtend themselves. 
 
 When the company is to extend from the left, tbe 
 word of command will be given-— ■ " ' 
 
 To the Right extend. 
 
 ,* 
 
 The whole, except the left hand file, face to the right, 
 In taking their distance look over the left shoulder,, 
 halt, front, and dress by the left. The rear rank, as in 
 opening to the left, take ground to the right of their file 
 leaders. 
 
 When to extend from the centre, the word of com' 
 fluand will be given — 
 
 From the Centre extend* 
 
 .At which the right wing faces and moves to the right, 
 «s in extending from the left; the left wibg perforins 
 the same movements as wheoex'eDdiog fron tbe right; 
 4he centre ille «tandfl f^ . , 
 
cucept (he 
 quick time, 
 lia( each file 
 nd flic may 
 r rank stops 
 irch or fire 
 of the front 
 ets'at which 
 
 rd ofcoin< 
 
 INFANTERIE I^EGERE. 
 
 De r Ordre etendu et de VOrdr^ script 
 des Files. 
 1. Q,uand la conipagnie est forrneeea ordre 
 de file serree, etqu'elle est conimand^e de s'dten- 
 drcdei:i druile, lea. mots de commaademeot 
 seront duniv^scoinine suil : 
 
 Files d gauche ordre 4tendu, 
 
 A ce raot la corapagnie, except^e la file droitCr 
 fait a gauche marpiie, au pas redoubU, jettaat 
 lesyeuz par i'epaUle droite, de gorteqae chaqae 
 file, qiiaad elle aura depass^ celle de sa droite 
 de dKu-x pas, puisse faire halte, front, et s*al.i- 
 gnersur la droite. Le second ran^ fait un pas 
 a droite, afin qu'eile jiuisfe, s'il est necessajre, 
 marcher oa faire fea par les, intervales du pre-^ 
 mier rang. C'est la distaace asitee eotre les 
 $les, que les troupes Ugefes preonent pouf sc 
 former en ordfe ^toadu ^ mais daosydes cas par- 
 tieuliers, quand c*est pour couvrir le front a'uA 
 corps, on masquer une maneeuvre, le com- 
 mandant indiquera la distance enire les files, 
 avant de donner le comniandement pour lea 
 ^tertdrev 
 
 U'uaftd^la cempagnie doit iteudre de lagauche,. 
 le comiuandemei^seFa dona^ t 
 
 r ' Mies a droite ordre itendu, 
 
 Les files, excepte la gauche, font a droite, en 
 
 Srenantleurs distances^ elleljettentles yeux par 
 essus i'^paule gauche, halte, front, et aligne- 
 ment a gauche. Le second rang, comme il a fait 
 en s*uuyrant a gauche, fera un paa a la droite 
 de leu rs chefs de files. ^ 
 
 Ctuaiid ta cqinpagnie doit s'etendre du centre 
 )e coifimandfimeut 6era donn6 & ... 
 
 Files du Centre^ ordre etendu. 
 
 L'uiie droite fait i droite, et marcbe a droite» 
 Goaime eu eteudaut de la gj^uche s Taile gauche^ 
 
 ' 
 
 ^ 
 
 1 f 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 ' 
 
 , ij 
 
 '' ''^ 1 
 
 
 '<i 
 
 ;:;■ i ll 
 
 \ 
 
 ■''i 
 
 
 
 ■>' 
 
 V ' \-]{ 
 
 _ 
 
 k 
 
 
 1 
 
 ''HI • 
 
 
 . '4 
 
 . ; i 
 
 
 '•'Ji 
 
 'l 1 ,t 
 
 Etendre d6 
 
 , : J 
 
 
 la droite^ de 
 
 ( t '-^ 
 
 it 1' 
 
 la gauche ou 
 
 }'■' 
 
 du centre. 
 
 ■ 1 
 
 
 ; ( 
 1 
 
 1 ^1 
 
 i- 1 
 
 • 
 
 
 I. U 
 
 
 
 ' ^ 
 
 -^ 
 
 ■■ ,'' .■-' 
 
 I i^i 
 
 , 
 
 i 
 
 1* :;, 
 
 
 1 
 
 "' . :h . 
 
 
 ^hI 
 
 ' '1 
 
 • ' ^ 
 
 'iH 
 
 1 
 
 \ / . ■ 
 
 : ' '■ 
 
 ;'j. 
 
191 
 
 ' •" V 
 
 ' .k:.-( 
 
 As soon as the recroits are perfect in this mode of 
 extending, the words of command of fiom righty left 
 or centre extend^ are laid aside, and the commanding 
 officer talcos post on the wing, m* point from which the 
 company is to extend ; and orders the bugle to sound 
 the signal to extend ; and should the dislancc proposed 
 to be taken betweeh the ^les be more than two paces 
 (the usual extended order,) he will signify, before the 
 signal to extend is made, at what distance the files are 
 to form, at S, 4, 6, or 6 paces. 
 
 On the signal to extend, the files open from the spot 
 
 V ' \ ^ where the commanding officer has'placed himself with 
 
 the bugle. When extended, the riflemen trail their 
 
 ■ arms. If detached corps should happen to be without 
 
 \ • ~ -a bugle, the officer must make use of the before men- 
 
 J . tion^ra words of command to extend. 
 
 Of closing again. 
 
 *A T ^" *^® signal from the bugle to close, every man faces 
 
 •xtenaea ^^^ ^j^^^g briskly to the point from whence the signal 
 
 j''^^"^ is given; the whole shoulder their rifles and dress ; ia 
 
 ***** 'Vwi. jjjjg movement the files must be careful not to intermix, 
 
 . to prevent the coafusion that would unavoidably arise 
 
 '"' from their doing so. Should the commanding officer 
 
 have no bogle with him to give the signal, be must giva 
 ^ .the word of command Ckase, 
 
 Of Firing in extended Order y and of 
 Skirmishing. 
 
 ^/firing on When riflemea or* light corps are to fire 
 the spot, from the spot in extended order, the bayonet* of 
 the latter miisl be firat unfixed, the commanding 
 officer then orders the homer to give the signJ 
 to commence firing. At this signal the front 
 rank makes ready» presents (each man selecting 
 his particiilarobject). and fires : at saon a& the rear 
 ' raok man sees his file leader put the ball into hit 
 piece, he makes ready, and fixes through the 
 intervals of the front rank ; and when the rear 
 rank men have got their balls into their pieces, 
 each man gives notice to his file leader to fire. 
 In this manner the fire is continued on the spoi^ 
 tin tho signal is giyeo to cease fi^ring. 
 
192 
 
 fi)itle§ m^meA mouTement»comine ^t^ndaiit d»' 
 
 ja droite; la file du centre ne bouge* Aus* 
 
 sitot que les Recrues seront pnrfailes en I'ex^cu* . 
 
 tiuii de cette fafon d'eteodre, les nioli, dels 
 
 droite^ de la s^i^uche, oil du centre, sontomU^ 
 
 et lo commandant sc poste a Paile, on uu point 
 
 (tijquul la compagnie doit g'elendre i et fait 
 
 donnerdu Cora le signal d'etendre ; et si s*eft 
 
 riniention de prendre une distance uUm grande \ 
 
 q'Va Tordinaire, it si^nificra, avant rexecution,. 
 
 a (|uelle distance les Ales se formeroiita 3. 4. &4. ^ 
 
 ou 6 pas» 
 
 Ausi<;na1 de s'^tend re, les files ouTreat dii 
 point ou le commandaii't sc sera place avecson 
 cors Ctuaud ils sunt en ordre etendu, leg 
 carabiniers traineront lesarmes, si un d 'tache- 
 ment se trouve sans cors, Tofficier sc servira iLes- 
 muls ci dessus pour eiendre. 
 
 De re server les Files, 
 
 All signal dii ^cors de serrer, chacun fait k'. 
 droite ou A gauche viveroent vers le point d'o& < 
 vient le signal,. tou«t portent les carabines et 
 alignent ; dans ce mouvement les files auront 
 soiri de ne pas- s'entremdler afin de prevenir la- 
 confusion qui ne raanquera pas d'arriver en tel 
 c^ii. ''.Si le commandant n*a point de Cors pour, 
 duuuer Ic signal, il donnera le mot ** serrez.** 
 
 DesfetiS' eji Ordre etenduy ei rfe Pescar- 
 
 mouche. 
 
 Quaml I6s carabiniers, ou corps de troupes I^- F«« depiti• 
 
 §eres,doivellt tirerdepied ferroceo ordre ^teo* i«""*» 
 u, les biayonelles de ces ilerttiers seront dteei, 
 alqrs le commandant ordonne an con d6 donner 
 le signal pour corameneer le feu. A- ce signal 4e 
 premier rang arme,joti«(cbacunsignalerason ob- 
 jet) et/?tt: aussitdtquel'hommedeserrefile voit / 
 
 ihettre fa bale daD« le canon de son chef de file, , ^ 
 
 il apprSte, et lire par les interTalet du premier 
 raDgi et daand ks bommet du dernier raog^ oat . 
 
 3Ba» 
 
 I.- 
 
 ji 
 
 ' I. 
 
 N. 
 
 ! ' 11 
 
 
 ; :i 
 
 I 
 
 #1 
 
198 
 
 0/ firing {n 2. In firing in kdvancin*, the c»mmandin^ 
 advancing, officer first order! the signal to inarch to be 
 
 founded, and imiuediiitely after, the aignal to 
 
 fire* 
 
 On this the rear rank raoye* briskly six paces 
 before the front rank, each man having passed to 
 the right of his file leader, makes read^, takes hit- 
 aira, and fires;, and, as soon as he has loaded 
 again, trails his rifle. When thescrjeant of the 
 front raHk sees the rear rank haa fired, he sieps 
 in front; gives a 8ign<i1 with his whistle, npon 
 which the front rank moves brifikly six paces be- 
 fore the rear rank, each man then proNents, takes 
 aim and-fires; folio wit>g the directions that have 
 been given to the rear rank. Thus each rank 
 continues advancing and firing alternately. If the 
 firing in advancing is to cease, the commandiog 
 officer orders the signal for haltt after which not 
 a shot must be heard. 
 
 Of firing in 9^ At the signal of the bogle to commence firing 
 retreuting iroraedialely folio wed by i he signal to relretit, the 
 first rank (namely, that whicb happens to be in 
 front,) makes ready, takes.aim, and firea, goes to< 
 the right about, marches with a quickstep twelve 
 paces in the rear of the second rank, fronts and 
 ^ads,. As soon as the scrjeant on the flank of tbe^ 
 second rankseesthat the first is formed & loading 
 hastepatwo pacea to the front, and gives the sig- 
 nal with bii whistle, npon which the second rami, 
 makes ready, takes aim and fires; then faces to 
 tile right>abont, marches with aquick step twelve^ 
 ^ paces into the rear of the first, fronta and loads* 
 
 In thift^manner both ranks retire, supporting each. 
 Mher. When the fire in retiring is to cease, 
 the commaadiog oi&cer orderathe signal fine halt 
 tp be made* 
 
 4^ Th& companies being suffidenllyifiatriKted 
 
 Of iti the above firings, they will proceed to the 
 
 i^tmishittg ppactice^ofthem, in which one general; principle 
 
194 
 
 nit leurt halle§ dans ie canon de leur^ pieces^ 
 chaque homme avertii son chef de file de ttrer* 
 Decette inaiii^re le fou de pied fernie est con* 
 Uoue jpsqu'au ligiial de cesser Ic feu. 
 
 S. En faisanl fell en avan^ant, le commandant ^^" d'atu*- 
 ftiitsonner d*abord le signal de marcher, et ini- ^"'* 
 mediatemeut apris le signal de faire feu, qui 
 fr'exetute comme suit :. 
 
 Austitdt que rhomine du premier rang a ftr/| 
 celui du second rang avanre viveinetit six pat 
 en avant du premier ring a la droiledc son chef 
 defile, arme^joue^feu% et aussildt qu'il a char- 
 ge, traine sa carabine. Qiiand le sergent du 
 premier rang voit que. le second rang a tire^ il 
 mil un pas en avani et donne son coup de siftet,. - 
 alors le premier rang avaiice Tivcments:;! paa 
 en avant dti second rang, cha<^ue homme arme^ 
 joucfeui suivant les- directions donn^es an »e^. 
 cond rang ;. c^est ainsi qtie chaqiie rang contl- 
 Duera d'avanoer ct de tirer alternativement. Si 
 h feu en avant doit cesser, le chef fait sonner le - 
 signal de halte, apres quoi plus de tiraillerie, 
 
 3. Au tignaf du cor» de coraraencer le feu, Feu de re- 
 immidiatement suivi du signal de retraUe^ le <*'a'''«* 
 premier rang, (c'cst-^-dire celui qui se trouvc en 
 
 avant) armtf,.youe, /(Til, fait un-demi tour a droi- 
 
 te, douze pa»en arriere du second rang, fait 
 
 front et charge. Quand le sergent au flauc du 
 
 second rang voit que le premier est f6rm6, et 
 
 charge^ ilraitdeu^ pas en ayant, ot donn^ le 
 
 signal ayec son siflct, alors le second ranff,Arm#, 
 
 joue^ feu, demUtour i droittt marche d un pai ^ ' ^ /" 
 
 acceleri douse paa en arriere du premier rangi 
 
 front et charge* De cette maniere les deux rangi 
 
 se retirent, te aoutenant mutuellement. Quand 
 
 le feu de retraite dotit cesier, le chef &it ftireie 
 
 iignal de halte^ 
 
 4. teicompa^nief-^taot luffiianiiiientjostrttk DeFeic^'m 
 lM.datiii.lei wiiditffeiiXy iU^jiroc^derontilii ^i#- moticA«. 
 
 p 
 
 V 
 
 1 
 
 ■ f 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 1 
 
 F 
 
 1 ;« 
 
 I 
 
 U 
 
 \l^ 
 
 
N. 
 
 
 f 
 
 195 
 
 li ' 
 
 y^ 
 
 one half of a body of riflemen miiiit be tent for* 
 ^ard to skirmiflb, (he other haU' reranin formed 
 and ready to itipport. Ifn biiMntion or cumpanf 
 of rifl^'men \% lo make an atlai'k, or by mcanii of 
 Hie above divpostlion keep the ei'.oir.yal a distance 
 fVoin their front, the conit^andinj; < fliccr Mrill 
 Arituiguify, whether lhefi<;ht or leflplatoonsare 
 to advance. If the tatter, be \bh platoon of 
 each company moves briskly flfl'v paces forwards, 
 tke ri«;fit half of Ihat platoon then halts nith 
 closed rank<), the left half moves sixty pices fur- 
 ther to the front and extends its file», so as to 
 cover completely the front of the m'lin bodvofrom' 
 which it is detached. Whenever rii;ht platooni 
 advance to skiritiish, right half platoons most be 
 pushed on in their front and extend themselveft 
 to the left, and vice versa. 
 
 If the signal is sounded to marchf the plaiooni. 
 which remain formed in fine« and •■the half pla* 
 toons which were advanced fifty paces in front 
 of them, move forward in ordinary time, taking 
 care to preserve their intervals The skirinishen 
 who have f)een pushed on in front, conduct them- 
 selves in the same manner as in firing in advan- 
 cing. If the signal for halt is given, th^rwhole 
 corps halts, and the skirmishei> cease firing^ but 
 keep their ground : on the signal for retreat^ I 
 the whole corps, except the skirmi^ers^ face to 
 the right-about, and retire in ordinary time, 
 paying the greatest attention to the preservatioa 
 of distances^ The platoons which have been 
 pushed on in front in extended order, conduct 
 themselves in the same manner as in fifing in 
 retreating. On the signal to haUt the whole 
 haltf , fronts, and the skirmishers cease firing. 
 
 At the sTgnal to etoae, the half phktoont which 
 have extended themselTes in frpnt to ikirmisb, 
 fall back, on the half v^hich has remained formed 
 in their rear. At the second sij^nal to c/ottf, the 
 advanced platoons retreat in quick time/ and 
 ttiM their places intheliat* 
 

 lent for* 
 I formed 
 
 iu'?inii of 
 ,distaaco 
 liccr will 
 toons are 
 itoun of 
 'orwiirdi, 
 \\i% Hith 
 ) ices fur- 
 , go an to 
 ody^froin' 
 platuuni 
 n most be 
 leouclvei 
 
 e plaiooni 
 e half pla- 
 « in front 
 |ie, taking 
 irinisheri 
 net them- 
 in advan* 
 hdrwhole 
 ring^ but 
 retreatt i 
 fnce to 
 ary time, 
 servatioa 
 ave been 
 conduct 
 firing in 
 e whole 
 firings 
 
 mtwhfdl 
 bkirinisb. 
 Id/ formed 
 Ic/tff^t Iho 
 lime, aiul 
 
 : 196 
 
 liqtier etdanNcette pratique ilestn^ceitaired'ob^ 
 icrvcr un principe g^n4ral} nomm<^ment, que pat 
 plus do la moitid d*un corps de c^irubiniers doit 
 <lre avanci pour fairc rescarmouchf , I'autre 
 moitit' rifste rorm^e pour ()lre prete a so'itenir. 
 Si un bataillon ou compaguie dc cuiubimers est 
 pour faire uno attaque, ou par Ic ir.oyen dc la 
 disposition ci-dessus, tenir I'ennemi * lu distance 
 deieur front, le commandant signifiera si cVsfc 
 lei pelotons de droite ou Ue gauche qui seront 
 en avant. Si c*ett ces deraiers, le peioton de 
 puiche de cba^ue coropagnio avance vivement 
 50 pas, la moitit droite' de ce peioton alors fait 
 haltc, les rangs serris ; la moitie de gauche faii 
 60pasplusen avant et ^teudges fiies-de mai:i^r&i 
 couvrir compl^tement le front du corus de b»- 
 taille duquel il est d^tach^. Quanu les pe- 
 lotons droits avaocent pour escarmoucber, le# 
 demi- pelotons droits seront pousses en avant et 
 I'^teodrout Tert la gauche» et vice versa, . 
 
 Uuand le signal tnarehe est tonn^, les pelotoof 
 qui itaient formes en ligne et les demi-pelotons 
 qui 6taient avanc^s 50 pas en avant de leur.front 
 iTaoceront au pas ordinaire, preoant garde de 
 conserver leurs intervalles. Les escarmoucheurs . 
 qui araient 6tk pouss^s en avant, se condoisent de 
 I h m^me maniire qu*en executant le feu d'atta* 
 oue. Si le signal de halte est donn^, tout le corps 
 I ait halte i et les escarmoucheurs cessent le feu i. 
 I nais tiendrout ferme; au signal de i»lraite9 tous 
 lei corps, ez4:ept6|le8 escarmoucheurs, font demU 
 tour a droite, et se r^tirent au pas ardinaire*.. 
 bifsnt grande attention ^ garder les distances, 
 les pelotons qui avoient ^te pousses eo avaat 
 en ordre itendu, se conduiront comme dans le 
 feu de retraite. Au si^ir a/ halte, le tout fera 
 \hUey et ies^escarmoucbeurs cesserontde tirer. 
 
 Au signal de serrer, les demi-pelotons qui s*^ 
 |liientetendus ea avant poor escarnioucner, se 
 iKtireront sur la moiti6 qui 6toit reslee formee 
 p leur^rrieror An second sigaalde serrerf la$^. 
 
 ; •' 
 
 - « 
 
 -/ 
 
 
 II 
 
 
 \ \ 
 
 t 'in 
 
 I 
 
 ■'1 
 
 
197 
 
 y< 
 
 When a company or balinlion hat hctv formed 
 for an attack in the above manner, and (lu; sig. 
 qal for ularm is soumlod, the ikirmialier* roll re 
 with Ihcgrealcst celerity lhroii}»h their resiif'itive 
 intervalf in the battalion ; in the rear of wliicli 
 they forntttod reaurae their several sUitiuus in 
 the line* ^ 
 
 This raancBuvre -will be requisite only when 
 the battalion is to attack, or may have occasion 
 to make use of its whole fire : the skirraiiheri 
 therefore will not wait, for another, but will 
 retire as fast as they can throug^h the intervali, 
 as above; but the quarter pUtooos will remsis 
 formed, and move with a firm and quick stey 
 into their proper places. The officers of the4e> 
 ta(hr*d platoons mtist direct their >nriBci| 
 attention to combine in such a roaaner, the move- 1 
 laents of their half platoons and skirmisher!, j 
 with those of the bat tali on or corps, as always tt 
 keep parallel with them, and to preserve the 
 proper distances of the extended order t&cy have { 
 ween directed to take. 
 
 It may happen that an entire company be i^\ 
 «|nired to extend itself for the purpose of cover* 
 in^ il>e troMt of acorps, wit-hout leaving any parti 
 #nr4)ieH fts a reserve. In tl^is case tjie cora^an 
 will trail arms, advance inclose order, whI wheif 
 arrived at the proper distance^ will oxtend itseN 
 with all possible ceJerity. If the company 
 detached from the riglit win^, it will extend ((i| 
 die left ;^ if from the left winj^, it will extend 
 to the right ; and if from the centre to both tli 
 flanks* , : , s' 
 
 Shonid K be necessary to retire across a plsiflj 
 on kk\e battalion ^olnff to the rigiit about, tli 
 right'und left flank files of each platoon reniaii 
 #rf>nted ; in retVeatinjif, the batiMiioin wiU car 
 fully presecye the i>nlervals lejft by -the ab«»^ 
 files, whose hijsiiHjtig it is to exieiid t4ie«iiKeK 
 4« cover its retreai, foUewio^^ it at tite dinUB 
 
 / 
 
198 
 
 pelotoni aTancffl ge retir«ront au pai redouble 
 €l le raogcrunt a Icurs places en li^ne. 
 
 Quand une compagnie oii iin baUillon a ^M 
 fbrni6 pour rattRi|iie de In n)aui^regus<iile,el que 
 ie nignnl A*alrtrme est Sonne, les escHrmoiicheiim 
 16 retireront avcc la plus graode ccl<-rit(^ par 
 leu rs intervales respectifs dans ie' balailloni et 
 se formeritnt en arriere, et rcsumerout leurt 
 diffcrentet. stations dans la ligne. 
 
 Celte mantcuvre nc sera necessaire que quand 
 Ie batnillon a et6 form^ pour une altaque, uu 
 qunnd il faiidra quSI se serve de tout son feu : 
 ain!(i dans ce cas, les eAcarmoticheurs se retire- 
 Tont en arriere de leiirs bataitlons respect its snns 
 s'attend.re les nns les nutres, uiais se retire- 
 ront a la debandade par les inlervalles, comme 
 il est dit ci-dessus; niais les quarts de pelotons 
 resteront formers, et marcheront fermenienl au 
 pas*redouble ou nu pas accehrt' a leurs propres 
 places. Les oilicler|des pelotons detaches met- 
 trout leur atteniion priucipale a combiner de 
 telle mani^re les inouveroeiis de feurs deini-pe- 
 lutons et escarmoucheurs, avecccux du bataii. 
 Ion, ou corps, que loujours ils soient paralleles, 
 et cunscrveot les distances propres a Tordre 
 d'etcndue qu'il leur aura dte iadiquede prendre, 
 
 H peut arriver qu'une eonipagii'ie ^ntiere sera 
 commanddo de sV'teudte, aliii de couvrir l« 
 front d'uncorp^, sans lais'«er aucune partie for- 
 mee en reserve. Dans cc cas hi coinpagnie trdi" 
 nera arm'es^ avancera en ordre serr?, et quand 
 elle arrivera a la distance requise, elle s^^tendra 
 avec toute la vitesse possible. Si la compagnie 
 est d^tachee de Taile droite, elle s'^tendra k gau- 
 che ; si ' c*esl de la gajjche, eHe s'^teitdra it la 
 droitc» et si c*est au centre elle s'6tendra aux 
 djBux ftancs. 
 
 S'il est n^cessaire de se retirer ii travers one 
 phiine; quand !e bataillon fera demi-tour 4 
 droite, les files des flancs de cbaqoe pelotoQ ne 
 tiongeroUt, ente retirantl^ Inct&iUon Btrra toin 
 
 '\ 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 n 
 
 K 
 
 !- 
 
 • ; 
 
 (1 
 
 ii 
 
 
 if 
 
 %'^' 
 
 ' ■ H 
 
 
 ijri 
 
 1 
 
 %\ 
 
 
 '% 
 
 ) 
 
 ■'■V 
 
 1 
 
 '<i. 
 
 
 
 'in: 
 
 li 
 
 Ml* 
 
 ' .1 
 
 
 
 r 
 
 r 
 
 
 
 
 !»»■; 
 
 ?i 
 
 ii 
 
 I 
 a.,1 
 
 
199 
 
 •f thirteen paces, and by their fire endeaTOurin^ 
 to keep off the enemy's flankers : for this parpose 
 riflemen should he practised to load and fire is 
 -marchin<:f ; during this manoeuvre it will be par- 
 ticularly necessary to caution the flankers against 
 expending their fire all at thr; same time. 
 
 If attacked by cavalry, the signal forltall will 
 -be first made, on which the battalion fronts; the 
 signal for retreat will then be sounded, on which 
 the skirmishers fall into their respectiTC places 
 'in the line. 
 
 If the batta:Iion is to continue its retreat, it 
 will face to the right-about; the skirmishing 
 •files remain fronted ar before. When the retreat 
 has beon effected to the point proposed, the sig- 
 nal io halt is made, on which the battalion fronts, 
 
 the skirmishers are called 
 Presses by the'Centre« 
 
 in, and the whole 
 
 Of the Formation of the Chain and 
 Advanced Guard, 
 
 Foimatfon 1. The object of this branch of the duty of 
 •/ the chain Hght troops is to scour a tract ofeouhtry hy means 
 of numerous and detached bodies, clearing the 
 woods and enclosures of the enemy's posts, and 
 -in a word, to establish a complete chain of yoar 
 own troops, hy occupying, as far as circumstan- 
 ces will permit, every advantageous spotj taking 
 particular care, however, thatyour own posts are 
 •o stationed as tb have easy communication, and 
 the power of mutually supjporting each other. 
 
 When a company of light infantry ii destined 
 to form Ike cnain without any other corps to 
 support it, the commanding officer signifies that 
 one fourth of it, i, e, one half platoon or section, 
 will ramaiii fomed a« a reserve : suppose, for 
 
200 
 
 ie gtirdcr lei vnides lalssE^s par leg diles fi\e8, qui 
 g'etendrontpour couvrir la relrajte, et qui la 
 suivront a la dislance de 13 pns, et par leur feu 
 lis tacheroQt d'ecai'ter les tirailleurs, ou lesddta* 
 chemcns dcs flancs de I'ennemi, ou lea tenir ^- 
 loi^iiest pour cot eSet,ii faudroit que les cara- 
 biiiiers fussent accoutum^s a charter et tirer eu 
 inarchant i daraul cette manceuvre, il est bien 
 ncccssatre d'avertir les homines de flancs de ne 
 |t»s lacherleur feu lous a.la fois. i 
 
 Si on est attaqu6 par la Cavalerie, le signal 
 pour la fta//e sera premierement fait, et le ba- 
 taillon fera fronts le si^^nal de r^/ro^'/e sera alors 
 8onn.e, et les escarraoucheurs prenneat leurt 
 places, Ic signal etant donne pour l«8 rappcller. 
 
 Si le bataillon doit continuer sa retraite, il 
 (era demi-tour ^ droite i les escarmuucheurs 
 resteront comine auparavaut. Quand la retraite 
 sera finie au point propose, le signal halle sera 
 dunne et le bataillon fiera front ; les cscarmou* 
 dieurs sont rappellcs, et le tout s'aligne par la 
 centre. 
 
 ! 1,1! 
 
 .tiiii 
 
 ..■■i' hi f 
 
 m 
 
 
 .:i 
 
 p ■ u 
 
 % 
 
 II 
 
 FQrmntion de la chained et de la garde ft- 
 
 vancee, 
 
 1 . L'objet de ce devoir des troupes legeres est 
 d'eclaircr une ^tendue de piiys par le m.oyen de 
 corps detaches et nombrebx, debarrassant les 
 bois et clotures des posies de Teunemi, et en ua 
 root elablissant une ^haine complete de tos 
 troupes et occupant autant -que Ics circonstancef 
 lie pcrmetent, tous les points avaiitageux ; ayant 
 unsoin particulier.cepcudant que \09 propres 
 postes toient telieraeRt stationnet, i\u*\U vous 
 jdonncQt unecommunic<ition facile, et le moyen 
 dc vous soutenir mutuellement. 
 
 Quand iine tompagnie d'infunterit l^gere est 
 destinee 4 former la chaioe sans ^lie soutenue 
 par d'autres troupes, le. chef signifie qu'une sec- 
 tion ou demi peloton resteraft^rmeeeh ri'serve, 
 suppose que la quatriemjs sectioa suit fizee pour 
 . 5 . 
 
 Formez Hf 
 Chaiue, 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 f 
 
 
 ^■: 
 
 I' fiiJ 
 
\ 
 
 
 ^ 201 ; 
 
 TOftahce, the fourth* section is fixed on for this 
 service; in this case the three first advance fifty 
 paces in quick time; the order is then given la 
 form the chain to the right or left^ or as circniu- 
 stances may require ; the signal from the bugle 
 is immediately given, and the detachment extends 
 in divisious uf two fitesat ten paces distant from 
 each other ;, the fourth section remains formed. 
 This disposition being made, the signal from the 
 bugle is given to march. The chain moves fur- 
 ward in ordinary time, taking care to preserve 
 the distance and alignement. The section of 
 reserve folloiviat the distance pf fifty paces, in 
 4>rder to give support to any part of the chain 
 that may be attacked. 
 
 Onlhe signal halt^ the whole halts and dresses. 
 If the chain is to fire, the signal is made to 
 commence firing ; on which the ri^ht flugehnan 
 t)f each division of the chain takes three paces to 
 the front and fires, falls back into his place, again 
 and loads: the other three men perform ihos^me 
 •'singly; and by this means the fire is kept up, 
 without intermission, Hif the signal is made to 
 cease, firing, 
 
 At the signal to retreat^ the wholr chain faces 
 to the right>about, and retreats in ordinary time. 
 On the signal to hvfly th^v/hole chain halts' and 
 fr~Ont«. if it \s io incUne to the leftt it faces to 
 the left, and lakes ground to the Ic.'t ; if to incline 
 to the rights it face» and takes ground jU) the right; 
 or the object of gaining ground on either flank 
 may be obtained with equal facility by an oblique 
 movement. Qik' the signal io close, the whole 
 chain closet t» the point from whence thie sound 
 is given. ,1 
 
 Should the two flanV p1atooii& of a corgi of 
 light infentry be ordered to form th^chaipi^ or 
 extend themsel vei (as cnrcumstances may require) 
 in order by this means to mask the form^on ojf 
 the baltalioD, oftio Jieep the eaewy. a^ a^Mitance, 
 
as circiMu- 
 
 202 ■ 
 
 cefervicb; dans ce cas, les trois autres sections 
 avancciil 50 pas au pas redouble; I'ordre est 
 donoe dc former la chaise a droite on a gauche, 
 ou selon Pexigence du cas ; le signal du cors est 
 iinm''diatement donne« etledetachements'etend 
 cu divisons de deux files k 10 pas de distance 
 de Tune a I'autre division ; la quatrieme section 
 rcsle formee en reserve. Cette disposition ^taat 
 f^ile, le signal du cors est donne ** marchej'* La 
 chaine avance au pas ordinaire, gardant scru- 
 
 Euleiiseiuent ses distances et son alignement. 
 1 section de reserve suit a la distance de 50 pas 
 afin de suutenir lapartie de la chaine qui pourra 
 ^tre'attaqu£e, 
 
 Aa ngmlMte, le tout h\tkaUe, oUgnemenL .> 
 $1 la ctiaiee doit tirer,|e; signal elt fait de com^ 
 Wiiiie0r Jejfeth'l^omwe d'i'ile mi xflanc droit de 
 qhaqu^ divifiipn, faiMroiit>pas;ea avant, Ure et 
 se re^et et charge i lesirois^autres font de rn^me 
 1-au apr^s Taut^re ; et par. ,ce moyen le feu eat 
 Bouteau sans inter4ni8Mon,jusqu*au tigoai pour 
 tetter lefeu. 
 
 An signal de retraite,toufe la chaine fait de*-> 
 aii-tour a droite, et ss retire au pas ordinaire* 
 j^u signal **:Aa//e,*' toute la chaine fait ** halte, 
 ^nt»^ Si elle doit tncUnerM la gauche, elle fait 
 une 4 ^<'|M''^ et prend son terrein a la gauche* 
 Sic'estpourtrac/tner a, la droite, elle fait une 
 a droite et prend terrein k la droite, oii Tobjet 
 de^agner du terrein a Tun. ou & I'autre fianc 
 I'rffectue fgalementcn gagnant du terrein par 
 un inuuvenient oblique. Au signal serres, toute - 
 la chaine'^srrre vers iepoiul d'ou le sigual a ete 
 soune. 
 
 Si les deux pelotonsctc flanc d'un corps de- 
 troupes legeres a pied, sont cominandes pour 
 former ia chaine, ou dc s'^teiidre* (selon Texi- - 
 genre du cas)nfin par ce moyen de masquer la- 
 formation du bataiiiou, ou de lenir^ Tenuemi ^ 
 U disiancci dans un pays ou son.fcoiit est diffi^- - 
 
 # * 
 
 ^ f^^ 
 
 % 
 
 'pi' 
 
 \r- 
 
 h: 
 
 ■"i 
 
 \i 
 
 !' ■ I 
 
 iiMl 
 
203 
 
 JHiposltion 
 0fa company 
 0f riflemen 
 •r light in- 
 fantry which 
 isto/orman 
 adnanced 
 ^MUrd, 
 
 in a country, ivherehis front in difBrnll vfnp^ 
 pr(>ach ; the two flank platoons ir ill advance in 
 quick i\vne the distance irhich may be directed, 
 and when arrived on the spot, the ri«^ht -flank 
 platoon forms the chain to thie left; and the left 
 llnhk platoon to the right, proceeding according 
 to the directions already given for extending, 
 and for the formation of the chain. On the signal 
 being made to close, the platoons close' to the 
 point froni which they extended, and both re- 
 sume their situations on the flanks of the corps 
 as quickly as possible, 
 
 8. The company is told off into four half 
 platoons, or sections. The commanding oflicer, 
 with the flrst half platoon, marches in front of 
 the corps to which he forms the advanced guard,! 
 in the daytime five hundred paces, but. in the 
 night, or in hazy weather, three hundred only. 
 The second section is detached two hundrcid pa* 
 ces in front of the fir^t, and a party of aserjeant 
 and six men is pushed on one hnnd<: \ paces fur- 
 ther, « hich forms the head of the advanced guard. 
 The third an.d fourth half platoons are placed 
 three hundred paces to the right and left of the 
 first, and even with ft, taking care to preserve at 
 much as possible the above distance from it,, and 
 detaching one hundred paces forwards, and ioi 
 an oblique direction to the outer flank, a non- 
 rommissioned officer and six men. 
 
 The duty of the advanced'guard is to scpurthe 
 whole country in its front, penetrating through ^ 
 woods and enclosures and searching into villages. 
 Pf the patroles meet with an enemy, the officer 
 of the half platoons informs the Captain of the- 
 company, who reports the same by a steady non« 
 commissioned ufflcec to the comHianding officer 
 of the corps. 
 
 ' The commanding officer of the advanced 
 
 .guard will of course have been previously direct- 
 
 %d,. wbetlitr in itase of fallipg. in with, an eneDi|» 
 
204' 
 
 cHtf i approcher; lev deux pelotons de flanc 
 oviinreront-iiu pas redouble la distance indiqiiee, 
 el quand ils y seroDi nrrtvcs, le peloton du flanc 
 droit, formera la chaine a s^auche, et le pelo- 
 ton du flanc <;auche, a la droite, procedant se« 
 Ion les directions drja donn en pnur sVti^ndre, 
 et pour la formation de lar charne. Au signal 
 de serrer,\t» pelolous ncrront vers le point d'oii 
 iisse sunt etendus, et I'un et rautie rosument 
 leurs sitnatioufl aux flaucs du corps aussitoi que 
 fiiire ce petit. 
 
 •' ■ '\' 
 
 If' 
 
 i i 
 
 ! 1. 
 
 2.- La compag^nie est divis^c en qoatre demi- 
 pelutontf ou sections.'' Le chef, ayec le premier 
 deini>peloton, marche en froiit du corps ^uquel 
 il: fitrme Tavant garden pendant le jour h cinq 
 cms pas,*iimis dans la nuit, ou en ieins couvert, 
 trois ccns teutemeot f la seconde section est de- 
 tachfetleuxxens pas en avant du premier, «t 
 unpartid'uB serpent et six liommes est pousss 
 cent pas plus loin et forme la tete de la garde 
 avaticee. Les troisieme et quatrieme demi pelo« 
 tuns, sont places A trois cens oas a la droite- et i 
 la gauche du premier, et* a la m^nie hauteur, 
 ayant soin degarderautant que possible la dis- 
 tance susdite, et detachanl a cent pas en avant, 
 et dans une direction oblique vers le flanc extc- 
 rieur, ua bas officicr etsix hommes. 
 
 LedeToirde la garde nvanc^e est d*^claiier 
 tout le pays en avant de son front, de p^netrer' 
 a travers les bois et clotures, et de faire fouill^r 
 les villages; si les pati'ouilies rescontrent I'en* 
 nemi, l*officier du peloton informe le capitaine, 
 
 Iiii envoye le rapport par on bas officier de con* 
 ance au chef du corps. 
 
 Le commandant de la garde nvancfe aura 
 necessairementeo des ordres* si en cas de reo" 
 contre avec reaiienii> il doit rattaqiier on teu^i 
 
 S3 ■ 
 
 DisponUioH 
 dCune corn* 
 pagnie de ca^ 
 rabimierB ott 
 ffinfanterie 
 fegtrcy form 
 mantune a* 
 vaiU g«trdt» 
 
 V, « 
 
 'U 
 
20 S 
 
 he^is to attack or merelj^ to amuse him withbU 
 tkirmiihers, or whether he is to fail back. In 
 th% last inslance hevmust not retire with the 
 main body, but, by withdrawing in an oblique 
 .direction, leave a char stage for the operations 
 of that corps against the enemy. He will by 
 this movement avoid the frossibility of confusion 
 enduing from the retreat of h.is.owntroopff,,v«'hich. 
 under particular circumstances, may unavoidably 
 become precipitate. On the signal to mar'cht.. 
 the whole advanced guard moves forward. On. 
 the signal haltythe whole hiilt^. kerping, however, 
 the di8pus.ition. If the signal lo'dose'is sounded, 
 the non.commissioned offi^ers'detachments join 
 their respective half platoons ;.and on the second' 
 a\envthl(y close, the secondHhird, and fourth half' 
 pmtoons close and form to. the firsts When one 
 single platoon is to compose- an advanced guard, 
 it will be toid oflFin four sections, which are then 
 to represent the four half platoons^ In every 
 other re»pectthe regulations and directions-given 
 in the foregoing paragrapji are applicable in the- 
 |»resent instance^ 
 
 Of tl^0 Service of TAghl Tfoops m the 
 
 Fields 
 
 8 During the carapaigOf light troops are 
 usually cantoned in villages^ and are not provided' 
 with caran equipage. They may, however, be 
 occasionally required to occupyr ground on the 
 -flank of a corps in the line of encampmeot ;. ihoi 
 ipeu muit, in. that case, construct huts of earth,, 
 or boughs of trees, and will perform all thecamp< 
 duties, and in ev^ry respect comply with the, 
 regulatioQslaid dowafoi iJtie difcipliAe.o£jregiilac 
 ijB&atrj* 
 
2Cf6 
 
 Kment ramuser avcc sei tirailleurs^ on s'll doit " 
 retrograder. i\u dernier caiil iiefaiit pas reti-- 
 rer au corps principal, inais en direeHon oblique * 
 et par ce moyen laisser lecamplibre pourlet^ 
 op^ratioatdece corps contrts Pennemi. Par ce 
 mouTement il ^viiera la possibilite de la confu- - 
 sion qiii pourra s'ensuiyre de la retraite dc sa ^ 
 troupe, <fin, par> les cir^ontances, pourroit bieii>: 
 deirenir pr^cipii^e. Au signal, miireAe, toute la . 
 ^anle avaucie marche eI^ avant. Au signal, . 
 haltefleiouifa\lhaltey gardant cependant Ifeuir . 
 disposition. Si le signal de 9<?rrer est sonne, les^ 
 d<'ta€heinent» sotia' leti bas vfliciers joindront 
 l^r deini-pelotons ie8peetif8;.ct au second si- ■ 
 gnal de serrer, les second, troisieme- et quatrie- • 
 me pelotonsformerontsur le premier* Quand-. 
 Nyant-garde n'est composee que d'un seul pelo* 
 ton, il sera divts^ en 4,^ection8 qui represente- 
 rontles^4idefnipelot{>n8. A tous autres^gards^ 
 les r^gleniensetdirections-donDes ci-dessus soot. 
 appKcables^ T instance pr^sente. 
 *■ ■ 
 
 Du. service d6s Troupes legeres en Cam." 
 
 pagne. 
 
 9:i: Dof&nt iMie Gampagne^ le» troupes l^geres^ 
 lont pour I'ordinliirecaotonnees dansles villages^. 
 et ne sont pas pourvues. d'equipage de canip^ 
 On peut cependant leurfaireoccuper un terrein 
 au flanc 4*un corps en ligne de campcnnent|> 
 dans ce casles homines coustruiront des cabai^* 
 nes, et feront tous les services du camp, et k.. 
 tous igardi suiYront les r^glemens. itablii |>oiir 
 k discipUp des troopei^^gl^es* 
 
 /; ((■ 
 
 l< 
 
 1 
 
 i -^ i 
 
 ■ 
 
 M 1 |i, 
 
 1 
 
 1 '! t 
 
 B 
 
 1 ; I' 
 
 nil 
 
 1 ' t 
 
 Ml 
 
 Im 
 
 1 P ,i 
 
 jHil 
 
 1 '' 'i ^ 
 
 91 
 
 K i ,i,/ 
 
 1 
 
 1 n 
 
 i 
 
 1 j;J 
 
 m 
 
 W 
 
207 
 
 JKipMiiion 
 
 to be observ' 
 cd by a pat- 
 role in recon- 
 noitring 
 ff rounds wit 
 lage.t^ or 
 wood.i^ or if 
 defiles, hoi'- 
 lototiiays^ or 
 enclosures^ , 
 fire to be 
 passed dur-- 
 ing the 
 march. 
 
 On arrhiiig 
 at a full. . 
 
 Jn patting 
 hedges and 
 nclo$ure$» 
 
 Of Patroles in general, 
 
 . 1. Snpponing a patrole to consist of a serjeant 
 and twelve incnv the serjeant detaches two mea 
 and a corporal in front, and two on each flank, 
 the latter ext«ndin^ themselves to the right and 
 left as far as possible, without losin<; sight of the 
 main body ; but the distance of ihesc .skirmishers, 
 both in front and on either flank, must be re^tiia- 
 led by local circumstances: in an open and plain 
 country, they may venture to extend themselves 
 furkher from the main body than in one that- is 
 eqcloted or hilly. On coming to an enclosure, 
 one m»o advances intoiiaudoxaminesit closely { 
 the other, remaining^ behind it, keeps upon the 
 watch, and takes care to be alway ready to 8up< 
 pprt his comrade in case of his being attacked. 
 
 2. On coming to a bill, one man will ascend ; 
 the other, remainin^^ at the bottom, will bt^^^iven 
 to understand, by a signal concerted between 
 them* whether the enemy occupy any par4. of it 
 or aol. If an enemy'is discovered, both the 
 skirmishers must conceal themselves, and having 
 ascertained as.nearly as possible the strength of 
 theenemyvone must endeavour to join the pat role 
 to give the intelligence; upon whidh the patrole 
 should re'ire, and, if possible, throw itself mto aa 
 ambuscade to observe the enemy's motions.—* 
 'When a flanker sees a detachment of the enemy 
 kdvancing immediately upon the patrole, and that 
 he is- not able by any other means \.og\ye\\ie 
 alarm of their approach, he must fire, which will 
 be the tigoal for all the flankers to jointhe maia 
 body, or the signal will be given for assembly, 
 and the patrole with united force will attack the 
 enemy if equal to him in numbers, or will secure 
 its retreat by a firm resistance, if the superior 
 strength of the enemy makes it imprudent to 
 risk an attack. 
 
 S. When a patrole marches through an en* 
 closed country, or one much intersected bj hed- 
 
.208 
 
 Des Patrouilks en general, 
 
 I, Suppotsnt (^ tne Patrouille contiste d*itn- 
 sergcnt el d(iuze honimet. In 8cr<;ent d^lache 
 (tciix honxipeM ct iin raporal en avaiit, et deux 
 hommes d chaqiie fl'cinc, cva derniers ^tendcnta 
 droite ct u gauche antaiit que poKMiblc, sans per- 
 dre dc vue le corps principal \ inais la distance 
 de ces tirailleurs en avan^, et des deux r6t^s se- 
 ra r^glee par ies cir Constances locales ; dans un 
 paysdc plaines, loin des hois ils peuveut avaa- 
 tiirer de s'^tendre pins loin de leur corps, que 
 dans un paysfourr^ ou monlueux. Arrivi^ » une 
 cloture, un homme avunce pour Pexaniincr ri« 
 goureusement ; tandis que Tautre restant en de. 
 Eors, setient enpirde, ct asoin d'etre toujour! 
 pr6ti sotttenir son caraarade en cas d'atta<}ue. 
 
 2. Arrivant i une rtiontagne ou c6teau, un 
 homme raontera, Tautre restant au bas, sera a- 
 rerti par un s/^nff< convenu enti^cUx, sf l*enne« 
 mi en occupe aucune parfie, ou autrement. Si 
 I*enneml est decouvert, Fes deux voltigeurs se 
 cacberontv et ayanl verifif a pcu pr^s I& forfd 
 de I'ennemi, un d'eux tachera de joindre la pa- 
 trouille, pour donner avis : et la patrouille se re- 
 tirera, pour, si c'est praticable, dresser une am- 
 buscade, pour observer fes'niouYementsde Ten- 
 nemi. Quand un voltigeur ditach^ iroit un d^- 
 tachement^ ennemi,^qui s*avance en droiture 
 contre la Patrouille, et que /es moyem \w\ man* 
 quenf, poiir autrement donner ralarme, il fera' 
 teu, ce quiservira desi|B;naI a tous Ies voltigeur\ 
 de joindre la PatrouiHe, qui Ies attaquera avee 
 lesfoicesrcBQies,' sjI est a nombre ep^al avee 
 Tennemi & ou ilftsnrerasa rctrnite par une re* 
 sistance ferme, si par la superiority des forces, 
 de I'ennemi ii £toit imprudiHit dc risquer. une 
 attaque. 
 
 3. Quand une Patrouille marche a travers un 
 laj't coupe d^clptii ret, oiiuir pays fourrr./ Ies 
 
 Diapoiiiitn 
 a observeY 
 par une pa] 
 troupe em- 
 ploij/e h re" 
 tonnoitre h 
 terrein^ vilm 
 lages^ boi» 
 ou di/ileSj 
 chemina 
 ci:eux^ ou 
 clotures^ 
 qu'il faut 
 pasarr rn 
 route*. 
 
 jirrivant it 
 une monia- 
 gne» 
 
 hayes et et^: 
 
 f 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 il 
 
 t, 
 
 5'' 
 
 
 ■^i 
 
 
209 
 
 1 - 
 
 j^es, the flankcrfi muRt be sent on each side of them 
 in order to examine Ihem thoroughly ; in doing 
 ivhich, they must always ke«pas near as possible 
 in-line With the main body, and resume their 
 proper stations, as soon as they have passed any 
 obstacle which may have drawn thbm out of 
 their direction. It may sometimes he necessary 
 for flankers to get to the tops of trees for the pur- 
 pose of reconnoitring, ana on no account must 
 they leave any high ground behind them without 
 first viewing the environs from it. 
 
 In Ifwvers- 
 
 inff onen . 
 ground, 
 
 •♦**•^.Jr^■J• • 
 «■-■ 
 
 •4. In marching OTer an open xountry, and 
 where objects ar&seen at a great distance it ,will 
 not be necessary to «end out skirmishers op the 
 flanks, unless a house or an enclosure is perceived 
 at«jdist«nce{ in which case thej must be dietach* 
 •d to exAmine it thoroughly* Hy night, or \u 
 h«icy wcAll^er, flankers a^e m all sitnationf in7 
 drspensably necessary, and mitst, be. particularly 
 careful to regulate their ipovement by that of 
 the main body. 
 
 In patsing 
 
 through an 
 koUow wajf. 
 
 . 5i Grc/'Jt preciintiqn is requisite when a palroTQ 
 is under the^necessity of passing an hollow way, 
 in order to guard against a surprise or beiiig cut 
 off. To avoid this, the patrole should b^^ divided 
 into flics, which followea^h oth^r at such a (lis. 
 tance that eiich may- be able to distinguish the. 
 two men immediately before ihem ; by this ar- 
 rangement, an enemy wlfl only be able'lo per- 
 ceive the two uien lu rr^)nt, anU the wnole pa< 
 frole will be alarmed, .either bv t^^eir c.oniraO^s 
 in front being attacke(j^ or h^ their ^rcu|»on 
 the enemy if (here should be turnings or wi^3- 
 ings in the hollow way, which prevent those in 
 the rear from seeing the file in front of ihcm, 
 the Inttcr must givetioliceof the preseptip of^a 
 •aemy by fi^rin^a^ akoU ■<.■ . • • • ; 
 

 210 
 
 voUufeurs «ci V nf cjwo} < {\ < ux c6t' ». afiu 
 d'ci) f'aire une recherche txin en \r tinaMt 
 iiji Kc ticndront en 1oii.« tcmM ai i-prcs < c*»rj)8 
 |)i-in('i|}Hl, v.l en ii<;ae ivec liii, I'il Kor«i po^iKiblu 
 ct reprcndront leiirs | laces, uiikjMiV f|u'i*« auront 
 paxte qticl(|iie obstacle, qui h^ auruit fait (lc« 
 vicr (Iiv lour .slaliun. 11 sera quelqiie fois neccs- 
 sairn pour les volti^curs de. niunter aux times 
 (lc.sarbr(?s pour recoAUoitre, et il ne fiut pan 
 pour <|uolq(ie»rai8on8 que cc soil, iaisserdcrrierc 
 eux deg hauteurs sans avoir exainind ses environs 
 et vu ic pays d'alentour. 
 
 4.'Fin marchei travcrs un paysouvert, et ou Truvcrsnnt 
 les nbjets sont vus a la distance, il ne sera pas ui fir rein 
 n^ccKHair'e d'envoycr des voltigeurssur les flafncs ouvert. 
 I inoius de vair uno maison ou cloture assez 
 pres pour donncr de la jalousie; auquel cas ils 
 iteront detaches pour rexaifiiner exactement. «.; ^ 
 
 De uuit ou en terns de brumes, des- voltigeurs 
 tout indinpensablement ndcessaires dans toutes V« /. 
 Ics positions; ils auront grand soin de rcgler 
 leur inuuYeineDtavec ceux du corps. *" * * 
 
 r I 
 
 m 
 
 !!■' 
 
 k 
 
 m 
 
 II 
 
 
 5. II est n^cosalre de prendre de «^randes 
 precautions quand une patrouille est obligee de 
 passer par un chemin creux, afin d'etre en gar- 
 de, crainte d'etre surpris, ou taill^ eh pieces. 
 Pour ^viter c« tnal.heur/ la patrouille sera diyi- 
 8(e eh files, qui se suivront a une telle distance 
 que chaque noinme puisse voir distinctement 
 ic9 d^ux hummes imm^di^lemcnt devaYit lui ; 
 par cet arrangement I'ennemi ue pourroit aper-^- 
 cevoirqueles deuxhorames en front, et'toiite 
 la patrouille sera alarm^e, ou par Tattaque dd 
 I'ennemi sui* leurscamarades en avant, s'ils sont 
 kttaqu^s, oa parieur feu centre r^noemi. Si il 
 se trou ve des tours et des serpentins dans le che- 
 min creux, qui «rip^chent ceux de Parriere d^ 
 Yoir la file qui est en leur front, cei dernien 
 innonceroDt la prince de I'eneiiii par un coub 
 ilefcU. ^ 
 
 Passant un 
 
 chsmin 
 creux. 
 
 !.;• 
 
 ^ij 
 
 1- • 
 
 v\ 
 
 
 
 \ 
 
211 
 
 In marching ' 6. When a Tfooc! presciitd itself in front of the 
 i'lroH^h a niurch, tlirou^'li which the patrolo inuNt iinsti, 
 muod, the fl ink skiritiiiher^ arc lent to the skirtii ufit ( 
 
 the/; mii«t however, icccp »o much within the 
 ', . , wood us not to he porci'iveil from without ; the 
 . main hoiij m:ii'chi'S directly through, but if pu«< 
 ' sible by Kome other rend than that which is com* 
 ' monlv used. For ihe security t)f a patrole, when 
 
 it isa stroii;; one, duhichmenls should be left at 
 -, (he entrance of tho wood, to sustain the main 
 
 body in its march throtigh, and to f^'ive the alarm 
 '' . \ in tAHC of tho approach ofhn ienemy. If the 
 
 '* ' ' ; wood is of <>^reat extent, small patrolet shonld 
 .'-^- < • be sent in front and on the flanks of the main 
 body ; and iimal! intermediate pat roles must he 
 sent out, keeping at the distance of 4 or 500 
 '^ '. yards from IhdSti in front of them, who\ti object 
 
 y iV will bu to examine all cross roads, (here being 
 ': \r little apprehension for the safety of these detach- 
 
 ments, snpposihi^ even the enemy to he in am- 
 V* '* buscadc in the wood* Thtree men wilt be sn'S- 
 : •'•' cient for these patroles, two of which will ad* 
 
 ' vancc in a line, and keep wilhiu si^ht of each 
 *^ ■ - 'other; the third foilowinif them and placiiij^ 
 
 ' ' ' biuLseif .10 as always to keep them both in view ; 
 by this meanj, should jhc most advanced patrole 
 . i.-n. be carried off by the enemy, the second and 
 following ones would escape, and the main body 
 would have timely notice of the dann;er. — lu 
 V returning, the patrole should take % different 
 
 route from (hat by which it advanced, for the 
 better chance ofdisqovcring th^ enemy ; indeed 
 it must be co^isidered as a general rule, that no 
 patrole should return by tb&v^i^v it came; nur 
 in case o^being; attacked, s;iud obliged to retreat 
 should it ever Ifall back in a direct line upon the 
 main body. Byeroadsarealways to be prefered 
 to the main route^ either in relurnin|^ fram 
 patroles or in retreating before an enemy; in 
 patroling through a wood, care should be taken 
 not to venture too far, and that the skirmishers 
 are not at too great a distance from each other, 
 for fear of hazj weather, or approa<^h of night. 
 
212 
 
 6. Qaand un bnlf M pr^wnle en avAnt do )a PntMntun 
 fnRrche,4 travcm dui|uel il faui/que lapatroiiille Boh, 
 paffe, lei Tolti<;eiiri nont enyuyM poi(r en axa^ 
 miner lt;tbord< oil entrceit its le tiendront ccf. /^ 
 pendant, aiiex rn dedans dii boit pour ne paa 
 £lre ¥ui de dithuriii ie cnrpa de lioupei marche 
 directoment a travem, niuif ai c*e»l puatible p«r 
 quelquo autre route que celle qui eat commu- 
 n^meiit uNitee. Peiir la snreie d'line pMrouillei 
 quaud olio est forte, on laiifNent des d^tacbe- 
 menlsi Tentr^edu boit pour aoutcntr h c«)rpa , f. 
 
 ftendant m ftiarche i travers, el doniler Ta- 
 arme i Papproche de Pennenii. !i>i ie bois eat 
 de grande iteudue, de petitei patruuiilea seront 
 envoy^ea en front el aux flancs dii corpa, el dea 
 pelites ptftronilles interim diaires serout en-- 
 Toy^eifSotenanla 4OO0U 500pas(]ecelleaqii^ sont 
 enleurTront; leur ubjet est J'exaininer tuns lei « 
 
 carrefoiires, car il y a peu. a appri'hender pour 
 la fcurel^ de cesdftachementi, suppuvant m^ine 
 que I'ennemi fut dano le boist Troifi homines 
 •nffisent pour la force de ces pnlrouilles, Honl 
 deux avanceront en ligne, et ^arderont fccipro- 
 qucment a vuei le troisieme les suivrh et se 1 y, 
 ticndrade manierf' a Ics avoir tousles deux eo 
 viic, par ce inoyen, oi lapatrouiile fa plus avan* 
 cee e^tenlevee^ l>i secuiide et celles qui suivent . 
 tero^t sanvees et s'ichapperont, et le corps .sera 
 d terns averti du danger. £n retoQmant, la pa> 
 trouilie prendra un cbemin autre que coiui par 
 lequel elle s^est avancfe pour avoir mcilleure 
 chance de voir Peuneini i ;*i la v^ritt^, il doit el re 
 tonsid^r^comme regie genfrale,dene jamais fa ire 
 relourner une patrouille par le chemin qu'e!)** a 
 pris en allant; ni en cas d'etre altaquee et 6l)!i- 
 e't' de se relirer, elle ue doit jamais le f-iire' en 
 figiic directe sur le corps d'oii elle est dctach^e, 
 Le?) routes ecart^esseront toujours pr^fi^r^cs au ' 
 grand chemin, soit en retournaht de palrouillea 
 ou se rctirant devanl Pennemi % la patrouille en 
 passant par un bois, aura attention de, ne paf 
 Crop avaaturer> el ^ue les voltigeuri ne soieak 
 
 $ 
 
 '. ''\ 
 
 'V 
 
"u 
 
 Inmarching 
 through a 
 defile. 
 
 " ■ 213 
 
 7. Before a palrole ventures into a defile the 
 two men advanced in front innst examine il well, 
 and at the same time Hankers must reconnoitre 
 the f^round on the right and left of it, where it 
 is probable the enemy mijijht be in ambuscade. 
 In returning, a patroie should if possible avoid a 
 defile it has before passed. When thedclile has 
 been passed, a few men may be left at the ex- 
 tremity of it, to give the alarm by a shot, in case 
 a detachment of the enemy shonid attempt to 
 cutoflfthe patroie; these men will eventually 
 disconcert the enemy's plans, who may naturally 
 conceive them to be the head of a detachment 
 passing the defile, as a support tu the.patrolc. 
 
 Fn reconnoi- 
 tring V il- 
 (age. 
 
 8. When a patroie is to reconnoitre a village, 
 the directions that have been nireudy given for its 
 conduct during the march must be strictly ad. 
 hered to. Whether the p?\lioly is a strong one or 
 not, it must halt at a few hundred paces from the 
 village, assemble all the ski>-;ui.shers, and lie con* 
 cealed^ a few men must^then be sent towards 
 .the village, and must endeavour to seize one of 
 the inhabitants, and conduct him to the officer 
 commanding the patroie, in order that he may be 
 examined respecting the presence of the enemy. 
 
 ^<lf upon diligent inquiry it is found that the enemy 
 are in the village, the patroie must make its 
 retreat: the deposition of one person should not 
 
 ^however, be depended upon; the men who have 
 been sent to the village must endeavour, if possi- 
 ble, to take another person, who must be sepa 
 rately examined, to sec whether his report coin- 
 
 ; cides with the former one. Ifaftei"* ail inquiry 
 it appears that the enemy are not in the village, 
 
 .some men must be sent into it, and small parties 
 
 ^to the right and left of il to examine the environs 
 dnd all the avenues mu^t at the same time be 
 occupied. The men who are sent into the vil- 
 lage must immediately repair to the mayor or 
 chief magistrate of the place, aad make him 
 accompany them to searcn all the houses, stftblei. 
 
214 
 
 ^ 
 
 .\ 
 
 Reconnoitre 
 un village. 
 
 pns Irop loin ies uiis des aiitres, crainte de 
 broiiiliai'd oil Pnpprochede lanuit. 
 
 7. Avant qiriine patroiirlle fi'avantiire a entrer Passant un 
 un deAle, ics deux hoiumefi avanc^s examine- drjilt, 
 
 ront soigneufseinent, et en inline terns des vol- . 
 
 ligenrs reconnoitront le terrein a droite et i \^ 
 
 gaiirhe ou probablement rcnneini pourroit a- . 
 
 voir dresse iine ambuscade. Au retour une pa- 
 
 truuille devroit autaiit que possible,. e viler un T .;^^ 
 
 d6file qu'elle it passe en allant. Quand le defile / .^ 
 
 est passe, on pourra y larsser quelques hommes, „ , . ' 
 
 qui de son extr^inile, donneront PaJarme par 
 
 un coup de fen, au cas qu'un dotachement de . \>.\ 
 
 Tennemi voulut conper la patrouille ; ccs hom- 
 
 nies i? tout evenement deconcerteroni Ies plans 
 
 del'enuemi, qui naturellementles prendra pour ,, 
 
 la l^te d'un detacbcment, passant le defile pour 
 
 goutenir la patrouille. 
 
 8. Quand une patrouille doit reconnoitre un 
 villBo^e, il faut strictement remplir Ies- iostruc 
 tions d'^jiV donnees pour la marche. Que la pa- 
 tTQi^ille soil forte ou foible, die s'arr^tera k 
 quelques centainesde pas du village, asse/nble« 
 ra tous leg voltigeurs et se tiendra a I'^cart;. 
 quelques hommes seront alors envoyes vers le ; 
 village, et tacheront de saisir un des habitants^, 
 et (le le conduire a Tofficicr commandant la pa-' 
 trouille, alin d'etre examine au sujet de la> pre- 
 sence de rennemi. Si apres un exameo<Tigou« 
 reux on trouve que Tennemi est dans le vilrage, . 
 la patrouille fera sa relraite : la disposition d'un 
 seul, cependant ne de^vroit pas avoir trop de 
 poids;.les hommes qui ont£t6 au village tache- 
 ront, si c'est possible de prendre un autre hom- 
 me, qui sera examine siparement, pour voir si 
 son rapport s'accorde avec I'aulre. Si apres 
 toute recherche il paroit que i'eaiiemi n'est pas 
 dans le vtlla^re, on y ehverra quelques hommes,' 
 et de petils partis a droite et a gauche pour exa-~ 
 miner le^ environs, et toutes Ies avenues seront 
 en m^me terns occupies. Les hommes qui ont 
 £U dauii Ip fiilage, iront tout de suite au MaiU^ 
 
 - T9. '■• 
 
 1 
 
 
 IT. 
 
 
 I: 
 
 
 iil 
 
 :!'? 
 
 n ■■] 
 
 I'f! 
 
 III? 
 I' 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 
 \s 
 
 .(I 
 
 % 
 
215 . . 
 
 bariH, and all other places where the enemy 
 might be concealed. If they find all safe, the- 
 men must return to the main body and make- 
 their report«--After thi», should the commander 
 4lf the patroie wish still to be dimself conviuced 
 of the truth: of the report, he may go in person 
 into the village, accompanied by a rew men, for 
 prudence would sucrjorest the impropriety of tak- 
 ing the whole patroie, as,^ notwithstanding the 
 former search, it ts still possible the enemy may 
 be in ambuscade, and only watching the oppor*. 
 tunity of the whole dfctaehment oeing in the 
 Tillage, to attack it t« advantage. When a non*. 
 commissioned officer commands a patroie, be- 
 fore he leaves a village he haa been directed to 
 examine> be should reouire a certificate of his 
 having been there. When a patroie isto recon- 
 iioitre a Tillage by night, the whole must assem- 
 ble at soipc distance m front of it, as in patroling 
 by day, and the environs must be e^^miued;, 
 but the meni who are sent into the-v^illage must,, 
 in this instance, be directed to creep gently 
 along the fron^ of the houses,, and particularly 
 along, those of the public houses, looking^at the 
 came time in at the windo^4, and endeayourin^ 
 to distinguish whether an^. of the enemy aro 
 withiii> Should< this be f.Qiind. impracficable,, 
 they must conceal tbemsetves^ and watit the-op- 
 portunity of some inhabitant passing, whom it 
 VfiH bethyeir otijpct tocarry off to thecoromanding 
 ofl^cer of the patroie with aalittlc nbise as-possible* 
 and wit hoiHt raising any alarm. Jf it should ap- 
 pear to be certain, from the report that the pri- 
 •pner makes, and from other intelligence, that the 
 •nem> areoot in the village; the same directions 
 must be followed as have been already laid down 
 for the day patroie; but should the enemy be ia 
 the village, the patroie mustlrelire;. an attempt, 
 bowever, should be made to carry ofif'one of bis 
 f idettes^in order to gain more certain accounts. 
 Whatever has been said with respect to Tillages,, 
 ij^ applicable also to. any plaoe or lonii* ^ . 
 
'11, 
 
 21 6 
 
 *•», _ -V ^. 
 
 *•;' 
 
 on Cbef Magistral dii lieu, el robli*eronl de 
 les- accom|i»<^tiera la vi»ile de toutes ies mai- 
 sons, el^ibies, a^i'ati;re.9, et autres endroits otk 
 rennctni pourroit 8tre cache. Si tout est bieD» 
 Ies homines relouriieront au corps cl feroot leur 
 rapport.— Apres qiiai si le commandcint de la 
 patrotitlle desire encorede verifier le rapport,, 
 H peut aller Iui-in8iiie au viilau^e, accoinpaga^ 
 de pen d'hommes, car la prudence dicleroit com-.- 
 b^en il sera inai a propos d'v conduire toute la 
 patrouilie» pui«que nonobstant tontes Ies re- 
 cherches, il est encore possible que I'enr.emi 
 soil dans'le Tillage einbusqii6 et guetant roc<ao 
 sion de toniber stir la patrouiHe, ou d*altaqner 
 avccavaatage tout ledetachement, qui se scroil 
 cru ensiirete. Quand un has officier commmde 
 uae patrouille, avant de partir du village qu'il 
 a eu oriire d*examiner, if demandera un certi- 
 ficat d'avoir etc la. Quand une patrouille doit 
 reconnoitre un village la ruit, le tout a'assem- 
 blera aqueique distance en front du lieu,conime 
 dans la patruuille par jour, et Ies environs 8e« 
 ronl examines; inais Ies hommes qui sent en«- 
 voyes au village, en cette occasion,, doivent se 
 posfer adroitement le long des devantures dei 
 maifons, et surtout des auberges, regardant aux 
 fenetres pour voir s'il n*y a point d'ennemi de- 
 dans. Si ceci se trouve impraticable, its se ca« 
 cheront, et attendrgnt {'occasion d'enlever un. 
 passant qu'ils emmeneront ^ Pofficier coniinaa* 
 danlla patrouille avec aussi peu de bruit que 
 possible, et saiis causer d'alarme. S'il paroit 
 certain par le rapport du prisonier qu'il n^y a 
 point d'ennemi ai| village, et aussi par d'autre^- 
 mtctligence, il se conduira coinine il est dit pour' 
 lapatrauilie devour i .raais si I'ennemi estdansle 
 village, la pairouilte se retirera, cependaat la 
 patrouille I achera d'enlever un de ses videttes, 
 pour avoir des nouvelles plus certaine^. Tout 
 ce ^ui a ete dit pour Ies villages est applicable, 
 MX Villf 9, Bourgg et autres lieuju 
 
 -'>^ 
 
 ;itlf 
 
 'if * \ 
 
 M 
 
 m 
 
 i* 
 
 lii'i 
 
 if 
 
 I ' ff il 
 
 'I 
 
 h 
 
 i: 
 
 1 
 
 I 
 
 i 
 
 T 
 
 'i 
 ^1 
 
 / I 
 
 
' x'Bif ■•. 
 
 21 1 
 
 On meeting 
 Mn enemy. 
 
 ^r 
 
 5 
 
 .&. When. skirmishers ,giycnot!ce of the ap" 
 proach of the enemy, the patrole should endea- 
 TOiir to coDceal itself, the oDject of a patrole being 
 to reconnoit-e a country, an^to'get intelligence 
 e^f the enemy, their movements &c ; all engage- 
 mj^nts should be avoided^ and, unless ab»orutely 
 compelled to fis;hV a patrole should always en- 
 deavour to gel away undiscovered. If a p»lrolo' 
 allows itself to hk unnecessarily drawn into an 
 affair with one of the. enemy's^ it must run an. 
 equal risk of b^ing captured, aud theservice itwas 
 to have performed remains unaccomplished, «o 
 that the army or d^taehment from whence the 
 |yatrole was sent out, may wait in vain fur the in. 
 telligence that was expeclcd from it. if a patrole ■ 
 fhould be unavoidably engaged in an affair, the/ 
 officer<)()mmanditig it will send Immediate notice 
 by two trustji men to the corps from which her 
 vras detaj^hed, and at the - same time a written 
 reporto f whatever information he may have been 
 able to obtain,, which he should always have 
 iieady in case of such an event. Whfen a patrole 
 is to be sent out, every, sorlof instruction for its . 
 conduct durini> the march should be communi- 
 cated tollmmcn. The greatest attention in the 
 officer commanding a -patrole will be requisite- 
 lb watch the conduct of his men : they must be. 
 -attentive, obeilientand vigilant, from the moment; 
 of their departure till their return jr and under 
 pain of the severest punishment, they, jnust be. 
 fbrbidden to go into any public-house during the^ 
 march : they should therefore be supplied with, 
 their complete ration of provisions. A pat role' 
 should always. endeavour to conceal its, march t;, 
 thereforevEoods&enclosuresare to be preferred^ 
 in its progress through a oountry^ Bridgessbould' 
 be avoidedvfor fear of arabuscad^S'Or.Qf beingcut: 
 off. If, however, a bridge mustof jieoessity be 
 passed, a few men should ht postednt it, to give ' 
 the alarm to the patrohe on the appri)ach of the; 
 enemy. In this case it will be advertited of the . 
 danger by a shot; by which' means it njay gaia« 
 time lo repMS thue brid^ei aodMlvatt avoid beioQ: 
 
sis^ 
 
 
 9: duand les Toltij^eurs donnent avif de-I'ap-^ Renrontfajt- 
 proche de I'ennerai, ia patrouille tachera de se renntmi^ 
 cacher, son objel elaiit de reconnoitre le vays,. 
 etile prendre langue concernant les ennemis,. 
 leurs mouvementH, &c« tout combat doit elre 
 evite,et 4 moins d'^tr.eabsolument obii«^e de se ' - 
 
 biittre, une patrouille devroitr toujours tacher. 
 de se retirer sans 6tre de'couverte. Si une pa- "-«>!' 
 
 trouille se laisse attirer dans une afi&ire avec 
 une des patrouilles ennemies,- elles court ua. '^ ■ 
 egal risque d'etre prise, et le service qu*elle de« 
 Toit faire resle a recenimencer^ de sorte que ^|'i' 
 l*lirin^e oudetachement d*oO sortcette patrouiU ' * 
 le ponrrait atteudre en vain 8«n retour et le» -^ 
 
 nouvelteS' qu'dn aiteqdojt en consi'q'iencei St 
 uiici patrouille se trouve inevitablenieiit engai^ee. 
 dans une affaire, I'officier qui la coniinande en- V 
 Terra avis sur }e champ par deux honimes de ' v . t 
 confianceavertir le commandant du corps du- 
 ^lel ila ^te d6tacbe, et en mlaiie terns un rap- 
 port par^crit detoute IMnformationquMl aurait * .- 
 {iu obtenir, lequelrapportil. aura toujours pret ^ Vf 
 
 pour 6tre pr^par^ d un tel eveneroent. Quand ^ . ^ 
 
 une. patrouille est d^tachie, toute sorte dMns-j 
 tructions pour sa conduite durant la marxrhe de- 
 Trait ^tre communiqu^es aux hommes. La plu». 
 grande attention de Tofficier commandant uce • 
 patrouille sera n^essaire pour veilier sur la con* 
 duite de ses homn^es : ils doivent ^tre attentifs,^ 
 obeissants et vigjlants du moment ^e leur de- 
 part jusqu*^ leur retour ; et sons peine de la pu» 
 Ditionlaplus rlgoureuse, il leur sera d^fendu 
 d^entrer dans ancun6 auberge durant la marche;. 
 c'eit pourpuoi its seront munis de leur ration de . 
 provision complete. Une patroiiille tacherit 
 toujours'de cacber sa marche: c'est pourquoi 
 les bois et les pa js couj^s. seroot prefSrrs dani 
 son prog r^to^ )i jtravers un pays. On evitera let. 
 ponts crainte d'embuscades oh d'etre coupes. Si 
 cependani il est n&cessaire d^ passer. un pont^^oik 
 yposleraquel^iieS'h.ommeip'Qur'alarraer la pa«. 
 irouine en cas de Tapproche de I'ennerai. Dant; 
 McwiciigniUile.daogecserauA coup dc fcu^ 
 
 b' II!' 
 
 lull' 
 
 ili 
 
 I 
 
 i:' 
 
 1& 
 
 m 
 
 r 
 
 it 
 
 ,ii) 
 
 *!'■ 
 
 I 
 J 
 
 I* 
 
 ii't .1 
 
 
 11 
 
 
 h 
 
 M 
 
 \ 
 
» 
 
 J 
 
 219^ - - - 
 
 c^it oCr. Sh'oultl' every Ihinfl^ remain c[«iet, at 
 the expiration of a rerlainjime. previously de- 
 lervnined, the me- ^ho were. left at the bridge 
 V(!l follow, and join the patrofe. 
 
 If the palrole is formed to pass places, where, 
 m)t withsl.Tmding every precniitiou. there is still 
 a probability ori)cingc»t off, small posts iiuist 
 be left at such places, or the patrolo should be 
 divided into a number of »mall detachments, 
 advance by different routes, and some place 
 should be appointed for a rendezvous of the 
 whole. 
 
 ^H> 
 
 When a patrole finds Hself unexpectedly in 
 |)rescnce of an enemy, if of equal force it should 
 attack $ but should the enemy's number be '\ery. 
 snperior, and there remain no possibility of get- 
 lintj away undiscovered, thepatrole mustdisperse 
 and each'man save himself as he can. In such 
 a case, and when, from an apprehension of dan- 
 ger, the patrole is advancing in small detachments 
 one in front of the other, as soon as those in 
 the rear are made aware of the enemy being so 
 superior, they mu^t immediately retreat, without 
 waiting for the detacbmetits in their front. It is 
 the duty of a commanding officer of a patrole to 
 point out to each man all the dangers to be ex« 
 pected, the manner inwhich heistoconducthim- 
 self in retiring singly, the roads that are open to 
 film in such a case, the places at which the patrole 
 nriay rendez-vous, and (should that be impractica- 
 ble) the position of the detachinent or army, to 
 which he must endeavoar to make his escape, 
 llie above instrnctions it is absolutely necessary 
 to impress strongly on the mipds of the men, ia 
 ol'derthat each man may kiiow how he is to 
 tkv6 himself under the abb ve mentioned eventSt.. 
 
 ^« the greatest prejudice rnay arise from a , 
 ptitrple having committed the most trifling error 
 ahd as, on the contrary the greatest advantage ; 
 ■iay beiteriv«d'to^ artuy from tb^ good cooduct 
 
'-^ ; 
 
 220 
 
 
 par ce moy«n ellepourra g:a^ner le terns At re» 
 passer le punt, et au rapinseviter d'etre coupee. 
 Si toiitestlranqiiillea rexpiralion d*uii leins,pr6— 
 aiabieinent determine, ceu'x qui etaieut au poat 
 Miivioqle! jpindront la patrouille^ 
 
 Si la patrouille est forc^e de passer>par des: 
 endroits oiH elle court risque d'etre couple, maU' 
 gretoutes les precautions, on laissera. des petitr 
 postet i d^ te» endroitfl> oil la patrouille sera 
 divis^e en petits ditacheinents qui avanceront 
 par diflfirentef routes et un rendex^vous sera^ 
 fiz^ oik irssereJoiad^iDQL 
 
 Quand une patrouille le troiive tnopinement 
 en presence derennemi, si elle est d'^eale force el- 
 le attaquerai- mais si le nombre des nommes est 
 tressup^rieur-et qu'il nereste aucune probabili- 
 ty de se retirersans 6tre decouvert, laC patrouil- 
 le dispersera etchacnu se sauver'a commc) il le- 
 peut<. £q tolxas^et quand par crainte de danger 
 une patrouille airance en petits. ditachenients^ 
 un en avant de^ I'autre, aussitdt que ceux de 
 derriere sent inforines que renneini eU si supd*. 
 rjenr, ils se retireroht sur le cbamp, sans atten*- 
 dreles.detachements en leur front. 11 est da 
 devoir d'un oflBcier commandant une patrouille 
 d'ezpo8er4chaqlie homme tous les dan<^era qu*iL 
 a aattendre* laconduite qu*il doit tenir en se 
 retiiant seul, lea chomins qui lui sont ouverta 
 en tel cas^ les endroits ou la patrouille pourra 
 se rejoindre, et (si eestimpraticable) la position, 
 du ditachement ou de rarmte, auquel il tache-. 
 ra de s'echapper. 11 .est absolument n^cessaire 
 d'imprimer forteroentdans Teaprit des bommea. 
 les instructions susdites, afin que chaqua tiomme 
 loit au fait des moyejis de se tiret d'affaire ea, 
 cas de malbeur. * 
 
 Yu que le plut^^raod prfjujdiee pourrait s'en* 
 tdivre de la moindre bevue d'ane patrouille^. 
 ausM par la bonne, conduile d'une simple pa« 
 .tfAuiUe, unei ariK^Q «iiti«re pourra rcLcevoir iva 
 
 I.. "._ .» 
 
 
 m 
 I {'iiii 
 
 ! 
 
 
 iff 
 
 f 
 
 *!'; 
 
 m 
 
 % 
 
 : 
 
 
 i^i 
 
 ir ) 
 
 " 
 
 %-r 
 
 a 
 
 
 i 
 
 #! 
 
. . 221 
 
 t 
 
 of one, all the above insliiirlions, and a» many 
 more as may be thuu(;ht useful, should be 
 explained to the men in Iheclenrest terms pteviouf 
 to the marching off, and during the march of Ihe 
 patrole. 
 
 0/the Advanced Guard, Flank Patrolesy 
 and rear Guard, and of their several 
 DuV.es on a march. 
 
 General rule !• ^^ i^ a rule which must always he attended 
 to that nocdiumn, regiment or detachment, whe- 
 ther it be near, oral a distance from the enemy, 
 marches without an advanced ^uard, and flank 
 patroles, in order to reconnoitre the conntry, 
 and prevent the possibility of an attack before 
 the column has time to form, or to look for and 
 disludge the enemy when he is supposed to be ia 
 the neighbourhood, though no account is re- 
 ceived of his. ex.actp08itiQa.. 
 
 Dhtrihution 
 oftheadvan 
 eed guard 
 andflank 
 jfotroles, . 
 
 8. The distribution of the advanced goard, 
 and flank patroles, remain as has been before 
 directed. The intention being, that they should be 
 sent as far in front and on the flanks as possible, 
 it becomes equally necessary, that. Ihey again 
 shpald detach in their front and on their flanks 
 (in as large proportion as. their numbers will 
 allow) skirmishers^ whose business it will be to 
 examine closely all objects which present ..them- 
 selves on the march, to traverse all enclosures, 
 and the like. Skirmishers, must always be in 
 partiesof two men each^ so that while one is 
 employed in examining any object, the other may 
 remain on the look out, and if any thing ap- 
 proach, oris perccivjied at a distance, the one 
 may immediately make a report lo the body 
 from which he is detached, while the other keeps 
 his eye constantly on the object till the return 
 of his comrade* 
 
• . 222 
 
 plus grands avanlJi;^f», totites ce« instniclions, 
 et aiitnnt d'autresqui |)oiirront efre nlilcH, de- 
 ■vraient clre cxj»liquees aiix homines dans leg ler- 
 mes les plusclairs avant Ic depart ct duraiit la 
 niarchc ds la patrouille. 
 
 De la Garde avancee, des Patrouilles dc 
 Flancy et de PArriere Garde et de leurs 
 Devoirs en fnarche, 
 
 1. C'est une reujle constantc et fixe, que ni la 
 coloane, ni le regiment, ni le d^lachement, Regie gin^m 
 qif i) suit proche ou loin de rennemi, ne marche ''«^<''« 
 
 sans une garde avanc^e, et ces patrouilles de 
 flanc, afin de reconnoitre et pr^venirla possibi* 
 lite d' line altaqueavnntqiiela colonneaitle terns 
 de former, ou pour tronver et deloger rennemi 
 quand il est suppose 6lrc dans le Toikinagc, 
 quolqu'on n'ait pas cu information de son exacte 
 position. ' 
 
 2. La distribution de la garde avanccc el des Distribution 
 patrouilles de ilancs, reste conjme ii est icj^le de fa garde 
 dessus. L^intentionetanlqu'ilssoieut poussesaus- avancteetdea 
 si en a^ant el sur les coles <jue possible : il devient patrouilles 
 cgalement necessiiire, qu'ils detacheut encore en dejlanct^ - 
 avant et sur les flancs (en proporlion de leurs 
 uombres ) des voiligeurs p<mr examiner stride- 
 
 meut tons les objcts qui se presentent en la ligne de 
 marche, traverser tons les champs, clo«, &c. Les \ 
 
 Yolligeurs seront tonjours en partis dedeux hom- 
 nies, eu sorte^que pendant que i*un est employe 
 a examiner un objet, I'autre puisse Tester en 
 aguets; et ji quelqiie chose approche, ou paroit 
 au loin, I'un puisse incontinent en faire rapport 
 au corps du quel il estdetache; tandis que i'autre 
 a rceil constamment fixe «ur i'objet jusqu'au 
 retour de son camarade. 
 
 
 (• 
 
 
 'il 
 
 K f 
 
 ■M 
 
 il 
 
 < il 
 
 Il 
 } 
 
 . f 
 
 ;V 
 
 
 
 ':«• 
 
 M 
 
223 
 
 '^f the i'*" 5, T\if distance nt which an advancccf ffonrd 
 tancf of the find flnnk pntrolcs should keep from the coruroni 
 
 ad lanced 
 guard and 
 ^ank pat' 
 roles from 
 •iketolumn. 
 
 mull he determined by localcircnmslances, and 
 hy the strength of tne column. They vhould, 
 however, he always at such- distance, that if 
 they should be unexpectcdety attacked, the co- 
 lumn may have time to put itself in a posture of 
 defence I and alsq, that if defilen, villages, or 
 woods present themselves on the' line of march, 
 they maybe examined thoroughly before the aN 
 rival of the head of the column, that there ma) 
 then be no delay. The skirmishen must be very 
 ^ ' cautious during the mUrch. not to be cut off 
 from the advanced guard i and the same precaa. 
 tiouf are necessary for the advanced guard, with 
 respect to the column. > 
 ' . - . 
 
 ^ . 4. Skirmishers, whether from theilank patroles 
 
 fjutiesof or advanced guard, are to stopeverv person they 
 « irmiineis, jYigei^ to«uestiprt them respecting the enemy, nnd 
 then conduct them to the main body, where they 
 will be detained or released according to circuni* 
 stances. Per^Sons so taken may be occasionally 
 found useful »s guides for the bye roads, or ton 
 point out ^ich places as might serve as ambag* 
 cades for the enemy. j\ll houses, gardens, en* 
 closures, (&c. must, be closely searched by the 
 akirmishers, and no height, or village, from 
 whence the UBighboring ground can foe seen, must 
 lie let': anexamined by them. It is hardly necei* 
 aary to observe, that the arm» of skirmishers 
 ahould always be in the b^st order, and ready for 
 immediate use. 
 
 ^- 
 
 ^1 
 
 When an 
 itdvoHted 
 ■guard ap^ 
 proHches a 
 tillage t 
 
 5. If a village should happen to lie on *he 
 road, through which a coluiinn must nnavoidably 
 pass, it will jlirsl be examined by the advancecl 
 guard, after the manner that has been prescribed 
 for patroles on similar occasions, and a report 
 made to the commanding officer of the colmnn. 
 The commander of au advanced guard or ftank 
 palrole, will at all times make an exactr^port to 
 Uie commanding officer of the column, of auj 
 
■;.■■- 224 ;■■ ■ 
 
 •3. la (rrstancequclii^ardi* :vvanc^e el leg pa<^ disfmcesiet 
 trouilleyde flanci duivent ;;'ci((!cr d« ii role imc ^«r(.'i«fliMn- 
 seroiil re^Hi. « par \vh circonsianccs locales, et c<e» e< p<im 
 par la furcf de la coloiniic lille."* doivenl ce- (''"'"lie de 
 peadanl ^tre tuiijourii A telle divtauce, Que si •/'"'"' *** '• 
 dies sunt inopincmeiit allaqufeM, la coloinne ^®''""'**» 
 puisvu avoir le lems de se ineltre en pusture 
 ded6fen8e{ ct auisi. mi des defiles, des bates, oit ' 
 des.villa^es se pr^senttMilen la lio^ne de marche : 
 lis puisseiit dtre cxainiuJsscrupureuscinentavaDt ' ^ 
 
 Tarriv^'e de la lete dela colomnc, alia qu'il ii*y '-. ' »-■ 
 ait alor.s auoun d^lai. Les Voltigeurs aiiront ' ' 
 
 ^ratute attention, dm ant la marche, de ne pas se 
 laissnr ct>i)[ier de TaTaui ^arde ; les mclmes pre- 
 cautions ttont n6ce8sairet pour Tavant gardi i ' 
 I'egard de la colonine. 
 
 4. Les voltigeurs den patrouilles de flanc el Si-rvicea de§ 
 de la jjarde avancee, arr^tcronl toutes les per- FoUigturs, 
 soDuesqu'i-ls rrncontreront, pour demander dea 
 nouvelles de Tennemi, el les conduiront au corpa 
 ou elles «eront detenues cu relachees selon lea 
 circonstances. Les personncs ainsi prises seront 
 dans I'occasion trcs utiles connme guides pour 
 les sen tiers, ou pour, indiquer des eudroits qui 
 pourront servir pour dresser des en^buscadet 
 aux eonemis. Toutes maisons, jardins, clos &c. 
 •eront bien examines par les voltigeurs et au- 
 cunc hauteur, ou village, d*oCl le terrein voisin 
 petit ^tre vu, nc sera exempt de leur visite. U 
 est presque s'.iperflu de dire que les amies del 
 toUigeurs doivcat toujuurs ^tre tenucs dans le 
 meilleur ordre, et en etat de service iinmediat. 
 
 ^. Si un Village se trouye«ur le themin, qu'il Quand une 
 faut inevitablement que la colomne passe, il sera avant gardt 
 examine en premiere instance par U garde avan- approc/te un 
 cee, d'apres la maniere qui a ete prescrite pour village^ 
 des patrouilles, en serablubles occasions, et un 
 rapport fait au commandant de la colomne. Le 
 commandant d'une garde avauc^e, ou palrouille • 
 
 de flanc, fera en tout tems un rapport exact au 
 conimandaofc de la colomne, de toutei les extra* 
 
 U 
 
 V 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 
 I 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 't 
 
 1 
 
 i|. 
 
 '■ 
 
 i 
 
 
 n 
 
 
 'f- 
 
 •;l 
 
 I " 
 
 
 i i' 
 
 «il 
 
 
 I ■ I 
 
 i 
 
 'I t 
 
 ill' 
 
 ■i 
 
 I' 
 
 ^i 1 
 
 4> 
 
 P 
 
225 
 
 
 •r U to pass 
 a defik or a 
 moodi 
 
 \X\\n^ extraordtnnry that may occur diirlnv the 
 march, or of any remarkable feature of the 
 country. 
 
 0. ^n advanced guard, or flank patrole, will 
 on no account enter a wood or defile, unlila 
 •mall party has previously passed through it, and 
 closely eiamined it. In reconnoitrinji^ a wood, 
 an advanced guard will follow the same directions 
 ubave been given for patroles, so that when the 
 column arrives at the defile, or wood, it may 
 pus ffilhout risk or loss of time. 
 
 )•; 
 
 •r meets an T. If the commander of the head of an advan- 
 enemjf, ced guard should have intelligence of the ap< 
 
 proi^cb of an enemy's patrole, he will first halt, 
 ' endeavourtodiscoverthestn^ngthof it, and then 
 
 fall back on the main body, th« commanding 
 officer of whkh, if the enemy is not in too great 
 force, should ^ry to conceal hii< men, suffer the 
 enemy to approach, and ertdea-vour toicntaitgle 
 him between h'xa parties anu the head of the 
 column, when he may attack him without risk. 
 If an advanced guard is set uptm unawares by a 
 body of the enemy in ambuscade, the ofiicercora- 
 ' niandiog it must immediately attack; but it will 
 
 depend upon what may be the general object of 
 the move, whether he IS to engage with his whole 
 force, trusting to the column for support, or whe- 
 ther he is merely to keep the enemy in check, 
 to as to gain the time sufficienKfor the column to 
 make such dispositions as may be thought ne« 
 cessary. It is a maxim, however, and one which 
 cannot be too strongly impressed upon the iiuHd 
 of every officer commanding an advanced guard, 
 or flank patrole, that in the event of hia being 
 - parsued by a considerable body ofthe enemy, he 
 is by no means to fall back immediately upon the 
 ; > column : officers should therefore take precau- 
 # . tions against any unforeseen accidents that may 
 occor during the march, and attentively observe 
 4he groimd by wjiich a retr«at may J»e cfiecicd* 
 
226 * 
 
 ordiinires qui mirvicnnent durnnt la marche, ou 
 de qijclqiie trait rcmurquablc du puys. 
 
 6. Une garde avanci^e, on une patrouille de "" ''""/J/J 
 flanc, n'cntrcra pa« p(»ur quelque cauie que ce *"'" "'•"*■/''* 
 suit, un boinon d<-fil6, avant qii'une petite par* <"*•*» *'<'J*« 
 tie I'ait pr^nlablement examine* Dam la visite 
 d'un boiM uiic <;nrde avanc6e suivra lei mSmei' ' ' 
 
 re<;le» qui ont 6te d^jii donnees pour let pa*- 
 trouiilcii, pour que la coloinnc a son arrivt^e aii 
 defile ou au bois, puisie lev puiBcr vau* perdre do* 
 temf* 
 
 >•»' 
 
 'I 
 
 \ .'. I 
 
 t 
 
 ;! 
 
 ii 
 
 ''^ u 
 
 7. Si le commandant de la tile d*une garde 
 avuncre est inl'orme de I'approche d une pa- 
 trouille ennemie, il fera halte, tachera de d6> 
 couvrirsa force, et se retircra i la colorone ; le 
 chef de la columoei si le nombre de Tennemi 
 n*est pas trop grand, tachera de cacher sa trou- 
 pe» souffrira que Teunemi approche, et tachera 
 de Penvelopper entre ses parties et la t^te de la- 
 coLmne,alors il peut Tattaquer tans risque. Si> 
 une garde avaticee est attaqu^e i Timproviste 
 par Pennemi en embuscadc, Tofficier qui la com* 
 roande attaquera k son tour; mais il d6pendnt 
 de ce qui pourra Hro i*objet g^nf ral du mou- 
 irement, s'il combattra avec tout son raonde, se 
 fiant au soutien de la colomne, ou si timpleraent 
 il doit tenir I'ennemi en ^chec, pour gagner 
 assez de teras pour que la colomne faise lei dif* 
 positions nicessairet. Cependant, c'est une mazi« 
 roedont la juslesse ne peut^tre trop profondtf- 
 ment gravee dabs Tesprit de tout officier qui 
 cominande une garde avancee, ou une patrouiilo 
 de fianc, qiie daui le cas nu'il soit poursuivi pap. 
 UD corps coD«id4rabtedere<'nemi, il ne dirigerS'; 
 jamais sa retraile en droiture sur la colomne^ 
 delaquelieila Hk detach^: c'est pourquui lea^ 
 officiers prendroht telles precautions contre let.; 
 accidents imprevus qui pourront Mbvenir du- 
 rant la niarcbe, observeront atten^vement le 
 terreinpar uu une retraite sera practicable. VOf* 
 lifiec commaadaat de la garde avan^tfei^ bm !%<. 
 
 ou qui'elh 
 
 renconlr§ 
 
 VennetnU 
 
 ■»r 
 
 
 
 -I 
 
 
 1|i 
 ■i, J, 
 1 ■ 
 
 I 
 
 'X 
 
 
227 
 
 Jfanadvan* 
 ted guard 
 meets an 
 •nemy in the 
 ntg/it. 
 
 'if I 
 
 The commandinor officer of an advanced gusrd is 
 not to confine himself to the main body, but oc- 
 casion^illy to vis-it the advanced and flank patroles 
 that he may make his own observations, and 
 trust as little as possible to the reports of olhers*^ 
 
 8, If the advanced guard should meet the 
 enemj in the night, the officer commanding ft 
 will immediately attack, if not with the whole,, 
 at least with part of his force, and not give the 
 enemy time to force him back upon the column f 
 he mustexert himself to preventconfusionnmong 
 his own men, but endeavour to spread dismay in 
 the detachment of the enemy. A resolute oflRcer, 
 with a few determined men, may at night render 
 the most important services! for even should h& 
 Bot be able to gain any solid advantage, still a 
 spirited and well-timed attack will at least have 
 the effect of enibarras»ing the enemy, during 
 which. time the column may form and prepare to 
 act as the occasion may require. It it always 
 useful, in these rencontres, to make prisoners, 
 in order to find out the strength of the ei.emvr 
 and what inay have been the object of his marLr.,. 
 
 When a 9. H is a rule that flank patrofes are never to 
 
 Jtank patrol* leave impracticable ground; or other obstacleti 
 
 '"' between them and \he column ; for example, if 
 
 in the course of a march Hiey tneei with a morass,, 
 or piece of water of considerable extent, close to 
 which the line of march is to pa^t ; it would be 
 a great fatilt to leave such an obstacle between 
 the patrole and ct>liimn, as it would be exposing 
 the formier to be cut off in sight nf the column,. 
 by a detachment of the enemy, without the pos- 
 sibility of receiving succour, ^'hen a flank pat* 
 role therefore meets with any impediment of this 
 sort, it wilt draw as near to the column as the 
 local circnmst^nce requires, & continue to march' 
 in' this manner, until the nature of the ground 
 suffers it to resume its usual station ; for as long 
 a# t colomQ is pasiiDg by a morais or lake \t h- 
 
 meets vaith 
 mny unpassm 
 •ble obstacle 
 tifith: march 
 
I gusrc! is 
 , but oc- 
 i patroles 
 ions, and 
 ofolhers,^ 
 
 meet the 
 nandin^ it 
 he -whole, 
 t give the 
 e column V 
 ion among 
 dismay in 
 iite officer, 
 ght render 
 ithoald hfr 
 age, still a 
 least have 
 ny, daring 
 lirepare to 
 ti is always 
 
 prisoners, 
 »he ei.eravr 
 
 his marer • 
 
 1 * 
 
 2^9 ■ ■;.;•:'■■ -^V/C. 
 
 bornerapas au corps principal* mais, quand ilr 
 sera ncccssaire, visiiera les uatrouilles avaDcee»> 
 etcellesdes fiancs, pour faire ses propres re- 
 marques, else iler aussi peu que possible sur le 
 rapport desautres. 
 
 8. Sila gardeavanc^e rencontre I'ennemV de SiunegarM 
 ■uit, Pofficier aui la commando atlaquera ins* ^^ancie rettm 
 
 tamment, si nou avec le tout, du moms avec uue ., ^-a 
 .•11. • .. J - ty • ncmifafiMic* 
 
 nart4ade»a torce, pour ne point donner a reniienH 
 
 le ttMns^dtfU faire rebroiidser sur la colomne ;;— 
 il.fora^tffs^ijiiiis- grands^ efiforts* pour empdcher la 
 confusion. gatmi !«»sient,. mais. il fera son possi- 
 ble pouiv- lepaindro-repouvanle^ et embrouille» 
 de confusion < le detacaeineni* ennouvi. Un offi* 
 cier determine avec un petit noinbre d'homme** 
 devoii^sj eta toute^preuve, peul daos la nuit 
 surtout rendre de8-service»>de la (litis grandeim* 
 portance; car, quand ineme il n'auro|t pit ga* 
 gner d'avanlage solide,.. n^anmoins^.' une attaquet 
 vive et faitc a propose aura du rooin» TetiEet 
 d'embarasser Pennerai, et pendant ce tems^ lai 
 colomne pent former et se preparer pour agier 
 selon Tejiigeace du cas* II est toujours utile^ 
 dans ces rencontres de faire des prinoniers) afiai 
 de decouvrir la force de l'eiioerai,«t quel pour.*- 
 roi' avoir etc Tobjet de samarche. 
 
 9/ C'e$it uue regie que I s patrouilles de flane* nuand tm 
 ne laissent jamais des terreins impracticables en* patrouUhdt 
 tre-elles^et la colomne, par exemple, si dans le jUincrencom 
 cours-de la mareheellesreneontrent un maMAs, (re dons «*• 
 ouiunepi^ce d'eau d'une ^t^due eonsiddrable, march* un 
 aupr^:«deqiiel8^ il faut poucMiivre la ligne do obstacle imi 
 murcLe^ oe seroit faire une graude faute de P^^^ 
 laisser un tel obstacle enlre la palrouilte et ta 
 colomne, cc qui Texposeroit i dtre eoupie A Is 
 Tue de la colomne par UD. detachement ennemi, 
 fans possibility de secours. G'ost,pour ces raisoflt^ 
 que qiiand uuepatrouille de flanc ceneooire uo^ 
 obstacle dans sa inarche, elle approchera la co« 
 lomne aulant que lea circonstanri** lneali*ii U 
 Mquierent, et ooniinu '^ 
 Bierejusqu'i ce que i 
 4oBiio k ttojen de rtr ut 
 
 %.•:;.,»* 
 
 ■ ^ 
 
 I ij tM9 wi»n 
 
 <i« 
 
 9.:i -s tf ■ 
 
 -*; -if- 
 
 S!.J 
 
 in' 
 
 ■{* f.!'. 
 
 ifri-^«, 
 
 irx 
 
 m 
 
 9^ 
 
 »^«ij^<>A| 
 
 ilfc¥ 
 
 ^m 
 
 1 
 
 - 1 
 
 r 
 ) 
 
 
 
 \ 
 
 
 I 
 
 ■A ' 
 
 
 'I 
 
 m 
 
 1 ■« 
 
 i ■ 
 
 
2^9^ 
 
 tnidiciently corereil by them : iKe aKore riife i* 
 equally tobeobserycd by all skirmishers from the 
 fiank patroles; but if a fliknlj^-patroleshnnliJ meet 
 with -aHhicket or snmll 'wood Ihf »kirmi»hers>wi!I 
 immediateiy enter and examine it, and a small' 
 
 * .. detachment shouid'b^ sent round it, in order to- 
 
 j^revent any concealed |>arty of the enrmy falling 
 
 ,^ ni>ou the rear. of -the colamn^ after it b'aspassed' 
 
 ibe wood. 
 
 VrJuntke ^^' ^^ *" *^^® coifMC" ofa marcK the cnliiran- 
 •s/umnAato •'^o*'^'* bhit, the advanced ^iiard will of course- 
 do the same ;.the flai':k pntrolrsand sk'irmishert. 
 making front onf vizards ;.and it is be to observed,, 
 that no defile within a short distance ofthe 
 > advanced guard or fl»nk patroles should be h;ft 
 unoccupied. The adrHnred guard should endea- 
 TOur even to mak<* itsolf master of th(* ground' 
 beyond the defile, if it is only by sending a few- 
 liien to take po<:t there **»:Ytfhecolumn'may bein 
 lecurity during the hn!^ • uMhc* nionbosuflEL'red' 
 to restthemselvesi Bf:* .-. jy this precaution, 
 the advanced guard wi.^ ^vscure the pass of the 
 defile It will of course be understf)od, that when 
 » column halts, the advanced guard and flank 
 patroles will post their own sentries, and thu»- 
 , , rbrm Ibe pickets and chains ^of sentries for tbu 
 whole column.. 
 
 •/ thtrettr 
 ffHtrd; 
 
 nctioHsfor 
 th* eonduci 
 •/« rear 
 
 , 11. Nocolnmn 18 ever tb nmrd. withonta* 
 rear guard, the strength of which must depend' 
 upon circumstances*. The disposition of it is the 
 fame as thee advanced guards with this^iSerence- 
 only, tb)4t the main body precedes the smaller, 
 ia marches where the enemy is supposed to be iir 
 front, the rear guard should be composed of » 
 Sew trusty men, . whose business it is to colfec4r 
 nAl slrag^fers, aad'totake ap deserters^ 
 
 ,19. A rear guard is 'as much' as possible to^ 
 avoid engaging the enemy, inasmuch as nothing 
 more is usually expected from the officer com- 
 paadipf it^ ibaa to'i.oia the «riDjr> wiUkottt-loai^ 
 
colomne faii^ 
 
 »30> 
 
 ^e-fa colomne pafse le lonj dii Tw>rd (rim nrrrar*' 
 (fu d'un lac, elle en est su£fi«animent coiiTcrle t^ 
 h re<;le«U!idite est le guide de la coBdiiite quO' 
 (foivent tenir les voltigctirs- dev patrouillcs de 
 flancsvmaissi unepatrouille de fl'^nc rencontre* 
 UQ petit bois^ halier, ou buisson, le^ vnlligeurs* 
 yeiilreront pour fouiller, et jn petit delache- 
 meat en fera le tour, pour emp^cher (fu'un en*- 
 aemi embus(]U<^ ne puistie tomber »Hr Parriere de 
 Ik colomne-qtiand il aura p-iisf le boi§i 
 
 10. Si dans le COD rsde la marche la cnlomne' 
 fait halte, la garde ivanc^e restera autisi de pied 
 fcrme, ies palrouilles^le fluac et les^voltigeurc 
 feront face exlerieurementt et auciin' defile ir- 
 une petite distance de la- gr-irde - avancre on. des^ 
 ^irouiilesde flanc, n? raanq'tiera pas d'etre oc* 
 cope. L^avant garde iachera oi^ite de s'enipai^ - 
 rcr du terrein audela du A fi\ki qnand, pour 16 
 Ikire, on o'eoverra que peu d'hoinmes qui s'j- 
 posteront, pour que la coloinne lAjit cii snr<^t6 
 durant la balte, et que les hommes puis^ent se 
 reposer. De plus, par cette precaution, la garde * 
 srvanc^e sera maitres«e du passage du defile. U ■ 
 est naturellement bienentendu, que, lorsqu'une* 
 csolorane fiiit balte, la garde avancee, et les pa-- 
 trotiilles de flanc posteront leurs propres senti- 
 oellet, de maniere i former des piquets et det 
 chaioes de sentinelles ppur tout le corps ou toute 
 la coloinne.* 
 
 1 1 Aucune €0100106*06 Tnarcbierarans arri^re 
 garde, sa force d^peodra^escircnnstances.^ Elle 
 •era dispos6e comnie la gardeavanc^e, avec cette - 
 dift.'rence seulement, que le' plus gros peluion t 
 pr^cide les mdindrest« En marcbe ou rennemi 
 est suppose dtre eo arant, Farri^ re garde oe sera 
 corapes-'e que d*ua petit nombre a*hoinnies dd - 
 coHfinacei pour ramaswr ler traioeurt et arr^ter 
 ks deterteurf. 
 
 18. Doe af r'l^re garde ^ftien mutant que faire Dfreeiiomk 
 
 •epeut, de combattrerenneniiy vuque tout ce gentrales 
 
 •ui est ezisQ de L'oflficier qui la commander est P^'' ^ ^^' 
 
 #• lomdre rartn^e moi pierte*— ii doit cependaoi ^"^ ^^'^ 
 
 De farriir§^ 
 gardt. 
 
 
 i« 
 
 f^'l 
 
 it) 
 iiii 
 
 Ui' 
 
 r ■ • 
 
 I 
 
 i 
 
 U 
 
 I, I 
 
 ty 
 
231 
 
 ©f tfie con- 
 duct of rear 
 guardi' of 
 different 
 columns 
 relative to 
 §ach other. 
 
 Mr imuY, IroTfever, eodaavour to execute bi» 
 infttruationn* whicil generally have for object to 
 prevent jtbe loss of baggage aad ca|>jttire of utrag- 
 glem, and tok^ep tlie eoemy atadistaune front 
 the column. The raean« of performing thi»> ser* 
 vice mu9i depend upontUennture of the-g^ound^ 
 9ind the relative •itualtona uf the column and Ibe* 
 •nemy* Thi.s, however, may be eoa«>dered asai 
 fixed principle^ that the rear guard should dis- 
 pute every de&le a»loug; as po8»Able, in order to 
 enable the column to gain ground: as-soon as 
 this object is attained, or the rear guard is obli- 
 ged to leave tlie defile, the next defile must be 
 gained as-expedtiioiislj as possible. 
 
 The' officer commanding a fear guard is as 
 much as* possible to avoid passing a defile in the 
 presence of a superiart energy ;. to this end he 
 must without loss of time occupy the defile, the 
 moment the column hrfs pasied,, without giving; 
 the enemy time lo bring, uy moretroiogS). 
 
 13. When an array retfres before an eoeinjv' 
 in several columns^ each havjng his own rear- 
 guard, they will preserve a- eommiinicatioDwitht 
 une^nother, and in common cover the retreat oli 
 the army.. Suppose, £ar insian6e,.an army retir- 
 ing in three columns^ and each'baviag a defile t<v 
 pass, but the first having a better and shorter road;: 
 oulmarcb«rthe«ecottd;..ia .tbi»«ase the officer 
 •ommandiqg the rear .guard of the first must nei 
 give up the dei^ertlUhe has-asceriained thatthe 
 ■ear gjuard uf the feeond column i* ftctualljr pa»* 
 fing : tbe.secQod it to observe thesam« oondnet 
 witn regard to the third, and viee veratL For 
 want of thift precaution,, a body of the enemjt 
 which had folio Wjed the &rtt column, might at* 
 lack the rear guard of the second in flank, whiehi 
 tt long as the rear guard of the first remain*- 
 ■otted before- the deftle, 1^. eannot venture to 
 . 3o, without risking htmidf to he taken in 'flank. 
 ^g^ if an isftaDce whi^h ftffurdi to aft ojftMr tkff 
 
232 
 
 tacher d*exdcuter was inttructionf, qui generate- arriere ^«r« 
 
 inenl onl pour objel de pT^venir ou empScher de, 
 
 leK perteg dc ba^^age et la prise des traineuri, et 
 
 de tenirrennemia ime certainc difitaoce de la 
 
 coloiune. Les moyens de reinplir ce tervice 
 
 depend root de la nature du terrein, et des titua* 
 
 tiong relative» de la colomne et de renneiiii. ' 
 
 On doit, cependant, adopter comme un principe 
 
 constant, que Tarriere garde diftfiutera tous ler 
 
 dcfile»ayec opiniatrete, et aussi long terns i^u'il 
 
 gera possible, pour que la colomne puisse gagner 
 
 du terrein r aunitot que le but ett atteint, oa 
 
 que I'arri^e garde e»t obligee d'abandonner le 
 
 defile, elle gagnera le defile voisin autsi promote- 
 
 nient que possible. L*o(ficier commandaat rar* 
 
 ri^re garde ^viteraautant que possible de passer 
 
 un defile en presence d'un eonemi superieur r 
 
 {»our cette raison il occupera sans perte de temt 
 e d^fildau moment que la colomne a psKsf, lant 
 donner le teras i reonemi de faire avancer plus 
 detroupe«» . * 
 
 13. Quand une arm^e se retire deyantunen- 
 nerai en plusiears colocuiei, chaque colomne 
 ayani aa propre arriere garde, ellcs conterveront 
 la communtcaiioitrune avec I'autre, et de con- 
 cert ellei couvriront la retraite de I'arm^e. Sup- 
 posons, par exerople,qu*une armee se retire en 
 trois colomnes et que chaque colomne a ua de- 
 file a passer, mais la premiere passant par ud 
 chpmin plus court et raeilleur, devan<'e la se- 
 cunde ;. dans ce c.is Tofficier commandant de 
 I'arriere garde de la premiere n'abandonnera pas 
 le defiU, avaut d't^tre assure q^ue Tarriere garde 
 de la seconde passe actueilement ; la sfeconde ob* 
 lervera la m^rae conduite a I'egard de la troisieroe,. 
 et vice versa'. Si cette precaution est neglig^^e*. 
 un corps ennemi qui auroit suivi la premiere 
 colomne, pcurra atlaquer Parriere garde de la 
 •ceonde en flanc, ocqui, tant que I'arridre garde 
 de la premiere reste postee devant le d.^fite, il 
 D'osera faire, sans risquer d'etre lui-m^me prir 
 (mflaoc. G^ist uiie occasion qui Cournit a uo- 
 
 De la eon* 
 duite des arm 
 rieresgardet 
 
 des different 
 tescotomnet^ 
 relatives ri^ 
 ciproqutm 
 men/. 
 
 If V 
 
 ": il.: 
 
 .1 
 
 i 
 
 I 
 
 .r 
 
 H 
 
 1 
 
 w 
 
 ill 
 
 \m 
 
 
 !' 
 
 ^' 
 
233 
 
 '.-« ' * 
 
 #/ the rear 
 guard when 
 pursued by 
 the enemy. 
 
 ^^. 
 
 0f the tkifn 
 
 mishers of 
 margfuwds. 
 
 opportunity of displaying hi» judgomeBt of 
 ground. Before an ufTu'er commanding a rear 
 guard arrives at a defile or village, which ho 
 must of necessity pass, if time permits him, he 
 should send forward some intelligent men, to 
 patrole to the right and left, and to discover the- 
 difierent passes^ which he should occupy, to 
 guard against being cut off, and to enect hii^ 
 passage vf'iih the greater facility. 
 
 14. If a rear guard should be pnrsued hy the 
 enemy, it will divide itself into two bodies, 
 whicH will continue to retreat in communication 
 with one another, sending out several skirmishers 
 who will extend themselves by two,, and fire in. 
 retiring. The skirmishers musk preserve as ^ood: 
 aline a^possible ^^ the two bodies* will r^tioa' 
 alternately, the ooecoveringtlie retreat of the 
 other. If the enemy should press forward, th9. 
 skirmisheri will throw themselves on eaeh flank* 
 and endeavour by their fire to disconcert his^ 
 attack. An enemy may sometimes be led to com- 
 mit himself by a feigned retreat, and by leaving 
 part of the corps in ambush, which may^^ fall upon 
 Aim with' advantage, while iik the heat of^his 
 pursuit. The officer commaadii^ the skirmishers 
 must take care that, in advancing and retreating, 
 they do not extend themselves too much, and 
 that the strictest attention is paid to his signals. 
 
 1^ Officers of rear gaards ajid flank patroles 
 must be very careful \o prevent their skirmishers, 
 loitering in any village ; soldiers offending in 
 thj« rosj^ect should be severely pOAished. 
 
S34 
 
 officier te moyen de faire eclater ion jup^emenl, 
 el 8a connoisiaixce du lerreia. Avaut d'arrivrr 
 k un defile ou village qu'il faut de toiite ncces« 
 file pa8!fer, Tofficier qui coinmandc une arriere 
 garde, vi le tcms Ic penmct, devr4)it envoyer en 
 avanl quelques hoinmes iiiU'lligents pour faire 
 la patrouiile a druile eta gauche, puur decou- 
 trir Ics diffifrreiils passages quM I doit occuper, 
 et le pfutrder d'dtre coupe, et d'cfiectuer tioa 
 paisage avcciplus de facilile. 
 
 ¥: 
 
 M ' S 
 
 K, Si rarri^re garde est poursuivie par Ten- DeVarri?r9. 
 nemi, elle se divisera en deux corps, qui conti- garde qxiand 
 nuoront la retraite encoiumuntcation recipro- fUeestpour- 
 que, detachant plusieurs escarmoucheurs qui «'<«^'« F"** 
 s etendront deux a deux elfcrontfeu en retraite. ^*'»'»ewi. 
 Les escarmoucbeurg conserveront la meilleure 
 ligne possible. Les deux corps se retireront 
 alternativement, I'un couvrant la retraite de . /^ 
 I'autre. Si i'enncmi pousse en avant, les escar- 
 nioucbeura se jetteront sur s<*8 deux flancs, et 
 tacheront par ieur feu de deconcerter son alta- . ' ' . 
 que. On peut quelquefois attirerrennemi a se 
 coroproinettre,parleni6yend'uneretraitesimulee 
 et enlalssant unepartie du corps en embuscade, 
 et qui pourra toraber sur lui avec avantage, 
 quand il sera d^rang^ dans la chaleurde sa pour- 
 suite. L'ofiicier cooimandant les escarinoucheurs 
 prendra ji^arde qu*en avanfant et se retiraut, ils 
 ne s'^lendent trop, et que ratlention la plus 
 ezacte soit faite aux «igoauj:. 
 
 15. Les officierides arriere gardes et des pa- j^es t^cnr^ 
 trouillesde flaneanront grand soin d'enipccner moucheur 
 que les voltigeurs ne s'aniusent dans les tillages: de VarriH^ 
 ceux qui serpnt coupables d'uoe telle offense, gardt, 
 doi?eDl'^lre s^Tcrement punis. 
 
 
 It 
 
 1 1 
 
 , \ 
 
 M 
 
 !i 
 
 i ■! 
 
 '■I '.' 
 
 I! 
 
 
 
 
 I 
 
235 
 
 9y compo' 
 nieson y»ur 
 left form 
 column to 
 tht rear, 
 
 i^uick 
 march. 
 
 L Battalion in line to form open column^ 
 * right in front* 
 
 ■ The officer commanding the company raoTei 
 to the centre, the left hand man facei to tht 
 rightatlhis caution. 
 
 The whole face to the np;ht-ahoiit, wheel to 
 the rear the quarter circle and come to the right- 
 about again without anv word of command for 
 halting, and dress on the iefthandman, the officer 
 comes to the pivot flank, corrects aji\y inaccuracy 
 in dressing aud remains sleadj. 
 
 Column left To form line from column, the whole face to 
 fact, the left 
 
 F»rtn line^ On the word form line, the officer steps back 
 quick march to the 4th or 6th file of ihe front rank, the ser- 
 jeant to the 2d file of the rear rank, tlie pivot 
 £les look to the right for Iheir dressing, and when 
 quick march is given, each file steps up obliquely 
 to the right, the rear rank man of ihe left file 
 doubling behind his front rank man, each file 
 as it comes up dresses on the file on its left; the 
 officer looks to his company see« each file come 
 regularly up and then takes the place kept by the 
 Serjeant of the company on hit right, who chao* 
 ges by the rear and covers his own officer. 
 
 By compttm 
 nies on your 
 right form 
 column to 
 the rear, 
 
 'Quick 
 march* 
 
 Mightface, 
 
 2; To form open column^ left in front* 
 
 The officer commanding the company moves 
 to the centre, the right baud man faces to the 
 left 
 
 The whole face to the left abont, wheel to 
 the rear the quarter cii'cle and come to the left- 
 about again, dressing on the right file. 
 
 To form 
 right. 
 
 line again, th« ivhole face to th« 
 
236 
 
 h IjC hatnillon en lispieformera en colom- 
 tie ouvcrte, la droitc en t/lte, 
 
 L'officier commandant chaquc ronipagnie se 
 place ati centre, I'homine de gauche du premier 
 ranjT fait une a droitc, a ce mgtprefiminafre. 
 
 L'liotnme dc gauche de chaque compu^nie ne 
 boii^e, les aiitrcs font demitour^ droitc, con- 
 version de quart de cerclc en arridre,enci>rc dcmi- 
 tour i droite sans le commandement halter Pts'a- 
 lignent sur leur homme de :juche, Tofficici: 
 yient au flanc du pirot, corrigc ralignemcntet 
 demieure^j:^. 
 
 Le tout fait un a gauche, pour se former eii 
 ligne. 
 
 All mot " en batatHe,'* Tofficier fait qiieiqncs 
 pasen arriere, arret(> ^ la 4e. ou 5o. file devjut 
 le premier rang; lo tergent a la seconue file ct en 
 arriere, les files de pivot font iele a' droite pour 
 Iciir aligneracnt nt quand ie mot pas redouble^ 
 marche, est donne, chaque file se transporfe vers 
 Tali^nement obiiquement, (mais noD pn.< tsii pas 
 oblique) a la droile, I'homme de Perre -flte de ia 
 g';u«.he doublant en arriere de son chef de file, 
 chaque file, a mcsure qu'elle arrive u la ligrr du 
 frodt, s'alig-ne a gauche : f'officier ayant loeil JL 
 la corapajjnie voit arriver chaque file en succes- 
 sion regnli^re, et prend la place occupee p^r le 
 f^rgent de la compagnie n sa droite, qui par 
 iVriere change sa place et cuuvre 0on propre 
 officier. 
 
 2, Former la colomne ouverte^ la gauche 
 
 en Ute. 
 L'officierde chaque compagnie se place de- 
 vantlc centre, iMiomme de fa droite du premier 
 rang d ce mot pre fimin aire fa\i un a gauche. 
 ' Le lout, Cfexceple les hommcs de droite des 
 compagnieS qui ne bougcnt) fait un demi tour a 
 gnuchCt conversion, le quart du cercle, en ai'riirey 
 encore demi tour a gauche, aliguement stir la file 
 
 droife. 
 
 Le lout fait uoe 4 drbite, poui; i« former en 
 Rgne, V 
 
 Compagnica 
 d gauche ei 
 en arrirrcen 
 colomne. 
 
 Pas redov 
 bit, marches. 
 
 Colomne M 
 
 en budn're^ 
 Pan rtdOu^ 
 
 tnarche. 
 
 • '^i«i^i.^^ u% ;. 
 
 A\: 
 
 Cnmpagnhs 
 a droit t et en 
 arh^re^ en 
 cvlotnue, \ 
 
 En batailh^ 
 pas redouble 
 marc he. 
 
 A droiti. 
 
 i ■ 
 
 III 
 
 ^ 
 
 ii 
 
 fa 
 
 
 ^11 
 
 li 
 
 i 
 
 ^1 
 
 
 f 
 
 Ill 
 
 \ 
 
 i 
 
 m 
 
237 
 
 Jiorm line. The oMcer ttfipi back to the 4th or 6lh file 
 ,^uick march of the front rank, the lerieant to the 8d file of 
 the rear rank, the pivot filei h)ok to the left for 
 their dressing and on the word quick marchy each 
 file ateps up t>bliquely to the left and dreisci on 
 the rip^nt file, the rear rank man of which doubles 
 « behind hi« front rank man, his place being taken 
 
 by the scrJeant who remainH there till the officer 
 of the company replaces him, the officer fnrcs his 
 company, sees them come regularly ujifand then 
 takes his station on the right of hi« company 
 which his Serjeant has kept fbr him. 
 
 files fromthe 
 right of 
 eompaniet, 
 fuick inarch 
 
 Frontform, 
 
 S. The officer moves out straight forward, his 
 covering serjeant coming up on his'rig'ht, the 
 company face to the right and file in rear of 
 their officer and covering serjeant looking to the 
 left for their distance and dressing. 
 
 Front file halls; th« officer of the company 
 and hiscovcring serjeant leading, post themselves 
 as in the direction given for forming line from 
 column, left in front, the company comtng into 
 liae in thetame manner. 
 
 Jdvanee by . 4. The officer commanding the company, at 
 
 filesfromthe this caution goes to the right-about as well as 
 
 left of com- his covering serjeant and moves by the rear to 
 
 panies, the left flank of hit company, at the word ^uick 
 
 quickmarch. march, he moves out, his covering serjeant 
 
 coming upon his lcft« the company face to the 
 
 left and follow in ^le : they look to the right 
 
 for distance and dressing. 
 
 Front form. Front file halts, officers and covering lerjeaints 
 take their places, aad the company comes up 
 into line in same manner as laid down for form- 
 ing Hoe from coiumn, rCgAl in fronL 
 
 Jtefreaf hy 5. The officer commandrng Chetom|^ny, and 
 Jitesffomthe his covering serjeant face to the right-aboot and 
 right of disengage to the rear, a;t the word quick march 
 
 *2S'*""''* *^®y "**** ®"* looking to their right for theic 
 ^^i^ "*""* distance and dressing. 
 
238 
 
 ki 
 
 Aiimol**rn hnlaWeC* I'officier quctques pas 
 en nrricrcnrrdloa la 4e. ou &e. file du premier 
 ran^, le Rer^cnt k b mconde file du dernier rang, 
 leNnlcs de pivot font lelv a gauche, pour leur 
 uli^nement, et au mot, ''pus ridoubU\ marcht»** 
 chaque fiJe avance obliqucmenta la ^aucbe de la 
 file (troile, Thumme de la serre file de la file 
 droito double en arri^re de flon chef de file, s» 
 l^lace^tant occupe.e par le seigent qui attend: 
 que TufiScier de la compagnie le reroplace, I'uffi- 
 cier fail front k la compagnie, ct voit que lei^ 
 fileiarrivent regulierement en succession poursc- 
 l^lacer dans raligncment,et alors prendsa station, 
 i^ln droite d« sa com^agaie que son serg^nt oc* 
 cupoit a sa placet 
 
 3. L'officiQr avani'e un pas, son sergent cou* 
 vreur se range iksa droite, la corapagnie fait un 
 i dr4>ile. Au mpt ** pa$redoubley mttrche" les ft' 
 1m Auivent leur officier, le sergent coutreur, lea 
 yeux d gauche pour, garder les distances ei 
 flaiignement* 
 
 La premiere file fait halte ; I'officier et son ser- 
 gent couvreur se pla^enlcomraeil estdit, tpiand 
 Us se niettent en balaiile, de Tordre en colomnci 
 la gaucKc en t^te. 
 
 4* L'oificier commandant la compa^nie, 4 ce 
 vjtot priliminaire fait demi tour k aroite et se 
 tiransporle par Varriire a la gauche, suivi dc son 
 sergent couvxeur :; Toilicier avance un pas en 
 avant du premier rang, ei son sergent se place k 
 sa gauche, la corapagnie fait un a gauche* 
 
 A cemot I'oilicier etson sergent couvreur »• 
 lutnccnt en druilure, les files suivcht en success 
 siun faisant un a droite a niesurcqu'ellesarrivent 
 ai| point d'uuj'otiicier est parti;, elles preudront; 
 leur aligncmentet distances dela droite. 
 
 La file de front fait haite, les officiers- et ser- 
 gents prennent leurs places, et la cumpagnie se 
 met eu ligne, comme il est dit, quiind iis se met* 
 lent en bataille,.de Pordre en columne, la droite 
 en t^te. 
 
 5. L'officier commandant la compagnie, et son 
 Mrgont ^ouTj cur font derai tour idroKe et de- 
 
 En halaildf 
 patrtdoubti^ 
 morcAe, 
 
 > 
 
 Compagnits 
 pw JiUs d* 
 la droito eit^ 
 a¥anty pas 
 redoubUn 
 tnarche. 
 
 En avant, 
 EnbataHb0 
 
 Compagniu 
 par files de, 
 la gauche^en 
 avant^ 
 
 Pai redottm- 
 blCf marches. 
 
 En avani. 
 En batailUm 
 
 Compa^nfee 
 par ^kt if« 
 
 P 
 
 
 i 
 
 i! 
 
 I 
 
 v| 
 
 I 
 
 ii' . 
 
 P 
 
 1. 1 
 
 ii 
 
 4, 
 
 I 
 
 : I 
 
 H 
 
\ 
 
 /* r- % . 
 
 239 
 
 Jitti from 
 th"! 'V Of' 
 fmpanhst 
 
 front forntt 
 
 Front form* The oflirrr comes to hiilcfl-nbout, hiirotrp. 
 ** '-' in; •irrj 5n» ildinjf Ihr Hiimc :iii(l forni nj' in ln» 
 real the rtlt's in rear t»f lln'm m».veort'«il)lu|iH'ly 
 to their '•i :lil miuI nhtn in l»n«* with tht; illiicr 
 conit' to lht;!ct'l-about anUdress um him, looking 
 to thttir I i^ht. 
 
 6. The officer ruul coverlny nerjeant go tu I he 
 ri^ht-about and move by »ht ri-vir tti ihe left r>f 
 the coM'.pany, vtandin^ ns if tiiej had disen;;aged 
 to their re.n fr<»m the left tiank, Jitlhe vtoi' (jiiick 
 inarch they move out foll«)vved by iho company 
 (who face to the left for that iuir{.)ose) toward* 
 their rear, looking to Iheir left for their distance 
 and drcfiiing. 
 
 The offii'er comet to his right-about, his cover- 
 ing seijeant coming round him and forming in 
 his rc'.ir, the files in rear move off ohrK|uely to 
 their left and when in line wilh the officer come 
 to the right-nbout, looking to their left and 
 dressing on him. 
 
 7. The olPcer followed by his covering Serjeant 
 ccme to Ihe centre of his company, the orticer 
 in frtint of the right file of ihe left snb-division, 
 the Serjeant in front of the left file of the right 
 siib-diviiiion, at the word quick niarch^ the inb- 
 divisions fall inwards, following the officer and 
 coveringserjeant who lead ^lrai;;ht forward look- 
 in^'^ to Iheir centre for their distance and dressing, 
 (e.tcept the two centre files, namely, the right 
 files of the left sub-division who moves forward 
 ill rear of the officer and covering Serjeant) the re- 
 maining files of I he sub-divisions who have faced 
 inwards when I hey have comf to where the cen- 
 tire fi'es stood, fronland move forward^by which 
 means every file has the same rank, two front 
 rank, two rear and so pu in file together. 
 
 Frontform, The centre files stand fast, the files in rear of 
 them move up to their places on the right and 
 left of them, the Serjeant moves oft* to therigbt 
 .a lo kevp his offiber^f place whuremaiDftfroaiiog^ 
 
 Advance, by 
 double files 
 from the 
 otntre of 
 Mmpanies, 
 
 Quick 
 march. 
 

 240 
 
 b litcnt k ranic-rc, Ic ner^ent 2ila fi^michc dc Tof* 
 /iricr qtinnd il f.iit face eii arrit^re, la conipa<;nie 
 fail iiri a droUe, ot uii !icr<;(;nl ou ban ofiicier de 
 scrrc file, m: place iin pa< en arriere de la pre- 
 niickc file puur surYir de pivot, fuifaDl face uU 
 front. 
 
 A ce mof, ifi suiTent Tofficier, fainant leu filet^ 
 leur a firnitei merturtMit quM« arrivcnt nu pivot 
 qui (levieHl »erre lilo, niiand loiitc la compa^nie 
 II pRSHv { ils prcndront de la droite leurs dislancef 
 et alij^nenicMt, et contlnueioul leiir retraire. 
 
 L'ofticiei' fait denii tour a }>-auche, ain<«i que 
 son torjjent qui st phce rn nrri^»e de Ini en tile, 
 lea (\\t:» fvnt m\ itc iivemenl oblique a leur droite, 
 (i u uiesure qi-'ellen ;irrivenl a la ligne de Toffi** 
 riur,cilo.4 fci(>:'.t d uti tour a gauche et s'aiigiie- 
 rontsur ivii, xeis la droit«>. 
 
 6. i'/ofTicis.r et le .crveiU coiivreur font deini- 
 tour u droite, He I . )<)p.ortent a la (i^auche par 
 rarriere,sepl;i(ai louuue s'ih avoient diboit^ 
 a leur aiTi<' * »ar le Hanc . :tuclie, la compagnie 
 fait un a g uuf •; et un oiiicier, ser^cnl ou bat of* 
 ficier de serie iile se ptaceac<';> de Tofficiec 
 coniiiiandaut pour servir de pivot. 
 
 A cc mot la compaojnie snivra son officier ^m 
 marche a Tarriere, les filos faisarit leur a gauche 
 aiitourdu ;;)^vot, et prenan^ leurs distances et 
 alis^nement de la gauche, centinueroDi leur re<*- 
 Iraite. 
 
 L'officier ftiit demi four a droite, s«n sergent 
 couvreur passant a cot> »e piace a son arriere 
 puur le couvrir, les files se purteut oMiquement 
 c, .rriere vers leur gaudiect a m. sure qu'ell*;» 
 &iiivent a la hauteur de I'ofiicier, dies marche- 
 ront deux pasa I'arnere, feront deiiii tour a 
 droite, et alii^neront sur la file gauche. 
 
 7. L'officier suivi de sou ser^^eut couvreur se 
 place devant le centre de sa compagnie, l'officier 
 en avant d^ la file droite de la sous-di vision de 
 gauche, etie sergent en avant de la file gauche, 
 de la sous-division de droite ; l<t sous division de 
 droite fait un a gauchet et celie de gauche fuit un 
 i^ftroite* 
 
 la droit9 en 
 arriire. 
 
 PaaredoUm 
 bltf manhe. 
 
 En arriere 
 et volt' -face, 
 Un butaillc. 
 
 Compagnie $ 
 par filei, d* 
 la gaucht tli 
 mrrierc. 
 
 pasredoubUf . 
 marche, . 
 
 Enarriere »i 
 voUefacCfei^ 
 bulailk. 
 
 CompfffnieB 
 par dintf>l(» 
 files dn cert- 
 treenaunntf 
 a droite et it 
 gauchSt 
 
 I 
 
 • iii' 
 
 
 t 
 
 • 
 
 
 1 
 
 » 'ii 
 
 m\ 
 
 I. 
 
 
24t 
 
 Ikts company till he seen t Hem formed', when h# 
 jbllo in on the ri^ht of them. 
 
 In ndvancing hy files fro w th'* ♦'enlre, a for* 
 mation mny in like manner be made to pi^ht or 
 left which will throw the companies into column,, 
 if ri^M'/orm, with 'he rt^ht in front, when the 
 officer and Serjeant wi V^o to the left, that bein^ 
 Lhtf pivot and \f left fornix into a column left in> 
 front when they will «;<> to Ihe ri^ht,. ttie right 
 V company may also be ordered to form to the? 
 
 eight, and the remaining companies be movcd- 
 Up by obliquing to the ri^lit and forming on< 
 Teft of it, or f'lVr versd^ should it be ncceuary to< 
 change the front on the march. 
 
 Metreathy 8^. The two centre flifis face to the rigjht and! 
 
 front the 
 etnlre of 
 
 quick niarcli 
 
 li 
 
 doub'e fihi left-abnut, the rear rank mf*n lead out to their 
 rear followed by their front rank, the remainder, 
 of each sub-division facing inwards & following 
 in like manner, the officer and covering sorieanl 
 go to the right about & place themselves in front. 
 of the two'centrc fifes, leadiugthi'm and looking, 
 to the centre for their distance and dressing. 
 
 Fjrontfonn, The officer and covering serjeant Iwit, the 
 centre files come to the fight & left-about, those* 
 to the rear move ofl' obliquely to the right and 
 left, the right sub-division to the left,, the left 
 siih-division to the ri<;ht, and dress on them, the- 
 oflicer and scr joint move to the right of the 
 company., as in forming after advancing. 
 
 Should it bo necessary to form to the rear while 
 retreating from the centre of the company, it 
 may be done by the files changing places with 
 each other, each file on the right stopping in. 
 rear of (he one on its left and on the word rear 
 form, the files then leading halting and those ia. 
 rear of them coming up on right and left of them,, 
 when the files have changed in that manner 
 (which is easily done on the march) a fbrmation 
 may be made in any direction to the rear, or tha 
 &l»<* ahangtng back to tkeir former poritioji iOk^ 
 the ftou^ 
 
;; >■■ 
 
 • ' .-242 -^ 
 
 A ee mot lies sonn-diviAions siiivront l^bflflcfer 
 «t le oergent coiivreur rjui avancent en droitiire, 
 f^iivis par les files, qiii,. apres avoir fait leurii a 
 droHe ai a gaiichc^ prcunent dii ceiUre feurs dis- 
 tances et leur aliguemeiit, (exceple les deux files 
 ihi centre qui avancerudl eu arriirede l-'oilincr 
 ct dii ser(^enlcoiivrctir)et pan ce moyeii chaqiie- 
 fiJe doiiJ)le sera cuiuposi-e d'hoinmes dii meina 
 rnn;^, deux du premier, et deux dii second, ek 
 ainsi de suite, ((Ott neste on pent conttidtper chaque 
 file ( n inarche defile comine un ratify). 
 
 Lex fites^du centre ne bou^ent, les files en ar- 
 riere se placeiit a droite el a gauche dais Pali«- 
 gncmeut, le serj^ent va a. la droilc poiu* garder la^ 
 place de sou oflicier, en attendant quM ait vii 
 iorruer la comp'jgnie, alors il se place a luur 
 drioite etie ser^^ent le couvre; 
 
 En niarchant en av'int par files du centre, oiv 
 pcut faire une formation d*iine maniere soinbia— 
 blea droite oil a gauche qui mettra les conipa- 
 gniesen colomiie, hi cVst d la droite la droite eii< 
 tete, quand Tollicier et le scr^fent ironl a la gau- 
 ch(.\qui sera le piv^t, et m c'est a. la i^aucha en 
 colomnc ia gauche en l^le, quand Totlicier et le 
 ser^^cnt iront a la droite ; on pourroit ainsi faire 
 former la compagoie de la droite, a droite et les 
 autrescompagnies parcourront une ligne obli- 
 qued la druiteet formauta sa gauciie, on vice 
 versa. s*il ctoit neccasaire de changer le front en. 
 marche- 
 
 8 A cccommandement preliroinaire les deux, 
 files font deiui tour a drgite et a gauche, les* 
 hommet de Parriere rang guidcnt en arriere sui* 
 vis ((e Ic uri- chefs. de files, les autres files de cha. 
 que sous-division faisant a droite el a gauche in- 
 terieurement et se suivant de la m^me maniere, 
 i'oilicier et son sergentcouvreur font demi tour a 
 droite et se placentdevant les deux files du cen* 
 tre, pour les guider, preiiant leurs distances et 
 aiigncnientriu centret 
 
 L'officier et son sergent couyreur font halte,, 
 les.fiteK du centre font demi toux ^ droite et a. 
 i%uCiiV). ccllci de I'arriere marchent vbli'(^uemeot 
 
 Pas redbm- 
 bkf maixhc^. 
 
 '.>•» 
 
 ^ "»'!«.^ 
 
 En 0vanf^ 
 Eji bataiUe^ 
 
 Compagnfe^ 
 par double$ 
 filesy du cc/i» 
 tre en arrie- 
 re a droite t$ 
 a gauche^. 
 
 En arrieH 
 ei9olt\face^ 
 En butaiUcy. 
 
 ij 
 
 t 
 
 ;..tt 
 i ^ 
 
 h 
 
 r,: 
 
 ii 
 
 i I' 
 
 'i. i 
 
 \ 
 
 5'^ 
 
 •It 
 
 M 
 
243 
 
 jitfvnncc hy 
 itnUan JiL'n 
 from fig 'it 
 oi'tujtHiutnirs 
 quick march 
 
 Form lico 
 dap. 
 
 9. The officer on the rijjhl of earh company 
 advances foiiowed by his serjeant, the company 
 face lo the ri«;-ht and follow in sin^jlc fiU», Ihe 
 front rank man keeping in rear o^m^' scrjeaut, 
 and hiii rear rank following him^ an;i so on. 
 
 Tlie officers, lead in}j:, mark lime till the Ser- 
 jeant comes up on their ri(;hl, the front raiiL 
 .till their rear rank men come up ou tbck ri^ht. 
 
 Form line. Same as cj&plained in former part. 
 
 Jdvmtce by |o. SsMwe a» from right ; bnl that the officer al 
 *jl"''*"'/'/'* . *'^e first v,orK\ of coij^mnnd changes bv Ihe rear 
 from lejf of ^^ ^j^^ ^^^^ and at quick march movei "oicl. 
 companies^ * 
 
 quuk march 
 
 Form two Same as from ri;rlit, bnt the serjeaol and officer 
 
 diep, come up on the left. 
 
 Form line. Same as explained beforct. 
 
 / 
 
 ulthance by 
 fUeafrom 
 iHght of 
 
 companies. 
 
 11. Same as explained before* 
 
 Form sub- 
 ^ivisioiu. 
 
 12. The right siib^di vision marks lime, Ihe left 
 sub'division leads out to the left and moves up 
 to the front, dressing and looking for its proper 
 distance lo the snb-itivision on its left, a super- 
 numcrary ofiiccr from the rear and a serjeanl af 
 the snb-di?isi#n disengages, move up qtiickly 
 to lead it to its place, the officer commanding 
 the company when he sees the left sub-divistoii 
 in a line with his own moves on in quick time. 
 
 Sa'me as- sub-divisions, left sections of each 
 sub-division stepping out, and iis there may not 
 be officers to lead them, serjeaat alone to step 
 
 up to do 80« 
 
 ^f9ntf«rm» All the officers and Serjeants except the one 
 
 commanding the company, and his covering 
 
 ^ aerjeaot (wi^ ar« with th« right teclioa of U^ 
 
 tiotu» 
 
244 
 
 *« 
 
 f 
 i 
 
 ^ i 
 
 
 t 
 
 1 
 
 L and officer 
 
 a la droife et i la fjauche, la Bous-dWision itr 
 droile a ^/:uch, et rti!e de la gaiiHif a (h'n'iU\ eX 
 s'iiligPv r I Sill' IPS ililes files du ccnlrc, I'offcier 
 el l«* fcLTift'n! iroiil a la droile dc la compa^nie, 
 r<' :in e il« onl f.iit dans la formation aprcs avoir 
 availed* 
 
 ^'il c»oU nrccssairc dc former a I'arrierft pen- 
 daiit 1.1 relraitedii centre de la compt;;Dief oa 
 fera chanujt'.r de ijlncc anx files, chaqne file de 
 droite fai&ant quelqiies pns pn.r Tarriere de opuT 
 de j;ar.chc, tt an moi " en arnirc^ en hntaille^ ler 
 files, qui alors seronl gw'den^ feront hnlie et celler 
 en leiir arrieie sc r^insjtmU a droite et A a^duche, 
 qu^ud les filos ont change de cetle maniere, (ce 
 quiesl loiil aisf!^ en inarche) nne formation pent 
 8e faire, en n.ielqtie direction que ce soil en ar- 
 ricre, on en tuisanl encore changer les files pour 
 ooe formation au front. 
 
 9. L'oflicier a la droile de chaqne compagnie 
 avance suivi de son sergent, la compagnie fait 
 on a droUe, etsuit ^ la file Phomme de la drnite 
 du premier rang, Thonime du second rang de la 
 premiere file, et chaque file successivement de 
 droite a gauche. 
 
 Les officiers qui guident, marquent fe teros 
 jusau'a ce que le sergeat arrive a leur droite, et 
 les nommes du premier rang, jusqu'a ce que ceux 
 du second viennentii leur droite. 
 
 Corame il estexpliqu^ cidessut. 
 
 10. Comme de la droite, cxcepte que Tofficier 
 an root pr^liminaire change par Tarriere a la 
 gauche, et au moi ** pa» redouble', marcAe,** se. 
 
 
 place ea avant. 
 
 Comme il est sus dit par la droite, mais Pof* 
 ficier el le sergent He forme k la gauche, com* 
 me il a drja H6 explique. 
 
 11. Comme il acte expHqu^. 
 
 Compagniet 
 p.ir mefteule 
 JiUf de la 
 droite en a- 
 vani,pas rem 
 double, 
 marche. 
 
 A deux d* 
 hauteur ou 
 pafjiics. 
 
 En bntailU 
 pasredoubl/^ 
 marche, 
 Compagniet 
 par unesculo 
 Jilede la gaUm 
 chcy pas PC* 
 doublif en 
 aiuintf nuwm 
 ehe. 
 
 A deux de 
 hauieur^ en 
 balcii'le. 
 Conipas^nirs 
 par fiLs de 
 la droile en. 
 avail pas 
 redouble, 
 lUArJiet, 
 
 ' i 
 
 ^ 
 
 I 
 
 f,i 
 
 1 
 
 
 
345 
 
 rr$;ht tub division) go to the renr, the leading Alcg 
 •t each section halt Jookin^ and dressing by their 
 rightt except the right section ivho look to the 
 itiii.the officer cmumnntiin^ andhis covering ierjcant 
 ^11 on the flanks of (heir section as in forming 
 line from column left in front, the men of each 
 •action coming up to the left in like manner. 
 
 The only difference in advancing from the left; 
 of companien and forming sub-divisions on the 
 viarch and Mctionf» is that the leading out is ta 
 > the HgiUt to ^hich point the file leaders are to 
 
 look 'or their distance and dressing, and in the 
 forming Wn^ the ofiicer commandrng tjie com- 
 pany and bis covering Serjeant conuirm to the 
 mode laid duvfA lor forqaing line from columnk, 
 irben the right is in, front. 
 
 Open column ofcompanieSf. right in front i 
 
 Baploy into . ^''^"^ company stands, fast, the companies in, 
 title on the *^ roas- move.' oq in Quick timq by the ubl^qu^, 
 front com^ »iep to the cigiit,aad form oi>. it* 
 
 Qpm. column ofcompaniesy rigH in front. 
 
 line bi/ altera 
 ■«<« comptu- 
 «^» m the. 
 front com- 
 
 Froq^ company stands fast,, second compaoy 
 moves by the obU^^e ateps^in quick ti^ne to tlie 
 right and formic on tliQ.fjroo|; <}ompaoy,, the third* 
 company moves off in same manner to the left 
 f4)rming on Left of it, and soon alternately till, 
 the line is formed with, what. if^ thp frpiU com* 
 paiiy in the. centi;^^ 
 
 A deployment may also be made on the front 
 company by moving the rear compatiy f by file» 
 fiwm the centre of companies, 'he officer leading 
 out and taking Die dislimce of his sub-divitiotk^ 
 from the company he forms or on any given, 
 company, those companies in front of the one 
 qamed to be formed on retreating from the centre 
 «f compauictaod lUpw io the roar advM^ngs 
 
S46 
 
 l«. laioui-diTisieu droile marque le pas, U D/t'ifi>ii, 
 ious-dlvisiun de gauche se delache de la gauche doubUi en 
 et avance nw t^tc en frmit, prenant aca dtsUncea *V^^^' "'•*" 
 el alignemeiit de la soua-divisiou I aa gauche, un 
 officier fturlaiini^raii'e de farrUre el un aergent, 
 auKsilot que la aoufi division sera deboitee, avaa- 
 cent vivement pour la conduire i aa place, Tofli- ^ 
 
 cier commandant la corapagnie quanU il verra la ' * 
 
 tmis-diyition de gauche aligDeeaveclaaieuoe, a- '^>- 
 
 vanceraau pas redoubld^ 
 
 De la ro^me mani^re que les sous-divisions, les So^-dM i 
 sections de gauche sedelachent a la gauche, ct un """»»*» ^o"- 
 officicr surnumiraire, ou un sergeot, avance ;.'" ^'* ***^ 
 pour la coBQUire* 
 
 Tousles officiers ct sergents, except^ cHui qui En avnt en 
 commanilc la compagnieetsonsergent couvreur, bataiUe^ 
 
 3ui sont k la section droite de la sous-division 
 roite, vont i I'arriere des files de guides on pre- 
 mieres files de section, font lialte^ alignement et 
 distances a droite, cxcepte la section droile qui 
 aligne a gauche. L'Officier commandant ei soa 
 Sergentcouvreurseplaccntauxflancsileleurs sec- 
 tions, comme <|uand la colorane la gauche en t^te 
 je meten bataille, les homines de rhaque sec<^ 
 lion arrivant ^ la gauche de la ro6me maniere. 
 
 La seule difference en avan^ant de la gao* 
 che decompagnics et forraant des sous-divisions 
 et sections en marchc, est que le deboitement 
 se fail a ladroite, du quel point ils arr^tcront leur: 
 distances et aligoements, et en formant la ligne 
 rofiicier commandant la corapagnie et son ser* 
 gent couvreur,se conferment, a la maniere in- 
 diquie pour former en bataille de la colomne la 
 droite en t^te. 
 
 Colomne ouverte de compagnieSj la droite 
 
 en tite. 
 
 La Corapagnie de front ne bonge, les com* 
 pagnies de Tarri^re marchent au pas oblique en 
 tems redouble k droite, et te metteot eo bataille 
 i-sa droite* 
 
 Cotomne^iWl' 
 lacompagntm 
 de front en 
 balaille^ dim 
 pioyety a 
 gauche, p^ 
 reiloub le. 
 
 i 
 
 
 I 
 
 If 
 
 
 k 
 
 j 
 
 t, 
 
 A 
 
 1 1 
 
 I 
 
i> 
 
 front to the 
 rig /it on a 
 givgn com* 
 puny. 
 
 Quick 
 march. 
 
 247 
 
 Battalioii of line. 
 
 The company named tf heels to ihe right, tho<ie 
 compfiniKS oil ihe right go to the right-about bj 
 word of commuDd from their own officers. 
 
 Those companies that have gone to the right.* 
 jhont move on hrin^^lng their left shoulders for- 
 v/ard till in line with liic named company* when 
 they Jjjet the w;)rH h:ilt, front, dress hack, from 
 Iheit own oiHcors, ihosc on the left move forward 
 in like manner {getting the word, halt, front, 
 dress up. 
 
 The bnUalion may chanfre its front in like 
 mnnnn- on any given file of any nameJ company, 
 thai Hlo facing, Ihosc 0!i the ripht going to Ihe 
 rii'hl-ahout and movin;^ forward carh wing, and 
 being'haltedand dressed on the named file, when 
 the change is made to the left, Ihe left wing goes 
 to Ihe right-ahont and acts as the ri^ht did in 
 Ihe former change. 
 
 • I 
 
right, tho<ie 
 ;ht-about by 
 £cers. 
 
 to the ri^hl.* 
 oiilders for- 
 ipanVf >vhcn 
 back, from 
 ove forward 
 halt, front, 
 
 ont in like 
 id company, 
 o'mg to the 
 h wing, and 
 ed file, when 
 ft wing goes 
 right did in 
 
 248 
 
 Cotomne owcerie He compagniesj la droiU 
 
 en Ute, 
 Ia Coftipagnie de front ne bougc, ia seconde 
 CorapaMoic raarche an pa» oblique, temi redou- 
 ble, i ia droitf , et se remei en bataille ^ ladroitef 
 la troisieme compa, nie marche de m^me i gau- 
 che et ne met en bataille i sa gauche, et ainii 
 ftlternariyement jusqu'^ cequela ligne toil for. 
 m^e, ajant au ceptre la compagnie qui itoit ^ la 
 Idte de la colomne.— On peutauisi d^pldjrer sur 
 la compagnie de front, en faisant marcher les 
 compagnies de Tarriire de lear centre par filef< 
 Toificier conduitant et prenant la distance de sa . 
 fous-diyision de- la compagnie sur laquelle i| for- 
 tnera, ou sur aucutie autre compagnie, celles qui 
 ■e trouTent en avant de la compagnie nommee, 
 seront formt^es par la reltaiie dn centre des com- 
 pagnief , et cellei en arriire seront formats en 
 ayaat ^ , . ,' 
 
 Bataillon en bataille en :me ligne* Le hataiUon 
 
 thangertuort 
 
 La compagnie nominee faUnnqilartde conTersion & teaurlaaw*i 
 droite, les compagnies I sa droite font demUtour 'k trieme raii^ 
 droite par le mot de comuandem<;nt de lean officiers. 
 
 s(^ 
 
 lacompagniM 
 de front par 
 compagnia 
 alterne^ d 
 droite et a 
 gauchcy de*. 
 ployezy pat 
 redoubl^t ^ 
 
 trieme cotiu 
 pagnie» 
 
 Les compagniefl qui ont lait deml-tonr k droite mar- 
 chent, avan^ant leurs ^panles gaucbes, jusqu'^ ce qu*> 
 ellessoient en ligne avecia compagnie nommie, alors 
 •ties resolvent de lears officiers Jes mots, ^* halte^ fronts 
 tnarriere^alignementy** celles de la gauche marche eu 
 avant de la meme maniire qa*aazinots, " haltCt front, 
 en avant, uUgnement,** 
 
 Le bataillon pent changer son front de cetle mani^re 
 sur aucune compagnie doon6e, ou sur aucune «ie ses 
 files, cette file faisant k droite on k gauche, celles do 
 l*aile droite faisnnt demi-tour k droite, et chaqae aile 
 en mottVement, et feront halte, alignem^nt sur Ja filo 
 nomni€c. Quand le changement est fait k gancbe, 
 Vaile gauche fait demi-tpur k droite et se conduit 
 coiume avoit fait Taile droite au prenier cbaogentBt* 
 
 FIN, i 
 
 Pan redoum 
 
 
 \ 
 
 i 
 
 t; 
 
 if 
 
 In 
 
 it 
 
 t 
 
 i 
 
 ('■'■ 
 I' 
 
 \ 
 I 
 
 n 
 
 1 
 
 I'll 
 
 
' 'y* 
 
 
 1 
 
 
>«4»- 
 
 u: — 7„'j 
 
 V«A 
 
 <^ 
 
 CO 
 
 (JC 
 
 <« 
 
 CO 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 ^-•f- 
 
 o o 
 
 ^. 
 
 m ■ 
 
 ^Hlv 
 
 1 
 
 ^HB 
 
 III l! 
 
 1 
 
 1| 
 
 ff! 
 
 IJ 
 
 ^*'-. 
 

 <J^ 
 
 <« 
 
 CO 
 
 \* 
 
 ., N 
 
 .-> 
 
 ^a 
 
 #-4 
 
 _o 
 
 o o' 
 
 c- ^v 
 
 • •^ 
 
 
 •/: • 
 
 — IS^- 
 
 
 « I 
 
 
 ^\. 
 
 i "i 
 
 • 4 
 
 
 ) -> 
 
 "» 
 
 ^-J: 
 
 1 ! ■• V 
 
 ;»■-■ 
 
 «» 
 
 
 Jli" 
 
 'J 
 
 <.;i 
 
 
 •ii 
 
 'It 
 
 li' 
 
 •-> 
 
 s 
 
 vi 1 
 
 Tr~:k 
 
 h ! 
 
 I'i 
 
 it 
 
' f 
 
 o 
 
 i:?v 
 
 ^rs 
 
 si."' 
 
 1 
 
o 
 
 IJ-*. 
 
 i 
 
 \H\ 
 
 I) 
 
 « 
 
 -i 
 
 I 
 
 i. 
 
 i.,j ■ 
 
 i 
 
. 
 
 n 
 
 » 
 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 *-. .:.. 
 
 I 
 
 
 r 
 
 ^' 
 
 
 
 -■:- 
 
 » 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 ^-H 
 
'•r--) 
 
 v2.-.-. 
 
 .C. 
 
 '' * 
 
 O 
 
 (Z 
 
 
 
 -Ci 
 
 
 o 
 
 ;r> 
 
 
 .//'■: 
 
 (I 1 1 1 1 1 
 
 L. 
 
 o 
 
 ' I 
 
 /^•' 
 
 y/ 
 
 A 
 
 / ^ 
 
 ./T 
 
 S 
 
 0> i' 
 
 ff / 
 
 h', 
 
 oo 
 
 •^ ^:<i 
 r^^' 
 
 ^1 
 
 u. 
 
 i: 
 
 t 
 
 ^ 
 
 I! J 
 
ir ^ 
 
 :^ 
 
 r 
 1 
 
 
 -^ 
 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 ?3 
 
 ■^ Q 
 
 (% e;' 
 
 ^ 
 
 2 S 
 
 A 
 
 ¥ 
 
 oc^ oc, oi^ oh «»^ 
 
 u 
 
 ^1 
 
 b 
 
 M 
 
 fU 
 
 RMir*^-**^ 
 
 h' 
 

 ^ , ' 
 
 ^ 
 
 II: 
 
 I 
 

 '3 , ' it.» 
 
 C 1 
 
 
 
 r', 
 
 r. 
 
 ? til Li 
 
 (v;^ 
 
 a 
 
 
 r 
 
 * 
 
 ^0 
 
 
 
 
 t5- 
 
 
 r-, 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 ^» - 
 
 
 "-» 
 
 
 2' 
 
 
 "1 
 
 
 c. 
 
 
 J 
 
 
 o a - 
 
 —^ 
 
 ^ I 
 
 i 
 
 If 
 
 i, 
 

 ■rs 
 
 
 ff 
 
 
 ^5 , 
 
 5 s 
 
 S... 
 
 [' 
 
 '>•' 
 
 b IIJ 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 ■ . Ii r n r n 
 
 ^ 1^ 
 
 I" ■ •- . 
 
 ^ 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 N^ 
 
 f 
 
 ij 
 
 ' - 
 
 li 
 
i 
 
 I 
 
 •v- 
 
 l,,c> 
 
 
 l\'^ 
 
 ' •)'/ 
 
 I 111 
 
*•.,• 
 
 •■5-- 
 I 
 
 I ^ 
 
 I I 
 
 
 
 ~cP 
 
 
 I I 
 
 
 C" UUIJullUL '•- • • 
 
 .^ 
 
 '^ 
 
 p^ 
 
 
 C! 
 
 "Z, 
 
 ■• , • 
 
 i^T" 
 
 
 TT^ 
 
 
 p. 
 
 O <^ 
 
 p^ 
 
 ^■h' 
 
 
 r* * 
 
 
 ? 
 
 r-A. 
 
 
 Ck 
 
 ?^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 2 
 
 0-.. 
 
 It 
 
 II- 
 
 f^ 
 
 I : 
 
 
 1 
 
 !.. 
 
"■». 
 
 ■:^ 
 
 r 
 
 f 
 
 
 •^'^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 I r 
 
 sU5 
 .^ ft 
 
 
 'oOj)o O- ^ :,, 
 
 i:: M:; 
 
 • II;' I 
 4. i;. J 'ii Lw 
 
 I t 
 
 '• r.. 
 ^ I' 
 
 .. ..LI 
 
 r5 
 
 -^ 
 
 1 
 
 i 
 
 c/otul oc y^orjucfaoii-n 
 
 i 
 
 i^ 
 
 , I 
 
 > 'I 
 
 l::' 
 
 
 "I 
 
 I 
 
 -< I 
 
 i 
 
 I 
 
 WIM 
 
 >^^ 
 
IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 
 
 % 
 
 1.0 
 
 I.I 
 
 I^IM |2.5 
 
 U Hi 
 
 us 
 
 IS 
 
 lAO 
 
 2.2 
 2.0 
 
 L8 
 
 IL25 i 1.4 
 
 iiiiim 
 
 - 6' 
 
 
 71 
 
 >i 
 
 -%..^^' 
 '> 
 
 / 
 
 
 Photographic 
 
 Sciences 
 
 Corporation 
 
 23 WEST MAIN STREET 
 
 WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 
 
 (716)873-4503 
 
 \ 
 
 •N? 
 
 \ 
 
 A 
 
 V 
 
 
 -^■?1 
 
r 
 
 
 
 •• 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 : 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 V 
 
 
 
 
 , 
 
 
 1 
 
 ••* 
 
 1 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 ' 1 
 
 
 1 ; 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 1 ■ . " 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 
 
 i' 
 
 , ■ 
 
 
 
 ■■;. . -^ . ,, .^ v^/'.. 
 
 
 
 
 ► ' 
 
 ( * ' * 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
k 
 
 1*! "^ 
 
 K) 
 
 IS,. 
 
 w 
 
 kO 
 
 5 
 
 r~\ 
 
 
 8— 
 
 <a 
 
 ^ 
 
 Vet 
 
 S' 
 
 ^^ 
 
 
 G 
 
 ^ ^ 
 
 OCO 
 
 06^ 
 
 oCx. 
 
 ""^"^^^ 
 
 r-— 
 
 
 t 
 
 f 
 
 n 
 
 ^ 
 
 I 
 
 **.•. >«"i'-'> 
 
 r:'' 
 
 .ft** 
 
 •afl^' 
 
<•'» 
 
 I •* 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 <^ 
 
 4 
 
 1^ 
 
 o 
 
 ^s. 
 
 j^, 
 
 ^i 
 
 C^ 
 
 ©. 
 
 a 
 
 •"i^ 
 
 •0 4-, ( 
 
 n / 
 
 
 «»:> 
 
 u 
 
 r' 
 
 L>. 
 
 Cf 
 
 i. 
 
 cs 
 
 <^ 
 
 oto 
 
 
 
 Co 
 
 • T :,- 
 
 t 
 
 I I 
 
 Z. 
 
 f 
 
 ^ 
 
 I 
 
 il- 
 
 ls 
 
 'H 
 
"h: 
 
 ! J 
 
 v^-^ 
 
 I . 
 
 Il 
 
 
 
 r .-•■U 
 
 - 
 
 -1. C^ 
 i ^ 
 
 o 
 
 P 
 
 2 
 
 
 (9 
 
 
 o 
 
 rs 
 
 r*. 
 * ; 
 
 
 J? 
 
 I 
 
 11 
 
 ^5 
 
 o 
 
 P 
 
 nnnn] (If [!^in 
 
 I 
 
 t / 
 
 i-vO 
 
 I* 
 
 I- 
 
 
 r 
 
 
 "I 
 
 t'l. 
 
 I' I 
 
 
 I 
 
 i 
 
 i i frifl ii ir i fKftjfc 
 
 I M" > I HW I "^ 
 
 J 
 
,^ 
 
 1; o . 
 
 ?^ 
 
 
 
,Q 
 
 o , 
 
 
 M 
 
 /I'jl^ 
 
 1^ 
 
 
 1 I 
 
 9. ' 
 
 p. 
 ft 
 
 '4 
 
 < ■* 
 
 
 ( ^ 
 
 r 
 
 L 
 
 ,1 
 
 1 « 
 
 1 
 
 ' i 
 
 / — V 
 
 'i 1 
 
 i. 
 
 Li 
 
 u 
 
 Q " i-B ^1 CI 'D (^ 
 
 I'J 
 
 
 
 Ci 
 
 t 
 
 I 
 
 f 
 
 4 
 
 O '*- 
 
 O, P. 
 
 '^ 
 
 
 '•4, 
 
 
 
 
 
 (^ 
 
 '3 
 
 
 
 
 « 
 
 1 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •• -.- • 
 
 
 •-• 
 
 ...... 
 
 
 c» 
 
 I 
 
 i 
 
 'f 11 
 
 
 I 
 
 J 
 
J' 
 
 Q 
 
 -^1 
 
 II 
 
 
 >'\ 
 
 ■I I 
 
 J ^^ 
 
 ii 
 
J 
 
 .)?, L 
 
 P^ jo )'iiHX\'.OU 
 
 o 
 
 
 I 
 
 A 2. n 
 
 n 
 
 J^oud M 
 
 fl 
 
 (^ 
 
 
 a. 
 
 IT 
 
 4' 
 
 iJ 
 
 0-' 
 
 -> 
 
 c^ 
 
 i 
 
 iJ LI Li ui Li 
 
 ii U 
 
 Nj 
 
 2' P ofl 
 
 '^ 
 
 Q 
 
 -ci'<<4(.aLoa 
 
 ii 
 
 u 
 
 .\f 
 
 ■ ^ ' Xi iii jL-^ - 
 
 
INDEX. 
 
 ... I 
 
 . ' • ' .1 > ' « r 1 > • • ' « ' . 
 
 ■,•'•■ t *« * - •..1 -/.•'• '• 
 
 Paob* 
 
 Squad Drill I 
 
 Ti|'> iVlaiiual Ktcrcise 25 
 
 The Platoon Uxncise 37 
 
 Rf^itlaiiunM in Firing 47 
 
 Foniiutiun of (he Company 53 
 
 Siziii);. — 
 
 Telling olf ,i 
 
 0(>eii Ordtr. .. .' • 
 
 Cio^ii* ordei 
 
 Couiitennarcli •. ^. . . 
 
 Wlieelinjt 
 
 General llule 
 
 TABLE shewing what extent of ground a given number of 
 files will cover when drawn up in line, each man being 
 
 sii pposied to occupy a space of 3^ inches 
 
 Passing a Bridge, &c 
 
 Formation of the Battalion 
 
 Words of Command to be given in trying the Battalion after it 
 
 has been (old oflf 
 
 When the Battalion takes open order i. '. . 
 
 When (he Battalion resumes close order 
 
 Inspection or Review of a Battalion of Infantry 
 
 Recei ving the General 
 
 Marching past in ordinary time 
 
 Marchmg past in quick time 
 
 Forming in line » 
 
 March of the Battalion' in line 
 
 When the Battalion halted, and correctly dressed, is to advance 
 
 , in line. ; 
 
 When the Battalion is to dress 
 
 When the Battalion is to retire 
 
 Covering Platoon Serjeants. 
 
 Attentions in Platoon officers 
 
 Attentions of Commanding Officers of a Battalion 
 
 Evolution.... , «. . .. 
 
 Discipline 
 
 Line ^ . . .- 
 
 Base line.................... ,... 
 
 Alrgnement . .^... 
 
 Point ii'appui, or Support 
 
 Point of Formation ........ 
 
 Deploy : . . . . . ;. 
 
 Proper Pivot Flank 
 
 Invei'.'iion of the battalion or column .^ . . . 
 
 Flank... 
 
 Reverse: £laak.,. ». i . . 
 
 57 
 
 03 
 69 
 
 71 
 
 75 
 
 IT 
 8.1 
 85 
 87 
 89 
 
 95 
 97 
 99 
 
 101 
 111 
 115 
 117 
 121 
 133 
 147 
 .149 
 
 !l61 
 
 167 
 
 ■■\ 
 
 i 
 
 159 
 
 r' 
 
 c.'iCki^jd10>>— « > 
 
!l 
 
 i 
 
 
 I 
 
 Column........... 159 
 
 Open Colli nm 161 
 
 Column of Uoule ,. — ^ 
 
 Closft Column 1 69 
 
 Echelloii 1 65 
 
 Passinj? Woods, &o 167 
 
 tVhcn the liattalion forms a Square or oblong... 169 
 
 Ci'se coiuinn in rear of the rij^lit tlivJ>it)n 173- 
 
 Close column in front of iiie left division 179 
 
 Close column on a central division, facing to the rear.... 183 
 
 Light Infantry....^ ' 189 
 
 Of firin*; in extended order, and of skirmishing 191 
 
 Of the formation of the Chain and Advanced Guard 199 
 
 Of Palrolcs in general .207 
 
 Of the Advanced Guard, Flank Pai roles, and Rear 
 
 Guard, and of their several duties on a march....... ..^21 
 
 Battalion in line to form Open Column, right in front. . . .235 
 
 To Form Open Column, left in front — 
 
 Open Column of Companies, right in front 245. 
 
 Battalion of Line « 247 
 
 Inspection Report and Return of the several Corp& of 
 
 Canadian Militia. 
 
 lUtutu of arms, accoalreniettt8,&x;. 
 
 ( . ' • 
 
 - y 
 
 
 •O' 
 
 '"i ' 
 
 .V. 
 
 
 • "^K'?^'^*^ 
 
 '1. ■' ^■'■^ 
 
 * v^ y 
 
'C . 
 
 Pasb. 
 ....159 
 ....161 
 
 • • • • 
 
 ....169 
 
 ....165 
 
 ....167 
 
 ....169 
 
 ....113' 
 
 ....179 
 
 , . • .lo3 
 
 ....189 
 
 ....191 
 
 ....199 
 
 . . . .201 
 
 Rear 
 
 ...321 
 
 t....235 
 
 , . . . • ^4 A 
 
 241 
 
 ■■.'■■■■■'■■ . INDEX. 
 
 •Paob-.' 
 
 Ecoie derEscouade , 2 
 
 Maniment des armes 25 
 
 L'Excercicedu fen de Peloton 38 
 
 Reglements pour Texecution des feax 48 
 
 Formatiofi de la Compa^nie 56 
 
 Du rang de Taille • 
 
 Detail de formation d'une Compagnie — 
 
 Ordre ouverte 58 
 
 Ordreserre... , — • 
 
 Contreraarche , — 
 
 Conversion , 64 
 
 Regie (renerale , .... 70 
 
 Tadlew pour montrer I'eteuduc des divisions selon ieur 
 nonibre de files, qnand eiles sont rangees en ba- 
 taiilef chaqiie homme occupant, Tun portant : 
 
 I'autre, a-peii |)res 22 pouces . « 79 
 
 Ponr passer un pont, &c....^ — 
 
 Formation du Bataillon 76 
 
 ComraaHdemeiUs pour yeriiier le detail des diffirentes 
 
 parties, dans Ieur distribution, dans le Bataillon 78^^ 
 
 Quand le Bataillon prend I'ordre ouverte 84 
 
 Quand leBalaillon resume Tordre serre 86- 
 
 Revue d'inspection du Bataillon d'infanterie 88 
 
 Recevoir le General ^, 96 
 
 !Marche d'un Bataillon en tenis ortlinaire — * 
 
 Defilant en Colomne au pas redouble 96- 
 
 Se former en ligne 68 
 
 Marche du Bataillon en ligne 106 
 
 Quand le Bataillon, en bataille, et correctement aiigne, 
 
 doit marcher en avant 1Q2 
 
 Qaand le Bataillon s'alignera..! 118 
 
 Quandle Bataillon doilse retirer 116 
 
 Sergents de serre file des Pelotons.. 1 18 
 
 Attentions des Officiers de Pelotons 1 22 _ 
 
 Attentions du Commandant du Bataillon i 34 ' 
 
 Eyolution 148 
 
 Discipline 1 56 
 
 Ligne ••• *^ 
 
 laigne de base........... ^.152 
 
 Ali.nem nt.... » — • 
 
 Point d*appai... • «.••*. ..... ** 
 
 '••i'l 
 
 t 
 
 I 
 fit 
 
V 
 
 " r pAGff. 
 
 D£p1oyement,(1^pIoyer... ••....,... •.•'...... ..158 
 
 Flancdn pivot ........I * ' -r 
 
 In? ersion du Bataillon uu Colomne /. . — 
 
 yianc ...^ ......160 
 
 Flanc oppose ou Haoc de revers — > 
 
 Colorane — 
 
 Coiorane ouverte /. 1 63 
 
 Colomne de route.....;. — - 
 
 ColoiilDe en inasse 164 
 
 Echelon 166 
 
 Qnaad ie Bataillon enligne passe un bois......... 16S 
 
 Quand ie Bataillon forme lequarre, ou Tobiong ..170 
 
 La Colomne en masse en arridre de la division de ladroite.174 
 La Colomne en masse en avant de la division de gaiichc. .180 
 La Colomne en masse sur une division du centre, faisant 
 
 .face en arriere. .,... 184 
 
 Infantrie l^gere , • • * 90 
 
 Des Feux en Ordre etendu, et de l'Escarmouche.........l02* 
 
 Formation de la Chaine, et de la Garde Avanc^e 200 
 
 Des Patrouilles en general.^ 208 
 
 De la Garde Avancee, des Patronilles de Flanc, et de 
 
 PArri^re Garde et'de leurs DeviJlrs en marche 232 
 
 LjB Bataillon en ligne formera en Colomne Ouverte, la 
 
 droite en tete 236 
 
 Former la Colomne Ouverte, la gauche en tele — » 
 
 Colomne Ouverte de Compagnies, la droite en lite 246> 
 
 Bataillon de Ligne .248; 
 
 Bapportet Retour d'iuspection des differents corps de 
 
 Milices. 
 Betour d'armes, Accoutrementit, &c« 
 
 
 
 \ 
 
 
Page. 
 .158 
 
 ••....! 60 
 
 •••••• — -• 
 
 • • • • •• 1 62 
 
 ••••••••.. . — 
 
 164 
 
 • •• 166 
 
 .168 
 
 >' .170 
 
 2ladroiie.i74 
 
 3 gauche.. 180 
 tre, faisaiit 
 
 • ••••■....i 84 
 •••••...,. 1 90 
 
 ^••. .102' 
 
 S 200 
 
 208 
 
 nc, et de 
 
 che 282 
 
 'iiverte, la 
 
 *...236 
 
 '*••••♦... — » 
 
 '^te 246i 
 
 .248> 
 
 corps de 
 
 ' t